Download JBL CVPD50 User's Manual

CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 117
CVPD50
50-INCH HIGH-DEFINITION
PLASMA DISPLAY
CVR700
HIGH-PERFORMANCE
AUDIO/VIDEO RECEIVER/VIDEO
PROCESSOR/OPTICAL DISC
CHANGER
®
OWNER’S GUIDE
JBL CINEMA VISION™ SYSTEM
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 2
JBL CINEMA VISION™ SYSTEM: CVPD50 HIGH-DEFINITION PLASMA
DISPLAY AND CVR700 CONTROL CENTER WITH AUDIO/VIDEO
RECEIVER, VIDEO PROCESSOR AND OPTICAL DISC CHANGER
4
5
7
10
12
13
16
19
20
24
32
39
39
39
39
40
40
42
45
46
48
48
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
53
53
53
53
54
55
55
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
62
Important Safety Precautions
Introduction
Safety Information
What’s Included
Disc Formats Supported by This Player
Terminology
CVR700 Front-Panel Controls
CVR700 Front-Panel Information Display
CVR700 Rear-Panel Connections
CVR700R2 Remote Control Functions
CVR700R1 Remote Control Functions
Installing and Connecting the Equipment
Recommended Placement
Wall-Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma Display
Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display on the Included
Credenza Stand
Important Safety Notes
Important Information About the CVPD50 Plasma Display
Basic Installation
System Configuration
Source Configuration
Speaker Configuration
Configuring Speaker Sizes
Speaker Crossover Configuration
Speaker Distances
Output Level Adjustment
Using EzSet
Manual Output Level Adjustment
Advanced Settings
Front-Panel Brightness
Volume Default
Main Menu Timeout
Fan Speed
Lip Sync
DVD Setup
Parental Control
Screen Setup
Inputs and Picture-in-Picture Settings
Picture Settings
Display Settings
Advanced Settings Menu
4:3 Scaling
Information Menu
Basic Operation
Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50 On or Off
Source Selection
Volume Control
Surround Mode Selection
Digital Audio Playback
Dolby Digital
DTS
Selecting a Digital Source
Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode Indicators
PCM Playback
Speaker/Channel Indicators
Audio Surround Mode Chart
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
65
66
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
72
72
73
74
74
74
75
76
76
76
77
78
79
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
87
88
89
92
Night Mode
MP3 and WMA Compressed-Audio Playback
Tuner Operation
Station Selection
Preset Tuning
Recording
Output Level Trim Adjustment
Memory Backup
Optical Disc Changer Playback Basics
Loading Discs
Status Bar
Selecting a Disc for Playback
JBL On Screen Library™
Transport Controls – Playing a Disc
Random Play
Repeat Play
Repeat A-B
DVD Playback
Using a DVD’s Menu
Notes on DVD-Audio Discs
Zoom Feature
CD Playback
Audio CD Playback Features
Selecting a Track
CD Status Bar
Video Off Feature
MP3/WMA Playback
MP3 or WMA Disc Playback
JPEG Playback
VCD Playback
Using the Status Bar for VCD Playback
Playback Control
Programmed Play
Programming the CVR700R2 Remote
Programming Product Codes
Preprogrammed Code Entry
Automatic Code Entry
Learning Commands
Changing Devices
Macro Programming
Recording a Macro
Preprogrammed Macros
Erasing a Macro
Read a Macro
Punch-Through Configuration
Volume Punch-Through
Channel Control Punch-Through
Transport Control Punch-Through
EzSet Configuration
Renaming
Renaming a Device
Renaming Individual Buttons
Resetting the Remote
Programmed Device Functions
CVR700R2 Remote Function List Table
Programming the CVR700R1 Remote
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
92
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
95
95
95
96
98
109
110
111
113
4:23 PM
Page 3
Programming Product Codes
Direct Code Entry
Auto Search Method
Learning Codes
Erasing Learned Codes
Macros
Programmed Device Functions
Volume Punch-Through
Channel Control Punch-Through
Transport Control Punch-Through
Resetting the Remote Memory
CVR700R1 Remote Function List Table
CVR700R1 Remote Setup Code Tables
Troubleshooting Guide
System Reset
Technical Specifications
Index
See trademark acknowledgements on page 114.
Typographical Conventions
In order to help you use this manual with the remote controls, front-panel controls and
rear-panel connections, certain conventions have been used.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,
do not remove cover (or back).
No user-serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock,
do not use this (polarized) plug with
an extension cord, receptacle or other outlet
unless the blades can be fully inserted to
prevent blade exposure.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute
a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
EXAMPLE – (bold type) indicates a specific remote control or front-panel button or
indicator, or rear-panel connection jack
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
EXAMPLE – (OCR type) indicates
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
a message that is visible on the front-panel
information display or screen
35 37 39 41
EXAMPLE
(Synchro
indicates
41 47
51 a message that is visible on the CVR700R2
37 type)
34
36 38 – 40
remote’s
LCD 37
display36 40 46 50
33
26 25
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
1 – (number in a square) indicates a specific front-panel control
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
30
43
a 29
– (number
a button or indicator on the CVR700R2 remote
22 34in an33oval) indicates
29 30control
32
42
21 33
28 31 20 32
31
¡ – (number in a circle) indicates a rear-panel connection
A – (letter in a square) indicates an indicator in the front-panel information display
1
7
2
3 in a4 triangle)
5
6
– (number
indicates
a button or an indicator on the CVR700R1 remote
control
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
3
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 4
read first! Important Safety Precautions!
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves
or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of
the polarized or grounding-type plug.
A polarized plug has two blades with one
wider than the other. A grounding-type
plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement
of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket or
table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
15. Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer, as
they may cause hazards.
4
16. This product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated
on the marking label. If you are not sure
of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your product dealer or
local power company. For products
intended to operate from battery power,
or other sources, refer to the operating
instructions.
17. If an outside antenna or cable system
is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so
as to provide some protection against
voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure,
grounding of the lead-in wire to an
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the
grounding electrode. See Figure A.
18. An outside antenna system should
not be located in the vicinity of overhead
power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can fall into
such power lines or circuits. When
installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep
from touching such power lines or circuits,
as contact with them might be fatal.
21. The apparatus shall not be exposed
to dripping or splashing, and no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
22. Do not attempt to service this product
yourself, as opening or removing covers
may expose you to dangerous voltage or
other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
23. When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician
has used replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or that have the same
characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
24. Upon completion of any service or
repairs to this product, ask the service
technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
25. The product should be mounted to a
wall or ceiling only as recommended by
the manufacturer.
19. Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles, as this can result in a risk of fire
or electric shock.
20. Never push objects of any kind into
this product through openings, as they
may touch dangerous voltage points or
short-out parts that could result in a fire
or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any
kind on the product.
Figure A.
Example of Antenna Grounding as per
National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70
Antenna Lead-In Wire
Ground Clamp
Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810-20)
Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810-21)
Electric Service Equipment
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode System
(NEC Art. 250, Part H)
Part No. HCGUL1492/6500 04/2004 EN
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing JBL®. The JBL
Cinema Vision™ home theater system is
truly an entertainment system for the
21st century. JBL Cinema Vision is a complete, integrated audio/video system that
combines the sophisticated performance
of separate components with the convenience of a turnkey solution. The system
includes a 50-inch high-definition plasma
display monitor and an audio/video system controller that contains a 5-disc
DVD-Audio/DVD-Video/CD changer, highperformance A/V receiver and a video
processor. The multichannel loudspeaker
system is designed to acoustically, electrically and visually complement the JBL
Cinema Vision source and video components. Satellites and the center feature
common voicing, dual-neodymium-driver
satellites, and a 1-inch titanium-laminate
tweeter. The subwoofer features a 400watt RMS power amplifier and a 12-inch
cast-basket woofer.
This manual describes the CVR700 control center, and the CVPD50 50-inch highdefinition plasma display. Together with
the CVSAT50, CVCEN50 and CVSUB50
loudspeakers, the JBL Cinema Vision system delivers a complete home theater
experience, including high-quality playback of most optical discs.
The CVPD50 and CVR700 have been engineered so that it is easy to take advantage of all of the power of their digital
technology. However, to obtain the maximum enjoyment from your new home theater system, we urge you to read this
manual. A few minutes spent learning
the functions of the various controls will
enable you to take advantage of all the
power these components are able to
deliver.
If you have any questions about these
products, their installation or operation,
please contact your retailer or custom
installer, as they are your best local
sources of information.
CVPD50 50-Inch High-Definition
Plasma Display Monitor
The CVPD50 is a state-of-the-art, true
high-definition plasma display that may
be used to display HDTV cable or satellite
television signals, as well as movies
played using the CVR700’s internal DVD
changer, or it may be used with a personal computer, as well as other external
devices such as video gaming consoles
and recording devices. The sophisticated
processor automatically configures 4:3
video sources for full-screen 16:9 display,
but purists may manually set the processor to display 4:3 video images without
scaling or adjustment. The CVPD50 offers
stunning picture quality, even under normal lighting conditions, thanks to its
3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m2
brightness rating. The digital video
processor on board the CVR700 outputs
a digital video signal via a single, proprietary connection to the CVPD50 display.
(The CVPD50 display requires the CVR700
control center for operation.)
CVR700 7 x 100 Watts System
Control Center
The CVR700 is a unique multifeatured
component, combining audio and video
source selection and processing with a
five-disc magazine changer capable of
playing DVD-Audio, DVD-Video, CD, CDR/RW, DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, MP3,
WMA, Kodak® Picture CD, VCD and JPEG
discs. Video playback using the internal
DVD changer is of the highest quality,
benefiting from pixel-by-pixel processing
and digital output to the plasma display.
The CVR700 is capable of reconstructing
the 3/2 pulldown effect introduced when
film-based programs are transferred to
video. In conjunction with precision video
output DACs, the result is a full 60-frameper-second image that is the closest thing
to film this side of your local cinema.
The audio section includes all of the latest surround sound processing formats,
including Dolby* Digital, Dolby Pro Logic*
IIx, Dolby Headphone, DTS®, DTS-ES®,
DTS Neo:6®, DTS 96/24 and Logic 7®.
High-efficiency digital amplifiers are
designed to match the characteristics of
the JBL Cinema Vision speakers, preserving signal quality and delivering the
power and fidelity you expect from JBL.
In addition to providing a wide array
of listening and viewing options, the
CVR700 is easy to configure so that it
provides the best results for your specific
listening environment and viewing preferences. On-screen menus make it simple
to customize system settings, on-screen
status banners streamline user interaction, and the EzSet remote automatically
measures and calibrates sound levels
for a perfectly balanced sound field
presentation.
Although the CVR700 is designed to be
used with the internal DVD changer and
CVPD50 display, it also includes a full
complement of inputs and outputs that
are normally found only on standalone
audio/video receivers. It includes
audio/video source inputs for two recording devices, a cable television/satellite
receiver/HDTV tuner, a personal computer
and an auxiliary device. A sixth source
may be connected to the front-panel
jacks, which include not only analog
audio and video inputs, but S-video, component video and optical and coaxial digital audio inputs. A front-panel optical digital audio output enables recording with
compatible portable devices. Dedicated
rear-panel digital audio inputs (4 optical
and 4 coaxial) are pre-assigned to the
sources, and 2 outputs (1 optical and 1
coaxial) are also provided. An HDCP
(high-definition copy-protected) DVI video
input may be used with a DVI-enabled
HDTV tuner, a satellite or cable set-top
box, or a DVD player, or with a personal
computer featuring a DVI or Analog VGA
video output. A composite video input
may be used with the PIP (picture-in-picture) function for simultaneous viewing of
two video sources using either a traditional small screen inset or a split screen.
A universal remote control operates all
devices, and may be programmed to
operate other components in your system, such as a VCR, personal video
recorder (PVR), or other devices. The main
remote control is easy to program using
its two-line LCD text display. A second,
simplified remote is also included.
Simple to Install and Use
The JBL Cinema Vision system is
designed for easy installation and simple
operation. Its sophisticated processing
capabilities operate automatically, transparent to the user. The JBL On Screen
Library™ display of loaded discs simplifies
navigation and selection of desired program material. With state-of-the-art
audio and video components, the JBL
Cinema Vision home theater system is
the perfect combination of the latest digital audio and video technologies in an
elegant, easy-to-use package.
n
n
n
n
50" True high-definition plasma display
with ultrawide viewing angle
3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m2
brightness
7 x 100W digital control center with
an audio/video receiver, video processor and DVD changer
A wide range of digital and matrix surround modes, including Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II
and IIx, DTS, DTS-ES Discrete and
Matrix, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7
5
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 6
(5.1 and 7.1, Cinema and Music
modes)
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
6
Seven channels of amplification
Internal five-disc changer plays DVDAudio, DVD-Video, CD, VCD, CDR/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, MP3,
WMA, Kodak® Picture CD and JPEG
discs
Extensive bass management options,
including quadruple crossover and
EzSet output-level calibration
Six A/V inputs with composite video
and S-video, three HDTV-compatible
component (Y/Pr/Pb) inputs, one DVI
input
Ten digital audio inputs, including
front-panel optical and coaxial inputs
Front-panel component video inputs, in
addition to conventional audio/video
and S-video inputs
Picture-in-picture capability for simultaneous viewing of two video sources
Accommodates 4:3 aspect ratio programs, with intelligent options for fitting to 16:9 full-screen display
Universal programmable learning
remote with LCD text display
Secondary remote for everyday use
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 7
SAFETY INFORMATION
Verify Line Voltage Before Use
Your CVR700 and CVPD50 have been
designed for use with 120-volt AC current, and the plugs are specifically
designed for 120-volt applications.
Connection to a line voltage other than
that for which the unit is intended can
create a safety and fire hazard and may
damage the unit.
Installation Location
n To ensure proper operation, and to
avoid the potential for safety hazards,
place the unit on a firm and level surface. When placing the unit on a shelf,
be certain that the shelf and any
mounting hardware can support the
weight of the product.
n
If you have any questions about the voltage requirements for your specific model,
or about the line voltage in your area,
contact your selling dealer before plugging the unit into a wall outlet.
Do Not Use Extension Cords
We do not recommend that extension
cords be used with this product. As with
all electrical devices, do not run power
cords under rugs or carpets or place
heavy objects on them. Damaged power
cords should be replaced immediately by
an authorized service center with cords
meeting factory specifications.
Handle the AC Power Cord Gently
When disconnecting the power cord from
an AC outlet, always pull the plug; never
pull the cord. If you do not intend to use
the unit for any considerable length of
time, disconnect the plug from the AC
outlet.
Do Not Open the Cabinet
There are no user-serviceable components inside this product. Opening the
cabinet may present a shock hazard, and
any modification to the product will void
your guarantee. If water or any metal
object such as a paper clip, wire or a
staple accidentally falls inside the unit,
disconnect it from the AC power source
immediately, and consult an authorized
service center.
n
n
n
n
Make certain that proper space is provided both above and below the unit
for ventilation. If this product will be
installed in a cabinet or other
enclosed area, make certain that there
is sufficient air movement within the
cabinet.
Do not place the unit directly on a
carpeted surface.
Avoid moist or humid locations.
Avoid installation in extremely hot or
cold locations, or an area that is
exposed to direct sunlight or heating
equipment.
Do not obstruct the ventilation slots
on the sides of the unit, or place
objects directly over them.
Cleaning
When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a
clean, soft, dry cloth. If necessary, wipe
it with a soft cloth dampened with mild
soapy water, then a fresh cloth with
clean water. Wipe immediately with a
dry cloth. NEVER use benzene, aerosol
cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any volatile
cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive
cleaners, as they may damage the finish
of metal parts. Avoid spraying insecticide
near the unit.
Unpacking
Cartons and shipping materials used to
protect your new system components
during shipment are specially designed to
cushion them from shock and vibration.
We suggest that you save the carton and
packing materials for use in shipping if
you move, or should the unit ever need
repair.
To minimize the size of the cartons in
storage, you may wish to flatten them.
This is done by carefully slitting the tape
seams on the bottom, and collapsing the
carton down to a more two-dimensional
appearance. Other cardboard inserts may
be stored in the same manner. Packing
materials that cannot be collapsed should
be saved along with the carton in a
plastic bag.
If you do not wish to save the packaging
materials, please note that the carton
and other sections of the shipping protection are recyclable. Please respect the
environment and discard those materials
at a local recycling center.
Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma
Display: Always make sure that two
people lift the CVPD50 plasma display
together. Never attempt to lift the unit by
yourself. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury or
irreparable damage to the unit that is
not covered under warranty.
Remove Front-Panel Protective Film
In order to protect the lens covering the
front panel of your new CVR700, it is
shipped from the factory covered by a
protective plastic film. Before using the
unit, remove this film by grabbing one
corner and gently peeling back the plastic
sheet. Note that the film must be
removed for proper operation of the
remote control.
7
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 8
Moving the Unit
Before moving any of the units, be certain
to disconnect any interconnection cords
with other components, and make certain
that you disconnect the unit from the
AC outlet.
Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma
Display: Always make sure that two
people lift the CVPD50 plasma display
together. Never attempt to lift the unit by
yourself. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury or
irreparable damage to the unit that is
not covered under warranty.
IMPORTANT NOTE: To avoid damage to
the CVR700 that may not be covered by
the warranty, be certain that all discs are
removed from the unit before it is tilted
in place or moved. Once the CVR700 is
installed, a disc may be left in the unit
when it is turned off, but the unit should
NEVER be tilted or moved with a disc
left in the changer. Failure to do so
may result in discs becoming dislodged and jamming the mechanism
which will require that the unit be
returned to an authorized service
facility for repair.
Important Information for the User
The CVR700 and CVPD50 have been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B device, pursuant to Part 15 of
FCC Regulations 47. Operation is subject
to the following conditions: (1) These
devices may not cause harmful interference, and (2) these devices must accept
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio-frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However,
there is no guarantee that harmful interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
n
n
n
n
Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
NOTE: Changes or modifications may
cause these units to fail to comply with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION: The CVR700 uses a laser system. To prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam, do not open the cabinet
enclosure or defeat any of the safety
mechanisms provided for your protection.
DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM.
To ensure proper use of this product,
please read this owner’s manual carefully
and retain it for future use. Should the
unit require maintenance or repair, please
contact your local JBL service center. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel only.
8
The following is important safety information that you should read carefully in
order to prevent the possibility of personal injury to yourself or others, or damage
to the equipment. Errors in installation or
connection may lead to damage to the
CVPD50, the CVR700 or other devices in
your system.
Never allow children to use the CVPD50,
CVR700 or any other electrical appliances
without supervision. Take care to install
these devices where they are safe from
children and pets.
Never operate the CVPD50 plasma display in environmental conditions other
than those listed in the technical specifications on pages 111–112 of this manual.
Protect the CVPD50 plasma display and
the CVR700 from moisture, including high
levels of humidity, proximity to standing
water, dripping water, spray water and
rain. Do not install this equipment outdoors, near a hot tub or in a bathroom.
Do not put any vessels that are filled
with water, such as vases, on the unit. If
you connect an external antenna to any
device connected to the CVR700, ensure
that no water can penetrate the cable.
Protect this equipment from heat, heat
accumulation and direct sunlight. Avoid
placing the unit near fire, heat sources or
ovens. Maintain sufficient space on all
sides of the unit for proper ventilation.
Do not drape curtains over the unit. Do
not mount the unit in an enclosed
cabinet or wall.
Failure to follow these instructions
may lead to personal injury or death
due to electric shock and/or fire
caused by overheating, and/or
irreparable damage to the unit that
is not covered under warranty.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 9
Power Connection and Operator
Control
The CVPD50 plasma display and the
CVR700 are completely disconnected
from electrical power only when the
power cables are removed from both
units and/or the wall outlets, and the
JBL Digital Link™ cable connecting the
CVR700 to CVPD50 is unplugged. Only
connect the CVPD50 plasma display and
the CVR700 to a plug receptacle that has
been installed in compliance with local
regulations regarding proper grounding,
and which provides 120V. Make sure that
the power plug and outlet are accessible
at all times.
Use only the power cord supplied with
the CVPD50 plasma display. Never
remove the plug from the outlet by
pulling on the cable. Do not run the
power cord near heat-producing objects.
The CVPD50 plasma display is equipped
with an attached glass filter plate. If the
unit is exposed to excessive stress, e.g.
due to shock, vibration, bending or heat,
the glass surface can break. Do not subject the glass surface to any pressure or
knocks. If the glass is cracked, unplug the
power cord immediately. Do not touch the
fragments with your bare hands. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury due to
sharp-edged glass fragments.
Always make sure that two people lift
the CVPD50 plasma display together.
Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself.
Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury or irreparable damage to the unit that is not
covered under warranty.
If you will be away for an extended period
of time, it is a good idea to unplug the
units and any antennae. It is also a good
idea to do the same before any thunderstorms. This is a precautionary measure
to prevent the possibility of personal
injury or death due to fire or electric
shock resulting from a lightning strike,
and to prevent damage to the unit.
Always power off all units and unplug
them before connecting them to each
other.
Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury due to electrical shock or fire, and/or irreparable damage to the unit that is not
covered under warranty.
9
CVR700 OM
4:23 PM
Page 10
What’s Included
CVPD50 Carton Contents:
One JBL Digital Link cable to connect the CVPD50 screen
to the CVR700 (3 meters; 5- and 10-meter lengths available
separately), packed with CVPD50
One CVPD50 50-Inch Plasma Display Screen (shown with
credenza stand)
One VGA to DVI cable for analog PCs (3 meters), packed with
CVPD50
CVR700 Carton Contents:
80,50
5x45
/2x
32
48
Abwicklung
M1:5
0
4,5
0
12/17/04
One CVR700 audio/video receiver/video processor/optical disc
changer with owner’s guide, quick-start guide and warranty
cards.
14,5
AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER / VIDEO PROCESSOR / OPTICAL DISC CHANGER
DVD A MP3 6:9 4:3
SVCD P-SCAN
PCM 192K 96K
RANDOM PROGRAM
RPERAT DISC ALL
One wall-mount bracket for the CVPD50 screen
One AM loop antenna
One FM antenna
One power cord for the CVPD50 screen (packed with CVPD50)
10
L
R
SL
SBL
DIGITAL EX
PRO LOGIC II
96/24
NEO:6
SR
SBR
57CH. STEREO
LOGIC 7
DSP SURR.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 11
What’s Included (continued)
One CVR700R2 remote control
One CVR700R1 remote control
11
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 12
DISC FORMATS SUPPORTED BY THIS PLAYER
The unit can play the following types of
discs:
DVD
8cm (3") disc
12cm (5") disc
CD
8cm (3") disc
12cm (5") disc
The CVR700 will also play most DVDVideo, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R or
DVD+RW blank discs, but we cannot guarantee complete playback compatibility of
DVD-recordable discs due to the wide
variation in recorders and blank discs.
ReWritable
Audio CD Compatibility:
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM digital audio
• Audio CDs are divided into tracks
CD-R/RW Compatibility:
• 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM, MP3 (32kbps – 320kbps)
or Windows Media® WMA (16kbps –
192kbps) digital audio
• May contain JPEG still images (up to
5 megapixels, file size up to 5mb)
• Linear PCM discs are generally divided
into tracks like an audio CD. MP3,
WMA and JPEG discs (or discs that
contain more than one of these formats) are divided into files, which may
be organized into folders, depending on
how the disc was created.
VCD Compatibility:
CD-RW
12cm (5")
CD-R
8cm (3")
12cm (5")
VCD
8cm (3")
12cm (5")
NOTE: Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs
created on a computer requires proper
formatting and finalization of the disc for
audio playback. Some computers and/or
software programs may not be capable of
creating compatible discs.
DVD-Video Disc Compatibility:
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Single-sided or double-sided discs
• Single-layer or dual-layer discs
• Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG or Linear
PCM digital audio tracks
• MPEG-2 digital video
• Discs are generally divided into one or
more titles, which may be further subdivided into chapters.
DVD-Audio Disc Compatibility:
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Single-sided discs
• Single-layer or dual-layer discs
• Linear or packed PCM digital audio
• Some discs may contain MPEG-2 video,
and Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG digital
audio
• Discs are generally divided into one or
more groups, which may be further
subdivided into tracks.
12
• 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM, MP1 (MPEG-1, Layer 1),
MP3 (MPEG-1, Layer 3) digital audio
• MPEG-1 digital video
• May contain JPEG still images (Video
CD Version 2.0)
• Some discs may contain menus and
chapters, while other discs simply contain tracks. Version 2.0 discs may offer
interactive playback control (PBC).
However, it will NOT play the following:
• DVD discs with a Region Code other
than that indicated on the rear panel
• DVD-ROM data discs
• DVD-RAM discs
• CD-I discs
• CD-G discs
• SVCD discs
• Kodak® Photo CD discs (Kodak Picture
CD discs, which are available to consumers, contain files in the JPEG format which may be viewed using the
CVR700.)
NOTE: Due to differences in the formatting of certain discs, it is possible that
some discs may include features that
are not compatible with the CVR700.
Similarly, although the CVR700 is capable
of a wide range of features, not all discs
include every capability of the DVD system. For example, although the CVR700 is
compatible with multi-angle discs, that
feature is only possible when the disc is
specially encoded for multiple-angle play.
In addition, the CVR700 is capable of
playing back both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks, but the number and types of
tracks available will vary from disc to
disc. To make certain that a specific fea-
ture or soundtrack option is available,
please check the options noted on the
disc jacket.
• Playback capability for CD- or DVDrecordable discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the disc and the
recorder used to create the disc.
• The CVR700 is compatible with most
discs recorded with files encoded using
MP3 or Windows Media 9, as well as
JPEG still images. However, note that
variations in the encoder or codec used
and the bit rate of the encoding may
affect the CVR700’s ability to play back
a specific disc. As a result, we cannot
guarantee complete compatibility with
all encoders and versions of the codecs.
47 49
51 53 55
For best results,43we45recommend
that
42 44 46 48 50 52 54
MP3 files be encoded
at
bit
rates
rang35 37 39 41
ing between 32kbps
37 41 47
34 36and
38320kbps.
40
33 be
WMA files should
26 encoded
25 37 at36bit40 46
35 39 45
32 27 and
36
24 192kbps.
rates between 16kbps
31 28 23 35
34 38 44
JPEG files should
no more
30 contain
33 than 43
29 22 34
5 megapixels, and
29 the
32
42
21 size
30 file
33 should
28 5Mb.
31
31 20 32
be no larger than
Note on DVD-Audio Discs: Due to the
newness of this format
and
some
author1
2
3
4
5
ing issues, it is possible
that
some
DVD7
8
9
10
11
Audio discs will not13play,14or that
all16 fea-17
15
tures and menus may
not
be
available.
19
20
21
22
23
Note that in many cases,
to
25
26in order
27
28
29
access the disc menu,
31 instead
32
33of pressing
34
35
the Menu Button j
37
38 , it39is neces40
41
43 Button
44
45 y
46 or the
47
sary to press the Title
Audio Button U. In addition, many
DVD-Audio discs provide two menus: a
DVD-Audio menu and a DVD-Video menu
intended for use on older players that do
not support the DVD-Audio format. If you
wish to view the DVD-Video menu and
access surround modes and other features only available through that menu
(such as Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM audio
tracks), you will need to temporarily disable the CVR700’s DVD-Audio capability
using the DVD Setup menu (see Fig. 31).
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
57
56
51
50
49
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 13
TERMINOLOGY
Home theater equipment has changed a
great deal since the first VCR was introduced about 30 years ago. Some of the
terms used to describe and configure
your CVPD50 PDP plasma display monitor
and the internal DVD/CD changer in your
CVR700 may be unfamiliar. Some of
these terms are described in this section.
Since they share some of the characteristics and technology of CD players, many
of the terms and operational concepts
used in a DVD player are similar to what
you may be familiar with from CD players
and changers, or older video disc formats
such as Laser Disc. However, if this is
your first DVD product, some of the terms
used to describe the features of a DVD
player may be unfamiliar. The following
explanations should solve some of the
mysteries of DVD, and help you to enjoy
all the power and flexibility of the DVD
format and the CVR700.
With the arrival of DVD, disc data capacity has increased dramatically. On a DVD
Video disc, most of this capacity is taken
up by MPEG 2 video and the multichannel
movie soundtrack in Dolby Digital and/or
DTS. This information is compressed. But
with DVD Audio, most of this capacity is
available for music only, without any
compression. This allows us to put the
audio information on the disc in the same
quality as the original mastering in the
studio, in PCM up to 24-bit/192kHz.
DVD-Audio’s 24-bit system provides substantially improved resolution of fine
detail, because it describes a specific
point in the musical information using
a 24-digit-long string of ones and zeros
with 16,777,216 possible combinations,
while CD’s primitive 16-bit system offers
only 65,536 options. The 192kHz frequency
allows us to have fast changes in music
made audible, which results in more
dynamism, and also allows us to obtain a
higher bandwidth, up to 96kHz. Although
that is far beyond the human audible
spectrum, it still improves the musical
realism.
Aspect Ratio: This is a description of
the width of a video image in relation to
its height. A conventional video screen is
four units wide for every three units of
height, making it almost square. Newer
wide-aspect-ratio video displays are 16
units wide for every nine units of height,
making them more like the screen in a
movie theater. The program material on a
DVD may be recorded in either format.
NOTES:
n Due to the advent of HD (high-definition) programming and the new 16:9
(also called 1.85 or widescreen) aspect
ratio, many newer sources now offer
their own scaling (resizing of the picture to fit a frame) options which are
accessed through their remote or
through their on-screen menu. To take
advantage of CVR700’s robust scaling
capabilities, it is best to allow the
CVR700 to handle all rescaling duties.
This means that all high-definition
external sources connected to CVR700
should be configured to supply a 16:9
picture to CVR700 if at all possible
and all non-HD legacy sources should
supply their native 4:3 (otherwise
called 1.33 or FULL SCREEN) aspect
ratio (with older devices, there are
usually no adjustments or options for
picture size, anyway). Regarding HD
sources, some experimentation may
be necessary, as not all offer a basic
16:9 aspect ratio option without other
parameter settings. The correct mode
may be called 16:9 FULL SCREEN in
some brand products; in other brand
products, you may need to select the
16:9 aspect ratio separately from
selecting FULL SCREEN scaling. Some
experimentation with the settings on
your source device may be necessary
to find the most pleasing appearance.
n
There are two film formats commonly
used in movie theaters today that are
close to the 16:9 aspect ratio of your
CVPD50 screen – 1.85:1 and 2.35:1.
The aspect ratio of your screen is
1.78:1, which is very close to the
1.85:1 film ratio that is found in many
movies recorded on DVDs or broadcast
on television, and these programs will
fill your screen. However, some
movies are filmed in the wider 2.35:1
ratio. Check the jacket of your DVD to
find its aspect ratio. When playing
such a DVD on your JBL Cinema Vision
system, if you have turned off the DVD
Auto Resize feature, or if your analog
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
video signal is of higher resolution
you
may
need to
1 than2 480i3 or DVI,
4
5
6
the
7 repeatedly
8
9 press
10
11 Letterbox
12
z
13 Button
14
15
16 on
17 your
18 remote conto select
either
19 trol 20
21
22
23 the24“2.35 LTRBOX
25 TO 16:9”
26
27or “2.35
28
29
LB TO30 16:9
31 CROPPED”
32
33 mode,
34
35
36
choosing
the mode
37 that38provides
39
40
41
42 most pleasthe picture
43
45
46
47
48
ing 44to you.
Note
that
the
cropped
mode may leave out portions of the
frame in order to fit the image to the
screen, and you may prefer the scaled
mode, even though black bars will
appear on the top and bottom of your
screen.
If you have turned off the DVD Auto
Resize feature, you may also choose how
to view 4:3 ratio images. You may view
the image as is, in which case black bars
will appear on the left and right sides of
the screen. You may set the system to
43 45 47 49
51
stretch the image to fill 42
the 44
screen,
using
46 48 50
either linear (the stretch35is even
37 39across
41
the entire image) or non-linear
37
34 36 (the
38 40
33 26
25 37the 36
stretch is more pronounced
towards
35
32 27 24 36
edges of the image, leaving
the center 34
31 28 23 35
nearly unmodified) scaling.
30 When
33
29 22 the
34
32
21 33
4:3 ratio image consists29of a30letterboxed
28 31 20 32
movie, you may simply zoom
in to remove31
the black bars at the top and bottom of
the screen.
1
2
3
4
Chapter: DVD programs are
divided
into10
7
8
9
chapters and titles. Chapters
are
the
sub13
14
15
16
sections programmed into19 a single
title
20
21
22
on a disc. Chapters may be
25 compared
26
27 to28
the individual tracks on an31 audio
32 CD.
33
34
37
38 to39see40
Press the Menu Button j
43 a disc.
44
45
46
a listing of the chapters on
On
DVD-Audio discs, a Chapter is referred
to as a Track.
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
Component Video: This form of video
signal eliminates many of the artifacts of
traditional composite video signals by
splitting the signal into a separate luminance channel (the Y signal channel) and
two color-difference signals (the Pr and
Pb signal channels). With a component
video connection, you will see greater
picture resolution and eliminate many
picture imperfections such as the moiré
patterns often seen on check-patterned
cloth. However, in order to benefit from
component video you must have a video
display with Y/Pr/Pb component video
inputs. Do not connect the component
video outputs of the CVR700 to the standard composite or S-video inputs of a
TV or recorder.
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
13
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 14
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of connecting an auxiliary display only. Onscreen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with the CVPD50.
When using the CVR700 with the CVPD50
display, there is no need to use the
CVR700’s component video outputs. All
video signals, including those from the
internal DVD/changer as well as those
originating with external source devices,
are upconverted to the digital format utilized by the single proprietary interface
cable between the CVR700 and the
CVPD50.
High-Definition Television (HDTV):
HDTV is a form of digital television that
advances picture quality by leaps and
bounds over conventional analog television. HDTV signals are broadcast in a digital format that compresses the signal,
allowing far more information to be sent.
Broadcasters take advantage of the additional bandwidth by offering high-resolution images containing millions more pixels than an analog picture, the end result
being an image so sharp it looks more
like a photograph than television.
The resolution of a digital video signal
can vary, depending on the number of pixels used, and whether the image frames
are interlaced or progressive. Conventional
television uses interlaced frames, in
which first the odd horizontal pixels are
scanned, then all of the even pixels are
scanned to display one frame. Progressive
scanning, as described below, displays
all of the horizontal lines of pixels in one
pass. These are the common digital video
formats:
• 480i – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,
sent at 60 interlaced frames per second (30 complete frames per second).
• 480p – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,
sent at 60 complete frames per second.
• 720p – The picture is 1280 x 720 pixels, sent at 60 complete frames per
second.
• 1080i – The picture is 1920 x 1080
pixels, sent at 60 interlaced frames
per second (30 complete frames per
second).
14
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
• 1080p – The picture is 1920 x 1080
pixels, sent at 60 complete frames per
second.
The “p” and “i” designations stand for
“progressive” and “interlaced.”
The 480p and 480i (when digital) formats
are called the SD (standard-definition)
formats, and 480i is the digital equivalent
of a normal analog TV picture. When analog TV shows are upconverted and broadcast on digital TV stations, they are
broadcast in 480p or 480i.
The 720p, 1080i and 1080p formats are
HD (high-definition) formats. When you
hear about “HDTV,” this is what is being
discussed – a digital signal in the 720p,
1080i or 1080p format. If your HD source
allows you to choose a picture resolution,
set it to 720p, which works best with the
CVR700 and CVPD50.
Strictly speaking, the 480p format is considered ED (enhanced definition). However,
the JBL Cinema Vision system processes
480p signals as high-definition, and when
referring to high-definition signals, we
will be talking about 480p or better
images.
JPEG Files: JPEG stands for the Joint
Photographic Experts Group, which developed a standard for compressing still
images, such as photographs. JPEG files
may be created on a personal computer
by importing images from a digital camera, or scanning printed photographs.
These files may be burned onto a compact disc. The CVR700 is among the DVD
players that are capable of recognizing
JPEG files and enabling you to view them
on your video screen.
MP3 Files: MP3 is an audio compression
format that was developed by the Motion
Picture Experts Group as an adjunct to the
MPEG-1 video compression format. A
number of encoding software programs
are available for transferring CDs and
other audio programs into the MP3 format. The main benefit of MP3 is that it
reduces the size of audio files considerably, depending on the amount of compression selected during the encoding
process, enabling you to store many more
songs on one compact disc than in the
standard audio CD format. The CVR700 is
capable of playing MP3 files and displaying the filenames on screen.
Multiple Angle: DVDs have the capability to show up to four different views of
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
25
24
23
22
21
20
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
the same scene in a program. When a
disc
is3 encoded
2
4
5 with6 multiple-angle information,
8
9 pressing
10
11 the12Angle Button
E
you to switch
14
15 will
16 enable
17
18
20
21
22
23different
24
between
these
views. Note
26
27 present,
28
29 few30discs take advanthat,
at
32
33 this
34 capability
35
36 and, when they do,
tage
of
38
39
40
41
42
the multiple-angle technology
may only
44
45
46
47
48
be
present
for short
periods of time within the disc. Producers will usually insert
some sort of icon or graphic in the picture
to alert you to the availability of multipleangle scenes.
Progressive scan: If you are using the
CVR700 with the CVPD50 display, and
with no external DVD players, you may
skip this section, as the internal DVD
player outputs a digital video signal that
is passed directly to the CVPD50 using
the proprietary interface cable. The
CVR700 offers progressive scan video
outputs for use with compatible high-resolution televisions and projectors. Before
DVD, no consumer medium could store,
transmit or display video with full resolution. To conserve bandwidth, analog compression (interlacing) is employed: first
the odd-numbered lines of a frame are
displayed, followed by the even-numbered lines. The result is that only half of
the video image is drawn at one time; the
viewer’s brain must reassemble the complete image. This is acceptable, if the
monitor is not too large and if there is not
too much motion in the image. Large displays and fast-moving images reveal the
limitations of this system. Thanks to
DVD’s immense data capacity, images are
now stored intact (progressively), so that
all the lines in each frame (odd and even)
are shown at the same time. But because
most TVs cannot handle a progressive
signal, all current DVD players generate
an interlaced output for compatibility. The
CVR700 is among the select few DVD
players with true progressive scan video
output for use with compatible TVs and
CRT projectors and with all plasma, LCD
and DLP display devices via the component video output. The result is 40%
greater light output than a conventional
TV and a stunningly detailed high-definition image, along with an almost complete absence of visible scanlines and
motion artifacts. The CVR700’s sophisticated pixel-by-pixel processing is a major
advancement over the previous generation’s line-by-line processing, bringing out
even greater detail in your favorite video
presentations. Of course, traditional
Y/Pr/Pb component video, S-video and
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
51
50
53 55
52 54
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
Page 15
57
56
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
32
31
42
composite video outputs are included for
use with conventional televisions and
1
2
3
4
5
6
projectors.
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
43
7
42
13
7
9
10
11
12
you will
Button
see19when20 you21first22press
the
Play
23
24
37 39 41
Ae
.
It
refers
to
the
fact
that
the
25
26
27
28
29
30
41
51
37
47
36 38 40
36
50 35 the
first
31 must
32 40
33 46examine
34
36 contents of
26 25player
37
39 39 45
49 41it is42a CD or DVD,
27 24the36
37
38 see
40
disc35to
whether
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
43then44extract
45 the
46 information
47
48
and
about
33
43
29 22 34
on the disc, such as
42
30 21the33type32of material
31 aspect ratios, subtitles, num31 20languages,
32
ber of titles and more. The slight delay
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
while
the contents
of the disc are read
42 3 44 4 46 548 50 52 54 56
2 is normal.
6
35 37 39 41
9
10
11
12
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
Resume:
The
operation
of the Stop
14 3343
15 4516 47
17 49
18
3651 4053 4655 5057
26 25 37
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
CM
on
the
CVR700
works
20 Button
21
22
23
24
35
45
39
4956
32 27 24 36
3135
34 38
26 differently
27 2837
282339from
29
30
3541 what
you44are48used to on
3034 2936 2238 3440 3337 41 4347 51
32 CD
33players.
34
35
36
On
traditional
43 a45
47 49 CD
51 player,
53 55 57
2933 30262125 3337 3236 40 4246 50
38 when
39
40 press
41
42 46
42
44
48 50 52
54 56
you
the
Stop
2832 31272024 3236 3135
45 49 the unit
39 button,
44
45
46
47
48 39 41
35 it37
31
44
34
does
just
that:
stops
playback.
On
a
CD
38
48
28 23 35
37 41 47 51
34 36 33
38 40
30 29
22 you
34 press the43Start button
player,
when
29 30 21 3333 26 3225 37 42 36 40 46 50
again,
the
disc
starts
35beginning.
39 45 49
32
1
2
3
4 245from
36 6the
28
31 20 32 27 31
34 have
38 44two
48
2311 35 12 you
45 47With
51
5331
57
749 the
8 CVR700,
9 5528
10 however,
30 5429 56
33
43
22 34
44 46options
48 50
52
when
playing
DVD
discs.
Pressing
13
14
15
29 16 2117 33 18 32
42
37 39the41Stop Button30CM
once will
19 1
20 2
21
22 4 23 532 24 6 31
283 31
20
41
51
37
47
36 38 40
25 the
26 playback,
27
28 but29it actually
30
stop
puts the
12
368 40 9 46 1050 11
26 25 377
31 in the
32
33
34 49
35
36
Resume
mode.
This
means
35
27 24unit
36
13
14 39 15 45 16
17
18
37
38
39 44
40 48 the
41 Play
42
34 you
38
28 23that
35
1 press
5
6
19when
20
21
222
233
244 Button
47
48
29 22 4334 4433 45 4346
8
Ae
25
• On DVD-Audio discs, a Title is referred
to as a Group. Many DVD-Audio discs
require you to press the Title Button
O to access the disc menu.
WMA Files: WMA (Windows Media
Audio) is another audio compression
format that was developed by the
Microsoft® Corporation for use with its
Windows Media Player. WMA files can
be even smaller in size than MP3 files,
while maintaining similar quality. The
CVR700 is among the DVD players capable of playing discs containing WMA
files. Note that Windows Media Player
uses other file formats; however, the
CVR700 is only capable of playing files
that end in the “.wma” extension.
the
27
288 time,
299 the
30
7 next
10 disc
11 will12
42
continue
33
34
3515 the36
13
14from
16point
17 on the
18
38 the
39
40
4121
42
disc37where
19 Stop
20 Button
22CM
23
24
44
45
4727
48
25
28
was43pressed.
This 4626is helpful
if you29 are30
31
32
33
34
35
36
2 watching
3
4 a movie
5
6 and must interrupt
45 47 49
51 53 3755 38
57
40 to 41pick 42
but39 wish
up
8 your
9 viewing
10
11 session
12
44 46 48 50 52 4354 44
56
45
46
47
48
you
left
14 where
15
16
17 off.
18 Pressing the Stop
37 39 41
CM
twice will stop the
21
23 4724 51
41
37
36 2038Button
40 22
4630 50
27
a29 traditional
manner and,
26 2625machine
37 2836in 40
35 disc
4536
39
49
27 3224when
36 the
33
34
35 is
played
again, it will
44 48
28 3823 39
35 4034 38
41 beginning.
42
start
from
the
33
43
22
26
32
30 21 33
resume
or
31
32
31
31 20 32
35
3419
3325
3231
31
37
30 29
34
43
44
45
29 30 21 33
28 31 20Note
32
1
8
45 47 49
51 53 55 57
Reading:
This is a message18that
13
44 46 48
5014 52 1554 1656 17
include only one title, but some may have
more than one, to give you a “Double
Feature” presentation or to include other
special features. Press the Title Button
O to see a listing of the titles on a disc.
When a disc has only one title, pressing
the Title Button O may show a list of
the chapters.
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
46 43 4745
32
47
48
42
49
51
53 55
57
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
that
31 the Resume function will be
37 39 41
canceled35if you
shut the unit off
(place
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
it in Standby
mode),
change
to
another
36
46 50
40
33 26
25 37
35 39 45
disc3 or select
a different
source.
Also,
49
36
4 32 5 27
6
24
31 28
38 44 delay
48
23
35
there
may
1- to342-second
9
10 be
11 a brief
12
30 29 22 34
33
43
between
the17 second
press32of the42Stop
15
16 29
18
30 21 33
Button
28 2331 20
21
22CM
24 and
31CVR700
32 the
27
28
29
30 mode change in the
acknowledging
the
33
34
35
36
Upper
Display
Line
H.
39
40
1
41
2
42
3
4
5
6
45
46
47
48
The45 resume
is not
available
for
46
47function
48
7
8
9
10
11
12
CDs, VCDs13or JPEG
files.
For DVDs
only,
14
15
16
17
18
the resume19 function
will 22be retained
even
20
21
23
24
after the CVR700
in
25
26 has
27 been
28 placed
29
30
Standby mode
by
31
32 pressing
33
34 the35Power
36
Off Button37 10
38
39 . 40
41
42
43
44
Title: For a DVD, a title is defined as an
entire movie or program. There may be as
many chapters within a title as the producers decide to include. Most discs
15
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 16
CVR700 FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS

Ô
Ó
(
&
*
AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER / VIDEO PROCESSOR / OPTICAL DISC CHANGER
DVD A MP3 6:9 4:3
SVCD P-SCAN
PCM 192K 96K
RANDOM PROGRAM
RPERAT DISC ALL
L
R
DIGITAL EX
PRO LOGIC II
SBR
SBL
96/24
NEO:6
SR
SL
57CH. STEREO
LOGIC 7
DSP SURR.
GAME/CAM
2
1
4
3
8
@
8)
!
7 9
5
0 Main Power On/Off
1 Sleep Button
2 Display Dimmer
3 Disc Drawer
4 Disc Selector
5 Tuning Mode/Eject Button
6 Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
Output
7 Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search Button
8 Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio Input
9 Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio
Input
! Tuner Band Selector/Play Button
B Memory/Pause Button
# FM Mode/Stop Button
$ Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs
% Headphone Jack
^ Front-Panel Door
1 Main Power On/Off: Press this button to apply power to the CVR700. The
LED indicator in the center of the button
will turn orange. Press it again to place
the CVR700 in Standby mode, and the
LED indicator will turn red.
3 Display Dimmer: Press this button to
reduce the brightness of the Information
Display Ô by 50%, or to turn the display off completely, in the following order:
FULL BRIGHTNESS -> HALF BRIGHTNESS
-> OFF -> FULL BRIGHTNESS.
If the CVPD50 is in use, pressing this button will also turn the CVPD50 on or off,
if it is plugged into AC power and its
master power switch has been turned
on. If the LED on the CVPD50’s front panel
is flashing, then check that its master
power switch is on (the “1” position).
4 Disc Drawer: This drawer is used to
access the five-disc magazine changer.
While a disc is playing, you may load a
disc into or remove a disc from another
location in the changer. If you select the
current disc, it will first stop playing. Seat
all discs carefully within the recess in the
drawer. Do not press down on the drawer
when it is open, to avoid damage to the
player. It is also best to open and close
the drawer by pressing the Eject Button
6 rather than by
43 pushing
45 47 the
49 drawer
51 53 55
42 44 46 48 50 52 54
itself.
2 Sleep Button: Press this button to
place the unit in the Sleep mode. After
the time shown in the display, the
CVR700 will automatically go into the
Standby mode. Each press of the button
changes the time until turn-off in the following order:
90
min
80
min
70
min
60
min
50
min
40
min
30
min
20
min
10
min
OFF
When the Sleep timer is in use, the frontpanel displays and other indicators will
dim to half-brightness.
16
6
35
37 39
41
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
#
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35
&
34
*
33
(
32
31
Ó
30
Ô
29

28
37 39 Selector
41
Source
37 41 47 51
36 38 40
Surround
Mode
Selector
36 40 46 50
26 25 37
Input
Select
Button
35
39 45 49
27 24 36
34 38 44 48
Volume
Control
28 23 35
33
43
29 22 34 Display
Information
32
42
30 21 33
Remote
Sensor
Window
31
31
32
%
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
you to enter
13 , the
14 CVR700
15
16will17prompt
18
21 by
22 pressing
23
24one of these
a19disc 20number
25
26
27
28
29
30
buttons.
31
32
33
34
35
36
6
Tuning
Mode/Eject
Button:
This
37
38
39
40
41
42
button’s
function
varies,
depending
on
43
44
45
46
47
48
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the current input
source. When the tuner is the source,
press this button to select the function
of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8. Each
press will alternate between the tuning
function and the preset selections function, with the current choice displayed
on the Lower Display Line E.
57
56
5 Disc Selector:
Press one of37these
41 47 51
34 36 38 40
buttons when prompted
a message
46 50
36 40 on
33 26 25by 37
45 49
35on39the
32 27Line
the Lower Display
36 and
24 E
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
CVPD50 screen for a disc number after
30 29 22 34
43
33
pressing the Eject
6. If32you 42
29 Button
30 21 33
28 internal
have selected the
31
31 20 disc
32 changer
as the source device using the Source
Selector & or by pressing the DVD
1
2
4
5
6
on3 either
remote
Input Selector d
8
9 Play
10
11
12
control, and then 7pressed
the
13 Direct
14
15Button
16
17
18
Button ! or Disc
a
25
^
$
When the tuning function has been
selected, each press of one of the
Tuning/Preset Buttons 8 will tune the
next higher or lower frequency, regardless
of whether an acceptable signal is available. Press and hold the Tuning Button
8 to scan up or down through the frequencies until a station with acceptable
signal quality is located. Tap the Tuning
Button 8 again to end the scan.
When the preset selection function is in
force, each press of one of the Tuning/
Preset Buttons 8 will tune the next
higher or lower preset station that was
previously stored in the CVR700’s memory.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 17
See page 64 for information on storing
preset stations.
When the disc changer is the source,
press this button to open or close the
Disc Drawer 4. The Lower Display
Line E will prompt you to press a disc
number. Press the Disc Selector 5 corresponding to the number of the drawer
you wish to access.
7 Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
Output: Connect the optical digital input
of an audio or video product to this jack.
8 Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search
Buttons: The function of these buttons
varies depending on whether you have
selected the tuner or the disc changer as
the current input source, and in what context you press it.
When the tuner is the source, press the
left button to tune lower-frequency stations and the right button to tune higherfrequency stations. Each tap of the buttons will increase or decrease the frequency by one increment. Press and hold
the button, and the tuner will scan for a
station with acceptable signal strength.
When the next higher or lower frequency
station with a strong-enough signal is
tuned, the frequency scan will pause.
Press the button again to stop scanning.
When the tuner is the source and you
have pressed the Tuning Mode Button
6 so that PRESET appears in the
Lower Display Line E, pressing these
buttons enables you to scroll through the
list of stations that have been previously
stored in the CVR700’s memory.
See page 64 for more information on
using the tuner.
When the disc changer is the source,
press and release these buttons to move
(skip) either backward (left button) or forward (right button) through the tracks on
a DVD-Audio, CD or VCD disc or the
chapters on a DVD-Video disc. Press and
hold either button for at least 1 second
and then release to search either backward (left button) or forward (right button) the current track or chapter at 2x
speed. Press and hold again and release
to increase the scan speed to 4x. Repeat
this procedure while in scan mode to
cycle through these scan speeds: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x, 2x and so forth. Press and
release the button while scanning to skip
tracks or chapters. To stop searching, you
must press the Play Button !, the
Pause Button @, the Stop Button #
or the other Search Button 8.
9 Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
Input: Connect the optical digital output
of an audio or video product to this jack.
Stop Button !# to exit the Step
Forward mode.
# FM Mode/Stop Button: The function of this button varies depending on
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the input source.
) Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio
Input: Connect the coaxial digital output
of an audio or video product to this jack.
! Tuner Band Selector/Play Button:
The function of this button varies depending on whether you have selected the
tuner or the disc changer as the source.
43
45 47
When the tuner is the source, pressing
42 44 46
this button will switch between35the37AM39
34 366438
and FM frequency bands. (See page
33 26 25
for more information on the tuner.)
32
27 24
31 28 23
When the disc changer is the source,
30
pressing this button will prompt29you29to22
30 21
enter the number of the disc you
28 wish
31 20
49
48
41
40
37
36
35
34
33
32
to play (corresponding to the drawer in
which the disc is loaded). You may select
Disc
a disc either by pressing one of the
1
2
3
5, 8or 9
Selectors 5 numbered 1 through
7
by pressing the Numeric Keys l
13
14
15
19
20
21
numbered 1 through 5 on either remote
26
27
control. If you don’t select a disc25number
31 play
32
33
within 5 seconds, the CVR700 will
the last disc that was selected. If37 the 38disc 39
43
is an MP3 or WMA disc, each press
of44 45
this button will expand the current folder
until a file is located, and the final press
will begin play of that file. If no disc is
found, the STOP MODE, DISC 1
message will appear and you will need to
open the drawer to insert a disc.
@ Memory/Pause Button: The function of this button varies depending on
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the input source.
When the tuner is the source, press this
button to store the currently tuned station
as a preset. Two flashing underlines will
appear in the Upper Display Line H.
Press the Tuning Mode Button 6
until PRESET appears in the Lower
Display Line E to indicate the function
of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8, then
press either of the Preset Buttons 8
until the desired preset location appears
in place of the flashing underlines. Press
the Memory Button @ again to store
the station in the preset location displayed.
When the disc changer is the source,
pressing this button during playback
freezes a picture (for DVD and VCD discs)
and pauses the playback signal. Pressing
the Pause Button @ twice places the
DVD changer in the Step Forward mode,
in which each subsequent press of the
Pause Button @ advances the picture
one step or frame. Press the Play or
When the tuner is the source, press this
button to switch between Stereo and
Mono modes for FM radio reception.
When weak reception is encountered,
51 53 55 57
select the Mono tuning mode. Press
50 52 54 56
again to switch back to Stereo mode.
See
page
51for more information.
37 41
47 64
36 40 46 50
When
the disc changer is the source,
35 39 45 49
press
once to stop playback
34 38 this
44 button
48
33 the current
43
of
disc and enter Resume
32
mode.
In42Resume mode, the CVR700 will
31
“remember” the point on the disc where
play was stopped, and the next time the
disc
is played,
it will commence playback
4
5
6
from
this
point,
unless the unit was
10
11
12
turned
off,
another
disc was selected or
16
17
18
another
source
was
selected. To fully
22
23
24
stop29the disc,
press this button twice.
28
30
There35 may36 be a 1- or 2-second delay
34
before
40
41 Stop
42 mode takes effect. Resume
46
48 available for CDs, VCDs, MP3
mode47 is not
discs or WMA discs. If one of those disc
types is playing, a single press of this
button will place the disc in Stop mode,
as indicated by the solid square and the
word STOP appearing in the Upper
Display Line H.
$ Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs:
The front-panel inputs give you the flexibility to temporarily connect a device to
the CVR700. This capability is useful for
such applications as viewing home
movies directly from the camcorder, or
playing a video game. For video devices,
connect one of the composite video, Svideo or component video outputs of the
device to the corresponding front-panel
input, and connect the left and right
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs.
Do not make more than one type of video
connection. In addition to the analog
audio connection, you may also connect
an optical or coaxial digital audio output
from the device to the CVR700. You will
then need to press the Input Select
Button ( to select the desired audio
input (analog, optical or coaxial), and
specify the correct video input using the
audio on-screen menu system. Press the
System Selector f, and then the
OSD Button n to enter the menu system. Select the SOURCES submenu,
and make sure the GAME/CAMERA
source is selected (or select the
17
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 18
SOURCE line to adjust it). Scroll down
to the VIDEO INPUT line and
select it to configure the CVR700 to use
the video input you connected your
device to.
% Headphones Jack: This jack may
be used to listen to the CVR700's output
through a pair of headphones. Be certain
that the headphones have a standard
1/4" stereo phone plug, or that you use
an adapter, as needed, to convert the
plug on your headphones to the 1/4" jack
used on the CVR700. When the headphone jack is in use, the main room
speakers will automatically be turned off
and the unit will output a standard stereo
signal. For more information on headphone listening, see page 60.
^ Front-Panel Door: The door may
be closed to hide the front-panel jacks
when they are not in use for a smoother
appearance. To open the door, gently
push on the bottom of the door in the
center to swing it down towards you, or
gently pull on the upper right corner. Push
upward on it to close.
& Source Selector: Rotate this knob
to scroll through the available input
sources. Turn the knob slowly and gently,
and you will feel a soft click as each
source is engaged. You may also hear a
click as the CVR700’s electrical circuits
engage the source. This is normal, and
assures you that you have correctly
selected the source. The name of the
source will be displayed in the Upper
Display Line H, and in a Status Banner
on screen, together with the source’s
audio input (for external sources) and
video format.
* Surround Mode Selector: Press
this button repeatedly to scroll through
the available surround modes. The modes
available will depend on the number of
speakers in the system and whether the
input is analog or digital. See page 60 for
more information on surround modes.
18
NOTE: 6.1 and 7.1 digital modes are
available only when the appropriate digital bitstream is present.
( Input Select Button: After you have
selected the desired input source, press
this button repeatedly to scroll through
the analog, optical digital and coaxial
digital audio inputs available for that
source.
Ó Volume Control: Turn this knob
clockwise to increase the volume, counterclockwise to decrease the volume. If
the CVR700 is muted, adjusting the volume control will automatically release
the unit from the silenced condition.
Ô Information Display: This display
delivers messages and status information
to help you operate the CVR700. See
page 19 for a complete explanation of
the display.
 Remote Sensor Window: The sensor behind this window receives infrared
signals from the remote control that are
intended to control the non-video functions of the CVR700 only. Aim the remote
at this area and do not block or cover
it unless an external remote sensor is
installed. Note that unless the CVR700
is not being used with the CVPD50, it is
best to aim the remote at the LED light
on the front of the CVPD50 plasma display, as the IR receiver located there can
accept remote control signals intended
for both the plasma display and the
CVR700.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 19
CVR700 FRONT-PANEL INFORMATION DISPLAY
A Disc-Type Indicators
B PCM Bitstream Indicators
C Programmed Play Indicators
D Disc Indicators
E Lower Display Line
F Speaker/Channel Input Indicators
G Surround Mode Indicators
H Upper Display Line
I Progressive Scan Indicator
J Aspect Ratio Indicator
A Disc-Type Indicators: The DVD,
DVD-Audio, CD, VCD or MP3 indicator
will light to show the type of disc currently being played. WMA and JPEG
discs will be identified in the Upper and
Lower Display Lines EH.
E Lower Display Line: Depending on
the unit’s status, a variety of messages
will appear here. In normal operation, the
current surround mode will appear on
this line.
H Upper Display Line: Depending on
the unit’s status, a variety of messages
will appear here. In normal operation,
this line will show the current input
source and identify whether an analog
or digital input is in use. When the tuner
is selected as the input, this line will
identify the station as AM or FM and
show the frequency and preset number,
if any.
B PCM Bitstream Indicators: The
PCM indicator will light when a PCM
(pulse code modulation) bitstream is
detected. PCM bitstreams are used on
audio CDs, and may also be found on
other disc types either as the main audio
format or as the format used on certain
portions of the disc, such as a “making
of” featurettes on a DVD. The 96K or
192K indicators will light when a highresolution audio signal is detected. This
type of audio track may be found on
some DVD-Audio discs.
C Programmed Play Indicators: The
CVR700 is capable of playing discs in a
programmed order other than the order in
which the tracks are found on the disc.
Tracks may be played in random order,
or you may program some or all of the
tracks on a CD to play in a playlist order.
In addition, you may program the CVR700
to repeat play of some of the tracks on a
disc, an entire disc, all discs, or a programmed playlist. Some of the programmed modes may not be available
for certain disc formats. See page 75
for more information.
D Disc Indicators: The circled numbers will light to indicate the positions of
loaded discs, and the indicator for the
current disc will flash.
F Speaker/Channel Input Indicators:
These indicators are multipurpose, indicating both the speaker type selected for
each channel and the incoming data signal
configuration. The left, center, right, right
surround and left surround speaker indicators are composed of two boxes, while the
subwoofer is a single box. The inner box
lights when a “small” speaker is selected,
and the outer boxes light when “large”
speakers are selected. When none of the
boxes are lit for the center, surround or
subwoofer channels, no speaker has been
assigned that position. (See page 48 for
more information on configuring speakers.)
The letters inside each box display the
active input channels. For standard analog
inputs, only the L and R will light, indicating a stereo input. For a digital source, the
indicators will light to display the channels
being received at the digital input. When
the letters flash, the digital input has been
interrupted. When a 6.1-channel bitstream
is detected, a horizontal line will appear
between the icons for the surround back
left and right channels to indicate that
these two channels are in mono mode.
(See page 61 for more information on the
Channel Indicators.)
I Progressive Scan Indicator: This
indicator lights when the CVR700’s
progressive scan component video output
is activated.
J Aspect Ratio Indicators: The
aspect ratio of the incoming video signal
will light. These indicators are informational only and reflect the aspect ratio
information provided by the DVD disc
itself. You may need or wish to make
manual adjustments to display the
images so that they fill the screen, or if
you prefer to avoid any scaling or cropping of the images, you may wish to letterbox the image. See pages 13 and 27
for more information on adjusting the
CVPD50 display to compensate for various aspect ratio issues.
G Surround Mode Indicators: One of
these indicators will light to show the
surround mode in use. Depending on the
specific combination of input sources and
surround mode selected, more than one
indicator may light. (See page 61 for
more information.)
19
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 20
CVR700 REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS
Y
¡
™
U j
W
£
∞
¢
k i ge
V
X
¶ ª
§ •
‹ fi ‡
⁄
‚
b d
·
› fl °
¤
hf
a
c
NOTE: To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product
Support section for this product at www.jbl.com.
0 Back Surround Speaker Outputs
(7.1-channel only)
1 Side Surround (7.1-channel) or
Surround (5.1-channel) Speaker Outputs
2 Center Speaker Outputs
3 Front Speaker Outputs
4 Fan Slots
5 Subwoofer Output
6 DVI/Computer Analog Audio Inputs
7 Auxiliary Analog Audio/Video Inputs
8 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video
Inputs
9 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video
Outputs
A VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs
B VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs
C Cable/Satellite Analog Audio/Video
Inputs
NOTE: To assist in making the correct connections for multichannel input, output and
speaker connections, all connection jacks and
terminals are color-coded in conformance
with the CEA standards as follows:
20
¡ Back Surround Speaker Outputs:
These speaker terminals are normally
used to power the back surround left/
back surround right speakers in a 7.1channel system. In conformance with the
CEA color-code specification, the brown
terminal is the positive (+) terminal that
should be connected to the red (+) terminal on the Back Surround Left speaker
with older color-coding, while the tan
D Composite and S-Video Monitor
Outputs
E Remote IR Output
43 45 47
42 44 46
F Remote IR Input
35
37
43 Video
45 39
47
G Digital Recorder Component
34
42 36
44 38
46
Inputs
33
26
25
35
37
43
45
47
H Cable/Satellite Component Video 39
32
27 24
34
38
42 36
44
46
Inputs
31 28 23
33
26 25
35
37
39
I Component Video Monitor30
Outputs
29
32
27 22
24
43 36
45
47
34
38
29
J Picture-in-Picture (PIP) Composite
21
30
31 28 23
33
42 44
46
26
25
28
20
Video Input
30 31
22
29
32
27 47
24
35 45
37
39
43
29
b Coaxial Digital Audio Output
21
30
31 36
23
28 46
34
38
42
28 44
31
c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio
Input20
30
22
29
33
26
25
35 37 39
291 Audio
d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital
21
30
32
27 2 38
24
34
36
28
31 31
Input
23
28 8 20
337 26
25
301 Audio
e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital
29 14
2 22
3213 27
24
29 30 21
317 28
Input
8 23
19
20
41
49
40
48
31 22
20
29 14
2
26
30 821
20
32
31 20
37
41
49
36
40
48
35
37
41
34
36
49
40
33
35
48
37
32
34
36
41
49
33
35
40
48
32
34
37
41
3
33
36
40
32
35
9
37
34
3
36
15
33
35
9
21
32
34
3
15
27
33
9
21
33
32
13
25
37
1
19
31
43
7
25
37
1
13
31
43
7
19
37
13
25
43
19
31
White
Red
Green
Blue
Gray
Brown
Tan
14
26
38
2
20
32
44
8
26
38
2
14
32
44
8
20
38
14
26
44
20
32
15
27
39
3
21
33
45
9
27
39
3
15
33
45
9
21
39
15
27
45
21
33
18
30
Subwoofer: 42
6
24
36
48
Digital Audio:12
30
42
Composite Video:
618
36
48
Component Video
“Y”:
12
24
42
Component Video
“Pr”:
16
17
18
28
29
30
46
47
48
“Pb”:
Component
Video
25
37
26
38
27
39
31
43
32
44
28
301
13
25
29
7
19
2831
Front Left:
Front Right:
Center:
Side Surround/Surround Left:
Side Surround/Surround Right:
Back Surround Left:
Back Surround Right:
49
48
f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio
Input
51 Optical
53 55 Digital
57
g
Audio Output
50
52 54 56
h Auxiliary
Optical Digital Audio Input
51 Cable/Satellite
53 55 57
i
Optical Digital Audio
41 54
37 52
47 51
50
56
Input
36 40 46 50
51 Digital
53 55Recorder
57
j
Optical Digital Audio
35
45
39
41 54
51
47 49
37 52
50
56
Input
34
44
38
48
36 40 46 50
k
DVI/Computer
Optical Digital Audio
33
43
45 49
35 53
39
41 55
51
37
47
51
57
32
42
Input
44
34
38
36 52
46 48
40 54
50
50
56
31
FM Antenna
Jack
33
35 39 43
45 49
51 53 55 57
42
32
AM
Antenna
Terminals
34
44
38
48
41
51
37 52 54
47 56
50
31
JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50
33
36 Output
46to50
40 43
42
Screen
432
5
35 39
456 49
37 41
47 51
31
34 Port
4412Factory
38
48
Use Only
10
11 for
36
46
40
50
33 DVI
436
435
5 (HDCP)/Computer
Video Input
45
39
16
17
18 49
38
terminal should be connected to37the red
43 Right
44
(+) terminal on the Back Surround
speaker with the older color-coding.
Connect the black (–) terminal on the
CVR700 to the matching black negative
(–) terminals for each back surround
speaker. (See page 42 for more information on speaker polarity.)
32 38 42
11 4424
12 48
23
5 436
34
10
22
31
33
4
16
28
32
31
17
29
10
22
34
11
23
35
16
28
40
4
22
34
46
10
28
40
4
16
34
46
10
22
40
17
29
41
5
23
35
47
11
29
41
5
17
35
47
11
23
41
22
34
23
35
24
36
28
40
29
41
30
42
33
45
34
46
35
47
36
48
39
40
45
18
30
42
12
24
36
Purple
Orange
Yellow
Green
Red
Blue
42
™ Side Surround
Speaker Outputs:
46
47 these
48
Connect
outputs to the matching +
and – terminals on your side surround
(7.1-channel system) or Surround (5.1channel system) speakers. Conforming to
CEA color-code specifications, the blue
terminal is the positive (+) terminal that
should be connected to the (+) terminal
on the Side Surround/Surround Left
speaker with older color-coding; the gray
41
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 21
§ Subwoofer Output: Connect this
jack to the line-level input of a powered
subwoofer. If an external subwoofer
amplifier is used, connect this jack to
the subwoofer amplifier input. Use a
Y-adaptor when connecting two subwoofers.
terminal should be connected to the
red (+) terminal on the Side Surround/
Surround Right speaker with the older
color-coding. Connect the black (–) terminals on the CVR700 to the matching black
negative (–) terminals for each side surround speaker. (See page 42 for more
information on speaker polarity.)
£ Center Speaker Outputs: Connect
these outputs to the matching + and –
terminals on your center channel speaker.
In conformance with the CEA color-code
specification, the green terminal is the
positive (+) terminal that should be con45 47 49
nected to the red (+) terminal 43
on speakers
42 44 46 48
with the older color-coding. Connect the
35 37 39 41
black (–) terminal on the CVR700
to the
34 36 38 40
black negative (–) terminal on 33
the speaker.
26 25 37
(See page 42 for more information.)
32 27 24 36
31
28 23 35
34
33
32
¢ Front Speaker Outputs: 30
Connect
29 22
these outputs to the matching29+ or30– ter21
28 31 20
minals on your left and right speakers.
When making speaker connections
always make certain to maintain correct
polarity by connecting the color-coding
1
2
(white for front left and red for front
7
8
right) (+) terminals on the CVR700
the
13 to 14
red (+) terminals on the speakers
and20
19
black (–) terminals on the CVR700
to 26the
25
black terminals on the speakers31(see 32
page 42 for more information). 37
38
43
44
∞ Fan Slots: These ventilation holes
are the output of the CVR700’s airflow
system. To ensure proper operation of the
unit and to avoid possible damage to delicate surfaces, make certain that these
holes are not blocked and that there is at
least three inches of open space between
the vent holes and any wooden or fabric
surface. It is equally important to make
sure that the holes in the top and bottom
covers of the unit are not blocked, either.
It is normal for the fan to remain on at
all times at one of three speeds,
depending on the selection you make in
the ADVANCED SETTINGS
submenu. By selecting the default
MINIMUM NOISE setting, the fan
will run at its slowest speed at volumes
below –20dB, and at its slightly faster
medium speed at higher volumes. This
setting should only be selected when
the CVR700 is placed on a shelf and
not within an enclosed space. When
the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet
or other enclosed space, select the
MAXIMUM COOLING setting, in
which the fan will always be on at its
highest setting.
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
¶ DVI/Computer Analog Audio
Inputs: Connect the left/right analog
audio outputs of a computer or other
device with a DVI output to these jacks
to benefit from the CVR700’s surround
processor for added realism and excitement when playing computer games,
51 53 55 57
or
giving multimedia presentations, or
50 52 54 56
for other uses. When you have also
connected
the computer’s DVI video out37 41 47 51
Video Input
put
36 to
46DVI/Computer
40the
50
you 45
may49also benefit from the
35 , 39
34 38 44
superior
visual
48 presentation of the JBL
33
43
CVPD50 screen.
Cinema
Vision
32
page 46 for more information on configuring an input for various source options.)
‚ Digital Recorder Analog Audio/
Video Outputs: Connect the left/right
analog audio and composite or S-video
RECORD/IN jacks of a video recording
device such as a DVD-Recorder, personal
video recorder or VCR to these jacks.
⁄ VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs:
Connect the left/right analog audio and
composite or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of
a video recording device such as a VCR,
DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder
to these jacks.
¤ VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs:
Connect the left/right analog audio and
composite or S-video RECORD/IN jacks of
a video recording device such as a VCR,
DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder
to these jacks.
42
You
31 may connect any device with left and
right analog audio outputs to these jacks.
• Auxilliary Analog Audio/Video
4
5
6
Inputs:
Connect
the left/right analog
10
11
12
audio and composite or S-video jacks of a
16
17device
18 to these jacks. You may convideo
22
23 video
24
nect
any
source such as a VCR,
28
29receiver,
30
HDTV
or other device to these
34
35 Note
36 that if the source device
inputs.
40
42 audio capability, that conoffers41digital
46
47 must
48 be made separately, and the
nection
CVR700 configured accordingly. Note that
the Auxiliary Source Input does not have
component video inputs assigned to it
and thus may only be used with composite or S-video. Therefore, if possible, it
is recommended that an HDTV receiver
be used with the Cable/Sat or even the
Digital Recorder source, so that a component video connection may be made. (See
page 46 for more information on configuring an input for various source options.)
ª Digital Recorder Analog
Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the
left/right analog audio and composite
or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a video
recording device such as a VCR, DVDRecorder or personal video recorder to
these jacks. The CVR700’s remote control
has a variety of digital recorders available as the default devices for this input,
but you may connect any video source
such as a VCR, HDTV or cable set-top
box, personal video recorder, or other
device to these inputs. Note that if the
source device offers either digital audio
or component video capability, those connections must be made separately, and
the CVR700 configured accordingly. (See
The CVR700’s remote control has a VCR
as the default device for this input, but
you may connect any video source such
as an HDTV or cable set-top box, personal
video recorder, or other device to these
inputs. Note, however, that the VCR
source is not associated with any digital
audio inputs or component video inputs,
and should therefore only be used as a
last resort for devices that have those
capabilities. The preferred system configuration is to connect an HDTV tuner or
digital cable or satellite receiver to the
Cable/Sat source, and to connect a personal video recorder, such as a TiVo,® to
the Digital Recorder source.
‹ Cable/Satellite Analog
Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the
left/right analog audio and composite or
S-video jacks of a video device to these
jacks. The CVR700’s remote control has
a cable, satellite or HDTV set-top as the
default devices available for this input,
but you may connect any video source
such as a VCR, HDTV or satellite receiver,
personal video recorder, or other device
to these inputs. Note that if the source
device offers either digital audio or component video capability, those connections must be made separately, and the
CVR700 configured accordingly.
21
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 22
› Composite and S-Video Monitor
Outputs: If you are not using the
CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary display, connect thse jacks to the composite
or S-video input of a TV monitor or video
projector to view the output of any standard video source selected by the receiver’s video switcher. If both standard composite and S-video sources are used,
you must make connections from both
Video Monitor Output jacks to your
display. Also, if component video sources
are used, you must also connect the
Component Video Monitor Output ·
to the display.
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of connecting an auxiliary display only. Onscreen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with CVPD50.
fi Remote IR Output: This connection
permits the IR sensor in the receiver to
serve other remote controlled devices.
Connect this jack to the “IR IN” jack on
JBL (or other compatible) equipment.
fl Remote IR Input: If the CVR700’s
front-panel IR sensor is blocked due to cabinet doors or other obstructions, an external IR sensor may be used. Connect the
output of the sensor to this jack.
NOTE: The remote IR input and output on
the CVR700 are only used for non-video
functions, and will have no effect on the
CVPD50 plasma display. JBL recommends
that you point the remote control at the
LED light on the front of the CVPD50 display for all functions, as the CVPD50 will
pass any non-video command codes to
the CVR700.
‡ Component Video Digital
Recorder Inputs: These inputs may
be used with any video source device
equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb component
video outputs. These jacks are permanently linked to the Digital Recorder
Source input.
22
° Component Video Cable/Satellite
Inputs: These inputs may be used with
any video source device equipped with
analog Y/Pr/Pb component video outputs. These jacks are permanently linked
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
· Component Video Monitor
Outputs: If you are not using the
CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary
video display, connect these outputs to
the component video inputs of a video
projector or monitor. When a source connected to one of the Component Video
Inputs ‡° is selected, the signal will
be sent to these jacks.
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of connecting an auxiliary display only. Onscreen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with CVPD50.
a Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
Composite Video Input: Connect the
composite video output of a video device
that you would like to have available for
picture-in-picture (PIP) viewing using the
JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen. When
the PIP function is activated, the signal
fed to this jack will appear within a small
field over the main program visible on
the plasma screen. Except for the DVI/
Computer source, the PIP view may also
be available as a split screen. Use the
Screen menu system to configure the PIP
view. When the main source is HD component video (480p or better), the PIP
function is not available.
The PIP source must be able to output
composite video simultaneously with
its main method of connection to the
CVR700. If the PIP device is connected
via its composite video output to a source
input on the CVR700, a Y-Cable will be
required to connect to both the main
source input jack and the PIP input.
b Coaxial Digital Audio Output:
Connect this jack to the coaxial digital
input of a DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, CDR/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible
digital recorder.
c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio
Input: Connect the coax digital output
from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the
S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer
sound card playing audio files or streams,
LD player or CD player to this jack. The
signal may be a Dolby Digital signal, DTS
signal or a standard PCM digital source.
Do not connect the RF digital output of
an LD player to this jack. This input is
permanently assigned to the Auxiliary
source input.
d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the DVI/Computer source input.
f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Digital Recorder source input.
g Optical Digital Audio Output:
Connect this jack to the optical digital
input connector on a DVD+R/RW, DVDR/RW, CD-R/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible digital recorder.
h Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio
Inputs: Connect the optical digital output
from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the
S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer
sound card playing audio files or streams,
LD player or CD player to these jacks.
The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal,
a DTS signal or standard PCM digital
source. This input is permanently
assigned to the Auxiliary source input.
i Cable/Satellite Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 23
49
48
47 45
46 44
to this jack. The signal may be35a Dolby
37 39
Digital signal, DTS signal or a34standard
36 38
33 26the
PCM digital source. Do not connect
25
32 to27this
24
RF digital output of an LD player
28 23
jack. This input is permanently31assigned
30 29 22
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
29
28
43
42
41
40
37
36
35
34
30 21 33
31 20 32
j Digital Recorder Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical
digital
49 47
45 43
audio output from a DVD player,
48 HDTV
46 44 42
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of35a compati37 39 41
34 audio
36 38 40
ble computer sound card playing
33 player
26 25 37
files or streams, LD player or CD
27 24 36
to this jack. The signal may be32a Dolby
31 28 23 35
Digital signal, DTS signal or a30
standard22
29
34
PCM digital source. Do not connect
29 30the
21 33
28 to31this
RF digital output of an LD player
20 32
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Digital Recorder source input.
49
48
47 45
46 44
43
42
35 37 39 41
34 36 38 40
33 26 25 37
32
49 27
47 24
45 36
43
31
48 28
46 23
44 35
42
30 29 22 34
35 37 39 41
29 30 21 33
34 36 38 40
28 31 20 32
33 26 25 37
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
30 29 22 34
29 30 21 33
28 31 20 32
49
48
47 45
46 44
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
k DVI/Computer Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital
signal, DTS signal or a standard
37 41 47 51
PCM
digital
Do not connect the
46 source.
36 40
50
RF
35 digital
39 45output
49 of an LD player to this
34 38
48 is permanently assigned
jack.
This44input
43
33the DVI/Computer
to
source input.
32
47 51
37 41 42
31
Connect the supplied
46 50
36 FM
40 Antenna:
35 39or 45
49
indoor
an optional
external FM antenna
44 48
34this
38terminal
to
43
33
32 AM 42
Antenna Terminal: Connect
31 AM loop antenna supplied with the
the
receiver to these terminals. If an external AM antenna is used, make connections to the AM and GND terminals in
accordance with the instructions supplied with the antenna.
damage to the device or to the CVR700,
which
not be covered under the
47 51
37 41would
36 40 46 50
warranty.
35 39 45 49
34 Port
for 48
Factory Use Only: This
38 44
43is used only by factory-author33
connector
42 personnel. Do not connect
32 service
ized
31
any control devices to this port, or
attempt to connect it to any other device.
Doing so may cause serious damage to
the device or to the CVR700, which would
41 covered
37 be
47 51 under warranty.
not
36 40 46 5043 45 47 49 51 53 55 57
50 52 54 56
35 DVI
39 45
4942 44 46 48 Video
(HDCP)/Computer
39 41
34 38 Connect
44 4835the37compatible
Input:
DVI video
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
33
43
output of a computer,
HDTV
tuner
46 50
36 or
40 DVD
33 26 25
37
32
42
35 39
player to this input.
input
can
also45 49
32 27This
36
24
31
31 the
44 48
34of38
23 35
28 VGA
be connected to
output
a con30 29 22 34
43
33
ventional PC (cable
for
connection
to
a
29 30 21 33
42
32
VGA output PC28is included
31 20 32with31the
CVPD50). Be sure to select the appropriate device from the SCREEN MENU. You
must select the 1DVI input
2
3first 4by pressing
5
6
d
the DVI Input Selector
7
8
9
10 on
11 the12
remote control or
Selector
13 the14Source
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22before
23 you
24
& on the CVR700
front
panel
25
26 input
27 via
28 the
29
30
can configure your
DVI
32 note
33 that
34 due
35 to36
SCREEN MENU.31Please
37
38
39
40
41
42
newness of HDCP
technology,
all HDCP43
44
46
47
48
encoded DVI outputs
may45not be
compatible with the CVR700. We recommend
that you test the compatibility of an
HDCP DVI source with your CVR700
before purchasing that source unit. In certain problematic connections, switching
to a top-quality DVI cable that is as short
as possible will help improve connection
consistency. This input is assigned to the
DVI/Computer source input.
NOTE: If using indoor antennas, please
mount them as far away from CVR700
and CVPD50 as possible, and empirically
position them for the least amount of
possible
interference
from the many
51
37 41 47
46 50
36 40 processors
digital
inside the CVR700
35 CVPD50.
39 45 49
and
34 38 44 48
43 to JBL
33 Output
Cinema Vision
42
32
CVPD50
Screen: Connect this output to
31 JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen
the
using the cable supplied with the screen.
When the CVR700 is used with the JBL
Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen, no other
video monitor connections need to be
made. Do not connect this output to any
other device. Doing so may cause serious
23
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 24
CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
24
0 Power Off (All)
1 Power On (All)
2 LCD Information Display
3 Input Selectors
4 Screen Selector
5 System Selector
6 Surround Mode Selector
7 Test Tone Button
8 Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset Button
9 SPL Select Button
A Audio Input Selector
B Direct/Brightness/Window Button
C Tone Mode/Color/List Button
D OSD/Contrast Button
E Angle/Tuning Mode Button
F Level/Guide Button
G ⁄/¤/‹/› Navigation Disc
H Exit/Cancel Button
I Set Button
J Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip
Button
K Volume Up/Down Control
L Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button
M Record/Stop/Pause Transport
Controls
N Status/Settings/Button
O Title/Freeze Button
P Random/Letterbox Button
Q Repeat/Frame Button
R A-B/Auto Button
S Program/PVR Replay Button
T Disc Skip/PVR List Button
U Audio/Screen Saver Button
V Subtitle/TV/Video Button
W Light Button
X Macro/A/B/C Buttons
Y Sleep/PIP Move Button
Z Night Mode/PIP Channel Down
Button
a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button
b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up
Button
c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap
Button
d JBL On Screen Library™/Favorite
Button
e Play Transport Control Button
f Tuning Up/Forward Search Button
g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down
Control
h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip Button
i Last Channel/Distance Button
j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info Button
k Zoom/Memory Button
l Alphanumeric Keys
m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset Button
n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast Preset
Button
54
a
b
55
53
c
d
e
f
g
i
h
52
j
50
l
48
51
49
k
m
o
n
p
47
46
q
r
45
s
t
u
44
43
v
42
w
y
x
z
`
29
31
33
28
30
32
o DTS Digital Surround Mode Button
p Dolby Surround Mode Button
q Mute Button
40
41
39
38
36
34
r EzSet Microphone Sensor
s IR Transmitter/Receiver
37
35
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 25
CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
NOTE:
The
43 IMPORTANT
45 47
47 49
49 5151
53 55
55
57JBL Cinema
43
45
53
57
4242 Vision
4444 4646remotes
4848 5050are
5252powerful
5454 5656 devices
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
43
42
1
35
7
34
13
33
19
32
25
31
30
31
29
37
28
43
35 capable
37 39
39 41
41 controlling virtually your entire
35
37
of
41 47
51
47 51
37 41
3434 home
3636 3838cinema
4040 37
system.
In comparison
to a
46 5050
36 4040 46
33 26
33
26 25
37 36
25 37
45 47 traditional
49
51 53 system
5535 57 of the
same
capabili45
39
49
35
45
32 27
39
49
32
27 24
36
36
24
44 4346
48 47 50
52 remotes
54
5356
55can
57replace
these
up to 10
3145ties,
44
34
31
34
44
3838
4848
234935
28 23
35 51
28
37 4230
39
4129
3044separate
46
48
50
52 controls
5443
56 and therefore
43
33
33
22 34
34
29 22
remote
41 32
37
36 3538
29293740
32 51 42
21
3921
4133
30
33 47
30
end
the
confusion
and42clutter associated
36 32
40 3746
28283637
263425
4150 47 51
31
31
20
31
31
3820
40 32
45
35
with
having
a
different
remote for each
39
49
273324 2636 25 37
36 40 46 50
34 system
38 3544 39
48 45 49
283223 27of
35 24
your
components.
36
43 45 In
47 order
49 to
51 53
43 38 44 48
293122 2834 23 33
35 this34goal,
achieve
the
JBL
42
44Cinema
46 48Vision
50 52
1 33 2 2 32 3 3
44
55
66
42
3030211 29
43
33
22 34
37 39 41
remotes
are designed3512to12 assume
the
312920730
7 32 21
8 8 31
339 9 321010 111142 34
3653 3855 4057 37 41
43
45
47
49
51
duties
of
controlling
different
devices
28 31
1313 20
1414 321515 31
1616 1717 33
1818
2554 3756 36 40
46 48by first
50 2652
within 42
your44system
pressing
one
45 47
55 23
57
23 32
35 39
1919 492020 51212153 2222
2424 27 24 36
35 37 39 41
102727Selector
442 46
54
56
31
34 38
3 48the
552 2828
6 29
29 Buttons
23 35
2525of
26264 50
3030 28 dfg
34 36 38 40 3037 41 47 51
33
22
378 1 39
29
34
one
of
these
2 323210 333
3131 9 41
333311 4 343412.5 Pressing
3535 6 3636
46
36
40
50
26 25 37 29
37 3941 40
47 51
30 21 33
36 38
40
39
45 49
35 39
places
control
in a32
11 4141
12 4242
147 3737buttons
15 8 383816 932
17 10
18your
2740 24
36remote
31
40 46 50 28 31 20 32
26 2543 37 44 36
31
34 38 44 48
23
4747
35 4848
2013 43 different
2114 44 2215 4545
2328
2417 where
16 4646
35 “page”,
45
49 18 the remote but27 24 36
30 39
43
33
22
29
34
2720
2922 44
3023 48
21
24
are
control
functions
avail34 assigned
28261923 tons
35 28
29 38
42
32
30 21 33
33
43
3326
3528 specific
3629
27
30
29322522 able
34 34
for
For3 exam28that
31 20 32 purpose.
131
2
4
5
30383121 3932
33 4033
4134 42
4235
ple,
all32internal
DVD 36changer
functions
7
8
9
10
11
3144 20 4532 46 31 47
48
37
43
1
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
38
39
40
42
are
accessed
by41pressing
the14 DVD
13
15
16
17
44
45
46
47
48
Button d
and
1
2 first,
3
4 all
520CVPD50
621
19
22
23
Plasma
Display
7
8 functions
9
10 are
11
12
25
26 accessed
27
28
29
3
4
5
6
by9 pressing
the
e
31
32
33
34
35
13
14 Screen
15
16 Button
17
18
10
11
12
37
38 system
39
40
41
19 all overall
20
21 audio
22 and
23
24
first,
and
15
16
17
18
43
44
45
46
47
25 for
26 the 27
28
29
30
commands
21
22
23
24 CVR700 are accessed
31
32 the
33 System
34
35 Button
36
by27 first28 pressing
f
29
30
37
38
39
40
41
42
.
Throughout
this
manual,
you
will
33
34
35
36
43
44
45
46
47
48
39 references
40
41
42 the system being active
see
to
46 SYSTEM,
47
48 SCREEN, CABLE/SAT,
in45DVD,
or other modes. This means that one of
these 10 keys is to be pressed first to
place your remote in the prescribed mode
before accessing any specific controls. It
is important to always remember to press
the appropriate page selection button
before trying to access any specific functions for a system or source. This may
take a little bit of discipline and practice
at first, but it should become second
nature in a very short time.
NOTES:
• The function names shown here are
each button’s function when used with
the CVR700 (System), its internal DVD
changer (DVD/Main) and the CVPD50
(Screen). Most buttons have additional
functions when used with other
devices, and some of these functions
may be assigned to different buttons,
depending on which device was selected. The device name will appear in the
upper line of the LCD Information
Display 2 and the function
assigned to that device will appear in
the lower line when the button is
pressed. See pages 89 through 91 for a
list of the functions assigned to each
button for each device type.
• Some buttons have special functions
when they are pressed and held for 3
seconds.
• The jack on the upper right side of the
remote is reserved for future use. Do
not remove the plug provided or connect any device to the jack.
• To make it easier to follow the instruc57
tions that refer to this illustration, a
56
larger copy may be downloaded from
the Product Support section for this
51
47
product at www.jbl.com.
46 50
3 Input Selectors: Pressing one of
these buttons will perform two actions.
The CVR700 will switch to the source
selected, and the remote will switch to
the control codes for the selected source.
In order to control the CVR700 again,
press the System Selector 5, and to
control the CVPD50 screen, press the
Screen Selector 4.
55
54
Press and hold any of these buttons to
power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and
the source device, and to begin play of
the source device.
45 49
The JBL Cinema Vision main remote
44• 48
43 control may be programmed to control
4 Screen Selector: Press this button
to select the control codes for the
CVPD50 screen.
42
6
12
18
up to eight devices, including the
CVR700 receiver with disc changer and
the CVPD50 screen. Before using the
remote, it is important to press the
Input Selector 3 that corresponds
to the device you wish to operate.
24
• The remote is capable of operating a
wide variety of products made by other
36
manufacturers using control codes that
42
are programmed into the remote’s code
48
library. As described on pages 76–78,
it is simple to program the remote to
operate your device by selecting the
device type and brand, and then programming the correct set of codes for
that brand.
30
0 Power Off (All): Press this button
to place the CVR700 (and the CVPD50) or
a selected device in the Standby mode.
Press and hold this button to place all
devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote, into the Standby mode.
1 Power On (All): Press this button
to power on the CVR700 (and CVPD50) or
another device you selected by first pressing the appropriate Input Selector 3.
Press and hold this button to power on
all devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote.
2 LCD Information Display: This
two-line screen displays various information depending on the commands that
have been entered into the remote.
Normally, the upper line will display the
current device (e.g., DVD/MAIN), and
the lower line will display the name of
the function key when pressed (e.g.,
DISC SKIP). See page 85 for information on renaming devices and keys.
5 System Selector: Press this button
to select the control codes for the CVR700.
6 DSP Surround Mode Selector: In
System mode, press this button to select
one of the DSP audio surround modes,
such as Hall 1, Hall 2 or Theater. Each
press of the button selects another mode.
See page 62 for descriptions of the various surround modes.
7 Test Tone Button: Press this button
to activate the CVR700’s test tone that is
used to calibrate speaker output levels.
See pages 50–51 for more information on
calibrating speaker output levels.
8 Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset
Button: When the System Selector
5 is active,
to select
43 press
45 47this
49button
51 53
55 57
from among42the44available
7 sur46 48 Logic
50 52
54 56
35 (See
37 39
round modes.
page4162 for descrip41 47 51
37modes.)
36 38
40
tions of the 34various
surround
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
When the Screen
Selector354
is
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
active, press31this28button
34 38 the
44 48
23 35to select
30 29
43
22 34that33were preset
CVPD50 picture
settings
29 30 21 33
32
at the factory
for optimal viewing
of42
28 31 20 32
31
sporting events.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
1
2
3 optimize
4
5 picture
6
settings for a7specific
viewing
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
The Broadcast
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16 most
17
18
21
22and 23
24
tral, balanced19 and20accurate,
are opti25
26 Movies
27
28 settings
29
30are
The
mized for clarity.
31 bright.
32
33
34
35 settings
36
softer and less
The
Sports
37
38
39
40
41
42
are more vibrant and optimized for fast43
44
45
46
47
48
moving action.
9 SPL Select Button: This button
activates the EzSet function to quickly
and accurately calibrate the speaker output levels. The EzSet remote also has a
manual SPL meter function to assist with
manual setting of the output levels, or
trimming the settings to an external
source. See page 51 for more information
on EzSet.
25
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 26
A Audio Input Selector: Press this
button to select one of the digital audio
inputs 9)cdefhijk for
use with its source or to select the analog
audio input for that source. It is not possible to reassign a digital audio input to
another source. See page 60 for more
information on using digital inputs.
B Direct/Brightness/Window
Button:
49
51 Press
53 55this57button when the tuner
50 to
52directly
54 56 enter a station’s freis48in use
39 quency,
41
or when a CD is in use to directly
41 47 51
38 40
enter a37track
number. After pressing this
36 40 46 50
25 37
button,
press
the 49
appropriate Alpha35 39 45
24 36
34 Keys
38 44 l
48 to select a station
23 numeric
35
43
33
22 or34track.
43
42
45 47
44 46
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37
36
26
27
28
29
32
30 21 33
the
31
31 20 When
32
1
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
42
Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the brightness of
the CVPD50. Use the ‹/› Navigation
3
4
5
6
Controls
q
to increase or decrease
9 brightness
10
11
12
the
setting.
15
16
17
See
page
55
for18more information on
21
22
23
24
screen adjustments. This button also
27
28
29
30
activates
the
Window
function for TiVo
33
34
35
36
players.
See
your
TiVo
owner’s manual
39
40
41
42
for
on the Window
45 more
46 information
47
48
function.
C Tone Mode/Color/List Button:
This button controls the tone settings,
enabling adjustment of the bass and treble boost or cut. You may also use it to
disable the tone controls, for a “flat”
response. The first press of the button
displays a TONE IN message in the
Lower Display Line E and on-screen
display. To disable the controls, press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G until
the display reads TONE OUT. To
change the bass or treble settings, press
this button again until the desired control
appears in the Lower Display Line E
and in the on-screen display, and then
press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls
G until the desired setting appears.
When the Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the color temperature of the CVPD50 display. See page 55
for more information on screen adjustments. This button also activates the List
function for TiVo players. See your TiVo
owner’s manual for more information on
the List function.
26
D OSD/Contrast Button: Press this
button when the System mode is active
to access the setup menu for the
CVR700’s audio functions. When the
Screen mode is active, press this button
to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 display. See page 55 for more information on
screen adjustments.
E 43
Angle/Tuning
Mode
Button: When
454347454947 51
49 535155535755 57
the DVD
mode
is
active,
press
this
42 4442 4644 4846 50
48 5250 5452
5654button
56
so select
alternate
camera angle, if
35 37an
3539
374139 41
413747415147 51
34 36on
34 38
36 40
38 37
40 DVD.
available
the
current
33
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
263325263725 36
37 403646405046 50
When
tuner
is24in 35
use,
354539this
4945 but49
32 the
2732
36 39press
242736
34
383444
384844 48
28312328
3523
35 scan
ton to31change
the
tuner
mode
30 293022293422 33
43
3343
between
manual and 34
automatic.
When
29 302921303321 32
42
3242
33
TUNE
the button
is
pressed
so
that
28 312820313220 31
31
32
AUTO
the
Lower
45
43474549appears
47 51
49 53in
5155
5357
55 57 Display
44
42 4644
4846only
50
48stations
5250 5452with
5654 acceptable
56
E,
Line
37
353937quality
4139 41will be tuned when scansignal
1
21
32
43
54
65
6
3634 3836 4038 37
40 413747415147 51
ning,
and
the
will
play
7
8736tuner
9 83646
1040
9 50
1110 FM
1211 stations
12
46
40
50
33
26 25263725 37
in32stereo,
available.
In 49
the
35
133624when
14
13
15
1435451639
15 4945
1716
1817 Auto
18
27
36 39
2427
312328
34442238
44
28
3523 201934
35
Tuning
mode,
the38
19when
2120
21 48Up/Down
2322 482423
24
3022293422 33
3343
43
29
25 8Lf
26
2534 2726
2827
2928 are
3029 pressed
30
Buttons
3242
42
302921303321 32
33
31
32
31
33
32
34
33
3534
35 575536 57
and
held,
the
unit
will
automatically
47
47 51
49 53
515536
53
31282043
313245
32454931
204331
38
374644
39
3846available
40
39
4140
42
41565442with
4237for
4442
48
50
48 52
50 54
52
56
search
the
next
station
43 3735
44
43393745
4439 4645
4847
48
41
41 4746 the
Tuning
good35signal
strength.
When
34 3634 3836 4038 37
40 413747415147 51
so that
Mode
21 33 Button
32 334 3 o
5 4 is6 5pressed
6
26 25263725 36
37 403646405046 50
TUNE
appears
35
3545in
39the
4945 49
87 32 9 8 MANUAL
9 2736
111024 12
11 3912
27321024
36
31 Display
31 2835
34
3444384844and
48
35
Lower
E,38pressing
14
13
151428 1623
15
17Line
1623 18
17
18
30 293022293422 33
43
3343
34
Tuning
Buttons
holding
the
20
19
2120
22
21
2322 Up/Down
2423
24
29 302921303321 32
42
3242
33
26
25 28 2726 282827
2928
3029 cause
30 the tuner to
8Lf
31
31
31 20313220will
32
32
31 up
3332or down
3433
3534
3635
36 frequencies
scan
through
the
38
37 stop
3938 when
4039 the
4140 button
4241
and
is42 released,
44
43
44
4645
4746
4847
48
even
if145that
21frequency
32
4 3does
5 4 not6 5provide
6
an acceptable
TUNE
7
87 signal.
98
10In
9 either
1110
12
11
12
AUTO
TUNE
13 or 14
13
1514 MANUAL
1615
1716
1817 mode,
18
each tap
the Tuning
19 of20
19
2120
2221 Up/Down
2322
2423
24
25 8Lf
26
25
2726
2827
2928 will
3029 cause
30 the
Buttons
31 step
32
31 through
3332
3433
34
3635
36 in
tuner to
the 35frequencies
37
38
37
3938
4039
4140
4241
42
single-step
increments.
43
44
43
4544
4645
4746
4847
48
When the FM band is in use, pressing the
button so that the TUNE MANUAL
mode is activated will enable you to tune
stations with weak signals by changing
to monaural reception. See page 64 for
more information on tuner operation.
F Level/Guide Button: This button is
used to start the process of setting the
CVR700’s output levels to an external
source, such as a favorite DVD. While
the source is playing, press this button,
and then press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls G until the channel to adjust
appears. Press the Set Button I to
select that channel, and then use the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G again
to adjust the level setting. See page 64
for more information.
G ⁄/¤/‹/› Navigation Disc:
This single disc-like button is used to navigate the on-screen configuration menus,
to scroll through options lists and to
select various settings such as delay,
speaker configurations, surround modes,
digital inputs, etc. To use the button, simply press it left, right, up or down in the
direction indicated by the ⁄/¤/‹/›
icons printed on the disc.
H Exit/Cancel Button: When programming the remote, press this button
to cancel the current function and return
to the previous remote function. When
using the remote to enter frequencies for
direct tuner access or track numbers for
direct access on a CD, press this button
to clear previous entries.
I Set Button: This button is used to
enter settings into the CVR700’s memory,
or to confirm a selection while setting
delay distances, speaker configuration
and output level adjustments. It is used
as the Enter or OK button for most other
devices.
J Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip
Button: This multipurpose button has a
different function depending on the
source in use.
When used with the tuner, this button
scrolls through the preprogrammed station presets.
When used with optical sources, such as
the internal disc changer or an external
CD player, press this button once to
return to the beginning of the current
track, and again quickly to go to the
beginning of the previous track.
The Page Down function is used with
cable and satellite television to page
quickly through on-screen menus.
When a disc containing JPEG still images
is being played using the internal changer,
press this button to scroll to the previous
image.
K Volume Up/Down Controls: To
raise the volume, press towards the top
of the disc, where it is marked ⁄ Vol,
and to lower the volume, press towards
the bottom of the disc, where it is marked
¤ Vol. The left and right arrows on this
disc have different functions, depending
on the source in use. See Channel/Slow
Play Up/Down Control g below for
more information.
L Tuning Down/Reverse Search
Button: This button has different functions depending on whether the tuner or
another source is in use.
Press this button when the tuner is in use
to change the station to one with a lower
frequency. Each tap of this button will
decrease the frequency by one increment.
When the tuner receives a strong enough
signal for adequate reception, MANUAL
TUNED will appear in the Lower
Display Line E. When the tuner is in
the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold the
button to cause the tuner to scan for the
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 27
next lower station with acceptable signal
strength and stop. The Lower Display
Line E will indicate AUTO TUNED.
When an FM Stereo station is tuned, the
display will read AUTO ST TUNED.
When the tuner is in Manual/Mono mode,
you may press and hold this button to
scan downward through the frequencies,
and the tuner will stop immediately
when you release this button, even if no
acceptable signal is detected at that
frequency.
See page 64 for more information on
using the tuner.
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly in reverse
through the current track or chapter.
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s transport controls.
M Record/Stop/Pause Transport
Controls: These buttons have no function in the System or Screen modes, but
are used with sources such as the internal disc changer or external DVD or CD
players, tape or digital recorders or VCRs.
When the internal disc changer is in use,
pressing the Stop button once will place
a DVD in resume mode, meaning that you
may press the Play Button e to continue playing the disc from the point
where it was stopped. If you press the
Stop button twice, play will resume from
the beginning of the disc. Pressing the
Pause Button w will pause play,
allowing you to step frame by frame forward through a DVD with each additional
press of the Pause Button w. Press
the Play Button e, to resume normal
play, or press the Stop Button w to
stop.
N Status/Settings Button: This button has different functions, depending on
which device is in use.
Press it to display the CVR700 system’s
status, or an external DVD recorder’s
status.
When the internal disc changer or tuner,
or an external cable television box is in
use, press this button to access the current settings for the device.
For digital VCRs and game consoles, this
button performs the Back function. For
some PVRs/DVRs this button performs
the Instant Replay function.
O Title/Freeze Button: This button’s
function differs, depending on whether
the internal disc changer (DVD/Main
mode) or the Screen mode is active. To
use this button, be careful to press only
on the upper portion of the button, as
other functions are accessed by pressing
on the lower portion of the button.
In DVD/Main mode, press this button
while a disc is playing to display the current title number. Press it again to jump
to the next numbered title on the disc.
This function may be available even
when the disc’s software prohibits titlejumping using the Forward/Reverse
Skip Buttons Jh. Many DVD-Audio
discs require you to press this button to
access the disc menu.
In Screen mode, you may use this button
to pause playback of the video picture
while allowing the audio playback to continue uninterrupted, enabling you to capture an instance or frame of the video.
P Random/Letterbox Button: This
button’s function differs, depending on
whether the internal disc changer
(DVD/Main mode) or the Screen mode is
active. To use this button, be careful to
press only on the upper portion of the
button, as other functions are accessed
by pressing on the lower portion of the
button.
In DVD/Main mode, press this button for
playback in random order. The Random
function is not available when playing
DVD-Audio or DVD-Video discs unless a
playlist has been programmed, and it is
not available at all for JPEG discs.
In Screen mode, when using the internal
DVD changer, this button is only active if
the Auto Resize feature is turned off via
the SCREEN MENU (see page 57). This
button performs the Letterbox function,
which enables you to adjust the screen to
eliminate black bars that may appear on
the top and bottom or sides of the image
due to the aspect ratio of the program
material differing from the 16:9 aspect
ratio of the CVPD50. In most cases, the
CVR700’s video processor is able to automatically detect the aspect ratio setting
of the program material and adjust the
display automatically to fill the screen.
However, in some cases the material may
be a movie displayed in widescreen
(2.35:1) format, or the material may not
contain embedded information necessary
for the CVR700 to make an automatic
adjustment. The available letterbox
modes are:
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50. This setting will
also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to
a 4:3 picture.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any
portion of the image. The image is simply
enlarged so that its two sides fit the
edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and the
black bars on top and bottom are cropped
off. The image is stretched in a linear
fashion (evenly throughout the frame).
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
compressed in a nonlinear fashion, but no
portion of the image is lost.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not compressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image proportions.
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry and there is still a
considerable amount of older 4:3 standard recording and broadcast equipment
in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broadcast in HD 16:9 format with black or
other color bars on its sides. Since these
bars are a part of the actual picture, conventional picture resizing techniques do
not work in eliminating them. This setting
is specifically designed to address this
problem. It first crops the bars off the
sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3
picture, and then performs a natural-looking nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
screen.
27
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 28
The Letterbox adjustment is temporary
and will only apply to that disc. We
encourage you to experiment with the
modes to find one that suits you for a
given presentation.
Additional aspect ratio adjustments are
available using the Frame Button Q.
Q Repeat/Frame Button: This button’s function differs depending on
whether the internal disc changer (DVD/
Main mode) or the Screen mode is active.
To use this button, be careful to press
only on the lower portion of the button,
as other functions are accessed by pressing on the upper portion of the button.
In DVD mode, pressing this buttons
accesses the Repeat functions. You may
repeat a chapter, track, title, disc, file or
programmed playlist. For JPEG discs, you
may repeat one file or one folder, but the
repeat disc function is not available.
In Screen mode, when using the internal
DVD changer, this button is only active if
the Auto Resize feature is turned off via
the SCREEN MENU. This button performs
the Frame function, which enables you to
set the desired aspect ratio for viewing
program materials, independent of the
aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The
following settings are available:
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50.
4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3
aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s
6:9 screen while creating a more naturallooking picture. This is accomplished by
stretching the two sides of the picture
more than the center of the picture where
most of the content is.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing
any portion of the image. The image is
simply enlarged so that its two sides fit
the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and
the black bars on top and bottom are
cropped off.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
28
compressed, but no portion of the image
is lost.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not compressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image proportions.
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry, and there is still
a lot of older 4:3 standard recording and
broadcast equipment in use, 4:3 material
is sometimes broadcast in HD 16:9 format with black or other color bars on its
sides. Since these bars are a part of the
actual picture, conventional picture resizing techniques do not work in eliminating
them. This setting is specifically designed
to address this problem. It first crops the
bars off of the sides of the 16:9 picture to
render it a 4:3 picture, and then performs
a natural-looking nonlinear stretch to fill
the entire 16:9 screen.
4:3 – This mode may be used with programs that are known to be in the 4:3
aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect
ratio is preserved unaltered, and black
bars will appear on the left and right
sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s
16:9 aspect ratio screen.
The difference between the Frame and
Letterbox functions is that the Frame
function allows access to the 4:3 and
4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly
useful for materials originating in the
4:3 format.
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame functions are not available with the internal
DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto
Resize function has been turned off using
the screen setup menus. See page 57 for
more information.
R A-B/Auto Button: This button’s
function differs depending on whether
the internal disc changer (DVD/Main
mode) or the Screen mode is active. To
use this button, be careful to press only
on the lower portion of the button, as
other functions are accessed by pressing
on the upper portion of the button.
In the DVD mode, press this button once
to select the beginning (point A), and
again to select the end (point B) of a passage you wish to play repeatedly. Press
the button again to end repeat playback.
A-B repeat play is not available for VCD,
MP3, WMA or JPEG discs.
In the Screen mode, this button selects
automatic detection of the aspect ratio of
program material from external sources,
with playback in the 16:9 format. It will
display 4:3 images stretched to fill the
16:9 screen. This function is not available
with HD (480p or better) signals. If the
4:3 image is in letterbox format, with
bars at the top and bottom of the screen,
those bars will remain. See pages 13 and
27 for more information on configuring
aspect ratios.
S Program/PVR Replay Button: In
the DVD/Main mode, press this button
to access the screen for programming
playlists. When a PVR (personal video
recorder) is in use, press this button for
replay of recorded materials. Refer to
your PVR’s owner’s manual for more
information.
T Disc Skip/PVR List Button: In the
DVD/Main mode, press this button to
begin play of the next available disc in
the changer. When a PVR is in use, press
this button to list recorded materials.
Refer to your PVR’s owner’s manual for
more information.
U Audio/Screen Saver Button: This
button has different functions depending
on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main
mode or Screen mode.
In DVD/Main mode, pressing this button
accesses the available audio soundtracks
on a DVD. In some cases, the disc may
simply contain different languages. Other
discs may switch the audio format: e.g.,
to linear PCM or Dolby Digital 5.1.
Pressing this button may sometimes provide access to commentary soundtracks.
In Screen mode, pressing this button
places the CVPD50 display in Screen
Saver mode, in which a JBL logo will
appear to move around the screen. It is
important to turn on the Screen Saver
any time a still image is likely to remain
on screen for more than a few minutes,
because a still image, such as a menu
display, may be “burned” into the display,
causing permanent damage to the plasma
screen that is not covered under warranty.
This danger is not present when a moving
image is displayed.
V Subtitle/TV/Video Button: This
button has different functions depending
on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main
mode or Screen mode.
In DVD/Main mode, press this button to
select a subtitle language or to turn subtitling off.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 29
In Screen mode, or when used with a
video source device that is used for obtaining television broadcasts, such as a
cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR,
DVR or VCR, this button allows you to
select between the television signal or
one of the device’s video inputs. See the
device’s owner’s manual for more information on the use of this function.
Z Night Mode/PIP Channel Down
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on the device in use when
it is pressed.
W Light Button: Press this button to
activate the remote’s backlight for ease
of use in darkened rooms. The light will
remain active for 7 seconds after this button has been pressed, and will remain lit
for an additional 7 seconds after any
other button on the remote has been
pressed.
When used with a compatible device
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a, it changes the channel
of the PIP device to the next lower one. It
has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.
X Macro/A/B/C Buttons: Press these
buttons to store or recall a “Macro”, a
sequence of commands that you may program into the remote. See page 80 for
more information on programming and
using macros. These buttons have unique
functions when used with game consoles, cable TV boxes and PVRs. See the
owner’s manual for the appropriate
device for further information.
Y Sleep/PIP Move Button: This button has different functions depending on
which device is in use when it is pressed.
In the System mode, the Sleep function
is activated to automatically place the
CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode
after a period of time. Each press of the
button changes the time until turn-off: 90
minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 minutes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,
20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,
and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and
so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,
the front-panel displays will dim to half
brightness.
In the Screen mode, this button places
the CVPD50 display in Standby mode,
without affecting use of the CVR700. This
function may be preferred for audio-only
listening sessions to prevent burning the
plasma display.
When a composite video output from a
PIP-capable device, such as a cable box,
has been connected to the Picture-inPicture Composite Video Input a,
pressing this button enables you to move
the PIP inset display around the CVPD50
screen, using the ⁄/¤/‹/ ›
Navigation Disc q.
When pressed in the System mode, this
button activates the Night mode, preserving dialogue (center-channel) intelligibility
at low volume levels when available in
specially encoded Dolby Digital sources.
a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button: This
button’s function differs depending on
which device is in use when it is pressed.
In DVD/Main mode, press it, and then
press the numeric key corresponding to
the position number of the disc you wish
to play to immediately begin playback of
that disc.
When a PVR is in use, this button switches
to play of the signal currently being
received by the PVR. See the PVR’s
owner’s manual for more information.
b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on whether it is pressed when
a picture-in-picture source is in use.
In System mode, this button accesses
the menu system for the remote control,
enabling you to program product codes,
use the EzSet speaker calibration system,
record macros, rename functions, and
perform other functions, as described
on pages 76 through 91.
When used with a compatible device
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a, pressing this button
changes the channel of the PIP device to
the next higher one. It has no effect on
the CVR700 or CVPD50.
c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on whether it is used with the
internal DVD changer, or with a source
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a.
When used with the DVD changer, this
button accesses the DVD setup menu
and enables you to configure the DVD
changer.
When used in Screen mode with a PIP
source connected, press this button once
to turn on the PIP function, and again to
turn it off. Pressing and holding this button for several seconds causes the main
source to appear in the PIP inset display,
and the PIP source to appear in the main
display. Pressing and holding the button
again returns the PIP source to the inset,
and the main source to the main display.
d JBL On Screen Library™/ Favorite
Button: This button performs different
functions depending on whether it is
used with the internal DVD changer or
another source.
In DVD/Main mode, this button accesses
the JBL On Screen Library, which displays
on screen a thumbnail image and description of each disc currently loaded in the
CVR700’s internal changer, including disc
type and title if available. Use the
⁄/¤/‹/› Navigation Controls G
and the Set Button I to conveniently
select and play any loaded disc.
When used with cable television boxes or
satellite receivers, pressing this button
scrolls through your list of preprogrammed favorite channels.
e Play Transport Control Button:
This button is used with the internal DVD
changer or an external DVD player, VCR,
tape deck, digital recorder, CD player or
any other device with a transport mechanism to begin playback.
f Tuning Up/Forward Search
Button: This button has different functions depending on whether the tuner or
another source is in use.
Press this button when the tuner is in use
to change the station to one with a higher
frequency. Each tap of this button will
increase the frequency by one increment.
When the tuner receives a strong enough
signal for adequate reception, MANUAL
TUNED will appear in the Lower
Display Line E. When the tuner is in
the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold
the button to cause the tuner to scan for
the next higher station with acceptable
signal strength and stop. The Lower
Display Line E will indicate AUTO
TUNED. When an FM Stereo station is
tuned, the display will read AUTO ST
TUNED. When the tuner is in Manual/
Mono mode, you may press and hold this
button to scan upward through the frequencies, and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button, even
if no acceptable signal is detected at that
frequency. See page 64 for more information on using the tuner.
29
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 30
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly forward
through the current track or chapter.
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
When used with optical sources, such as
the internal disc changer or an external
CD player, press this button once to skip
to the beginning of the next track.
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
i Distance/Last Channel Button:
This button’s function differs depending
on whether it is used in the System mode
or with another source.
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s transport controls.
g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down
Control: These controls use the ‹/›
icons on the same disc as the Volume
Up/Down Controls K. The left and
right arrows have different functions,
depending on the source in use.
When a disc containing JPEG still images
is being played using an external disc
player, press the right side of this button
to advance to the next image on the disc
or the left side of this button to return to
the previous image. (When using the
internal changer, the Page Up/Down
Buttons Jh perform this function.)
When a cable television box, satellite
receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVO device is in
use, press the right side of this button to
tune in to the next higher channel, or the
left side to tune in to the next lower
channel.
When the internal DVD changer or an
external DVD player is in use and a DVD
is playing, press the right side of this button once to switch to the DVD slow forward play mode. Each additional press
of the right side of the button will cycle
through the available slow-play speeds of
1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing the left side
of the button switches to the DVD slow
reverse play mode. Additional presses of
the left side of the button cycles through
the available slow-play speeds of 1/2x,
1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-play speeds are
available for CDs or other disc types.
h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip
Button: This multipurpose button has
a different function depending on the
source in use.
When used with the tuner, this button
scrolls through the preprogrammed station presets.
30
The Page Up function is used with cable
and satellite television to page quickly
through on-screen menus. When a disc
containing JPEG still images is being
played using the internal changer, press
this button to scroll to the next image.
In the System mode, this button is used
to enter the distance from each speaker
group to the listening position to avoid
unnatural sound caused by the speakers
being placed at varying distances from
the listener, which could result in delay
artifacts. When this button is pressed,
DIST FRONT 10FT will appear
in the Lower Display Line E, with
FRONT and 10FT both flashing.
Press the Set Button s to select
the front speaker group, and FRONT
will stop flashing. Use the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls q to select the
desired distance, and press the Set
Button s again to enter it. Use the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q to
scroll through the remaining speaker
groups: CENTER, SIDE-S (side
surround) or BACK-S (back surround –
this setting may only be available after a
6.1-channel bitstream has been detected;
for example, by playing a Dolby Digital
EX DVD).
When used with most video sources, this
button returns to the previously selected
broadcast channel.
j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info
Button: This button is used in Screen
mode to access the setup menus to configure and adjust the CVPD50 display
screen. In DVD mode, this button accesses the menu on the current disc, enabling
you to select the main feature or accompanying featurettes for playback or make
other selections, depending on how the
disc is programmed.
k Memory/Zoom Button: When used
with the tuner, press this button to enter
the currently tuned radio station into a
desired preset location using the
Alphanumeric Keys l to select the
preset location between the numbers 01
and 30. Press this button a second time
to store your selection. To recall that station later, select the tuner as the source,
then either use the Preset Up/Down
Buttons Jh to scroll to the desired
preset station, or use the Alphanumeric
Keys l to directly enter the preset station location.
In DVD/Main mode, this button may be
used while a DVD-Video disc is playing to
zoom the picture so that it is enlarged.
There are four steps to the zoom function,
each progressively larger. Continue pressing the button to cycle through the steps
and return to the normal view. Depending
on the disc, you may also be able to use
the ⁄/¤/‹/› Navigation Controls
G to view different areas of the
enlarged image.
l Alphanumeric Keys: Select numbers by pressing these keys. When
renaming functions or devices on the
remote, these keys may be used to
select letters.
m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset
Button: This button’s function varies
depending on whether the System or
Screen mode has been selected.
In System mode, this button is used to
select a stereo listening mode. When the
button is pressed so that 2 CHANNEL
STEREO appears in the Lower
Display Line E and on-screen display,
and the DSP and Surround Off
Surround Mode Indicators G are lit,
you will enjoy a two-channel presentation of the sound along with the benefits
of bass management. Depending on
whether your system is configured for 5.1
or 6.1/7.1 channels, the next press of the
button will cause 5 CH STEREO and
then 7 CH STEREO to appear, and
the stereo signal will be routed to all five
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
(or seven) speakers.
See page
62 for
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
more information
on
stereo
playback
35 37 39 41
modes. 34 36 38 40 37 41 47 51
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
In the Screen
mode, pressing35this
button
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
automatically
the
screen’s
31 adjusts
44 48
34
38 picture
28 23 35
43
33
settings to 30
preprogrammed
settings
that
29 22 34
29 30 21 33
42
32
are recommended
as
optimal
for
viewing
28 31 20 32
31
movies.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
optimize
Buttons imn
1
2
3
4
5 picture
6
settings for a7 specific
viewing
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
The Broadcast
most
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
21
22and23are opti24
tral, balanced19 and20accurate,
25
26
27
28 settings
29
30are
The
Movies
mized for clarity.
31 bright.
32
33
34
35 settings
36
softer and less
The
Sports
37
38
39
40
41
42
are more vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast43
44
45
46
47
48
moving action.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 31
n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast
Preset Button: This button’s function
varies depending on whether the System
or Screen mode has been selected.
In System mode, this button is used to
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
select a DTS
Neo:6 audio surround
mode.
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
See page 6235for37more
information
on
the
39 41
available DTS
37 41 47 51
34 Neo:6
36 38 options.
40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
In the Screen
mode, pressing35this
button
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
picture
automatically
the
screen’s
31 adjusts
34
44 48
38
28 23 35
33
43
settings to 30
preprogrammed
settings
that
29 22 34
29 30 21 33
42
are recommended
as optimal32for viewing
28 31 20 32
31
broadcast television programs.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize
1
2
3
4
5 picture
6
settings for a7 specific
viewing
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
The Broadcast
most
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
21
22and23are opti24
tral, balanced19 and20accurate,
25
26
27
28 settings
29
30are
mized for clarity.
The
Movies
31 bright.
32
33
34
35 settings
36
softer and less
The
Sports
37
38
39
40
41
42
are more vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast43
44
45
46
47
48
moving action.
s IR Transmitter/Receiver: The
infrared emitters and receivers behind
the plastic lens at the top of the remote
communicate the remote codes to the
CVR700 and other programmed devices.
Be certain that the lens is not covered
when using the remote, and point the
lens toward the CVR700 for the best
results. In learning mode, the remote
receives IR codes to be learned through
a receiver behind the lens. See page 78
for more information on learning remote
codes.
NOTE: DO NOT remove the rubber plug
that is supplied to cover the jack on the
upper right side of the remote. The jack is
not active and is reserved for future use.
o DTS Digital Surround Mode
Button: In System mode, when a DTSencoded digital source is playing, each
press of this button will scroll through the
available DTS audio surround modes. The
specific choice of modes will vary according to the type of encoding on the disc
and your system’s speaker configuration
(5.1-channel or 6.1/7.1-channel). See
page 62 for more information on DTS
modes.
p Dolby Surround Mode Button:
In System mode, this button is used to
select from the available Dolby audio surround modes. Each press of this button
will select one of the Dolby Pro Logic II
(available in 5.1-channel systems) or IIx
(available in 6.1/7.1-channel systems)
modes, Dolby 3 Stereo, or Dolby Digital
when a Dolby Digital-encoded source is
in use. Each press of this button will
scroll through the available modes. See
page 62 for more information on Dolby
modes.
q Mute Button: Press this button to
momentarily silence the CVR700. Press
it again, or use the Volume Up/Down
Control K to restore audio.
r EzSet Microphone Sensor: The
microphone sensor that is used by the
EzSet system is behind the three slots
at the top of the remote control. When
using EzSet to calibrate the CVR700, be
certain that the slots are not covered.
See page 51 for more information
on EzSet.
31
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:23 PM
Page 32
CVR700R1 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
43
30
42
29
28
35
34
33
32
311
43
30
7
42
29
13
28
35
19
34
3325
3231
1
3137
43
307
43
42
29
13
28
35
19
34
3325
3231
43
1
3137
42
307
43
35
29
13
34
28
19
33
3225
3131
1
3037
43
297
43
28
42
13
35
19
34
25
33
1
3231
7
3137
3043
13
29
19
28
25
31
37
1
43
7
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
48 5350 5552 5754 56
43 4542 4744 4946 51
41 52 54 56
42 4435 4637 4839 50
The CVR700R1
remote is capable of performing most of the same functions as the CVR700R2 remote control, which is intended mainly
35 47373449
3936 51
4138 5340 55 3757 41 47 51
43 45
for
system
setup,
but is40smaller
and easier to handle on a day-to-day basis. The most noticeable functions missing from the CVR700R1
47 5146 50
34 46363348
3826 50
4025 5237 54413656
42 44
remote
are
the
LCD
information
screen, and the EzSet speaker calibration function.
45
35
39
49
32
27
46
36
40
50
33 3926 41
372455 57
35 4737
43 45
49 315125 53
34 4538 4944 48
23programmable,
28
35
39
32
27
36
As
it
is
a
learning
remote that is capable of controlling the source devices in your system, you will need to program it
24
34 49
38 53
40 55
42 47
44
4636 48
523757
5441 5647 51
43 45
51
3050 29
22 34 3833 44 4843
31 28
23 35
46
36 from
40
50
separately
the
CVR700R2
remote
with the codes for your other components. It is already preprogrammed at the factory to control
33
26
37
25
42 4744
46
48
50 55
52 57
54 21
56 49
35 49
37 51
39 30
41
43
45
47
51
55 57
45
53
29
32 4353 42
2230 34
45 its49
35 3933
32 27 242928
36
your
CVR700
and
internal
disc
changer,
as well as the CVPD50 screen.
41
51
47
37
34 48
36 50
38 29
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
44
52
54
56
35 4637
39
41
43 45 21
4731 33
4920 51
55 57
32 5331 42
32
31 28 2330 35
34 4638
48
36
40
5044
33 41
41
51
47
37
34 3936
3826
40
2545
4237
4435
46
48
50
52
54
56
28
37
39
41
37
43
47
49
51
53
55
57
31
31
32
20 33
30 29 22 34
45 404943 37 41 47 51
3551
39 38
32 40
46
36
40
50
27
36
33 3826
24
34
47
37
36
3541
3936
41
42
44
4637
48
50
52 57
54 56
43 25
45
47
49
51
53
2937
32 55
21 33
30
31
44 48424136 40 5146 50
34
38
45
35
23 3440
28 36
35 36
3938
49
32 2527 37
46
33
50
265240
25
26
28 36
42 24
44
46
48
50
54 37
56 4 47 5
35
37
39
41
31
31
32
20
1
2
3
30
Power
On
(All)
43
3349
22 3339
31 28 36
44 24
34 45
29 35
34
38
48
456 49
35
35
27
40
2435 23
37
3757 4136 4740 514639 50
2527
34 49
36 41
382632
40
37
39
43 45
47
51
53
55
29 22
42
32
1
2
3
4
5
30
21
6
43
33
DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/SAT
30
33
7
8
9
10
11
31
34
44
34
48
2841
3238 27 37
28 2329
3536
36
4639 504538 494412 48
362347403551
3334
24
37
2555
3449
382653
40
28
42 4744
46
48
50
52
54
56
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
4529
51
57
31
31
32
20 31732 43
3013
42
33
213233
Selectors
22 39
3450
8 2329
935
10
111633
29 2230
34
14
15
17 484318
28Input
35
4538
494412
36 4440
3348
2445
37
2527
4236
464651
48 5350
52 5742
54 56
4428
52
54
56 4921
35 4637
3926 150
41
43
47
55
29
20
32
42
32 30
4318
33
39
231
335
420
521
30 2131
622
2230
Sports,
Broadcast
and Movies
3132
29
34
44
34
1
38
48
19
23
24
13
14
15
16
17
23
45
28
35
39
49
3233 27
36
24
41
51
37
47
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
28
35
37
39
41
37
39
41
43 3145
47 49
51
5332 55
3157
29 22
31 203132 30
42
213138
33
4323
332044
Preset
Selectors
7 23
8 30
934
10
11
12
291935
34
48
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
24
28
36
46
40
50
41
51
47
3448
36 32
38 5231
40 54 37
51
47
3633 3826 402529
28414637
423744
50
35
39
41
20
2
42 56 Buttons
32
30
2131 15
4328
302514
33
335
433
633
⁄
/¤
Navigation
34
132 22
16
18
31
32
3436 4730
35 514636 50
26
29
45527
39
49 17
32 2527 1372429
40
33
46
50
3757 41
26
3440
38
40
25
26
28
3536
37
3936
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
31
31
32
29
20
32
42
33
1
2 30198321 20
434 32
5
6
Level/DVD
Setup/Guide
Button
31
7
44
9
10
11
12
45
35
38
48
39
49
21
22
23
24
37
38
39
40
41
42
45
35
23
31 3826 32
3436 35 4636 50
39
49
2733
33
27 2428
3724
25
34 49
40
283647
42
44
4636
48 53
50
5237
5441 564740 51
432 45
55
57
31
32
3
2›
3
4 45
5
30
6
492032
551
613148
33 44
43
‹1728
/36
38
83 2233
10
11
12
34
35
23Navigation
38
14
15
16
18
25
26
27
29
30
43
44
45
4634
47 494448 48
28 7 23291335
37
38
39
40
41
42
4639
2731
36
40
50 Buttons
2428
4
26
37
25
35
37
39
41
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
4529 4730 49
51
53
55
57
43
45
47
49 551
53
55
57
30
43
33
32
42
1
2
3
4
6
21
43
22
33
31
34
44
7
8
9
10
11
12
29
8
9
10
11
12
38
48
22
Set
Button
29 13
34 3231
23 41
35 39
4547
35
15 2743
162428 44
17
18
38
21
22
23
24
32
33
34
36 49 48
45
46 51
36
4735
341914
36 20
38 52
40 54
4435
4820
50
56
28 4637
42
44 4 46
48 50
54
39
41
29337
5
42 56
32484352
30723129
21 38
33
42
132 28
510
616
30 191421312520
33
8 2230
914
11
12
34
44Button
34
Exit/Cancel
13
15 50
17
18
35
15 31
16
17
18
21
2223 41
23
24
37
38
39
40
42
26
27
28
29
30
36 47
4641
40
33
51
26
37
37
25
34
36
38
40
28
37
39 32
41 30 31 43
354 21
39
41 43
3155
31 533
20 651
45
4737
49
53
32
42 57
31 20
33
30
1
2 29138322
722
935 Direct/Brightness/Window
10
11
12
34
14
15
16
18
19
20 50
21 49 17
22
23
24 Button
4547
20 3231
21 2743
23
24
39
26
27242941
28
29
30
45
46
48
32
33
34
35
36
36
46
36 47
40
51
6
3633253826
402543
2844
36
38 53
40 55
42
44
46
48
50
5237
5441 5647 51
31
313433
32
293745
20
47
49
51
57
6
32
42
21
30
7
3137732
345045
4417
823 19
935 39
10
11
12
38
Game/Digital
Recorder/Computer
14
15
16
18
20
21
22
24
25
26 49
27 48 23
28
29 4630 50
2813
35
26 27
2724
28
29
30
32
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
46
36
36
40
40
33
26 254337 45
26
37
28 4744
25
42
46
48
50
52
54
56
35
37
39
41
31
31
32
20
49
51
536 55
57
30132 29 14322 34
33
43
1
4
5
37
31
44
34
Input
Selectors
38
48
15 45
16
17
18
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
35 39
31
3224 23
33
34
35 4536 49
35 39
8
3224284338
3323 19
34
35
36 49
3241
39
40
42
44
46
47
48
27 37
36
36 41
47 51
37
3445
3827
35449
393653
41
42
44
4637
48
50
5240
54
29 3 22
4372 45
47
51
55
32
42
1 48
2 57
3 56 434
5 446
21
30
30
43
33
533
637
44
31
8
9
10
11
12
29
34
38
Mute
Button
38
48
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
23
31
32
33
34
35
36
28 43
35
23
38
39
40
41
42
28
35
38
39
40 3341
42
463826 47
48
36 4740 5146 50
4
3747
37
2844
2545
3445
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56 41
35
37
393653
31
32
20
29 47
45
49
51
43
49
51
55
42
32 55
141
231
3822
434
510
611
30
43
4312 57
33 4553
33
7 57
9Up/Down
8 223025
9 21 31
10
11
12
29 13
34
Volume
Control
14
15
16 27
17
18
36
38
39
40
41
42
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
35
43
44
45
46 50
47
49 48
3237
44
45
46
47
482429
4639
36 4740
36
3326
9
41
51
26
37
37
25
28 4637
34
36
38
40
35
39
41
44
48
50
52
54
56
42
46 510
48 53
52
29834744
20 132 43723145
49
51
5754
42
4218 56
32 55
491421
2131 15
650
30 19
33
33
11
12
3143
4448
34
132330
15 4538
17 48
Disc
Direct/Favorite
Button
14 3331
16
17
18
20 3237
21 27
222428 23
24
38
39
40
41
4216 49
44
45
46
47
32
33
34
35
36
35
35
39
36
36
46
40
50
35
414637
51 50
4751
37
37
34 39
40
28
25
42
4820
54 56
37
413826
39
41 5552
31
31
31
32
2036 32
43
45
474435
49
53
57
3013
33
8 23
9 2231
10
11
12
3143722
14
15
16
4417
34
34
19
20 45
21 49
22 Keys*
23
24
Alphanumeric
484318
20 3237
21
23
24
38
39
40
41
42
25
26 27
2724
28
29
30
44
45
46
47
48
2841
35
355146
39
3629
36
40
50 38
41 47 51
37
47
37
3633 3826
4025
34
3653
38
4057
35
37
39
41
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
29
10
43
45
47
49
51
55
42
32
1
2
3
4
5
622
30 29 19
21 Angle/Tuning
4323
33
33
223039
34
14
15
16
18
34
3143
20
21
24
34
4417
25
26 49
27 48
28Mode
29 (Tune-Manual)
38
26 27
27
28
29
30
35
44
45
46
47
48
3224
33
34
36
23 40
28 13
35
3231
36
46
4630 50
36 40
5045
3335
37
26
34
38
4025
2848
25423747
50
52
54
35
37
3936
41
31564241 47 51
3153
32
29849
2026
33
43
51
55
57
11
1 45
346
533
21
632
3072 44
33
4323
9434
10
11
12
223039
31
44
19
20
21
22
24
29
34
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Button
38
48
37
38
39
40
41
42
32
33
34
35
36
23
28
35
45
45
35
49
39
49
32
27 24 36 34
27 37
3341
24
4136 4740 5146 50
37
25
2851
36
3826
40
35
37
39
46
48
50
52
54
56
31
3153
32
20
2949
4542
55
57
32
42
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
3072 4744
6
21
43
33
30
33
8
9
10
11
12
22
14
15
16
17
18
34 32
3147
44
34 38
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37 48
3823 29
39
40
41 4442
Screen
Saver/Letterbox
Button
38
48
38232913
39
40
41
42
35
44
45
46 27
48
28 43
35 3325
28
36
36
40
24
41
51463951504553 4955 57
12
37
37
32
34
36
38
40
2554
284839
4435
4637
50
56
41
4312
45
4747 49
298 22
31 10
32
202652
42
32
30
30 45
33
43
4312
33Swap
731
9 21
11
8 22
9
10
11
3137
34
4442
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
29 13
34
38
39
40
41
31
32
33
34
35
36
43
44
45
46
47 48Button
48
PIP
On-Off/PIP
2329
44 3319
46
47
48
28
35
4538
35
39
49
32
46
36
27
36
40
50
24
41
51
26 32
474946 51
37
25 4337
28 3936
34
38
40
42
44
48
50
52
54
56
37
41
31
45
47
53
55
57
31
20
29
42
42
32
138
2 223029
3 21 41
433
516 4348
3043
30 19
33
14213225
15
16
17
18
13
14
15 49
18
34
4447
34
27
30
20 3137
21 28
222329 28
23
24
39
40
42
44
45
46
Auto/PIP
Channel
Up Button
48 617
4538
355146
35
39
13
27 26
36
36 47
31
40
50
33 3826
24 41
37
36
4025
28
4637
48
50
56
35
39
41 52
31 42
3154
2972 2244
31 20
32
31 33
32
4212
132
38 21
420
510
622
3043
30 34
4311
33
9 204447
34
20 3131
21
22
24
34
19
2148
23
24 Channel
25
26 28
272329 23
28
29
30
33
35
36
44
45
46
48
Learn/Screen
Standby/PIP
38
35
45
35
39
49
32
46
36 35
40 37
50
41
51
47
37
34
36
38
40
26 2527 372443
28
39
41
31 5512 57
4731 33
49
51
53
2922245
32
127
433
532
3037
616
21
43
8334
9 204441
10
11
13
14
15
18
29 738
34
3131
26 28
28
29
30
39
40
42
25
26 48
27 4217
28
29 4630 50
3223
33
34
35
36
Down
Button
38
45
3530
49
36 40
27
30
24 36
3757
2653
3439
38
40
28 34744
42
46363332
48
50
5441 5647 51
312542
4372 22
45
49
51
5552
29
20
1 29
433
532 43
632
213138
3037
30
33
8
9
10
11
12
44
13
14
15
16
17
18
34
19
20
21
22
23
24
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
31
33
34
35 504536 49
Light
Button
48
35 4639
32 2527 3724 36 40
28 23 35
33
26
14
28
42 3 21
44
4637 32
48
50
522 57
54 3 56 4
35449
39 53
41
31
43
51
31
2972 2245
42
32
515
1 55
5
621
6 48
43
33
8 47
920 3225
10
11
12
3147
34 45
29 43
34
38
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
24
38 3013
39
40
41
42
26
27
28
29
30
37
3823 23
39
40
41
44
45
46
48
Program/Record
Button
35 39
494442
36
2428
47 5151 53 55 57
3451
3827
40
28 4744
42
46
48
50
52
54 37
56 41
354920
37
393653
41
31
45
55
57
43
45
47
49
31
32
42
30
1
2
3
4
5
21
43
33
6
30 13
33
7 2329
8
9
10
11
8 22 29
9
10 44
11 48 48
12
34
29
14
15 3131
16 28 12
17
18
26
27
28
30
19
20
21
22
23
24
44
45
46
47
48
32
33
34
35
36
43
44
45
46
47
Freeze/PVR
List
35
36 4740
4638
50Button
3325
3756
2554
3432
36
38265240
35 46
41
44
4839
50
42
4441
4851 650
54
2937
31
31
2037
4218 56
32 4352
3037
21 Button
126
2 29
491446
540
33
727
83 2230
10
11
12
34
14
15
16
17
18
13
15 50
16 49
17
19
20 3231
21 27
22
23
24
38
39
41
42
25
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
Pause
35
45
39
28
46
36
36
40
33
24
414737
51 51
474939
374535
2543
28
3734 3936 1413826 240
41 533155
32
2937
20
4218 57
49 213140
510
33
636
15
722
83 2330 24
11
12
3137
3450
4447
13
14
15
16
17
25
26 27
27 28 43
28
29
30
20 3231
21
23
38
39
41
42
19
20
21 49
22 48 Live
23 Button
24
27
44
45
46
48
32
33
34
35
Frame/Stop/PVR
4538
355146
35
39
36 47
36
40
2442
41
41 5647 51
37
28
3633 3826
4025
34
36 32
38 53
40 555237
44
46
48
50
54
31
31
20
43
45
47
49
51
57
30
1
2
3 29 19
534 Forward
4323
633
727
833
9435
10
11
12
22 39
31
44
34
38
48
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
24
26
28
29
30
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Play
Button
26
45
23
28
35
49
32
36 40 46
36 40 46 50
50
26 2527
3724
2653
42
44
463733651
48
50
523757
54
35549
39
41
16
294947
43
55
3225
4229 56 30
304333
21
25
38 45
43
33
33
72 28
10
11
12
223039
3137
44
34
2919
34
14
15
16
17
18
38
25
26
27
28
38
39
40
41
42
20
21
22
24
32
34
35
36
31
32 48
33
34
35 45
36 49
Play
Button
Status/TV/Video/PVR
44
45
46
47
48
23
35
45
35 39
49
32
27
36
27
3656 41
244213
245423
47 51
37
34
36
38
40
28
44
46
48
50
52
35
37
39
41
31 11
32
29 9 22
20 12
17
32
1 4331
2 42 3
434
5
3043
6
21
33
30
33
8
10
24
31
29
34
44
44
14
15
16
17
18
38
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
3823 19
39
40
41
42
37 48
3823 29
39
40 4638
41 50 Search
42 48 Button
44
45
46
47
48
Tuning
Down/Reverse
28 13
35
28
35 4740
33
51
37 4136
34 39
36
3826 40
254237
28 37
35
41
31
29 2230
20
32
132
2731 29
38 22 434
510
611 4312
21
3028
18
33
43
33Button
9
23
29 19
34
14
15
16
17
18
25
26
27
29
30
20 3331
21
22 27
23
24
37
38
39
40
41
32
33
34
35
36
Memory/Zoom
44
45
46
47
48
43
44
45
46
47 49 48
4542
35
39
32
36
46
36
40
50
24
41
51
37
47
26
37
25 29
34 20
36 32
38 40
28 31
31
4224
4218
32 4412
22
30 25
33
33 4538
728
8 2330
91421 41
10
11
31
34
13
15
16
17 Search
48
2021 31
21
22
23
26
27
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Tuning
Up/Forward
Button
35
28
35
39
49
32
36 40 46 50
33
24 2836
2527 37
31 43
31 20 32 26 131
20 532
19
2
3 2231 15
434
3029
622
33
3143
4417
14
16
34
19
20 45
21 49
23
24
38
48 18
26 3237
27
28
30
38
39
41
42
31
32 27
332428 13
342329 40
35
36
Up/Down/Forward/
44
45
46
47
48
35 Preset/Page
35
21
39
36
29832230 49 21 10
42
32
1
2 29
5
30
6
33
43
33
7
11
12
31
34
44
34
20
21
22
24
25
26Skip
27Buttons
29
30
38
48 2328
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 28 44
3923 19
40 Reverse
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
35
20
28 31 20 32
31 42
29 832230
1 3072 29
533 11
632
4317
33
9421 47
10
12
34
13
14
15
16
18
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32 Skip/Last
33
34 Channel
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
Disc
Buttons
43
44
45
46
48
28 31 20 32
31
29
32
42
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
21
6
6
33
7
8 30 19
10
11
12
13
149
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
37 Picture/Channel
38
39
40 Up/Down
41
42 and Slow
31
32
33
34
35
36
44
45
46
47
48
28 31 20 32
31
7
8
9
10
11
12
8
9
10
11
12
13
1914
15
20
25
16
21
37
26
13
14
19
15
20
25
127
17
22
43
32
2
733
23
28
38
83
13
29
39
34
44
19
20
25
25
26
31
21
26
31
127
37
32
16
21
26
31
122
27
37
32
2
728
38
33
43
31
37
32
733
38
43
8
13
39
34
44
9
14
19
40
35
45
37
38
43
13
39
44
14
19
40
45
15
20
25
41
46
43
44
19
45
20
25
46
21
26
31
47
25
26
31
27
37
32
31
37
32
38
33
43
37
38
43
39
44
43
44
45
32
17
18
22
23
24
38
39
40
41
42
27
28
29
30
43 Forward/Reverse
44
45
46
47
48
Play
Button
2
314
415
516
617
18
13
18
23
24
28
29
30
44
45
46
47
48
33
34
35
36
System
Selector
420
510
622
83 Screen
9
11
12
24
29
30
19
21
23
24
39
40
41
42
34
35
36
Selector
49
515
616
10
11
12
14
17
18
30
25
26 Mode/Color/List
27
28
29
30
40
41
42
35
36
45
46
47
48
Tone
Button
10
11
12
15 OSD/Contrast
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
41
42
36
31
32
33
34 Button
35
36
46
47
48
™
16
17
18
21
22
24
26
27
28
29
30
42
37 JBL
38 On23
39
40 Library
41
47
48
Screen
/42
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
48
43
44
45
46Button
47
48
Settings/Distance
28
29
30
38
39
40
41
42
33 Menu/Info/Audio
34
35
36
Input Selector
39 Power
40
41
42
34
35
36
44
45
46 (All)
47
48
Off
40
42
45 IR41
46Transmitter/Receiver
47
48
46
47
48
*The alphanumeric keys function as such for all devices except in System mode of the
CVR700, where pressing each key will access certain audio functions as follows:
1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector
6: Stereo Mode Selector
2: DTS Digital Surround Mode Selector
7: Test Tone
3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode Selector
8: No additional function
4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector
9: Night Mode
5: DSP Surround Mode Selector
0: Sleep Timer
42
44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 5154 5356 55 57
50 52 54 56
34 36 3538 3740 39 37
41 41 47 51
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
46
33 263425 3637 38 36
40 40 37 4150 47 51
44 46 48 50 52 54 56
35 39 3645 4049 42
32 273324 36
46
50
26 25 37
37 39 41
31 283223 35
34 38 3544 3948 35
45 49
27 24 36
30 293122 34
37 41 47 51
33
36 38 40
44 48
3443 38 34
28 23 35
36 40 46 50
29 303021 33
33
32
42
26
37
25
43
33
29 22 34
43 49
45 47 49
51 53 55 57
45 47 49
51 53 55
28 3143
35 39 45
32 57
27 24 36
2920 3032 21 31
42
32
33
42
44
46
48
50
52 54 56
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
31
34
44
38
48
28 23 35
28 31 20 32
43
43 45
45 47
47 49
49 51
51 53
53 55
55 57
57
31
30 43
45
47
4933 51 53
5537 5739 41
43
35
22
35
37
39
41
29
34
42
42 44
44 46
46 48
48 50
50 52
52 54
54 56
56
IMPORTANT
NOTE:
The
JBL
Cinema 34 36another
In DVD
mode,
this button
29 42
44
46
5436 56
42
41 selected
51
21 first
37 you
47
38 40device
30 by
33 4832 50 52
47 51the
37 41accesses
34
38 40
35
35 37
37 39
39 41
41
3
4
5 36
640 46
28 35
the
appropriate
Vision
remotes
are powerful devices 1 332 26pressing
DVD 26
setup menu
described
on
Input
31
50
31
32 57
20 Selector
37
39
41
46page
36
40
50 53,
33
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
37
25
37
25
41 47
51
37 41
47 51
34
34 36
36 38
38 40
40 37
7
3 . 11
4354612
5 48456 50
8 1 279 2 24 1042
39
49 52
32
41
51
capable
of
controlling
virtually
your
entire
and
enables
you
to
configure
the
DVD
37
47
34
36
38
40
36
45
35
44
54
56
39
49
32 27 24 36
36 40
46 50
40 46
50
33
33 26
26 25
37 36
25 37
31
34 1838
48 26 25 37
36 40
46 50
45 47 home
49
51
53 55
57 In comparison 13
35
cinema
system.
to
a
changer.
9
11 414412 33
147 2815 8 23 1635
1710
31
44
34
38
48
37
39
35
35
45
45
39
39
49
49
23
28
35
32
32 27
and hold
this button to place all
27 24
36
24 36
30 29Press
35 39
49
22 34
44 4346
48 47 5049 52system
5434
34 36333824 4043 32
27 47
36
24 51
41
306 4529
5356
of3855the
same
43
33
31
3145traditional
19
2013
2114
2215 23
44
4457
38
48
48 capabili16
17the CVR700,
23 35
28
28 23
35 51 34
118 37 2 the
3
4
5
‹ ›22 34
including
29 30devices,
32
42 31
34 38 44 /48 Navigation Buttons: These
21
33
23 50
28 46
35
37 4239
41
36 40
4622
50 33
52 can
5443
56
30
3044ties,
29
33
43
42
26
37
these
replace
up to2510 28
224834
25
29
29
34remotes
21 used
2619
2720
2833
29
30
30 are
33 to 32
21 and22any 23
24
7
8
9
10
11
12
buttons
navigate
the onCVPD50
other
products
whose
30
33 45 47
43
31
31 20 32
32
22 49
29 45
34 43
41 32
51 42
37
36 3538
40
35 39
55 57
29
2937separate
28 314920 5132 53 31
32controls
42and therefore
27
36
3921
4133
21
30
30
33 47
remote
31
3225
3326
3427 3528 243629
30 29
screen
configuration
menus,
to
scroll
codes
you
have
programmed
into
the
32
42
21
13
14
15
16
17
18
30
33
36
46
40
50
31 28 23 35
28
283637
34 38 44 48 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
263425
51
3141and
31
31
32
32 3731
47clutter
20
2040confusion
38the
end
associated
37
3831
3932
4033 4134
4235
36 28
31
20
remote,
the
Standby
mode.
39 3645 4049 46 50
30into
19 33
2031 43
21 3222 35
23 37through
2439 41options lists and to select various
273324 2636 25 35
22
29
34
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
37
with having
different
remote for each
43
44
4538
4629
4841
39 47
42 32
38 a
42
283223 2735 24 34
delay,
configura3040
3544 394842
45 44
51
49 46 48 50 5237
26
27
28 3429 36settings
3038 40such37as 41
47 speaker
36
1 54 2 56DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/
3
4 21 5 33 25
6
49
55 57
of
your
system
components.
In
order
to
33
43
43 43 44 45 28
4547 31
46 20 51
47 32 5348 31
293122 2834 23 35
34 38 44 48
46
36
40
50
tions,
surround
modes,
digital
inputs,
etc.
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
31
32
33
34
35 26 3625 37
35 37
39 41
SAT
7 42
8 44Input
946 Selectors:
10
11
48
50
5212Pressing
54 56 one of
1 achieve
2 2 32 this
3 3 goal,
4 4 the
5 5 JBL
303021129
33 22
3342
43 6 6 Cinema Vision 41
35 39 45 49
34
36
24
1 38
2 39
3 40 32
4 41 27
5 42
6
51 buttons will perform
37
47these
37
34 36 38 40
7 Set8 Button:
9
10 button
11
This
is12used to
two actions. 31
16
17
18
35 14 37 1539 41
312920730
32 21
7 remotes
8 8 31
9 94532
1047
10
11
11
12
12 53 55
43
49
designed
assume
the 5736 4013 46
34 38 44 48
42to51
33are
28 23 35
50
33
26 25 37
7 44 to
43
45
48 12
9 46 1047 11
41
51 8the
enter
settings
into
the
CVR700’s
First,
will
switch
37
47
34
36 the
38CVR700
40
4328 4531duties
4720 49
51
53
55
57
13
14
15
16
17
18 memory,
19
20
21
22
23
24
30
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
43
33
31
32
22
devices
29
34
1313
1414 of15controlling
15
1616
1732
17different
1818
4949 511 53 2 55 357 4
27
36 4335 4539 4745
55014 6 15
36 40the46
33
13remote
16
17
42 44 46 48
50 39
52 41
54 56 24
or1921
to 18
confirm
a21 selection
while 24setting
source
will 29
26 27selected.
25 37
42
32
254644
26
28 54Then,
29 56 30
35
37
30
33
20
22
23
31
34
within
your
system
by
first
pressing
one
38
48
42
44
48
50
52
1919
2020
2121
2222
2323
2424 23 35
28
39 1045
4920 selected
32 27 to
7
11
12 21
28
368 359 codes
24
22 31
23
35 37 39 41
delay
speaker57configuration
and
31
32
20 24times,
37 41
47 5133 31 43switch
34 Selector
36
40
30
33 the34control
35
36 19for the
2 2525of
3 the
5 2838
29
34
dfg
26 53 2755 28
29
30
43 45 47 25
49
51
35 37 3931 32
41
26264 102727
286 29Buttons
29
3030 22
34 38 44 48
23
28
35
41
51
37
47
34 36 38 40
13
14 to 15
16 25
17CVR700
36 21
46 5032 37 42source.
40 33
33 26 25 37
26 18 27
28
29
30 level adjustments. It is used as
In
order
control
the
output
29 30
38
39
40
41
42
41
51
42 44 46 31
48 50
56
34 36 3830 4029 37
4 343412.5Pressing
43
3131 9 2 323210 3 33331136
35 6 3636 one of these
32 52 3354 34
35
36
22 34 4733
46
40 35
338 1 26
35 20
45 4931
39 32
32 27 24
28 50
25 37
36
19
20
21
22Selector
31 23 32 24 33 , 34
35
36
again,
press
or OK button for most other
31
36
33a 26 432529
44
46the46System
47
3730 45
35 37 39 the
41 Enter
3250 48 42
your
remote
in
21 40
3737buttons
39391735
4040
41
41
42
42 control
33
45
8 383816
9 places
10
11
12
1524
18
39
49
37
38
39
40
41
42
32147 27
31
34
44
36
38
48
28 23 35
25
26 45 CVPD50
27
28 37screen,
29 38 30
35
39 36401 38 41
42 37
32 27 2428
devices.
and
to control
press
3631
41
2
3
4 475 51 6
34
40
3149
32 the
20 39
,24where
the
“page”
312013 28
34
44
38
30
4343different
46
47 1848
48
48 remote
33
43 but35
2123
14 444422
15 454523
16 4622
17 47
29
34
43
44
45
46
47
48
31 28 23 the
34
48 34 43. 35 44 36 33
31 38
32 44 33
35 Screen
45 26
46 25 47 37 48 36 40 46 50
Selector
30 29 tons
33 21 control
43 32functions
7
8
9
10
11Button:
12
29 assigned
Exit/Cancel
When proare
34
42 avail30
2619
2722
30 29 22 34
20 2821 29
22 3023 33 24
43
33
45
35
39
49
37
38
39
40
41
42 32 27 24 36
29 30 21 33
1 31 2 For
3 exam4
5
32specific
42purpose.
6
31
20 32
gramming
press this button
and
any of these buttons 31
to
able
for28that
13
14
15 the
16 remote,
17
18
29 30 21 Press
32 hold 42
26 3427 35 28 3629
30
33
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
283225 31 3320
43
44
45
46
47
48
31
32
7
8
9
10
11
12
28
cancel
the
function
and return
and
ple,
functions 31 20 power
132
2on
3 CVR700,
4
5 the CVPD50
21
22 current
23
24
6
31 the
30 29 1922 to20
43
33
3831
3932 all
4033internal
41 34 DVD
4235 changer
36
34
remote
the
device,
play 29
of 30 2521 to26
13
14 DVD
15
16
17
18
are
the
27
29
30function. When
32 28 42
7 source
8
9
10 and11to begin
12
33the previous
4437
4538 accessed
4639 47 40 by48pressing
41
42
28 31 3120 using
the
to enter
the
device.
31 remote
Button d
32
20 5CVPD50
21 6 22
23
24 source
32
33
34
35
36 frequencies for
1
2 first,
3 19and
4 all
13
14
15
16
17
18
CVR700 OM
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
43
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
12/17/04
44
45
4:24 PM
46
47
Page 35
33 37 39 41
42 44 46 48
48
2
3 Display
4
5
6
Plasma
accessed
26 11
27 12 28
292
7
8 functions
9 25 10 are
1
8
9
10
11
12
by pressing
the
Screen
Button e 7 358
13
14
15 31 16 32 17 33 18 34
first,
and
all16 overall
audio
and
37
38 system
39
40
41
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 13
14
commands
are
accessed
43
44
45
46
47
20
21 25 22for26the
23 CVR700
24
27
28
29
30 19
20
by
Button
26 first
27 pressing
28
29the System
30
31
32
33
34
35
36 25
26
f
. Throughout
this40 manual,
you
32
33 37
34 38 35 39 36
41
42 31
32
will
see
38
39 references
40
41 to42the system being
43
44
45
46
47
48 37
38
43 45 47 49
active
SYSTEM,
44
45in DVD,
46
47
48 SCREEN, CABLE/
42 44 43 46 44
SAT, or other modes. This means that one 48
35 37 39 41
of these 10 keys is to be pressed
first to
34 36 38 40
place your remote in the prescribed mode
33 26 25 37
before accessing any specific controls.
32 27 It
24 36
is important to always remember
press
31 to28
23 35
30
the appropriate page selection
key47before
22 34
29 49
43 45
51
29 4630 48
21 50
33
trying to access any specific
for
42 functions
44
28 31 20 32
a system or source. This may
a little
35 take
37 39
41
37
34 at36first,
38 but
40
bit of discipline and practice
33
26
37
25
it should become second nature in a very 36
35
32 27 1 24 36
2
3
short time.
31
43
303
19
45 47
49
51
53 55
57
204
21
24
5 Broadcast
6 46 2348 and
Sports,
42
4422
50 Movies
52 54 56
36
25
26
27
28
29
30 Screen
Preset
Selectors:
When
the
35
9
10
11 3712 39 41
42
41 of
47 1 51
37 any
34
36 active,
38 3540press
31
32
33
36
Selector
15
16
17 is34
18
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
48
7
37
38
39
40
41 the 42
these
buttons
to
select
CVPD50
pic21
22
23
24
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
4327 settings
44
45
46
47 preset
48
ture
1348
31
44fac34 at38the
28
29 that
23 35
2830were
30 29viewing
43
33
tory
33 for34optimum
35
36 22 34 of sporting 19
29 30 21 33
42
32
events,
broadcast
television
programs
25or
39
40
41
42
51 53 5528 57
31
31 20 32
movies.
31
45
46
47
48
50 52 54 56
37
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
43
37 41 imn
47 1 51 2
Buttons
optimize
3
4
5 picture
6
36 40 for
46a specific
50
settings
viewing
7
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
35 39 45 49
The
Broadcast
most
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
34 38 44 48
19 and20accurate,
21
22and23are opti24
tral,
balanced
33
43
53 55 57
25
26
27
28 settings
29
30are
mized
for clarity.
The
Movies
42
5232 54 56
31 bright.
32
33
34
35 settings
36
softer
The
Sports
31 and less
37
38
39
40
41
42
are
vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast41 more
47 51
43
44
45
46
47
48
moving
40 46 action.
50
37
43
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
44
direct
tuner
access
numbers for
38
39
40
41 or track
42
direct
access
press this button
44
45
46 on a
47 CD, 48
to3 clear4 previous
5
6entries.
9
10
11
12
Direct/Brightness/Window
Button:
15
16 Press
17 this
18 button when the
tuner
is22 in use
directly enter a station’s
21
23 to 24
frequency,
or29 when
27
28
30 a CD is in use to
directly
number. After press33
34enter
35 a track
36
ing
press
the appropriate
39 this40button,
41
42
Alphanumeric
Keys
l to select a
45
46
47
48
station or track.
43
45 47
49
51
53 55
57
When the Screen
42 44 mode
46 48is active,
50 52 press
54 56
this button 35
to adjust
37 39the
41brightness of the
41 47 51
37 informa34 page
36 38
40 more
CVPD50. See
55 for
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
tion on screen
adjustments.
This
button
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
also activates
Window
function
for 48
31 the
34
44
38
28 23 35
30See
33
43
22 34
TiVo players.
TiVo owner’s
man29 your
42
51for53more
5529information
57
30 21 33 on 32
ual
the Window
31
31 20 32
50 52 5428 56
function.
43 45 47 49
39 45
49
⁄
4
5 /¤6 Navigation Buttons: These
42 44 46 48
34 38 44 48
buttons43are4512
used
navigate
the
on-3757 39 41
9
47 to49
51 53
3555
33 10 4311
Movies
configuration
menus,
to5134
scroll
42
4418
50
5453
51
43 4645 4847
49 52
15
16 4217
37 41The
47Sports/Broadcast/
365655
38 57
40 NOTE:
32 screen
3645 4047imn
4649
42 39lists
44 4146
50
Buttons
optimize
and 48
to select
various
33 52
35options
37
1 50 51
2
4 57 5 picture
6
31 through
21
22
23
24
26 54
37 43
25 56
533 55
CVPD50 and other devices as described
3544 3946for
4548
49 508 52
37
47 2751 24 36 42
34such
36
3837
4039 speaker
35as
41 4132
settings
a7 specific
viewing
medium.
delay,
configura9 5410 56
11
12
25
26
27 settings
28
29
30
314641
earlier for the CVR700R2 remote control
34 38 44 48
36
33 2634 25
23 51
2850
35 35
37
47
36 37
38 digital
40 40inputs,
The
Broadcast
most
neuetc.
13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
37
39 41
31
32 43 33 45tions,
34
35
36 modes,
47 surround
49
51
53
55
57
304540
33
43
3936
32 2733 2426 3625 35
22 50
functions; however, functions may be 42 44 46 48
294946
34
37
4121 4722and
51 23are opti19 and37
20accurate,
24
tral,
34
36balanced
38 40
50
52
54
56
372
38
39
40
41
42
1
3
4
5
6
Setup/Guide
Button:
29
31 2832 2327
32
42
21 49
304845
33
3524 34
36 3835 4439
combined on different keys. Each key has35 37 39 Level/DVD
36
4027 4628 settings
50 29
33 26 for
25
26
30are
The
Movies
37
25 clarity.
41
438
44
45
46 button
47
48
28
30
33
4338
is
to23start
process
of 4832 32mized
7
31
9
10 This
11
12
31 44
20
31used
2228 34
29
35 the34
35
an
independent
function
depending
on
39
27 and
36
31 bright.
32
33 45
34 49 35 settings
36
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
41
51
24
37
47
34 36 38 40
softer
less
The
Sports
29
30 2129 3322
32
3342to an
43
CVR700’s
output
34 levels
14
15
17
18the 30
31 28 23 35
34
3839 4440 48 41
the
use.5413Be 56
careful
to 33 16 26setting
37
38
42
36 40 46 50
42 device
44 46 currently
48 50 in52
25 37
28 31
are
more
vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast29
31
32
20
32
42
30 21
such
a33favorite DVD.
30 29 22 34
4346
33
19 System
20
21or32 22 external
24 source,
35
45as49
43
44
45
47
48
press
35 37the39input
41 selector, or the
27 2324 36
28 39
moving
action. 32
31 this
31 playing,
20 32 press
29
42
the
34 38is 44
25 51 26
2923 35
30 source
1
2
3
4 30 521 33
6
48
37 41
47
34 36 mode
38 40
corresponding
to27 31 28 28While
Screen
selector,
28 31 20 32
31
43 the ⁄/¤
then press
36to40
46
33 device
31 50
32 to 33 30 34 29button,
3522 34
36and 33
7
8
9
10 Game/Digital
11
12
26 25 you
37 wish
Recorder/
the
control
prior
29 30Navigation
32
42
1
2
3
4
5
21
6
35 39 45
49
Controls
until
the
33
32 27 24 36
Input
Selectors: Pressing
pressing a button to be sure37that 38your 39 28 40 41 42
13
14
15 Computer
16
17
18
3181 appears.
31 20 327to adjust
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
5
6
92
103 Press
114 the
12
43 desired
44
45
46 channel
47
48
these24buttons will perform two
button
will operate
the
19
20
21 one
22 of 23
30 29 press
33
43
22 34
7 to158select
9 that
10channel,
11
12
Set
Button
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
16
17
18
function.
Refer
to
the
function
list
on
25
26
27 actions.
28
29 First,
30 the CVR700 will switch to
29 30 21
32
42
33
⁄14/¤ 15Navigation
and then19use the
13
17
18
7 source
8
9
10 Then,
11
12 remote
20
21
22
2316
24
28 319620through
the
selected.
the
pages
97
for
information
on
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
32
28 23 35
7
8
30
22 34
Each function on the CVR700R129remote
29 3013 21 14
has the same effect on the28CVR700, 33
31 19 20 20
32
which function is assigned to a given key
for a given device.
2
3On (All):
4
5
6this button
Power
Press
to7power8 on the
CVR700,
9
10
11 the12CVPD50 or
1
7
13
1
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
2
3 25 4 26
5 27
6 adjust
Controls
the37 3023
19again
20 to
21
28
2922
level
setting.
more3629
8
9 31 10 See
25 11 page
26 12 64
27 for3528
32
33
34
43
information.
31 17 39
32 18 40
33
35
14
15 37 16 38
4134
42
38
44
24
30
36
19
20
21 43
37 23 45
38 24 46
39
22 44
4740
41
48
42
25
26
27
28 43 29 44 30 45
46
47
48
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
39
45
1340 switch
14
15
17 codes
18
will
to
for the
41
42 the16control
1946
20
21
22
23 to 24
selected
In order
control
47 source.
48
25 CVR700
26
27again,
28 press
29 the
30 System
the
31
32
33 , and
34 to35control
36 the
Selector
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
33
30
CVR700 OM
28
43
42
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
45 47
44 46
13
14
19
1 20
25
2
7 26
3
7
31
8
13 32
9
37
37 19 38
14
15
43 25 44
20
21
31
26
27
37
32
33
43
38
39
43
44
19
25
31
Page
32
31
31 20 32
1
51
50
53 55
52 54
2
3
57
56
4
5
45
46
21 40 22 41 23
17
18
27 46 28 47 29
23
24
43 45
33
34 4735
1
29
30
42 44
39
40 4641
35
36
7
35 37
45
46 3947
41
42
34 36 1338
42 24 press towards the top of the
the volume,
30
button 48(marked
⁄); to lower the volume,
49 36 51 53 55 57
press towards
2
3 the 4bottom
5 of 6the button,
48 50 52 54 56
where it8 is42marked
9
10¤. 11
12
3347
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
41 48
14 Direct/Favorite
15
16 4717 51 Button:
18
Disc
In
41
37
40
48
36 40
1925 mode,
20
21
22
23 50 24 and then
DVD
press
this46button,
26
37
45corresponding
35 39
27
36
2524 the
26 numeric
27
28key
29 49 30
press
to
34 38 44 48
28
35
3123
32
33
34 of 35
36 you wish
the
position
number
the disc
43
33
29 22 34
39
40
41
to37play 38to immediately
begin42playback of
42
32
30 21 33
43 disc.
44
45
46
47
48
31
31that
32
20
When used with cable television boxes or
satellite receivers, pressing this button
scrolls
through
2
3
4 your
5 list6of preprogrammed
favorite
8
9 channels.
10
11
12
14 Alphanumeric
15
16
17
18
Keys:
Select num20 or21letters
22 by 23
24
bers
pressing
these keys,
26
27
28
29
except
in System
mode30(when operating
32 audio
33 section
34
35of the
36 CVR700), in
the
38
39
40
41
42 the following
which
case
each
key has
functions:
44
45
46
47
48
1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector:
This button is used to select from the
available Dolby audio surround modes.
Each press of this button will select one
of the Dolby Pro Logic II (available in
5.1-channel systems) or IIx (available in
6.1/7.1-channel systems) modes, Dolby 3
Stereo, or Dolby Digital when a Dolby
Digital-encoded source is in use. Each
press of this button will scroll through the
available modes. See page 62 for more
information on Dolby modes.
2: DTS Digital Surround Mode
Selector: When a DTS-encoded digital
source is playing, each press of this button will scroll through the available DTS
audio surround modes. The specific
choice of modes will vary according to the
type of encoding on the disc and your system’s speaker configuration (5.1-channel
or 6.1/7.1-channel). When a DTS source is
not in use, this button has no function in
System mode. See page 62 for more
information on DTS modes.
34
27
28
29
30
31
24
23
22
21
20
36
35
34
33
32
35 39 45 49
34 38 44 48
33
43
32
31
42
6
41
7
8
9
10
11
12
51 57
47 55
40 49 37 5141 53
47
13 36 14
15
16
17
18
46 50
37 48 5040 52
46
54 56
51
39 574521 49 22
19 35 5520
23
24
36 53
39 41
50
5438 5644 48
35 52
25 34 37
26 4127 47
2851 press
29
30
CVPD50
screen,
the Screen
38 40
43
34 31 33 36
32 4033 46 3450. 35
36
Selector
25 37
37 4132 47 5142
33
35
37
38 3939 45 4049 41
42
36
24
36 4031 46
Press
50 and hold any of these buttons to
32
34
44
38
48
23 35
43
44
45
46
47
43
45
47
49
51
53 55 57
35 39 45
49 on the CVR700,48
power
the CVPD50 and
33
22 34
42 48
44 43
46 48 50 52 54 56
34 38 44
the
source
device,
and
to begin play of
32
42
21 33
35 37 39 41
33
43
the
source
device. 37 41 47 51
203 32 4 31
5
6
34 36 38 40
32
42
36Press
46 button
40 this
50
9
10 33
11 26
12 25 Button:
Mute
to
31
37
35 the
45 49 Press
39CVR700.
3217 27 18 24 36
silence
15
16 momentarily
31 28
38 44 48
35 the34
2 21 3 22 4it
5 24 23
Up/Down
or6 use
Volume
23again,
30 29 22 34
33
43
8 27
9 528 10
audio.
Control
4
6 11 30 2112 to restore
2929
32
42
30
33
14 10
17 36 2018 32
2835
33 15 11
34 16
31
12 31
Volume Up/Down
Control: To raise
20 39
16
26 45
22
32
28
38
34
44
40
32
31
30
29
28
34
42
35 37 39
34 43
36 45
38
33 4226 44
25
4532 4727 49
24
35 37
4431 4628 4823
34 36
3730 3929 4122
33 26
3629 3830 4021
32
28 31 27
20
26 25
31 37
28
27 24
30 36
29
28 23
29 35
30
29 22
28 34
1
231
30 21 33
8
31 7 20 32
1
13
49
48
43
33
29 22 34
12/17/04
4:24
29 30
21 PM
33
3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode
Selector: This button is used to select
a DTS Neo:6 audio surround mode. See
page 62 for more information on the
available DTS Neo:6 options.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector:
1445 4947
15 51
16 5351
17 555318
43 134543 47
49
5755Mode
57 (TuneAngle/Tuning
Press this button to select from among
42 194442 46
46
48
50
56
54 56the DVD mode
2044 48
21 50
22 52
23 545224
Manual)
Button:
When
the available Logic 7 surround modes.
35 253735 39
41
2637 41
27active,
28 press
29 this
30 button to select an
is39
413747415147 51
37
38
40
(See page 62 for descriptions of the34vari313634 38
3236 40
33
34 camera
35
36
alternate
angle if available on
403646405046 50
33 2633 25263725 36
37
ous surround modes.)
37
38 the
39 current
40
41
42
DVD.
32 2732 24273624 35
36 393545394945 49
43
44
45
46
47
5: DSP Surround Mode Selector:
31Press
34
4438
48 press this butWhen
the38tuner
is4848in44use,
23 34
2831 232835
35
30
30
this button to select one of the DSP audio
3343
43 mode between
22 to33
29 222934
34
ton
change
the tuner
29 2 30
4321
4745
47 32
51
49
5553 5755 57
32
42 535142
surround modes, such as Hall 1, Hall
or294321304533
3349and
manual
automatic.
When the button
28 3128
422031
44
4220
4644
50
48 5250 5452 5654 56
31
32
324846 31
Theater. Each press of the button selects
is pressed so that TUNE AUTO
35 3937 4139 41
another mode. See page 62 for descrip- 35 37appears
in the Lower
Display Line E,
34 3634 3836 4038 37
40 413747415147 51
tions of surround modes.
only
stations
with
acceptable
signal quality
33 2633 25263725 36
37 403646405046 50
1
21
32
43
54
65
6
tuned
when
scanning,
and
35
35
45
45
6: Stereo Mode Selector: This button
is32
39
39
49
49 the
32 24be
27will
2736
36
24
7
87
8 2328
109will
10 34
12
113834
12384844
31
31
44
48
play
stations
in stereo,
289tuner
352311
35 FM
used to select a stereo listening mode.
30
30
43
43mode, when
14
13
15
14 2229
1615available.
18 Auto
29
34221716 33
34 1817In33
when
the
When the button is pressed so that 13
29 3029 21303321 32
3242 Buttons
42
33
19
19 474521
20
22
21
2322
24
235755 2457
8L
the
43 4520
43
4947Tuning
51
49 53
51Up/Down
5553
SURROUND OFF appears in the
28 3128 20313220 31
31
32
42 4426
42 464427
4846 28
50
48 52
52
54 3056 the unit will
25
25
26
27
2950
28 54
30
2956
f
are
pressed,
Lower Display Line E, the CVR700
35 3732
35 393733
4139 3433
41 3534 search
31
31
32
36
35
36
automatically
for the next availwill operate in a bypass mode with true,
34 3634 3836 4038 37
40 413747415147 51
37
38
37
39
38
40
39
4140 with
42
41 good
42 signal strength.
able
station
fully analog, two-channel left/right stereo
46
46
36
40
40
50
50
33 2633 25263725 36
3732
1
21
43
54
65
6so that
45
44
4746
48
4749is
4849
When
this39
button
45pressed
35
354539
mode with no surround processing or4332 274443
32 2427
3624 4645
36
7
7
8
9
8
10
9
11
10
12
11
12
31 28312328TUNE
383444384844 appears
48
in the
3523 34
35 MANUAL
bass management, as opposed to other
30 293022293422 33
43
3343
34
13
14
13
15
14
1615
1716
18
17 pressing
18
Lower
Display
Line
E,
and
modes where digital processing is used.
29 3029 21303321 32
42
3242
33
20
19
21
20the Tuning
2221
2322 Up/Down
24
23
24 Buttons
When the button is pressed so that 28 3128192031holding
31
3220 31
32
25
26
25
27
26
2827
2928 will
30
29 cause
30 the tuner
8Lf
SURROUND OFF appears in the
31scan
33
32up55
36
35stop36when you
43 DSP
45 47 3149 to32
51
53
57 3534 and
or3433down
Lower Display Line E, and the
42 44 1 46 37
48 release
50
54
37 452
38the
3956
41 if there
42
button,
is no
and Surround Off Surround Mode
21
3238
339
5 4 40
65 4140 even
6 42
35
37
39
41
43
44
43
45
44
46
45
48
47 frequency.
48
acceptable
signal
at 12that
In
Indicators G are lit, you will enjoy a7
87
98
109
1110
12
11 4746
37 41
47or 51
36 38 40 either
Auto
Manual
mode,
each
tap
of
two-channel presentation of the34sound
13
14
13
1514
1615
1716
1817
18
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
the
19
20
19
2120 Tuning
2221
2322Up/Down
24
23
24 Buttons 8L
along with the benefits of bass32
manage35 39 45 49
27 24 36
25
26
25
2726
2827
2928
30
29 move
30 the frequency up
f
ment. Depending on whether your
31 system
34 38 44 will
48
28 23 35
31
32
31
3332 down
3433 in
3534single-step
36 increments. When
is configured for 5.1 orf 6.1/7.130
channels,
43 3635
29 22 34 or33
37
38
37
3938 FM
4039 band
4140 is42
41
42 pressing the button
the
in
use,
32
42
21
the next press of the button will29cause
30
33
454431 4645
48
that the4746Tune4847Manual
mode is activated
either 5 CH STEREO or 7 28
CH3143 20 444332 so
will enable you to tune stations with
STEREO to appear, and the stereo
weak signals by changing to monaural
signal will be routed to all five (or seven)
reception.
See
1
2
3
4
5
speakers. See page 62 for more informa6 page 64 for more information
tion on stereo playback modes. 7
8
9
10 on11tuner
12 operation.
14
7: Test Tone: Press this button to13 activate
19
20
the CVR700’s test tone that is used to calibrate speaker output levels. See25pages26
31 on32
50 through 52 for more information
calibrating speaker output levels.37(The 38
EzSet function is not available on43the 44
secondary remote.)
8: No Additional Function
9: Night Mode: This button activates the
Night mode, which preserves dialogue
(center-channel) intelligibility at low volume levels when available in specially
encoded Dolby Digital sources.
0: Sleep Timer: The Sleep function is
activated to automatically place the
CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode
after a period of time. Each press of the
button changes the time until turn-off: 90
minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 minutes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,
20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,
and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and
so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,
the front-panel displays will dim to half
brightness.
15
21
27
33
39
45
16 Letterbox/Screen
17
18
Saver Button:
22 button
23
24
This
performs the Letterbox func28 which
29
30
tion,
enables
you to adjust the
34
35to eliminate
36
screen
black bars that may
40
41on the
42 top and bottom or sides of
appear
the
due
46 image
47
48 to the aspect ratio of the
program material differing from the 16:9
aspect ratio of the CVPD50. In most
cases, the CVR700’s video processor is
able to automatically detect the aspect
ratio setting of the program material and
adjust the display automatically to fill the
screen. However, in some cases the material may be a movie displayed in widescreen format, or the material may not
contain embedded information necessary
for the CVR700 to make an automatic
adjustment. The available letterbox
modes are:
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50. This setting will
also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to
a 4:3 picture.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
43
42
Page 35
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
37 is39used
41
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This35mode
36 38 to
40
to adjust an image which 34
is designed
26 25 In37
display a 16:9 movie on a 33
4:3 screen.
32 27 24 36
order to preserve the full width
the
31 28of 23
35
movie on a narrower screen,
30 the
22 34
29 image
29bars
is reduced in size and black
21 33
30 appear
28 31 zooms
20 32
above and below it. This setting
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any
portion of the image. The image
is2 simply
1
3
enlarged so that its two sides
7 fit the
8
9
edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen
and the
13
14
15
black bars on top & bottom 19are cropped
20
21
43 45 47 49
51
off. The image is stretched
in a linear
25
26
27
42 44 46 48 50
fashion (evenly throughout the
frame).
31
32
33
35
37 39
41
3738 is
38 used
39
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL –34This36mode
37
40
36
33 a26widescreen
to adjust an image from
4325 37
44
45
35
36
24 ratio
film which is actually32at a27wider
31 28 23 35
34
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
30 29 22 34
33
fit on the smaller screen,
the image is 32
29 30 21 33
compressed in a nonlinear
but31
28 31fashion,
20 32
no portion of the image is lost.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment
1
2for a3
4
widescreen film. The image
7
8is not9 com10
pressed or scaled in any
way,
but15the 16
13
14
outer edges are cropped,
sacrificing
a 22
19
20
21
slight amount of the original
content
in28
25
26
27
exchange for 100% accurate
image
pro31
32
33
34
portions.
37
38
39
40
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As43 HDTV
to46
44 is new
45
the broadcast industry and there is still a
considerable amount of older 4:3 standard recording & broadcast equipment in
use, 4:3 material is sometimes broadcast
in HD 16:9 format with black or other
color bars on its sides. Since these bars
are a part of the actual picture, conventional picture resizing techniques do not
work in eliminating them. This setting is
specifically designed to address this
problem. It first crops the bars off the
sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3
picture, and then performs a natural-looking nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
screen.
The Letterbox adjustment is temporary,
and will only apply to that disc. We
encourage you to experiment with the
modes to find one that suits you for a
given presentation.
51
50
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
4
10
16
22
53
5228
34
53 55
52 54
11
17
23
29
35
41
47
35 37
34 36
33 26
32 27
31 28
30 29
29
45 4730
28
44 4631
43
42
39
38
25
24
23
22
21
49
20
48
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
41
40
37 41
36 40
37
35 39
36
34 38
35
33
34
33 5332 55
51
32 5231 54
50
47
46
45
44
43
57
56
51
50
49
48
42
57
56
to the Picture-in-Picture
which a JBL logo will appear to move
35 37 39 connected
41
41 47 the
51 screen. It is important to turn
Input a, pressing
around
37 41Video
47 51
34 36 38 Composite
40
40 46 50
changes
the6 channel of the
on the Screen Saver any time a still 33 26 1 25 this
37
2 button
336 40
4 465 50
39 45 49
35 to
45next
39 the
49 lower one. It has
32 27 24 PIP
36 device
image
is
likely
to
remain
on
screen
for
7
8
9
10
11
12
44
38
48
34 38 44 48
on16the CVR700
or CVPD50.
more43
than a few minutes, as a still 31 28 13 23 no1435effect
15
17
18
30 29 22 4334 45 3347 49 43 51 53
55 57
53 55 57
image,
may4529
be 47 1949 2051 Light
42 such as a menu display,43
22 4223 Press
24 this button to
3246 Button:
30 21 4233 44 21
4856 50 52
54 56
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
“burned” into the display, causing perma28 31 25 20 activate
31the 28remote’s
32
backlight
for ease
30
3526 37 27 39
41 29
35
37
39
41
nent damage to the plasma screen that is 31 of32use 33in darkened
rooms.
The
light
will
3440 3537
36
41
51
47
34
36
38
41
51
37
47
34 danger
36 38 40
not covered under warranty. This
40 46after
50 this butfor41736seconds
33
38
39active
42
2546403750
36 2640
33 26 25 3737 remain
is5not present
when a moving image is
6
35 48
39
32
2739
ton
pressed,
and 45
will49
remain lit
244554636
44
45
2
335has
4 been
49 47
32 27 1 24 4336
6
displayed.
3134 2838 2344 3548 34 38 44 48
11
12
31 28 23 35 for
an additional 7 seconds after any other
7
30 29 22
18 On-Off/PIP Swap Button:
PIP
13
29 30 21
23
24
When
used
with
a
PIP
source
whose
55 57
28 31 19 20
29 56 30
composite
video output has
54
43 been
45 con47 2549
nected
to the Picture-in-Picture
35
36
42 44 46 3148
41 51 42
Composite
Video Input a,
47
35 press
37 39this
3741
1
2
46
button
once to turn on the34PIP 36
function,
47 50 48
38 4340
45
8
and49again to turn it off. 33 26 7 25 37
17
40
41
40
46
39
38 44 48
Pressing
43
5
57
56
45 47
44 46
32
27
36
13 24 14
and holding this button
sev31 28 for
35
19 23 20
45
eral
seconds
causes
the
main
source
42
30 29 43
22 to
34
25 42 26
29 30
appear in the PIP inset display,
and21the44
33
35
37
3131display.
32
20 32
PIP source to appear in the28main
37 34 38
36
Pressing and holding
again
43 the
45 button
47 49
51
43 33 44
26
42
44
46
48
50
returns
the
PIP
source
to
the
inset,
and
6
32 27
the
main
source
to
the
main
display.
1
2
3
35
37
39
41
12
31 28
8
9
10
11
12
3033 29 2243 34
33
43
34 button
on the remote has been pressed.
2915 3016 21 1733 1832
42
32
42
33
28 Program/Record
20
22 20 2332 2431
Button: In the
32 2131 31
51 DVD
53
mode,
press30this button to access
26
27 55
28 57 29
50 the
52
5434 56for
play lists.
32
33 screen
35 programming
36
14
38
3
37
44
936
35
15
39
402
413
424
5
6
The
function
is used
when
the DR
41 Record
5
6
41
4746 51 47
457
48
8
9
10
11
12
Input
Selector
has
been
activated
10 4611 50 12
40
for
with
13 use
15 external
16
17 recorder.
18
451714
39
49 18an
16
34 38
19 442320 48 2421
22
23
24
22
Freeze/PVR
List Button:
In Screen
4733 49
51
55 57
43 2653 27
25
28
29
30
27
28
29
30
mode,
you
may
use
this
button
to
pause
4632 48 50
43 45
42 52 54 56
31
32 of 36
33 video
34 picture
35
36while allow33
34
35
playback
the
3931 41
42 44
37 the4138
40
41
42
39 40
40
ing
playback
to continue
unin-37
41 4239
51
37 audio
47
38
35
53
55 57
43 364744 40 4845
46
47
48
46 50
terrupted.
45 37
46
25
34 36
52
54
56
35 39 45 49
33 26
24 36
When
is in use, press this button
4
5
34a6 PVR
38 44 48
23 35
32 27
41
51
to11list
your
47
37
34 36 38 40830 In
33recorded
43 materials. Refer to 31
9
10 34
12
22
29
18 Auto/PIP Channel Up7 Button:
28
46
40 33
50
29 36
33 26 25
PVR’s
owner’s
manual
for
information.
32
42
21
30
37
30
13
14
15
16
17
18
29
24 Screen mode, this button selects
the
28 35
45 49
39 32
32
31
31 20
29 30
36
24
19
20ratio21
22
23 Pause
24
Button: This button may
be
30
automatic
detection of 27
the aspect
28 31
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
21
25
26 in the
27
28
of36program material,
with playback
30 29 22 34
33
32 the
33
34
16:9
42 format, inserting black31bars on
29 30 21 33
32
1 39 2 40
37
38 4:3
right
required
for
48 and left sides28
43
45 47 49
51as 53
55
57
31
31 20 32
43 56 44 7your
45 8 46
images,
unless
42
44 46
48 you
50have
52 configured
54
13
14
system
to
display
4:3
images
stretched
35 37 39 41
20
51 19is
to fill36the3816:9
This47function
37 41
34
40screen.
1 (480p
3 25 4 26 5
40 246or50
33
not available
with 36
HD
better)
26 25 37
499 more
32
27 See
24 36
31 10 32 11
7 39
signals.
pages3513
and 845
27 for
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
information
on
configuring
aspect
ratios.
13
14
15 37 16 38 17
30
19 Learn/Screen
20
21
22 Standby/PIP
23
24
25
26 Down
27
28
29 Press
30 this butChannel
Button:
31 to begin
32
33
34
35 of “learning”
36
ton
the process
the
37
38
39
40 product’s
41
42remote into
codes
from
another
43 CVR700
44
45
46
47
48 (See page
the
secondary
remote.
93 for more information on using the
remote’s learning function.)
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame functions are not available with the internal
DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto
Resize function has been turned off using
the Screen setup menus. See page 57 for
more information.
When used in the Screen mode, this button places the CVPD50 display in Standby
mode, without affecting use of the CVR700.
This function may be preferred for audioonly listening sessions to aviod burning a
still image into the plasma display.
When pressed and held for at least two
seconds, this button places the CVPD50
display screen in Screen Saver mode, in
When used with a PIP-capable device
whose composite video output has been
35
41
47
49
48
39
38
41
40
25
24
23
22
21
20
37
36
35
34
33
32
29
30 the internal disc changer or
used
with
43
35 an36external DVD or CD player or
with
42
3 41 4 42 5
other playback 6device. Pressing the Pause
1
2
9button
12 play, allowing you to
47 10 48
will11 pause
15step 16
17 frame
18
forward
by frame through7 a 8
14
21DVD22with23each 24
press of the Forward13
6 28Button
27Skip
29
30 . Press the Pause 19
20
33Button
35
36 the Play Button 25 , 26
or
12 34 again,
39to18resume
40
41normal
42 play.
31
32
43
33
29 22 34
37
43
44
45
46
47
48
29 30used
19
20
21
22
23
24 Frame/Stop/PVR Live Button: In
When
PIP-capable
42 device
21 with
33 a32
43
28 31 composite
3125 output
20 32
Screen
mode,
this
button
performs
the
whose
video
has
been
26
27
28
29
30
connected to the Picture-in-Picture
31
32
33
34
Composite Video Input
a,
37
38 pressing
39
40
this
changes
of the46
1 button
2
3
4 the5 channel
6
43
44
45
PIP7 device
to 9the next
higher
8
10
11
12one. It has
no13 effect
on 15the CVR700
or CVPD50.
14
16
17
18
47
46
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
Frame
function, which enables you to
36
set
the
desired aspect ratio for viewing
42
program
materials, independent of the
48
aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The
following settings are available through
the Frame function:
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50.
4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3
aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s
16:9 screen while creating a more natural
looking picture. This is accomplished by
stretching the two sides of the picture
more than the center of the picture where
most of the content is.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
35
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 36
43
42
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing
any portion of the image. The image is 43
42
simply enlarged so that its two sides fit
35
the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and
34
the black bars on top and bottom are
33
cropped off.
32
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
compressed, but no portion of the image
is lost.
36
31
30
29
28
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
30 29 22 34
33
43
29 30 21 33
32
42
43 45 47
28 31 20 32
31
The stop
function 51
may
be used 42
with44the46
43 45 47 49
53 55 57
internal
disc 48
changer
35external
37 39
42
44 46
50 or
52with
54 an
56
DVD37or CD
or other playback
34 36 38
35
39 player
41
1
2
3
4internal
5
6 51
33
device.
disc
changer
is
41
26 25
47
34
36 When
38 40the 37
32once
825 37
9
10
11 button
27 will
36Stop
4612 50
40
24
33
in7use,
the
26 pressing
31 28 23
4532 4727 49
51 5335 5539 5745 49
24 36
13
15
16
17mode,
18 meaning
place
a14DVD
in resume
30 29 22
4431 4628 4823 50
5234 5438 5644 48
35
19 you
20 may21press
22 the23
Play24Button
e
that
33
43 29 30 21
3730 3929 4122 34
25 to 26
27
28
29 the 30
continue
playing
disc
the
28 from
31
20
29
41
51
32
42
37
47
36 3830 4021 33
31
32
33
34
35
36
point
where
it
was
stopped.
If
you
press
28
36 4031 46 50
26 2531 3720 32
37 Stop
38 button
39
40 4541
42 resume
the
play
35 twice,
39
49 will
27
24 36
34 38
from
disc.
4323 the
44 beginning
45
46 of44the
47 48
48
28
35
1
2
33
43
29 22 34
When
a2 PVR 32
is
this button
1
3 in use,
4
6
7switches
8
42 5
30 21 33
to
play
of
the
signal
currently
being
8
9
10
11
12
31
13
14
31 7 20 32
received
by the
PVR.
See
the18PVR’s
19
20
13
14
15
16
17
owner’s
manual
for
more
information.
25
26
19
20
21
22
23
24
49
48
41
40
37
36
35
34
33
32
51
53 55
33
43
57
Depending
the type of disc used in the
50 52 54on 56
internal DVD changer, each additional
51through the available
press
will47
cycle
37 41
36 speeds
40 46 as
50follows (available scan
scan
35 39may
45 differ
49 for external optical
speeds
34 38 44 48
source devices):
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
42and44DVD-Video
46 48 discs:
50 522x,54
4x, 56
DVD-Audio
32
42
31 100x 35 37 39 41
16x,
34
36 38
40
37 41 47 51
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
CD and VCD
2x, 4x,
8x
36 40 46 50
33 discs:
26
37
3
9
15
21
27
42 44 4625 48 50 52 54 56
32 27discs:
36 4x,35
24 2x,
MP3
and
WMA
8x, 39
16x 45 49
4
5 3531
6 37 39 41
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
41
37
47 51
34 for
36 38 40
See
3012 29more
43
10 page
11 68
22 information
34 3633 40 on
46 50
33 26 25 37
29
43 45
47 49trans51 53
using
the
internal
DVD
changer’s
16
17 32 18 30 21 33 3532 39 4542 49
36
28 2731 24
42
32 4631 48 50 52
20 44
port
controls.
34 38 44 48
22
23 31 24 28 23 35
35
37
39
41 43
33 When
34
28 Memory/Zoom
29 30 30 29 22 Button:
34 36 38
40 4237 41
29 30 21
32
33
34
35
36 tuner, press
used
with
the
button
36to 40
33 26 this
37
25
28 31 20
314
323
1
2
5
6
40
41 currently
42
enter
the
tuned
radio
station
35 39
32
27 24 36
7
8
9
10
11
12
31
34 38
46 a 47
48 preset location
into
desired
28 23 using
35 the
3318
2216 the
13
1430 to29
15select
3417preset
Numeric Keys
1 19
2 2029 3 30
4 22 33
5 23 32
21 21
24
location between
the numbers
01
and6 30.
28 31 20 32
31
31button
32
33
26
27
29
30This
Forward
3
4 Play
528 Button:
6
37 changer
38
39
31
33
35
36disc
may
with1134the internal
7
8 be32
9used10
12
43
44
45
39
40 DVD
41 or CD
42 player
or3714with1538an external
or
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
13
16
17
18
49
51 53 55 57
playback
is an alternative adjustment for a 43 45 1947 other
43
44
45 device.
46
47
48
20
21
42 44 46 48
50
5222 5423 56 24
widescreen film. The image is not com- 25
26 Status/TV/Video/PVR
27
28
29
30
Play
35 37 39 41
7 25
8a
9 27 10
1230
26 second
28 11
Press this button
time
to29store
pressed or scaled in any way, but the
32
33
34 it
35 51
36
display
the CVR700
41
37Press
47to
34 36 3138 Button:
40
13
14
15
16
17
18 36
31 To 32
35 later,
recall33that34station
your selection.
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing 33
a
36status,
40
50 external
38
39
40 46
42
or41 an
DVD
26 3725 system’s
37
19
20
21
22
23
24
37
38
39
40
41
42
select
the
tuner
as
the
source,
then
either
slight amount of the original content32in 27 4324 recorder’s
35 status.
39
36
44
45
46 4547 49 48
3
430
5
31 28 23 35
2543
2644 1 2745 228
34 38 44 48
46 2947
48
use
the
Preset
Up/Down
Buttons
exchange for 100% accurate image pro43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
In
Screen
mode,
or
when
used
with
a
30
33
43
7
8
9
10
11
29 22 34
32
33 preset
34 station,
35
36or
portions.
42 44 46 48 50 to
52scroll
54 to
5631the desired
29 30 21 video
device
32
42 that is used for
33 source
13 39
1440 to1541
1642
17
37
38 Keys
use
the
Numeric
directly
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51 53
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new28to 31 20 obtaining
31 television broadcasts, such as a
32
1945
2046 46214748 2248
43
44
enter
the51preset
station
41 56
42 44
42 location.
44
50 23
52
47
34 4636 48
38 50
40 5237 54
the broadcast industry and there are still
cable box, satellite receiver,
PVR,37 36 40 46 50
33 TiVo,
2535 37
26 3927 41 28
29
35 37
3926 41
25
In DVD mode, this button may be used 41
a considerable amount of older 4:3 stanDVR or VCR, this button
37 35
35 4739 51
45 49
32 3827you
37 41
34 allows
36
40
24to 36
3134 36
32 3833 40 34
while a DVD-Video disc
playing
to zoom
dard recording and broadcast equipment
36 40
33 is26
31 signal
25 37
select
between
the
36 4034 4638 5044 48
23 or35
33 26
1
2
3
4
5
6 television
2528 37
37
38
39
40
41
35 39
32enlarged.
the
picture
so
that
it
is
There
in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broad27 24 36
30
33
43
22
35
45
39
49
29
34
32
one
of
the
device’s
video
inputs.
See
the
27 24 36
7
8
9
10
11
12
43 31 28
44 2345 35 46 34 47
38
29
are
four
steps
to
the
zoom
function,
each
cast in HD 16:9 format with black or other
32
42
21 33
31 for
34 38 44 48
2330 35
28 more
device’s
owner’s
manual
infor30 29 22 34
33
13
14
15
16
17
18
28 31 20 32
30 29
31 43
33
progressively
larger.
Continue
pressing
color bars on its sides. Since these bars
22
34
29 30 21 33
32
mation
on the
use24 of this function.
19
20
21
22
23
29 30 21 33
32
42
28 31 the
the button to cycle through
are a part of the actual picture, conven31
32 and
20 steps
28
Search
25
26
27 Tuning
28
29Down/Reverse
30
31
31 20
32
return to the normal view. Depending on
tional picture resizing techniques do not
33
34 Press
35 this
36 button when the tuner
the
work in eliminating them. This setting31is 32 Button:
1
2
3
4
5 disc,
6 you may also be able to use the
is
change
37
38
39in use
40 to 41
42 the station to one
1
2
3
4
5
⁄
/
¤
/‹/› Navigation
Controls
specifically designed to address this prob7
8
9
10
11
12
with
lower47 frequency.
43
44
45 a 46
48
1 Each2 tap of
3 this
4
5
6
7
8 the
9
10
11
to
view
different
areas
of
lem. It first crops the bars off of the sides
13
14
15
16
17
18
button will decrease the
frequency
by one
13
14
15
16
17
enlarged
image.
7
8
9
10
11
12
of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3 pic19
20
21
22
23
24
increment.
When
the
tuner
receives
a
19
20
21
22
23
ture, and then performs a natural-looking
13
14
15
16
17
18 Tuning
25
26
27
28
29
30
Up/Forward
Search
strong enough signal for adequate recep25
26
27
28
29
nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
19
20
21
22
23
24
32
33
35
36 Press this button when the tuner
in 34 Button:
tion, MANUAL TUNED31will appear
31
32
33
34
35
screen.
25
26
27
28
29
30
37
38
39
40 is41in use
42 to change the station to one
37
38
39
40
41
the Lower Display Line E.
When
the
31
32
33
34
35
36 a 48
higher frequency.43 Each
tap45of this
47
4:3 – This mode may be used with pro44
46
47
tuner is in the Auto/Stereo 43mode,44press45 46 with
37
38
39
40
41
42
button
will increase the frequency by one
grams that are known to be in the 4:3
and hold the button to cause the tuner to
43
44
45
46
47
48
increment.
When the tuner receives a
aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect
scan for the next lower station with
strong
enough
signal for adequate recepratio is preserved unaltered, and black
acceptable signal strength, and stop. The
tion, MANUAL TUNED will appear in
bars will appear on the left and right
Lower Display Line E will indicate
the Lower Display Line E. When the
sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s
AUTO TUNED. When an FM Stereo
tuner
is in the Auto/Stereo mode, press
16:9 aspect ratio screen.
station is tuned, the display will read
and
hold
the button to cause the tuner
AUTO ST TUNED. When the tuner
The difference between the Frame and
to scan for the next higher station with
is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press
Letterbox functions is that the Frame
acceptable signal strength, and stop. The
and hold this button to scan downward
function allows access to the 4:3 and
Lower Display Line E will indicate
through the frequencies, and the tuner
4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly
AUTO TUNED. When an FM Stereo
will stop immediately when you release
useful for materials originating in the
station is tuned, the display will read
this button, even if no acceptable signal
4:3 format.
AUTO ST TUNED. When the tuner
is detected at that frequency. See page
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame functions
is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press
64 for more information.
are not available with the internal DVD/
and hold this button to scan downward
CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize
When an optical player source, such as
through the frequencies, and the tuner
function has been turned off using the
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
will stop immediately when you release
Screen setup menus. See page 57 for
this button to search quickly in reverse
this button, even if no acceptable signal
more information.
through the current track or chapter.
1
25
2
55
54
57
56
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
6
12
18
55 57
5424 56
30
4736
46
42
45
4448
43
42
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
51
50
49
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 37
43
42
43
42
is detected at that frequency. See page
43
64 for more information on using the42
tuner.
35
45 47
44 46
49
48
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
51
50
53
52
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
32
31
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
26
27
28
29
42
32
33
34
38
39
40
44
45
46
43
45 47
44 46
37 39 41 the internal DVD changer or an
43 45 47 49 When
51 53 55 57
37 41 player
47 51is in use, press the
40
When an optical player source, 42
such4434
as 4636 4838 external
50 52 DVD
54 56
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
the internal DVD changer, is in use,
press
top of this
button once to switch to the
35 37
35 39 45 49
32 3927 41
24 36
41
51 play mode. Each addithis button to search quickly forward
DVD
forward
37 slow
47
34 36
31 3828 40
34
23 53
35 55 57 38 44 48
45
49
51
36 40
33 4726
through the current track or43chapter.
tional
press
the
30 2529 37
33 46 of50
43 top of the button will
22
34
55 57
42 44
48 50 5235 5439 56
45 the
49
32 4627
2430 36
Depending
on the type of disc used
in29the
32
42 available slow-play
21 cycle
33 through
54
56
35 37
31 3928
34 38 44 48
23
28 41
31
31 35
32
20 speeds
internal DVD changer, each34additional
of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing
37 41
36
30 3829 40
33 47 51
43
22 34
press
the
bottom
of the button switches to the
51 will cycle through the
47
36
46
40
50
33available
29
32
42
26 25
21 33
30 37
46
scan50speeds as follows (available
slow49reverse play mode. Additional
35 DVD
28 scan
39
32 27
31 45
31 36
24
20 32
45
49 may differ for external
31 28
38
48the
speeds
optical
of the button
23 135 234 presses
3 444 of
5 bottom
6
44 48
30 29 22 34
33 cycles
43through the available slow-play
source devices):
7
8
9
10
11
12
43
29 30 21 33
32
42
speeds
of 1/2x,
1/4x
and 1/8x. No slow132
16
17
18
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video28discs:
4
5
42
6
31 12x,
32 14331 15
20 4x,
play
speeds
are available
for CDs or other
19
20
21
22
23
24
16x, 100x
7
8
9
10
11
12
disc
types.
25
26
27
28
29
30
13
14
15
16
17
18
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
31
32
33 System
34
35 Selector:
36
Press this button
192
20
21
22
23
24
1
3
4
5
6
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x 37
38 to39select
40 the41control
42 codes for the CVR700.
6
25
26
27
28
29
30
7
8
9
10
11
12
46
47
48
See
on 4332 4433 45
12 page 68 for more information
31
34
35
36 Selector: Press this button
13
14
15
16
17 Screen
18
using
the
internal
DVD
changer’s
trans37
38 43 39 45to40
41 the
42control
18
select
codes
47
49
51
53 55
57 for the
19
20
21
22
23
24
port
controls.
43
44
45 CVPD50
46
47 screen.
48
24
48
30
50
52 54
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
13
14
15
16
17
18
43
45 47
49
51
53 55
31
57
31
32
34 adjustments.
35
36
more information
on33 screen
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
37 31
38 activates
39
40 the
41List func42
This
button
also
34
38 44 48
28 23 35
47 51
44 29 45
43
3347TiVo48
22 See
tion50for 43
TiVo30players.
3446your
46
29
42
32
33 information
owner’s
more
45
49 manual30for21
28 31 20 32
31
44
48 List function.
on the
38
39
40
In37the DVD
mode,
press
button
35 41this
37 42
39 41 to
43
44 of45the next
46 34available
47 36 48
begin
play
38 disc
40 in 37
2
3
4
5
6
36
33 26 25 37
the changer.
41
40
8
9
10
11
12
35 39
32 27 24 36
When
used
with
most
this
14
15
16
17 31video
18 28 sources,
34 38
23 35
button
returns
to
the
previously
selected
30
33
43
20
21
22
23
24 29 22 34
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
29 30 21 33
broadcast
channel.
32
42
26
27
28
29
30
Buttons imn
optimize
28 31 20 32
1
2
3
4
5 picture
6
31
33
34
35
36Up/Down and
Picture/Channel
38
39
40
41
42
Slow
Play
Forward/Reverse
Button:
44
47
48JPEG still images
When
a45 disc46containing
1
2
3
is being played using the
internal
disc 4
7
8
9
changer, press the top of this button to10
13
14 the15disc 16
advance to the next image
on
or
19 return
20
the bottom of this button
to21 the 22
25
26
27
28
previous image.
32
31
33
34
When a cable television
box,32 satellite
37
38
39
40
receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVo device is in
43
44
45
46
use, press the top of this
button
to
tune
5
11
17
23
29
35
41
47
settings for a7 specific
viewing
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
The Broadcast
most
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
19 and20accurate,
21
22and23are opti24
tral,
balanced
6
25
26
27
28 settings
29
30are
mized for clarity.
The
Movies
12
31 bright.
32
33
34
35 settings
36
softer and less
The
Sports
18
37
38
39
40
41
42
are more vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast24
43
44
45
46
47
48
moving action.
30
36 OSD/Contrast Button: Press this
42
button
when the System mode is active
to48access the setup menu for the
CVR700’s audio functions. When the
53 55
52 54
57
56
32
33
34
35
36
34 36 35
38 37
40 39
35
373741
39 4141 47 51
37 JBL
38 On39Screen
40
41
42
Library/Settings/
41 51
47 51
375047
34
363640
38 4040
374641
33 26 34
37 38
25 36
43
4433 Button:
45
46
47
Distance
In
DVD
mode,
this
46but364946
40
50
364548
40
50
33
263537
32 27 24 26
25 3937
36 25
45 49
35
45
35
39
32the
39
49
32 27
ton accesses
JBL
On
Screen
Library,
27
36
36
24
31
34
44
24
38
48
28 23 35
31 23
44 48
34 44
31 28
344338
38 48
23 35
2833
35
30
which
screen
a thumbnail
22 34 on
29 displays
30 22
30 29
33 33 43 43
22 34
29 34
29
32
42
21
30 and
33
image
of32each32disc
cur29
29 description
42 42
21 33
21
30 33
28 31 20 30
31
32
56
33
43
22 34 cable
13 Screen
15
16 active,
18
29
used
When the
42 14 44 mode
46
48is
5017 52 press
54 56
19 with
20
21 and
22 satellite
23
24television to
32
42
21 33
30
19 35
21 the
23 settings
24
page
quickly
through
this button
to 20adjust
picture
37 39
4122
25
26
27
28 on-screen
29
30 menus.
31
31 20 32
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57 25 34 26 36 38
47for51
3729 4155
27 40
28 page
30
See
of the CVPD50 display.
31 Disc
32 Skip/Last
33
34 42
35 44 36
Channel
46 Buttons:
48 50 52 54 56
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
51
50
Buttons imn
optimize
1
2
3
4
5 picture
6
settings for a7 specific
viewing
8
9
10 medium.
11
12
The
Broadcast
most
neu13 settings
14
15are the
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
21
22and23are opti24
tral, balanced19 and20accurate,
7
8
9
10
11
12
25
26
27
28 settings
29
30are
mized for clarity.
The
Movies
13
14
15
16
17
18 35
31 bright.
32
33
34
36
softer and less
The
Sports
settings
4319 45 2047 49
51
53
21
22
23 554024 5741
37
38
39
42
are
more
vibrant
and
optimized
for
fast4225 44 2643
46 45
48
43
4550
47 52
515655
53 57
55
51544653
27
28 49
2949
30
43 47
44
45
47
48 57
moving
action.
42
44 48
46 48
50 54
52 56
54 56
35 37 42
39 44
41 46
50 52
41
36 Mode/Color/List Button:
Tone
37 41 47 51
35
36 39 41 Skip Buttons: When used with34 36 38 40
Reverse
35 37
37
38
39
40 This
41 button
42
controls the tone settings,
41 47 51
36 40 46 50
37 buttons
33 26 25 37
34 36
40 these
41
42 38
the
tuner,
scroll
through
the
43
44
45
46
47
48
enabling
adjustment
of the
bass and tre36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
35 39 45
49
32 27 24 36
preprogrammed
station presets.
47
48
boost
or
cut.
You
may
also
use it to
32 43
27 24
31 28ble
34
44
38
48
45 36
47 35
49 395145 5349 55 57
23 35
31 When
34 38
44 48
43the45
49
55 57
28 23
35
tone
a “flat”
33 47controls,
43 51for53
22 34
42
44 used
46 with
48 optical
50 52 sources,
54 56 such as 30 29disable
30 29 22 34
33
43
42 The
44
46 48
50
52 button
54 56
29
32
42
21
the
internal
disc
changer
or
an
external
response.
first
press
of
the
30
33
37 39 32
41
29 35
42
30 21 33
35 a TONE
37
31 39 41
20 32
41 47 button
51
CD 20
player,
once 28 31displays
37 forward
IN message in the
34
36 3238 press
40 the
28 31
31
41 47 51
36 38 40
36 40of 46
33
to skip
beginning
the 50
next track.
26 to25the37
Lower34Display
Line E.37To disable
the
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
35 39 45 49
32
36
43
Press27the24reverse
button
once to return to
controls,
press
the
⁄/¤
Navigation
35
45
39
49
32
27 24 36
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
42
1
2
331
4 until
5 the
6 display
track,
and
Controls
reads
1 the2 beginning
3
4 of 5the current
6
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
30 29 22 34
43
33
35
again
quickly
to
skip
to
the
begin30
TONE
OUT.
To
change
the
bass
or
tre7 once
33
43
8
9
10
11
12
7
8
9
10
11
12
22
29
34
29 30 21 33
42
32
29 30press
43 1345ning
47 of 49
51 53
5518 57When the
32
42 until 34
the
ble
again
28 14
16
33 18button
13
14 settings,
15
16 2117 this
31 15
32 17 31track.
20 previous
28 31 20 32
42 1944Pause
46 48
50 52
5424 been
56 pressed
31 in the Lower33
20
21
22
23 has
Button
the
19
20 desired
21
22control
23 appears
24
32
35 2537while
39 a41
26
27DVD28is playing,
29
30 the picture
Display
25
26
27 Line
28 E
29 and30in the on-screen
31
41 47
51
37 35
34 3136 32
38 40
33
34
36
advances
frame
by4 frame
each time the 31 display,
30
32
33 and34then35press
36 the⁄/¤
2
3
5 50 6
36
46
40
33 37 26 138
25 37
39
41
29
2 41 3 42 4
5
forward
skip4035
button
is42pressed.
Navigation
until
the6
37
38
39 1 40 Controls
39 45
49 12
32 43 27 744
8
24 36
45
469
4710
4811
28
desired
7 46 8 appears.
11
12
31 28
44 functions
43
44
45 setting
47 9 48 10
48
The23Page
and38Down
are
35 Up34
30
29
28
49
48
45 47 49
51 53 55 57
35 37 39 41
44 46 48 50 52 5437 56
41 47 51
34 36 38 40
35 37 39 3341 26 25 37
36 40 46 50
39 45 49
34 36 38 3240 27 37
36 4735 51
24 41
Screen
is active,
press
44 48
38 button
4634this
50
33 26 mode
23 40
35
25 3137 28 36
30contrast
22 of
to
the
CVPD50
34the
4533
39
49 43dis32 adjust
27 24
36 29 35
29 30 21 33
32 48 42
31 28
38 44
See23page
for more
information
on
play.
35 55 34
28 31 20 32
30 29 adjustments.
33
4331
22 34
screen
29 30 21 33
32
42
NOTE:
Movies
28 31 The
31
32
20 Sports/Broadcast/
in49to the
51 next
53 higher
55 57channel, or the bottom
tune52in to
48 to 50
54 the
56next lower channel.
46
26
27 42 2844 29
45 47 49
51 53 55 57 25
39
4430 46Preset/Page
48 50 52 Up/Down/Forward/
54 56 31
32
33 35 3437 35
45 47
44 46
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
28in 20
28 31
rently loaded
the
CVR700’s
internal
31 32
32
20
31 31
changer, including disc type and title
if available. Use the ⁄/¤/‹/›
1
2 1 3Controls
4 23 5 34
645 and
12
56 the
6
Navigation
10
111249 12 51
9 43
11 47select
Set
7 Button
8 7 9 7 8 to
10 8conveniently
11910 4512
1314 161415disc.
16
13 15loaded
17 46 171848 18 50
and
42
13 play
14 any
171516 4418
53 55
52 54
35
3724 39 41
20
21 mode,
22 this
23 button
In19the System
is used
2526
2627 3427
28
293040 30 37 41
25
28
29
28 from
29 36
30 38speaker
to25enter26the 27
distance
each
3132
3233 3333
31
34 2634
35 25 353637 36 36 40
32 4533 47
3449 35 51
36
53 55
57
to31the 43
listening
position
to avoid
unnatu3738
3839 3239
37
40 2740
41 24 414236 42 35 39
42
4445
48the
5253 54being
4931
51 42
55 565734
3843caused
39 4647
40
4150
ral37 sound
by
speakers
38
4344
4445
45
43
46 2846
47 23 474835 48
52 54 5633
35
3744
414830
43
44
45 3946
46
47 50from
placed
at42varying
distances
2948 22 the
34
41 51
51 55 57
3435 363743
383945
404129
4737
49
21473353 32
45listener,
47 49
51 could
53 55
5730
which
result
in delay
3637 4041 4647 505131
3334 263642
38
40
28
37
25
465631
48
2050 3252 54 56
44artifacts.
46 48 When
50 this
524454
button
is pressed,
3233 27262425 3637 3536 3940 4546 4950
35 37
39 41
37DIST
39 41FRONT
10FT
will
3132 28272324 35
34
4445 4849
35 3839appear
36
37 41 47 51
5140
3734 41364738
36in the
38 30
40
Lower
with
3334 E,
31 2928Display
44 48
2223 3435 Line
38 43
36 40 46 50
3633 402646255037
26FRONT
37
25 29
13233 flashing.
2 4243
3
4
5
30 and
10FT
302921
22 3334 both
35
39 45 49
32
45244936
27 24 28
3629 3135 3927
2021 3233 73132
42
3031
8select
9
10
11
Press
the
Set
Button
to
34 38 44 48
28 23 3528 34 382844234835
31
313020group,
32 and
43 17
13 34FRONT
14 33 15
16
33
294322
29the22front
34 speaker
32 21
42 23
the
⁄20/¤
3229 Use
304221
21stop
19 33
22
30will
33 flashing.
28 31 20 32
3127
31
31Navigation
20 321
2
3
5 select
6 the28
Controls
to26
254
29
4
5
desired distance,
the
Set
7 1
8 2 and
9 3 press
10
11
12
31
32
33 6
34
35
11 18
12 40
to9 enter
the
Button 13 7 again
37
38Use
39
41
14 8
15
16 10 it.17
2 6 43
⁄
Controls
2 /¤3Navigation
185 46 6 47
44 174 45
19 13 4 20 141 5 21 15
22 163 23
24to
scroll
through
12
207 11remaining
8
925 19 10 26the
27 218 12 28 229 speaker
29 2310 30 2411
groups:
CENTER,
1317 33 27SIDE-S
1418 34 2815 35 2916 (side
18
36 3017
14
1531 25 16 32 26
surround,
surround)
or BACK-S
3421 41 35
1923 39 332024 40(back
22 42 3623
24
20
2137 31 22 38 32
available
only after
6.1-channel
bit2529 45a3926
30
26
2743 37 2844 38
30 46 4027 47 4128 48 4229
stream
has been3135detected).
453236 4633
4734
4835
36
32
33 43 34 44
19
1920
2021
21
22
22
23
2324
57
56
24
3842 Input
39
40
41
38 Menu/Info/Audio
39
40 3741
Selector:
4347 button
4448 accesses
45
46 the
47
46 this
In44DVD45mode,
menu on the current disc, enabling you to
select the main feature or accompanying
featurettes for playback or make other
selections, depending on how the disc is
programmed.
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
42
48
In System mode, press this button to
assign one of the Digital Audio Inputs
9)cdefhijk to a source.
See page 60 for more information on
using digital inputs.
37
31 20 32
31
CVR700 OM 43
12/17/04
PM 55Page
45 47 49 4:24
51 53
57 38
38
42
44 46
48
50
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
1
36 38
41
2
40
3
26 7
8
37
25
2713 24
2819 23
29 22
25
30 21
31
31 20
36
14
35
20
34
33
32
32
26
37
38
43
44
1
2
3
7
8
9
13
14
15
19
20
21
25
26
27
31
32
33
37
38
39
43
44
45
52 54
4
37 41
10
40
35 39
15
16
34 38
21
22
33
936
27
28
33
34
32
31
56
5
47
4611
4517
44
23
43
51
50
49
48
6
12
18
24
29
30
35
36
42
40
41Off (All):
42
Power
Press this button
46 the47CVR700
48 and CVPD50, or a
to45place
selected
device,
in the Standby mode.
4
5
6
39
Press
and
10
11 hold
12 this button to place all
devices,
including
the CVR700, the
16
17
18
CVPD50
and24any other products whose
22
23
codes
you have
programmed into the
28
29
30
remote,
into
the
Standby mode.
34
35
36
40 IR
41 Transmitter/Receiver:
42
The
46
47 emitters
48
infrared
and receivers behind
the plastic lens at the top of the remote
communicate the remote codes to the
CVR700 and other programmed devices.
Be certain that the lens is not covered
when using the remote, and point the
lens toward the CVR700 for the best
results. In learning mode, the remote
receives IR codes to be learned through
a receiver behind the lens. See page 93
for more information on learning remote
codes.
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 39
INSTALLING AND CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT
1238,8 1
IMPORTANT NOTES:
• Never attempt to lift the CVPD50 plasma
screen by yourself. Always make sure
an assistant is available to lift the plasma
screen with you.
• Do not block the ventilation holes of
the CVR700, and make sure that air can
circulate freely around it.
• Read through this manual before beginning installation.
• Remember to observe the color coding
when connecting audio and video
cables.
Recommended Placement
The JBL Cinema Vision system will
provide the best results when installed
in a rectangular room, with the screen
installed on one of the shorter walls.
5x45
80,50
The bracket must be installed in wood
studs; there is no wall-anchor option. The
slot holes in the bracket are designed to
accommodate 16-inch on-center wall
studs. See the illustration (Figure 1) for
the dimensions of the bracket.
515 1
713,40 1
950,1 3
754,8 1
1106,50
80,61 5
255,6 2
5-1/2"
20-1/4"
16"
Figure 1
The bracket must be installed using four
lag bolts, each at least 1/4 inch in diameter. Each bolt must be long enough to
engage in the stud by at least 2 inches.
Abwicklung
M1:5
In order to avoid splintering the wall
studs, it is necessary to drill pilot holes
for each lag bolt.
The JBL Cinema Vision speaker system
may be used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel applications. Your system includes enough
loudspeakers for a 5.1-channel system.
Additional pairs of CVSAT50 satellite
speakers are available from your JBL
dealer or custom installer, along with
pairs of CVSAT50 table stands, should
you wish to upgrade to a 7.1-channel
system.
If desired, a second subwoofer may be
added to create a 5.2 or 7.2 system. If so,
30/4x
R 20
3,20
3x45 /4x
Gratseite
32
14,5
In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, it is
best to aim all of the speakers (except the
subwoofer) toward the listening position
at about ear-level height. The low-frequency material reproduced by the subwoofer is mostly omnidirectional, and this
speaker may be placed in a convenient
location in the room. However, bass
reproduction will be maximized when the
subwoofer is placed in a corner along
the same wall as the front speakers.
Experiment with subwoofer placement by
temporarily placing the subwoofer in the
listening position and moving around the
room until the bass reproduction is best.
Place the subwoofer in that location.
R 4,
120
50
02
02
3,75
R 49
Use a carpenter’s level to ensure that the
bracket is installed squarely. You will
observe that the bracket uses slotholes
to assist you in making adjustments to
level the bracket before fully tightening
the lag bolts.
9
The center channel speaker should be
placed slightly behind the front left and
right speakers, and no more than 2 feet
above or below the tweeters of the left
and right speakers. This placement may
be obtained by placing the CVPD50
screen, and the left, right and center
speakers on a credenza using the included
pair of CVTS50 table stands for the left
and right CVSAT50 speakers, and the
included credenza stand for the CVPD50
screen and CVCEN50 center speaker.
5
25
10x45
01
20
13
/2x
33,7
0
4,5
∞
∞
33,7
106
48
581,7
The front speakers should be placed the
same distance from each other as they
are from the listening position. They
should be placed at about the same
height from the floor as the listeners’
ears will be, or they may be angled
toward the listeners.
50,50
In 5.1-channel applications, two of the
surround speakers should be placed
slightly behind the listening position and,
ideally, should face each other and be at
a level higher than the listeners’ ears. If
that is not possible, they may be placed
on a wall behind the listening position,
facing forward. In 7.1-channel applications, place two of the surround speakers
in the side positions, and place the two
surround back speakers on the rear wall.
It is appropriate to configure the CVR700
for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,
but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-channel program material or a 6.1-channel
processing mode is in use, material for
the surround back channel will be outputted simultaneously through both
the Surround Back Left and Right
Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only
one loudspeaker to these speaker terminals will not only deprive you of the benefits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such
as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the
functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,
as described on page 51. It may also put
undesirable strain on the surround back
amplifier circuits and power supplies.
ware and/or bracket installation. Be sure
to follow these bracket assembly and
installation instructions carefully. If
you have any questions or doubts about
your ability to correctly wall-mount the
CVPD50 plasma display, consult with your
authorized JBL dealer or custom installer.
17-3/4"
connect one end of a Y-adaptor interconnect to the Subwoofer Output §, and
connect each end to the LFE input of a
powered subwoofer.
88,34 3
622
Before unpacking and placing the JBL
Cinema Vision components, it is important to select appropriate locations for
each component. Make sure that all
power switches are turned off and all
equipment remains unplugged from AC
power until the system is completely
installed and connected in order to prevent electric shock, or transient signals
that may damage equipment.
514
CVR700 OM
490
12,35
636,6
450
Wall-Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma
Display
Due to its weight and fragility, there are
special concerns in wall-mounting the
CVPD50 screen. The customer is solely
responsible for proper selection of mounting hardware not included with the
CVPD50 plasma screen, and for proper
installation of the wall bracket, including
but not limited to the selection of appropriate weight-bearing supports and proper
use of the bracket. JBL disclaims any liability for the selection of mounting hard-
Figure 2
Once the bracket has been installed. Two
people may carefully lift the CVPD50
screen and lower it onto the bracket so
that the two hooks on either side of the
bracket engage in the openings on the
underside of the CVPD50.
Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display
On the Included Credenza Stand
If wall-mounting the CVPD50 plasma
screen is not convenient or practical, you
may prefer to install the CVPD50 on a credenza or other sturdy piece of furniture
using the included credenza stand. In
addition to offering an elegant appear-
39
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 40
ance that matches that of the optional
CVTS50 speaker stands, the stand
includes a cradle for placement of the
center speaker.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES:
• The credenza stand consists of three
main parts: two metal columns and a
glass base. Be extremely careful in
handling the fragile glass base to
avoid breakage that might result in
personal injury.
• The credenza stand is only intended for
use with the CVPD50 plasma screen.
Attempting to use the stand with any
other model plasma screen or any
other device is unsafe and may result
in personal injury and damage to the
equipment.
950,1 3
754,8 1
1106,50
713,40 1
622
1238,8 1
• The stand must be placed in a safe
location, protected from young children
88,34 3
and pets who might topple the
stand,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
Never place the stand so that any part
of it is sticking out over the edge of
the credenza, table, shelf or other surface underneath it.
• Make certain that your credenza or
other furniture is capable of supporting
the weight of the CVPD50 in a stable
fashion.
515 1
80,61 5
• If it becomes necessary
to move the
255,6 2
CVPD50 to another location, two people
should carry it by holding the plasma
screen. Do not attempt to carry the
CVPD50 while holding it by the stand.
To ensure a proper fit, GENTLY place the
plasma display on a carpeted floor with
one end up. Make sure that the screen
itself is at all times perpendicular to the
floor. While one person holds the unit
steady, the other person should check the
fit of each column in the two openings on
the underside of the unit. Loosen, move
and retighten the column feet until a
proper and secure fit is achieved. Then
secure the columns in their openings
using the two supplied hex bolts and the
same 5mm hex wrench you used to
attach the feet to the columns.
This method is preferable to placing the
stand on the credenza and lowering the
plasma display onto it, which may cause
the installers to place the display’s
weight unevenly on the columns for a
moment, causing the glass base to snap,
which may result in personal injury.
It is the responsibility of the person
installing the display to properly and
securely mount the credenza stand to the
plasma display.
Two people may now right the CVPD50
and carefully place it in the desired location. Do not lean the CVPD50 on the
stand while righting it, as this will cause
the glass to snap, possibly resulting in
personal injury. Carry the assembly by
holding the bottom and sides of the
CVPD50 plasma display itself, not by
holding the stand.
5-1/2"
20-1/4"
of opening a new world of video enjoyment with sharpness and beauty far
beyond any television you have ever
owned. As this may be the first plasma
display device you have ever owned, it is
important to be aware of some unique
properties of this technology.
A plasma display works by using a grid
containing millions of “cells”, each filled
with phosphorous that glows in red,
green or blue when it receives an electrical charge. The charge is supplied by a
wired grid that allows the video processing logic to pinpoint each individual cell
to determine whether or not to turn it
“on”. The cells are sandwiched by glass
plates that seal the phosphorous in place.
The combination of cells, known as pixels
in video display terminology, when properly functioning can present a color picture with incredibly high resolution.
Given its construction, the CVPD50 is very
fragile, and requires extreme care in handling. Once installed, it’s easy to use,
although there are a few points for you
to be aware of.
1. It is possible for a phenomenon known
as “burn-in” to occur when the phosphorous cells remain turned on for too
long a stretch of time. This is liable to
occur when a still image, such as a
menu screen or even the CVPD50’s
own start-up screen, remains on
screen for more than a few minutes.
In order to protect against burn-in, the
CVPD50’s screen saver will be activated
after it detects 2 minutes of no movement on screen. It is not possible to
disable the screen saver.
17-3/4"
saver
43However,
45 47 the
49 screen
51 53
55 does
57 not
42function
44 46 for48the 50
54 Therefore,
56
DVI 52
source.
Figure 4
Figure 3
16"
Each column is made up of two parts: the
main column and the top foot. Using the
supplied bolts, attach each foot to its column, but do not fully tighten the bolts.
Use a 5mm hex key (not supplied).
Carefully insert the glass base into the
slot in the column, making sure to line up
each column flush with the edge of the
base. This will insure that the base is
installed evenly for maximum stability
and so that the columns will line up properly with the openings on the underside
of the CVPD50.
40
After the video cable has been connected
to the CVPD50 as described below, and
after the speaker wire has been connected
to the CVCEN50 speaker as described in
its owner’s manual, you may carefully
place the CVCEN50 speaker in the cradle
below the screen formed by the two top
feet of the credenza stand. The bottom of
the grille will fit snugly behind the two
stops at the front of the top feet.
Important Information About the
CVPD50 Plasma Display
Your new JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50
high-definition plasma display is capable
35it is
37crucial
39 41
that you set your source
37its41
47 51
34device
36 38
40
to activate
screen
saver
after47
43 45
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
42 par44 46
2 minutes of inactivity
on screen,
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
35 37 39
if you are
the CVPD50
31ticularly
34 using
38 44 48
28 23 35
34
36 38
your
computer,
where
an
image
30with
33
43
22
29
34
33 26
29such
as
a
spreadsheet
may
remain
on 25
32
42
30 21 33
32 27 24
28screen
31 20
for 32
a long31period of time.
31 28 23
Burn-in is also of concern when30you29are22
29 30
listening to audio CDs, which have
no 21
28 31 20
1visual2 information
3
4 so 5that the
6
CVPD50’s
8 screen
9
10
11 on.
12 You may
start-up
remains
15
16the Screen
17
18 Standby
wish 14to activate
1 in 2
19function,
20
21
22
23 the24screen
which
places
7
8
25
26 mode,
27
28 pressing
29
30the Screen
standby
by
e
Selector
31
32
33
34 followed
35
36 by the
13
14
Screen
Y 19 . 20
37
38 Standby
39
40 Button
41
42
43Press44the button
45
46again
47 to restore
48
25 the 26
video display.
31
32
49
48
41
40
37
36
35
34
33
32
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
7
13
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 41
The following tips can help you avoid
burn-in:
4. There are ergonomic concerns that
apply generally to reduce viewer
fatigue and eyestrain.
• Be particularly careful during the first
100 hours of use to display mainly
moving images or frequently changing
still images.
• Use your display in full-screen (16:9)
format, rather than letterbox (black
47 or
49
bars at top and bottom43of 45
screen)
4:3 (black bars to left 42
and 44
right46of 48
35 37 39 41
screen).
34
36 38
40
• Remember to activate33your26comput25 37
when
er’s own screen saver32
27 using
24 36
31 also
23 35
28 holds
it with the CVPD50. This
30 29 22 34
for a DVD player or other
device con29 30 21 33
nected to the DVI input.
28 31 20 32
• Even after the first 100 hours of use,
try to display moving images as much
of the time as possible.1
2
3
• The optimal viewing distance for the
50-inch CVPD50 plasma display is 12
to 16 feet.
51
50
37
36
35
34
33
• The background lighting in the room
should be sufficient to read by, as
53 55
57
too much
light reduces the contrast,
52 54 56
and too little light is difficult for your
eyes to adjust to.
41 47 51
When
40• 46
50 using the CVPD50 plasma dis39 45
play49
with your computer, select fonts
38 44
and 48
backgrounds that are rich in con43
trast, such as a black font on a white
background, to avoid eye fatigue that
can result from using red or blue
fonts on a dark background.
32
31
42
4
5
6
7
9
• Switch off the display when
it8 is not
being used by pressing 13the Screen
14
15
Standby Button Y 19 as20 21
described above.
25
26
27
10
11
12
31
32and 33
• Avoid increasing the contrast
37
38
39
brightness settings.
43
44
45
• Whenever possible, choose to display
images containing a variety of colors
and color shades.
16
17
18
22
23
24
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
2. Although extreme care is taken during
the manufacturing process, it is possible that your CVPD50 plasma display
will at some point develop some minor
pixel dropouts. It is extremely unlikely
that this will occur or be noticeable
and, as such, in most cases it will not
be considered a sufficient defect for
warranty replacement (repair of individual pixels is not possible). Should
you have any concerns, kindly contact
your custom installer for further
guidance.
3. Over a long period of time, the natural
consumption of the phosphorous layer
may result in a slight loss of brightness
or contrast. This is normal, and should
not be noticeable.
41
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 42
Basic Installation
The JBL Cinema Vision system offers a variety of entertainment options, including playback of DVDs and CDs, and radio listening,
and it may be enjoyed with no additional
equipment. However, it is also compatible
with most available audio/video devices.
IMPORTANT NOTE: For your personal
safety and to avoid possible damage to
your equipment and speakers, it is
always a good practice to turn off and
unplug the CVR700, CVPD50 and ALL
source equipment from AC power before
making any audio or video system connections.
Step One: Connect the Front, Center,
Surround and Surround Back Speaker
Outputs ¡™£¢ to the respective
speakers.
To ensure that all the audio signals are
carried to your speakers without loss of
clarity or resolution, we suggest that you
use high-quality speaker cable. Many
brands of cable are available and the
choice of cable may be influenced by the
distance between your speakers and the
receiver, the type of speakers you use, personal preferences and other factors. Your
dealer or installer is a valuable resource
to consult in selecting the proper cable.
Regardless of the brand of cable selected,
we recommend that you use a cable constructed of multistrand copper with a
gauge of 14 or smaller. Remember that in
specifying cable, the lower the number,
the thicker the cable. Cable with a gauge
of 16 may be used for short runs of less
than 3 meters (10 feet). We do not recommend that you use cables with an AWG
equivalent of 18 or higher, due to the
power loss and degradation in performance that will occur. Cables that are run
inside walls should have the appropriate
markings to indicate listing with UL, CSA
or other appropriate testing agency standards. Questions about running cables
inside walls should be referred to your
installer or a licensed electrician who is
familiar with the NEC and/or the applicable local building codes in your area.
When connecting wires to the speakers,
be certain to observe proper polarity.
Note that the positive (+) terminal of each
speaker connection now carries a specific
color code, as noted on page 20. However, most speakers still use a red
terminal for the positive (+) connection.
Connect the “negative” or “black” wire to
the same terminal on both the receiver
and the speaker.
42
NOTE: While most speaker manufacturers adhere to an industry convention of
using black terminals for negative and
red ones for positive, some may vary from
this configuration. To ensure proper
phase and optimal performance, consult
the identification plate on your speaker
or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity.
If you do not know the polarity of your
speaker, ask your dealer for advice before
proceeding, or consult the manufacturer.
We also recommend that the length of
cable used to connect speaker pairs be
identical. For example, use the same
length piece of cable to connect the
front-left and front-right or surround-left
and surround-right speakers, even if the
speakers are a different distance from
the CVR700.
It is appropriate to configure the CVR700
for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,
but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-channel program material or a 6.1-channel
processing mode is in use, material for
the surround back channel will be outputted simultaneously through both
the Back Surround Left and Right
Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only
one loudspeaker to these speaker terminals will not only deprive you of the benefits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such
as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the
functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,
as described on page 51. It may also put
undesirable strain on the surround back
amplifier circuits and power supplies.
Connections to a subwoofer are normally
made via a line-level audio connection
from the Subwoofer Output § to the
line-level input of a subwoofer with a
built-in amplifier.
Speaker Placement
Front Speakers
Center Channel Speaker
Subwoofer
Surround Speakers
†
†
†
†
5 — 6 ft
1.5 — 1.8m
†Alternate placement for surround speakers when only 5.1 channels are used;
required placement for back surround
speakers in 7.1-channel systems.
The front speakers should be placed the
same distance from each other as they are
from the listening position. They should be
placed at about the same height from the
floor as the listeners’ ears will be, or they
may be angled toward the listeners.
The center channel speaker should be
placed slightly behind the front left and
right speakers, and no more than 2 feet
above or below the tweeters of the left
and right speakers. It may be convenient
to place the center speaker in the cradle
of the CVPD50 credenza stand, as shown
in the drawing.
The JBL Cinema Vision system may be
used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel applications. In
5.1-channel applications, two of the surround
speakers should be placed slightly behind
the listening position and, ideally, should
face each other and be at a level higher
than the listeners’ ears. If that is not possible,
they may be placed on a wall behind the
listening position, facing forward.
NOTE: In 5.1-channel systems, the
two rear speakers are called simply the
surround speakers, whether they are
placed to the sides of or behind the
listening position. In 7.1-channel systems,
there are four surround speakers, two of
which are referred to as side surround
speakers, due to their placement to the
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 43
49
48
sides of the listening position. The two
remaining speakers are referred to as
back surround speakers, as they are
placed in back of (behind) the listening
position. In 7.1-channel applications,
place two of the surround speakers in the
side positions, and place the two back
surround speakers on the rear wall.
The low-frequency material reproduced by
the subwoofer is mostly omnidirectional,
and this speaker may be placed in a convenient location in the room. However,
bass reproduction will be maximized when
the subwoofer is placed in a corner, along
the same wall as the front speakers.
Experiment with subwoofer placement by
temporarily placing the subwoofer in the
listening position and moving around the
room until the bass reproduction is best.
Place the subwoofer in that location.
31 the32AC power
33
34cord35is located
36
The jack for
37
38
39
40
41
on the left side of the CVPD50. Make42
43
44power
45 switch
46
47
sure the master
next
to48 the
jack is in the “0” position before plugging
in the AC power cord. Again, a mirror
may be helpful in locating the jack and
49 47 45 43
switch. Do not turn the master power
48 46 44 42
switch to the “1” or on position until after
35 37 39 41
all components have been connected.
36 38
40
28
31 20 32
37 41 47
46
45
44
43
31
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
32
42the
antenna
to
31 . The FM
antenna may be an external roof antenna,
an inside powered or wire-lead antenna
or a connection from a cable TV system.
If the antenna or connection uses 300ohm twin-lead cable, you must use an
optional 300-ohm-to-75-ohm adaptor to
make the connection.
If you would like to install any external
source devices in your system, proceed
to Step Four below. Otherwise, you are
almost ready to begin enjoying your JBL
Cinema Vision home theater system.
Step Two: Thanks to its sophisticated
43 45 47
49
51 is53
video processor,
the CVR700
able55to 57
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
upconvert composite, S-video and compo35 37 39 41
nent video
source signals for a single37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
cable connection
to the screen.
Connect
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
™
the included
proprietary
JBL
Digital
35 39 45Link
49
32 27 24 36
cable to31
the 28
Output
34Cinema
38 44 48
23 to
35 JBL
30 29 22
43back
33 on the
Vision CVPD50
Screen
34
29 30 and
42 on
21 to
33the 32
of the CVR700,
digital input
28
31 The connecthe underside31of20
the 32
CVPD50.
tor is located on the right side of the
screen when facing it. You may wish to
1 to assist
2
3 you in
4 orienting
5
6 the
use a mirror
7
8 correctly.
9
10
12
cable connector
Note11that this
cable uses13 a proprietary
system,
14
15
16
17 and18
should not19 be connected
to22 any23display
20
21
24
device other
25 than
26 the27CVPD50.
28
29
30
34
43
42
35 37 39 41
34 36 38 40
33 26 25 37
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
30 29 22 34
29 the
21 33FM
Connect
30supplied
28 31Connection
20 32
FM (75-ohm)
In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, such as
JBL Cinema Vision, it is best to aim all of
the speakers (except the subwoofer)
toward the listening position at about earlevel height.
Step Three:33
Assemble
supplied
36 40
26 25the37
35 at39
AM Loop Antenna
so that
32 27
36 tabs
24 the
34 38
the bottom of31the 28
antenna
loop snap
23 35
33
22 34
into the holes30in the
Connect
29 base.
29 30 Terminals
32 .
21 33
it to the AM Antenna
47 45
46 44
42
Step Four: You may wish to install additional components to your system. We recommend installing devices to the source
input jacks labeled for the corresponding
device type to benefit from both the preassignment of digital audio inputs, and the
programming of the two remote controls.
Audio/video components require that
both an audio and a video connection be
made. The type of connection will depend
on the capabilities of your component.
Audio connections may be analog or digital. We recommend using digital audio
connections whenever possible for superior sound reproduction. You may also
wish to make analog audio connections
as a backup.
Video connections for most devices may
be composite video (yellow jacks), Svideo (four-pin connector) or component
(Y/Pr/Pb – green, red and blue jacks)
video. Choose only one type of video
connection for each source component.
Whenever possible, we recommend using
component video connections for the best
quality. S-video provides an excellent
alternative, and composite video may be
used when neither S-video or component
video signals are available. As mentioned
above, the CVR700 will upconvert each
51
video format to the proper digital video
50
format for the CVPD50. However, if you
49
are using another display device, you will
48
need to make a video monitor output connection to the display corresponding to
each type of video format used by your
source components.
NOTES:
• The input source selectors and their
associated control codes on each of
the two remotes are preprogrammed to
operate only certain types of devices,
as listed below, although you may connect any compatible audio/video device
to any of the inputs. Although you may
reprogram an input selector on the
main remote control so that its device
type matches the device you wish to
connect, the secondary remote’s input
selectors may not be reprogrammed.
Therefore, we recommend that you connect compatible devices to each source.
Input
Device Types Preprogrammed
Source In Main Remote
AUX
TV, HD Tuner, VCR/Combo,
DVD, CD, CABLE, SAT
VCR
VCR/Combo
CBL/SAT CABLE, SAT, HD Tuner
GAME/ GAME, CAMCORDER
CAM
DR
DVDR, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVR
DVI/
COMP
DVI/DVD, DVI/CABLE,
DVI/SAT, HD Tuner
• The analog and digital audio connections, as well as the composite, Svideo and component video connections, are dedicated to each source
input as labeled and may not be reassigned to another source. Be certain to
make all of the connections for each
source device to the correct jacks.
Cable/Satellite Source Input
Since the JBL Cinema Vision system does
not include a TV tuner, you may wish to
connect a cable TV box, satellite TV
receiver, HDTV set-top tuner or another
device capable of receiving TV broadcasts to the CVR700. This device should
be connected to the Cable/Sat source
input jacks. Select either the Cable/
Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input
d or the Cable/Satellite Optical
Digital Audio Input i for your digital
audio connection. If desired, connect the
analog audio outputs of the component
to the Cable/Satellite Analog Audio
Inputs ‹. If available, connect the component video outputs of your device to
the Cable/Satellite Component Video
Inputs °. Otherwise, connect either an
S-video or composite video output from
the component to the Cable/Satellite
Analog Video Inputs ‹.
NOTE: When using a source connected
via the Cable/Satellite Component
Video Inputs °, due to limitations in
the CVR700’s audio section, it is necessary to also connect the corresponding
43
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 44
43
42
Cable/Satellite Analog S-Video Input
‹ in order to view the CVR700’s audio
on-screen menu system.
Next, connect the VCR Analog Audio
Outputs ¤ to the analog audio record
inputs on your recorder. Connect the
same type of VCR Analog Video Output
¤ (composite or S-video) that you used
for the input to the CVR700 to the record
input of your device.
Digital Recorder Source Input
If you have a personal video recorder
(PVR), such as a TiVo, we recommend
that you connect it to the Digital Recorder
(DR) source input and output jacks.
Alternatively, use the Digital Recorder
source for a DVD Recorder, a CD recorder,
a MiniDisc recorder, a tape deck or any
other audio or A/V recording device.
Select either the Digital Recorder
Coaxial Digital Audio Input f or the
Digital Recorder Optical Digital
Audio Input j for your digital audio
connection (but not both), and connect
the appropriate digital audio output on
the recorder to the corresponding digital
audio input. If desired, connect the analog audio outputs of the recorder to the
Digital Recorder Analog Inputs ª.
DVI/Computer Source Input
Due to its advanced video processing and
reproduction capabilities, the JBL Cinema
Vision system may be used with your personal computer (PC) for no-compromise
video displays. A dedicated DVI (digital
video interface) may be used with compatible computers to enjoy activities from
video games to surfing the Internet. The
large screen is perfect for displaying presentations to a group, or simply for providing a better view of an intricate
spreadsheet. This source input may also
be used with the latest compatible DVD
players or other devices with high-quality
DVI video outputs.
For PVRs and DVD recorders, connect the
component video outputs to the Digital
Recorder Component Video Inputs
‡. Note that there are no corresponding
component video outputs, as copy-protection measures incorporated in most
devices prohibit recording component
video signals due to their high quality.
Alternatively, you may connect the composite or S-video outputs of your recorder
to the Digital Recorder Analog S-Video
Input ª, but note that a separate source
is available for analog VCRs.
Select either the DVI/Computer Coaxial
Digital Audio Input f or the DVI/
Computer Optical Digital Audio Input
k for connecting the corresponding digital audio output on your PC. Alternatively,
or as a backup, connect the analog audio
outputs on your PC to the DVI/Computer
Analog Audio Inputs ¶. If your PC’s
analog audio output is a stereo 1/8-inch
mini-jack, you will need to supply a Ycable with a stereo 1/8-inch mini-plug
at one end and conventional left and
right analog audio interconnect plugs
at the other.
Connect either the Coaxial Digital
Audio Output b or the Optical Digital
Audio Output g to the corresponding
record input on your recording device. If
you also connect the Digital Recorder
Analog Audio Outputs ‚ to the analog
record inputs on your device, remember to
select the correct input on your recorder.
Connect the video output port on your
PC to the DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video
Input 5.
If your computer has an analog VGA
video output instead of a DVI output, you
may use the included VGA-to-DVI adaptor
43 or45
49 to
51connect
53 55
57
video
Connect either the composite video
S- 47 cable
the computer’s
Video
video Digital Recorder Analog42
to the
44 46 output
48 50
52DVI
54(HDCP)/Computer
56
Output ‚ to the corresponding 35
Input 5.
record
37 39 Video
41
input on your recording device. 34 36 38 NOTE:
41using
37
47 a51
40
When
source connected
33 26
32 27
If you have an analog VCR or other
ana31 28
log recording device, we recommend that
30
you connect it to the VCR source input29
29 30
and output jacks.
28 31
VCR Source Input
Connect the analog audio outputs of the
recorder to the VCR Analog Audio
Inputs ⁄. If available, connect the Svideo output of your recorder to the1 VCR 2
use 8
Analog Video Input ⁄. Otherwise,
7
the composite video jacks.
44
25
24
23
22
21
20
13
14
46 50
via
DVI 40
(HDCP)/Computer
Video
37 the 36
35 , it39is not
45 possible
49
to view the
Input
36
34 video
44 48 menu system.
38 on-screen
CVR700’s
35
33 although
43 you may access the
In
34addition,
32
42 attempt to do so, you
audio
if you
33 menus,
will
lose the video signal at
31
32 temporarily
the DVI input. If the last previous source
used provided an S-video signal, such as
an external VCR, then that signal will
3
4when5you attempt
6
to access the
appear
on-screen
9
10 menus
11 while
12 using the
DVI/Computer
source.18
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
IMPORTANT:
Saver
35 39
45 function
49
32 27 24 The
36 Screen
44 DVI
does31not28
operate
when34using
38 the
48
23 35
30input.
33
43 an
29 22
34
video
Therefore,
to prevent
29 30 21 33
32 your CVPD50
42
image
from burning into
28 31 20 32
31
screen, it is extremely important that you
activate the Screen Saver function on
your PC or other DVI device. If none is
1
2 recommend
3
4
5
6
available,
we
you
place
the
7 screen
8
10 mode
11
CVPD50
in9 Sleep
by12press13 Screen
14
15
16
17
18Button
Standby/Sleep
ing the
21 remote
22
23
24
Y 19 on20either
when
you
25
26
28
29will 30
anticipate
that
a27still image
remain
31
32 more
33 than
34 a few
35
36
on screen
for
minutes.
37
38
39
40
41
A/V Auxiliary
Source
Input
43
44
45
46
47
42
48
An auxiliary audio/video source input is
provided in case you have an additional
component you’d like to connect to your
JBL Cinema Vision system, such as an
additional cable television box, satellite
receiver, HDTV tuner, laserdisc player, or
any other audio/video device. Do not connect a turntable to this input unless you
are using it with a phono preamp with
conventional analog audio outputs.
Connect the coaxial or optical digital
audio output of the device to the
Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input
c or the Auxiliary Optical Digital
Audio Input h. As a backup, you may
wish to connect the device’s analog audio
outputs to the Auxiliary Analog Audio
Inputs •. If the device has composite or
S-video outputs, connect one or the other
to the corresponding Auxiliary Analog
Video Input •.
Main Room Remote Control
Extension
An infrared receiver located on the front
of the CVPD50 is capable of receiving
control commands for both the CVPD50
and the CVR700, enabling you to place
the CVR700 inside a cabinet. If you wish
to control an external source component
that is also hidden from view, simply connect the CVR700’s Remote IR Output
Jack fi to the Remote IR input jack on
compatible equipment. Now you may
simply point the remote control at the
plasma screen to send commands to any
device in your JBL Cinema Vision system.
If the CVR700 is used without the CVPD50
and is placed inside a cabinet or other
location that prevents the remote sensor
from receiving commands, an optional
remote IR sensor may be connected to the
Remote IR Input Jack fl.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
42
44 46
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
CONFIGURATION 29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
4:24 PM
SYSTEM
Page 45
25
24
23
22
21
20
50
52 54
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
43
42
35
NOTE: All remotely controlled components must be linked together in a “daisy
chain.” Connect the IR OUT jack of one
unit to the IR IN of the next to establish
this chain.
You are now ready to power up the system, make minor configuration settings,
and then begin enjoying your JBL Cinema
Vision system.
1. Plug the AC power cords for the CVPD50,
CVR700 and any source devices into
unswitched AC outlets. Make sure the
master power switch on the underside of
the CVPD50 (next to the power cord jack)
is in the “1” position. Use a small mirror
to locate the switch. The LED inside the
Main Power On/Off Switch 1 on the
CVR700 will turn red, indicating that the
unit is in Standby mode. The LED on the
front of the CVPD50 will turn amber, indicating that it, too, is in Standby mode.
NOTE: It is possible to see the LED on the43
front panel of the CVPD50 flashing red and42
yellow alternately even though you have 35
unplugged the CVPD50’s power cord. This 34
is
because the CVPD50 also receives power 33
through its connection to the CVR700 in 32
order to trigger turn-on when the CVR700 is31
powered on for seamless operation; this is 30
normal. However, the CVPD50’s power cord29
28
must be plugged in for proper operation; the
LED will flash when the CVR700 is turned
on to alert you that the power cord is
unplugged. If the CVPD50 does not turn on
when the CVR700 is powered up and the 1
LED on the CVPD50 is not flashing red and 7
yellow, then turn off both units, unplug them13
both from AC power, unplug the JBL Digital
19
Link cable that connects them and then
reconnect everything. If this does not resyn- 25
31
chronize the components, contact your
authorized JBL custom installer or dealer for37
assistance.
43
2. Remove the protective plastic film from
the front-panel lens. If left in place, the
film will affect the performance of your
remote control.
3. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in
the main remote as shown in Figure 5. Be
certain to follow the (+) and (–) polarity
indicators that are on the top of the battery compartment.
Figure 5
47
46
45
44
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
37 39
38
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
viewing
the on-screen menus, it
37 41
47 51
40• When
40 46 that
50 they not be left on the
important
37 is36
35 39for45
49
36 screen
an extended
period of time.
34 38 44 48
35 The
constant display of a static image
33
43
34
4. Press the Main Power On/Off Switch
34 36
2
533 and
6
1b 1 to turn
on3 the 4CVR700
26
32 27
the CVPD50.
7
8
9
10
11
12
25
24
31 28 23
13 control
14
15
16 several
17
18
5. The remote
contains
30 pre29 22
19 special
20
21
22
23
24 21
29 may
programmed
functions
that
30
33
28 31
25 by26pressing
27 and
28 holding
29
30 20 32
be activated
par31
32
33than 34
35 and
36
ticular buttons
rather
pressing
37
38
39
40
41
releasing. One such function is the “All42
43
44function.
45
48 2
On/Off” power
To46 turn47on1 the
CVR700, CVPD50 display screen, and
7 other
8
devices programmed into the remote,
13
14
press and hold the Power All On 19Button20
b until all units turn on. The LED25inside26
the CVR700’s Main Power On/Off
31
32
that
Button 1 will turn orange to confirm
37
38
the unit is on, and the Information
43
44
Display Ô will also light. The CVPD50
will turn on and display the JBL logo screen.
such
as these
menus or video game
32
42
images
is
likely
to cause the image to be
31
permanently “burned into” the plasma
screen. This type of damage is not covered
by4 the 5JBL Cinema Vision warranty.
3
43 6 45 47
49
51
Making
Configuration
10
11 42
1244 46 48
50
Adjustments
35
15
16
17
183743 3945 4147 49
9
53 55
52 54
51
57
56
53 55
57
4150 4752 5154 56
37
3642 38system
44 4046 for
48 the
23 34 24menu
The22on-screen
audio
40 46 50
33 2635 25373739 36
41 the
27 section
28
29 available
30
OSD
is
by pressing
32 2734 24363638 35
40 393745414947 51
33 Button
34
35
n
this button
is
31 3628.33When
383644404846 50
23263525 34
37
43
45 43
39 pressed,
40
41the
42
MENU
(Figure
6)47 49 51
30 MAIN
29322227
3424 33
35 39 45 49
36
42 made
44 42
46 48 50
45 will46appear,
47 29and
4830adjustments
are
32
3121283323 35
34 38 44 48
28 313020
35
37
39 41
31
32
from the individual
menus.
To
use
the
33
43
29 22 34
37
34 36
29 30 in
32 38 40
42
21the33audio
on-screen menu system
36
33 26 25 37
28 31 20 32
31
Using the On-Screen Display
⁄/¤
section of the CVR700, press the
35
32 27 24 36
Navigation 1Controls
q
the
2
3
4 31 until
5
6 35
34
28 23
When making the following adjustments,
43 45 47 49
51 53
55 57 › 7cursor8 is next
to1030
the 11item
on-screen
33
9
12 34
29 22
you may find it easier to use the on-screen
44 46 48 50 52
2
329 30
4the215 33 6 32
you 54
wish56to 13adjust,141 and15then
press
45 display
47 system.
49
51These
53 easy-to-read
5542 57
16
17
18
displays
28 31 20 32
35
37
39
41
Set
Button
s
44 give
46you48
50
52
54
56
7 to218select
9 that
10item.
11
12 31
19
20
22
23
24
a clear picture of 34
the current
status 37 41 47 51
36 38 40
In
some
cases,
the
selection
will
cause
a
13
18
37 of 39
41 and make it easy
26
2714
2815
2916
3017
the unit
see 25
which
36 40 46 50 25
33to 26
37
43 to
45 appear,
47 49and51
53 the
55 57
new45submenu
when
19
20
21
22
23
24
41 47
51
37 making.
36 selection
38 40you are
31
32
33
34
35
36
35
To
on39
49
32 view
27 the
36
24
42 44 46 has
48 been
50 1reached,
52 54
2 29 563 30 4
lowest
31that
34 38
44 level
25
48 37submenu
36
46
50
38
3926
4027
4128
42
23have
28you
35
make40certain
26screen
37
25 menus,
35
37
39
41
30 49
s4633 7 4734will8 4835 9 36 10
43 the43Set Button
22 34
29 from
31
35 to
39the45
44
4532
connection
CVPD50
the 33 pressing
27made
24 a 36
41 47 51
37
34
36
38
40
29 30 21 33
32 select
42 the item that
the 38on-screen
› 14
cur15 42 16
39 13 4040
to JBL34
Cinema
Vision
38 44
48CVPD50
36
46 41 50
23 35
28Output
33 26 3725 37
28 31 20 32
31 sor is pointing to.
Some
settings
in
the
21 48 22
44
45 19 3946 20
35
45 47 49
32 27 4324 36
rear panel of the
Port 33 on the43
22 34
29Screen
ADVANCED
you4827 28
31 28submenu
44
25 38 26
23 35 will34require
The CVR700’s
on-screen
menus
32
42
21 33
30CVR700.
30 ‹/›
3331Controls
43 33
to
press
the.
Navigation
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
22
29
34
32
34
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
not 32
available
31when a component video
31are20
42
21 33 the32available
1
2 52 52
3 54 54
456 56
5
6
30 through
q
to29scroll
4242
48
50
44
48
37
38
39
40
source device
is in44
use46
unless
the50corre28 31 20 32
31 when
settings.
7
8
9
10
11
12 Throughout this manual,
37 39
39 41
43
44
45
46
3535 37
41
sponding S-video
connection
has been
4115
51
you
are
asked
to
“scroll”
to
a
certain
37
47
34
36
38
40
13
14
16
17
18
41 47 51
37menus
made to the34
CVR700.
36 The
38 on-screen
40
36 40 46 50 item, that means to use the ⁄/¤
33 265 25 37
2 not 3available
619 the2036
21
22
23
24
40 46
50
are
at all when
334 26
37 35DVI
39 45 49 Navigation 1Controls
32 27 25
24 36
2
3
4
5
6
q
until
the
25
26
27
28
29
30
45
35
Input
Video
(HDCP)/Computer
is
39
49
32
8
9
10 27
12
36 34 38 44 48
31
23 35
2811 24
›
cursor
is
next
to
the
item.
on-screen
7
8
9
10
11
12
3234 33
34
35
36
in use. If you31attempt
to use31the on-screen
30
38 44
48
14
15
16
28
35
22 34
2917 23
18
33
21
27
28
29
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
43
37 be
3833
40
3029video
32
menus, the DVI
will
tem-39 42 43
21 33
30 input
22
29
34
20
21
22
23
24
28
43
44
45
46
31
31
32
20
29
porarily lost.
42
32
30 21 33
26
53 55
52 54
30
28 31 20 32
31
NOTES:
IMPORTANT
32
33
34
35
36
the on-screen
menus
• In order to access
3
4
38for the
39 CVR700’s
401 audio
412 section,
42
make5 sure6
8 in System
9
10mode
11
12
control
44the remote
45
467
47is
48
1
2
3
4
5
13
14
15
16source
17
18
(NOT set to control
an external
7 19 the CVPD50
8
20
219 screen).
2210 23
device or even
To11set24
26 mode,
27
28 16 the
29 17 30
the remote 13
to25System
14
15 press
31
32
33 . 34
35
36
System Selector
j
19
20
21
22
23
37
38
39
40
41
42
and
contain
• Both the CVPD50
25
26 CVR700
27
28
29
43
44
45
46
47
separate IR31sensors32that are
capable
of35 48
33
34
receiving commands from either remote
37
38
39
40
41
control. JBL recommends that you point
43
44
45
46
47
the remote at the CVPD50 screen for all
commands, as the JBL Digital Link cable
is able to pass remote commands to the
CVR700 for system and DVD control, as
well as to any other devices you have
connected to the Remote IR Output
Jack fi. However, video control commands received by the CVR700 cannot be
passed to the screen.
41
13
42
47
›
**
48
SY
SO
SP
AD
LI
14
MAIN
MENU
19
S
U
E
V
P
T
R
A
A
EM
C 25
ES
KER
31
NCE
SYN
37
43
20
C
S
D
C
15
16
17
18
22
23
24
**
21
ONFIGURATION
26
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
32
6
12
Figure 6
18
24
30
36
42
48
The menus will remain on the screen for
20 seconds, and then they will “time-out”
and disappear from the screen. The timeout may be increased to as much as 50
seconds by going to the ADVANCED
SETTINGS menu, and changing the
item titled OSD TIME OUT.
Selections will also be shown in the
Upper Display Line H or the Lower
Display Line E, depending on which
parameter is being adjusted. In general,
the Upper Display Line H will indicate
the name of the current menu and the
Lower Display Line E, will indicate
45
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 46
the menu line or option that the onscreen › cursor is currently pointing to.
43 45
However, the ADVANCED submenu
42 44
functions differently, in that the settings
35 37
are adjusted directly on screen rather
34 36
than by using submenus. At that time
33 26
both the setting name and the currently
32 27
selected setting will be displayed in31the28
30 29
Lower Display Line E.
29
28
System Configuration
47
46
39
38
37
**
38
SYSTEM
43
44
39
40
41
42
46
47
48
**
45
5.1
7.1
BACK
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
TO
MAIN
MENU
Figure 7
**
A
W
S
T
›
SYSTEM
**
RE
YOU
SURE
YOU
ANT
TO
CHANGE
YSTEM
CONFIGURATION
O
5.1?
43
42
Source Configuration
35
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26 25
27 24
28 23
29 22
30 21
31 209)
(Figure
37
36
35
34
33
32
will
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
47
46
45
44
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
37 39
41
With the MAIN MENU on screen,
1
2
3
scroll down to the SOURCES
line
and
press the Set Button s 7 . A 8confir9
51
50
37
**
38
39
SYSTEM
43
44
4
9
5
N
Y
R
T
›
10
40
41
42
46
47
48
BACK
6
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
Figure
9
27
28
29
30
33
35
36
34
Once you have confirmed that you
39
40
41
42
wish to change source settings, the
45
46
47
48
SOURCES menu (Figure 10) will
appear. The first line indicates the currently selected source.
R
I
D
D
3
R
E
K
*
C
O
V
A
E
V
A
:
:
W
CE
T
T
S
:
O
L
B
O
O
A
A
TO
O
M
:
:
L
L
M
OU
D
DE
OG
AS
GI
GI
:L
.R
F
MA
R
V
:
I
S
C
C
O
.
A
I
CES
D/CD
C
G
:
C
N
7
MAN
7
7
7
7
IC
AUT
TOR
ME
*
CHNGR
7
A
.
.
7
O
Y
N
.1
MO
GEMEN
1
MOV
1
MUS
7.1
16:9
SETT
U
B
D
V
R
G
I
M
N
TO
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
SOURCES
MENU
43
42
V
T
35
45 47
44 46
*
SOURCES
LE/SAT
/CD
CHANGER
AUX
For most sources, you will want to assign
a default surround audio mode. Refer to
the chart on page 62 for descriptions of
each available surround mode. You may
temporarily change the audio mode
assignments at any time during playback
using the remote control. It is recom49
51 53 55 57
mended that for initial setup you select
48 50 52 54 56
Dolby Digital for digital audio sources,
41
and Logic
7 for
sources.
51
37 41
47analog
40
37 39
34 36 38
MU
36 40 46 50
33
26 25 37
The internal
DVD/CD changer enables
35 39 45 49
NG
32
27 24 36
you
to
program an audio mode for each
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
type of
30 29 22 34
33 disc, thus
43 empowering you to
choose
stereo reproduction
29 30 21 33
32 two-channel
42
28 31 20 32
for older
31 two-channel CD recordings,
source,
Figure 10
A
V
/
C
I
V
A
U
INPUT*
Figure 13
44
*
Dolby Digital for video DVDs, and Logic 7
matrix surround processing for analog
3Video4 CD programs.
5
6
11
12
menu on screen
With10the SOURCES
and the
16 DVD/CD
17
18 changer source selected,
scroll22down
21
23 to the
24 AUDIO MODE
menu28(Figure
27
29 14).
30
9
15
33
34
39
40
35
*
45
› DVD
AU
C 46
D
V I47D
CD
AUD
MP3
WM
BACK
36
AUDIO
41
MODE
*
42
DIO
E O 48
IO
A
TO
AUDIO
MODE
MENU
ITAL
RECORDER
INPUT/COMPUTER
E/CAMERA
ER
B A C57
K
53 55
52 54 56
TO
SOURCES
MENU
Figure 11
41 47 51
For
46 50 sources, you may assign a
40 external
digital
39 45audio
49 input by scrolling to the
38 44 48INPUT line and selecting
AUDIO
43 analog audio input, or the coaxial
from the
32
31
42
or optical
digital audio input assigned to
that source (see Figures 12 and 13). This
selection is not available for the internal
DVD/CD changer, which internally passes
6
its5 digital
audio signal directly to the
11
12
audio
section
of the CVR700.
4
*AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
O
ES
11
12
ESET
ALL
SOURCES
O
FACTORY
SETTINGS?
15
› SOU
AUD
DV
DV
CD
CD
MP
SOU
RES
BAC
MPOSITE
:9
Y SETTING
NU
Figure 12
ARE
YOU
SURE
YOU
WANT
TO
CHANGE
SOURCE
SETTINGS?
3
*
MERA
LOG
C 7
E 7.1
**
45
37
36
35
34
33
10
*
SOURCES
› SOURCE: GAME/CA
AUDIO INPUT:ANA
AUDIO MODE:LOGI
TYPE:MOVI
NIGHT MODE:N/A
VIDEO INPUT: CO
SOURCE A.R.: 16
RESET TO FACTOR
BACK TO MAIN ME
42
43
34 enables
36 38 you
40
The SOURCES submenu
33 DVD/CD
26 25 37
to configure both the internal
32 27 24 36
changer and any external sources
for dig31 28 23 35
ital audio inputs, audio surround
mode,
30 29 22 34
video input (for external sources
and
29 30only)
21 33
28 external
video screen aspect ratio (for
31 20 32
sources only).
46
32
31
› C
D
A
V
D
D
G
T
NO
YES
Figure 8
49
48
If you wish to change the current
or make adjustments to a different
source, then make sure that the › cursor
1
2
is next to the SOURCE line, and select
it by pressing the Set Button s 7 . 8
A list of available sources will appear
13
14
(Figure 11). Scroll to the desired source
19
20
and select it, or to retain the previous
25
26
source, scroll to the BACK TO 31
32
SOURCES MENU line and select
37 it. 38
SYSTEM
›
45 47
44 46
31
mation screen
appear,
giving you the opportunity to opt out of
49
51 53 55 57
source configuration. To continue, scroll
48 50 52 54 56
1
3 the4 Set 5
6
and2 press
to the YES line
41
Button
s 7 again.
Note
that
you
9
10
11
12
518
37 41 47
40
may
reset
all sources
factory
36 40
46 5014 to their
13
15
16
17
18
37
default
35settings
45from
39 19
4920 this21screen
36
22 by23
24
34 to38the44RESET
4826
scrolling
35
25
27ALL
28
29
30
33
43
34
SOURCES
line
and
31
32 selecting
33
34 it. 35
36
25
24
23
22
30 21 33
31 20 32
47 49
51 53
55 57
With43the45MAIN
MENU
on screen,
44 that
46 the
48 › cursor
50 52is 54
56 to
make42sure
pointing
35 374339 45
4147 49
51 53 55
572
1
CONFIGURATION
the SYSTEM
4238the
4440Set
46 37
48 415047
525154
line 34
and 36
press
Button
s
7 . 568
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
3543 3745
3947 (Fig.
4149 7) 51
55 57
The 32
SYSTEM
menu
will 53
appear
14
39 45 414913
273442
36384635
24 3644
4048 37
50 52 47
54 5156
on screen,
with
the
›
cursor
pointing
to
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 4819
20
3335 2637 2539 3741 36 40 46 50
the 5.1
30 29CHANNEL
33 line (the
43 default
22 34
25
26
3234
2736 2438 3640 3537 3941 4547 4951
29 30
32
42
setting).
If 31
your
consists
only 32
21 system
33
3436of
3840314446 48
23
28
35
50
33
253137
32
20 26
front28left,31center
and
right
3032
3335 39374345 38
2224
2927
3436speakers,
49
2931speakers
two surround
subwoofer,
4244 44
3028 2123 and
3335 a 32
34 3843
48
28
3133MAIN
3129BACK
2022 3234 TO
scroll down 30
to the
43
42
214the
1 line229
3press
5 32
MENU
and30
Button
6
33Set
28 31 20 32
31 ¤
s 7 . Otherwise,
use
8
9
10 the
11 ⁄/12
Navigation
to
3
6
13
141Controls
152
16q
17 4
185 move
the ›19cursor207to point
to
the
desired
12
218
22 9
2310
2411 sys1
2
3
4
5
6
Set
tem configuration;
25
2613
2714then
2815press
2916 the3017
18
Button
confirmation screen2412
31 s3219 7 .33A
20 8 3421 9 352210 362311
(Fig. 8)37will 38
appear,
giving you the opportu2513 392614 402715 412816 422917
3018
nity to43retain4431the
previous
Select3624
19 453220 463321setting.
473422 483523
NO if you wish
to38retain
26 3927the40previous
28 4129
3725
4230
setting, or YES
to
update
the
setting.
31
32
33
34
35
43
44
45
46
47
4836
43
42
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 14
The options available for the DVD-Audio
disc audio modes differ from the other
disc types because the DVD-Audio format
outputs 5.1-channel audio that is not subject to further surround processing. However, as indicated by the available options
shown in Fig. 15, you may select whether
to pass the audio output directly to the
speakers without any bass management
processing (DIRECT), or you may
select the BASS MANAGEMENT
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 47
43
42
mode, which passes the digital audio to
the CVR700’s processor so that low-frequency portions of the audio may be
steered to the appropriate speakers
depending on the capabilities of your
specific speakers. If you are using the
JBL Cinema Vision speaker system,
you may leave the DVD-Audio disc
audio mode at the default BASS
MANAGEMENTsetting. If you are
using other speakers, you should select
DIRECT, and make sure to configure
your speakers using the SPEAKERS
submenu as described on page 48.
*
DVD
AUDIO
*
› DIRECT
MANAGEMENT
BASS
BACK
TO
SOURCES
MENU
Figure 15
The available audio modes for DVD Video, audio CD, Video CD and compressed audio discs are reflected in
Figure 16. Note, however, that the
options shown each encompass a suite of
surround modes. Although a more complete explanation of the available surround modes may be found on page 62,
the DOLBY surround mode submenu
serves as a good example (Figure 17).
Note that some modes may not be available, depending on how you set your
system configuration in the SYSTEM
submenu above (Figure 7). For example,
the DIGITAL EX, PL IIx
MOVIE 7.1 and PL IIx
MUSIC 7.1 modes are only available
for 7.1-channel systems. In addition, the
DIGITAL 5.1 and DIGITAL
EX modes are only available when source
materials that are encoded in the Dolby
Digital 5.1 or Dolby Digital EX format are
actually playing.
*
› L
D
D
S
D
O
O
T
T
S
CD
VIDEO
*
GIC
7
LBY
S
EREO
P
BACK
Figure 16
TO
SOURCES
MENU
› D
D
P
P
P
P
P
3
*
D
IGITAL
5
IGITAL
E
L
II
MOV
L
IIx
MO
L
II
MUS
L
IIx
MU
L
II
EMU
-STEREO
O
.
X
I
V
I
S
L
BACK
SOURCES
TO
LBY
1
*
E
5.
IE
7
C
5.
IC
7
5.1
1
.1
1
.1
MENU
Although you are encouraged to experiment with the various audio surround
modes as you become more familiar with
your system, at this time it is recommended
that you select Logic 7 Cinema (Movie)
for DVD-Video and VCD discs, and for
video sources such as cable television,
and Logic 7 Music for audio CDs, MP3s,
WMAs, the AM/FM tuner and other
audio-only sources to complete the setup
process. Select the 7.1 version if your
system is in 7.1-channel operation, or the
5.1 version if you are using 5.1-channel
operation.
Note that the audio mode setup for
DVD-Video discs is slightly different
than for the other disc types. With the
SOURCES menu (Figure 10) on
screen, instead of scrolling to the
AUDIO MODE line as for the other
disc types, continue scrolling until the
› cursor is next to the DVD-V line
and select it. The DVD VIDEO submenu (Figure 18) will appear. Although
audio mode selection is similar to the
other disc types, the sub mode (e.g.,
Music 7.1 for Logic 7) is displayed
separately on the TYPE line.
DVD/CD
CHANGER
DVD
VIDEO
› AUDIO
NIGHT
RESET
BACK
M
T
M
T
ODE:
YPE:
ODE:
O
FAC
TO
L
M
N
T
MAIN
O
O
/
O
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
signals
which are
30 29 are
33
43 only found
22 played,
34
29 DVD-Video
32
42 discs. To
on
30 21 33(or DVD-Audio)
28 31 20 32
31
Figure 17
*
45 47
44 46
*
GIC
7
VIE
7.1
A
RY
SETTNG
MENU
Figure 18
The DVD VIDEO submenu (Fig. 18)
also enables you to adjust the Night
Mode setting. The Night Mode setting
may be accessed directly from the
SOURCES menu (Figure 12) for other
source inputs. The Night mode is a feature of Dolby Digital that preserves the
dynamic range and full intelligibility of a
movie soundtrack while reducing the
peak level. This prevents abruptly loud
transitions from disturbing others, without reducing the sonic impact of a digital
source. The Night mode is only available
when specially encoded Dolby Digital
adjust the Night mode setting, make
certain that the › cursor is on the
NIGHT line. Next, press the ‹/›
1
2
3
4
5
Navigation
Controls
q
to choose
6
between
settings,
7
8 the 9following
10
11
12 as they
appear
in the15Lower
13
14
16 Display
17
18 Line E:
19
20
21OFF 22
23
24
OFF:
When
is highlighted,
the
25
26
27 not
28 function.
29
30
Night
mode
will
31
32
33
34
35
36
MEDIUM COMPRESSION: A
37
38
39
40
41
42
mild compression will
be applied,
when
47 49
51
43
44
45
46 43 4745 48
MEDIUM COMPRESSION
42 44 46 48is 50
highlighted.
35 37 39 41
37
34 36 38 40 When
MAXIMUM COMPRESSION:
33 26 25 37
MAXIMUM COMPRESSION
is 36
35
32 27 24 36
highlighted, a more severe
compression34
31 28 23 35
algorithm will be applied.
30 29 22 34
33
32
21 the
33
We recommend that29
you 30
select
28
20 32
MEDIUM setting as a 31
starting
point 31
and change to the MAXIMUM setting
later, if desired. The Night mode may also
1 time
2 a Dolby
3
4
be adjusted directly any
7 by pressing
8
9
10
Digital source is playing
the
Night Mode Button 13Z 14 . When
the
15
16
button is pressed, D-RANGE
will 22
19
20
21
appear in the lower third
25 of26the video
27
28
screen and in the Lower
31 Display
32
33 Line
34
E. Press the ⁄¤ Navigation
37
38
39
40
Controls q within 43
3 seconds
to
44
45 select
46
the desired setting.
*
DOLBY
DIGITAL
NIGHT
MODE
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
*
› OFF
MEDIUM
COMPRESSION
MAXIMUM
COMPRESSION
BACK
TO
DVD
VIDEO
MENU
Figure 18a
No additional adjustments are available
for the internal DVD/CD changer, as the
SOURCE A.R. line of Figure 10 is
automatically set to 16:9 and may not
be adjusted.
However, the video input and aspect ratio
(video screen) for external sources may
be adjusted. Scroll to the VIDEO
INPUT line to select a composite
video, S-video, or for the CABLE/SAT,
DIGITAL RECORDER and GAME/CAMERA
sources only, a component video input for
each external source. In addition, scroll to
the SOURCE A.R. line to specify
whether the source uses a 16:9 or 4:3
aspect ratio, or select auto detection.
The SOURCES menu also
contains a RESET TO FACTORY
SETTINGS line that allows you to
47
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 48
reset that source to the factory default
settings.
Speaker Configuration
It is important to make sure that the
CVR700 is correctly configured for your
speakers so that low frequency portions
of the audio program will be steered to
the appropriate loudspeakers (this is
called bass management). Speaker configuration also ensures that there are no
time delay artifacts caused by the speakers being placed at varying distances
from the listening position. And it is in
this section that the output levels are
adjusted to ensure that all speaker channels are balanced, preserving the directionality and dynamism of the original
recording.
If you are using JBL Cinema Vision loudspeakers, you will be able to skip some
of these settings, as the CVR700 has
been preprogrammed at the factory to
accommodate your speakers. However,
you will need to program the distances
and speaker output levels to conform to
your specific listening room.
With the MAIN MENU (Figure 6) on
screen, scroll to the SPEAKERS line
and select it, and the confirmation screen
(Figure 19) will appear, allowing you an
opportunity to retain the previous settings. Note that the RESET line indicates that all sources will have their
speaker settings reset if you choose the
reset option. Speaker settings are global,
and only need to be set once, unless you
change the BASS MGR line in the
SPEAKER CONFIGURATION
submenu (Fig. 21) to INDEPENDENT.
Select YES to change the speaker settings and continue to the SPEAKERS
submenu (Figure 20).
**
ARE
YOU
WANT
TO
SPEAKER
N
Y
R
T
›
SPEAKERS
**
SURE
YOU
CHANGE
SETTINGS?
O
ES
ESET
ALL
SPEAKERS
O
FACTORY
SETTINGS?
*
O
R
I
E
N
O
S
V
F
S
T
E
BACK
Figure 20
48
A
N
N
T
E
K
W
S
E
BACK
I
S
A
L
SPEAKERS
*
GURATION
OVERS
NCES
S
TO
MAIN
MENU
KER
C
D
BAS
T
:SM
ER:SM
SURR
SURR
OOFER
MGR:
T
THE
TO
O
S
A
A
O
O
:
G
S
NF
M
LL
LL
UN
UN
ON
LO
E
When SMALL is selected, low-frequency sounds will be sent only to the
45 47 49
51 53 55
subwoofer 43
output.
If you choose
this
42 44 46 48 50 52 54
option and there is no subwoofer con39 53
41 55 57
43 45 4735 4937 51
nected, you34will36not38hear
any low-fre40 54 3756 41 47
42 44 46 48 50 52
quency sounds
from25the37front36channels.
40 46
33 26
IGURATION
ANAGER
*
DS:SMALL
DS:SMALL
BAL
SETTINGS?
SPEAKERS
MENU
Configuring Speaker Sizes
The first step is to configure speaker sizes.
You may skip this step if you are using JBL
Cinema Vision speakers at all positions. If
you are using other model or brand loudspeakers, you should NOT skip this menu.
Scroll to the CONFIGURATION line
and select it to display the SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION AND BASS
MANAGER submenu (Figure 21). For
each of these settings, use the LARGE
setting if the speakers for a particular
position are traditional full-range loudspeakers. Use the SMALL setting for
smaller, frequency-limited satellite speakers that do not reproduce sounds below
200Hz. Note that when “small” speakers
are used, a subwoofer is required to
reproduce low-frequency sounds.
Remember that the “large” and “small”
descriptions do not refer to the actual
physical size of the speakers, but to
their ability to reproduce low-frequency
sounds. If you are in doubt as to which
category describes your speakers, consult
the specifications in the speakers’
owner’s manual, or ask your dealer.
The factory default sets all
43 channels
45 47 49
42 BACK
44 46 48
to SMALL, except for the
SURROUNDS, which35are 37
set 39
to 41
34 36system
38 40
NONE, as the factory default
33 26 25 37
configuration is for a 5.1-channel
system.
32
27 24 36
27 24 36
35 39 45 49
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
Navigation 1Controls
q
to5 move6
2
3
4
the
›
the cursor to7CENTER.
8
9 Press
10
11 ‹/12
1
2
3
4
5
Navigation
Controls
q
6 to select
13
14
15
16
17
18
the7 option
best
sys-24
8 that
10 describes
11
12 your
199
20
21
22
23
tem,
on
these
13 based
14
16 speaker
17
18definitions:
2515
26
27
28
29
30
19
20
23
24
3121
33
34
35
36
SMALL
is3222selected,
low-freWhen
25
26
28
29
30 will
3727 channel
38
39
40
41 be 42
quency
center
sounds
31 only
32 to 43
33 subwoofer
34
35
36
44
45
46
47 If you
48
sent
the
output.
37
38
39
40and 41
choose
this option
there 42is no sub43
44
45
46you 47
48 hear lowwoofer
connected,
will not
frequency sounds from the center channel.
When LARGE is selected, a full-range
output will be sent to the center speaker
output, and NO center channel signal will
be sent to the subwoofer output.
NOTE: If you choose Logic 7 as the surround mode for the particular input
source for which you are configuring
your speakers, the CVR700 will not make
the LARGE option available for the
center speaker. This is due to the require43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
ments of Logic 7 processing, and does
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
not indicate a problem with your receiver.
51
50
37
36
35
34
33
NOTE: This setting is not 31
affected
by 35
28 23
30 29 22
34
changing the System Configuration
setting
29 30 21 33
32
(see Figure 7). In order to benefit
from
28
31
20 32
full 7.1-channel operation, you31
must
change43both
Configuration
45 the
47System
49
51
53 55 57
setting42and44you46must
the Back
48 enable
50 52
54 56
1
2
3
4
Surround
in the SPEAKER
35 speakers
37 39 41
7 41 47
8 BASS
10
519
37 AND
CONFIGURATION
34 36 38 40
36 13 40 21).
46
5015
33 26 25
14
16
37
submenu
(Figure
MANAGER
19
20
21
Begin31
the 28
speaker
setup34process
by mak38 44
48
23 35
25
26
27
ing certain
that22the34cursor
at
30 29
33 is pointing
43
31
32
33
29 30 21
32sets
42
line,33which
the
configthe FRONT
37
39
32left 31
uration28for31the20front
and
right38 speak43
44
45
ers. If you wish to make a change to the
front speakers’ configuration, press the
1
2
3
4
5
‹/› Navigation
Controls
q
6
so that 7either8 LARGE
9
10or SMALL
11
12
appears,
13 matching
14
15the appropriate
16
17
18
description
from
these
definitions:
19
20
21
22
23
24
57
56
50
35 37 39 41
39 45 49
36 4735
41
24
34 36LARGE
3832 4027is37
When
selected,
a 51
full-range
31 28 36
44 48
23
35front
4634left
40
50 38and
33 26will
25 be37sent
output
to the
30
43
22 39
34 453349
32 27 24 3629 35
front
right outputs.
Only
LFE-channel
infor42
21 38
33 443248
31 28 2329 3530 34
mation
will be directed
to the
subwoofer.
20 32
30 29 2228 3431 33
4331
29 30you
32
42
When
your selection
21have
33 completed
28 31 20 32
31 press the ⁄/¤
for
the front channel,
Figure 21
32
Figure 19
› C
C
D
L
* SPE
A
› FRO
CEN
SID
BAC
SUB
BAS
RES
22
28
34
40
46
35 37 39 41
41 47
38 40 no37signals
When
is selected,
will51
53
55 NONE
57 34 36
36
40 46
26 25 channel
37
be sent
to 33
the center
output.
The50
52
54 56
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
receiver will
operate in a “phantom”
cen31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
41
47 51 mode
ter channel
and
center
channel43
30 29 22 34
33
46 50 will be sent to the left and
40
information
29 30 21 33
32
42
39 45 49
28 31 20
right front channel
outputs.
31
32
38 44 48
43 you have completed your selection
When
42 center channel, press the ⁄/¤
for the
2
3
4
Navigation 1Controls
q
to5 move6
the cursor to7SIDE
SURROUNDS.
8
9
10
11
12
Press the ‹/›
Controls
13 Navigation
14
15
16
17
18
5
6
q
to select
best 24
19
20the option
21
22that 23
describes
the25 surround
speakers
in29 your30
11
12
26
27
28
system
speaker
17
18 based
31 on these
32
33
34 definitions:
35
36
23
24SMALL
37
39
40low-fre41
42
is38 selected,
When
29
30 surround
43
44
45 sounds
46 will
47 be 48
quency
channel
35
sent
to36the subwoofer output only. If you
41
42 this option and there is no subchoose
47
48 connected, you will not hear any
woofer
low-frequency sounds from the side surround channels.
When LARGE is selected, a full-range
output will be sent to the side surround
channel outputs, and NO surround channel
CVR700 OM
43
42
45 47
44 46
1
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
1
2
3
9
43
42
15
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
4:24 PM
Page 49
49
51 53 55 57
signals
will be sent to the subwoofer output.
48
50
52 54
appears in the on-screen menu. When
this option is selected, all bass information will be routed to the front
left/right “main” speakers.
56
surround
37 39 When
41 45 NONE
43
47 49 is selected,
51 53 55
57
51
information
will52be split
between
36 38 sound
40 4437
42
4641 4847 50
54 56
46 front
40 41
50 right outputs. For
left
and
26 25 the
37 front
35
3736 39
45 37
49 when
27 24 optimal
36 3635performance
41 47
no 51
surround
34
3839 40
38 44 48
28 23 speakers
35 2634 25
36 the
46 50
40Dolby
33
are
in use,
3 Stereo
37
29 22 32
34 2733 24 3643 35 39 45 49
mode
should
be
used.
30 21 31
33 2832 23 3542 34 38 44 48
31 20 When
32 2931
you
your selec30
33
43
22 have
34 completed
29 30
32
42
tions
for 21
the 33
side surround
channels,
28 31the20⁄32
31
/¤ Navigation
Controls
press
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
25
24
23
22
21
20
12/17/04
35
21
34
27
33
33
32
39
31
45
30
29
28
1
• If a subwoofer is connected to the
CVR700, you have the option to have
the front left/right “main” speakers
43 bass
45 47
49
51 at53all55 57
reproduce
frequencies
42 have
44 46
50 52 operate
54 56
times, and
the48
subwoofer
35 the
37 CVR700
39 41 is being used
only when
41 47 51
34 36 38 40
with a digital
source that 37
contains
a
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
dedicated
low-frequency
effects,
or
LFE
35
45
39
49
32 27 24 36
soundtrack.
This23allows
you
31 28
34 to38use
44both
48
35
your main
speakers
30 and
33
43to
22 34
29 subwoofer
29 30 21
32 bass
42
take advantage
of the
33 special
31
31 20
32
sounds28
created
for some
movies.
Note,
however, that the subwoofer will only
play the LFE information. Press the
1
2
3
4
5
‹/› Navigation
Controls
q
6
so that ON
appears
7
8
9 in the
10 on-screen
11
12
menu. 13
14
15
16
17
18
q
to5 move6 the cursor to BACK
3
4
SURROUNDS.
9
10
11
12 Press the ‹/›
Navigation
Controls
q
to select
1
2
3
5
6
15
16
17
18 4
the
option
that
best
describes
the
speakers
7
8
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
in
use28at
left and right
14 the
17 back
18 surround
2713
29 15 30 16
positions
based on these
23 definitions:
24
3319
34 20 35 21 36 22
26 41 27 is42selected,
28
29
30 system
3925
40NONE
the
When
36
4531 adjust
46 32 47
48 34only355.1-channel
will
so33that
sur37
38
39
40
41
42
round
processing/decoding
modes
are
43
44 and45the 46
47
48
available
surround
back
amplifier
channels will not be used. This setting will
override any setting made previously in
the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
submenu (Figure 7).
51
50
19 MGR
20 setting
21
22
23 you24to
allows
The BASS
25 speaker
26
27configuration
28
29
30
use the same
set32 or 33
34 different
35
36
tings for all31inputs,
to have
43 45 47 49
40
41
42the
settings for37each38input.39 In most
cases,
42 44 46 48
When SMALL is selected, the system
43
44
45of GLOBAL
46
47
48
will
factory default
setting
35 37 39 41
will adjust so that the full complement of
be appropriate,
as most listeners
do
not
43 45 47 49
51 53
55 57
34 36 38 40
6.1/7.1 surround processing/ decoding
need54to 56
have individualized
set42 44 46 48 50 52
33 speaker
26 25 37
modes are available, and low-frequency
tings.
However,
some
listeners,
particu32
27 24 36
35 37 39 41
information below the crossover
point
51 with full-range31front
23 35
28 speakers
larly47those
37 41
34 36 38 40
will be sent to the subwoofer
output.
If 36 40
30 29 22 34
33 26
that46are50
used for both movies
and music,
25 37
you choose this option and
is no36 35 39
21 33
49 that different 29
32 there
27 24
may45prefer
bass30manage28 31 20 32
31will
34 38 44 48
subwoofer connected, you
23hear
28not
35
ment
settings
be
used
when
listening
to
33
43
22 sur29 the
34
any low-frequency sounds30from
music
through
a
CD
player
as
opposed
43 45 2947 304921 5133 53 3255 57 42
round back channels.
42 44 2846 314820 5032 52 3154 to56a movie from a DVD player, VCR or
1
2
3
When LARGE is35selected,
cable/satellite set-top.
37 39 the
41system
7
8
9
will55
adjust
the full
51
37 41 47 Use
36 complement
38 40
53
57 so that 34
the ‹/› Navigation Controls
13
14
15
36 40 46 50
of 6.1/7.1
52
54 56 surround33processing/decoding
26 125 372
q
to change this setting to
3
4
5
6
35 39 45 49
32 and
19
20
21
27 a24
36
modes are available,
full-range
You may now
7
8
9 3810 44 INDEPENDENT.
1148 12
31
34
23 35 back
28 surround
41
51 be sent to the
47 will
25
26
27
signal
30 29 13
33
14
15
16 43 change
17
18 the source input and return to the
22 34
46 50
40
31
32
33
channels,
with no 29
low-frequency
informaSPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
32
42
21
30
33
19
20
21
22
23
24
39 45 49
37
38
39
tion sent to the subwoofer
output.
28 31 20
31
32
menu and adjust the speaker sizes to suit
37
36
35
34 38 44 48
33 When
43 you
25
26
27
28
have completed31your 32selection
33
34
32 for the
42 back surround channels, press the
37
38
39
40
31 ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q
1
243
344
4 45
5 46
to move the cursor to7 SUBWOOFER.
8
9
10
11
Press the ‹/› Navigation
Controls
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
q
to select the
option
that
best
19
20
21
22
23
11 49 12 51 your
choices
avail4510 47describes
53 system.
55 25
57 The
26
27
28
29
the 52
subwoofer
4416 46able
54 56 position will
17 48 for
18 50
31
32
33
34
35
for38the 39
other40 41
3722 39depend
23 41 24 on the settings
37
41 47 51the front left/right
3628 38speakers,
29 40 30 37particularly
43
44
45
46
47
26
37 36 36 If 40
the 46
front50left/right speakers
34 25positions.
35
35 39 45 49
27 24are36set to
SMALL, the subwoofer will
40
41
42
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
be43set to ON. If the front
46 22automatically
47
48 33
29
34
32speakers
42 are set to LARGE,
30 21left/right
33
31 are available:
31 20two
32 options
2
• If no subwoofer is connected to the
CVR700, press the ‹/› Navigation
3
4
5
6
Controls
q
so that OFF
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
of reproducing, but it may be different for
speakers that include a powered woofer
section intended to reproduce the LFE
channel. Before making any changes to
the settings for the crossover point, we
suggest that you find the crossover point
for the speakers in each of the four
groupings, front left/right, center front,
side surround and back surround, by looking at the specifications page of each
speaker’s owner’s manual, by getting that
information from the manufacturer’s Web
site, or by contacting your dealer or the
manufacturer’s customer service department. You will need this figure to accurately configure the next group of settings.
29
30
the
source.
35
36
43
44
45
41
42
Speaker
Crossover
48
Configuration
6 47
12
When all initial speaker “size” settings
have been made, you now have the
24
option to take advantage of the CVR700’s
30
Quadruple Crossover system, which
36
allows individual crossover settings to be
42
made for each speaker grouping. Again,
48
if you are using JBL Cinema Vision loudspeakers, you may skip this submenu, as
the factory default settings are appropriate for your speakers.
18
The low-frequency crossover point is set
by the design of your speakers. Depending
on the design and driver complement of
your speakers, it is usually the lowest
possible frequency the speaker is capable
51
50
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
4
10
16
22
28
34
40
46
Note that when any speaker group other
than the front left/right speakers is set to
LARGE, the crossover may not be
adjusted, as the feed will be full-range,
43 being
45 47derived
49
51
53 sub55 57
with no sound
for the
42 position.
44 46 48
50 52 54 56
woofer at that
The factory
35 37
39 speaker
41
default setting
for all
positions
41 47 51
34
36
38
is 90Hz. To change one 40
of the37settings,
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
53
55 to57the SPEAKERS
submenu
return
35 39 45 49
32
24 36
52
54 20),
56 and27
(Figure
then23scroll
to34
the 38 44 48
31 28
35
CROSSOVERS
select it.43
30 29 22line34and 33
41 47 51
29 30 CROSSOVERS
32
42
The
SPEAKER
21 33
40 46 50 28
31
3122)20will
32be displayed.
submenu
(Figure
39 45 49
To
44 48 the setting for any of the
38 change
four43
speaker groups, press the ⁄/¤
42
Navigation
q
until
the6
1Controls
2
3
4
5
cursor is next7 to the
group11 where
8 speaker
9
10
12
you wish to make
a change
and
13
14
15
16 then
17
18
press the ‹/19› Navigation
Controls
20
21
22
23
24
5
q
until
desired
6
25 the 26
27 setting
28
29
30
appears.
choices
for35low-36
11
12 The31available
32
33
34
frequency
information
to39 be sent
to
the42
17
18
37
38
40
41
subwoofer,
rather
than
to
the
main
23
24
43
44
45
46
47
48
speaker
29
30 channel, are 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz,
90Hz,
100Hz, 120Hz and 200Hz. Pick the
35
36
choice
41
42that is identical to the information
for
47 your
48 speakers, or if an exact match is
not possible, pick the closest choice that
is ABOVE the speaker’s low-frequency
limit or crossover point to avoid the creation of a low-frequency “hole” where
your system will have no bass information. The setting for the crossover point
45 47which
49 is51
53 55
for the LFE43
channel,
created
to 57
42 44low-frequency
46 48 50 informa52 54 56
provide specific
35 movies
37 39with
41 digital soundtion in many
37 41 47 51
38 match
40 the
tracks, may34be 36
set to
cross36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
over for any32of the four speaker
groups.
35 39 45 49
27 24 36
Since the crossover
point
commonly
31 28 23
34 38 44 48
35
used in the30creation
33channel
43
29 22of the
34 LFE
29 30 is
32 recom42
SUBWOOFER
21120Hz,
33 we
31 group
31 20 the
32 speaker
mend that 28
you select
whose crossover point is closest to
120Hz. To do this, press the ⁄/¤
Navigation 1Controls
q
until
the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
37
38
39
40
41
42
49
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
43
42
45 47
44 46
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
4:24 PM
25
24
23
22
21
20
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
Page 50
47
46
45
44
43
32
31
43
42
42
cursor is next to the SUBWOOFER
line, and then press the ‹/›
1
2
3
4
5
Navigation
Controls
q
until
6
the7 name8 of the
9 speaker
10
11 group
12 with the
desired
crossover
frequency
appears.
Of
13
14
15
16
17
18
course,
you may
with dif19
20
21 also
22 experiment
23
24
ferent
settings
the
25
26
27 to find
28
29 one
30 that provides
31 the
32 smoothest
33
34 and
35 most
36 complete
bass
particular
37 response
38
39 in your
40
41
42 listening
environment.
43
44
45
46
47
48
*
SPEAKER
›F
C
S
B
S
R
R
E
I
A
U
E
O
N
D
C
B
S
N
T
E
K
W
E
BACK
T
ER
S
S
OO
T
:
:
U
U
F
T
TO
R
R
E
H
CROSSOVERS
9
9
R
R
R
E
0
Hz
0
Hz
OUNDS
OUNDS
:
90
SE
SE
*
:
90
Hz
:
90
Hz
Hz
TTINGS?
SPEAKERS
Figure 22
Speaker Distances
MENU
Delay times are adjustable only for the
Dolby and DTS modes, so you will notice
that the DISTANCES menu may not
be accessed for other modes, such as
Logic 7. In addition, when a non-Dolby
Digital mode such as Dolby 3 Stereo or
Dolby Pro Logic II is selected, adjustments may be made to the Surround
speakers only. To set the delay time for a
specific input, you will need to access the
SPEAKER DISTANCES submenu
(Figure 23). With the SPEAKERS submenu (Figure 20) on screen, scroll down
to the DISTANCES line and select
it. Note that this line will not be available
if the audio surround mode for the current
source was not set to a Dolby mode. You
may need to return to the SOURCES
submenu (Figure 10) and select a Dolby
audio mode before adjusting the distance
settings.
Due to the different distances between
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
*
*
the listening position and each speaker
:
10
FT
› FRONT
CENTER:
10
FT
position, the amount of time it takes for
SIDE
SURROUNDS:
10
FT
sound to reach your ears from each chanBACK
SURROUNDS:
10
FT
UNIT
OF
MEASURE:
FEET
nel is different. You may compensate for
RESET
THESE
SETTINGS?
this difference through the use of the disCK
TO
SPEAKERS
MENU
43 45B A47
49
51 53 55 57
tance settings to adjust the timing for the 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
speaker placement and acoustic condi35 37 39 41
Figure 23
tions in your listening room or home the34 4336 4538 4740 49 37 5141 5347 5551 57
ater. The CVR700’s advanced software
33 4226 4425 4637 48 365040 5246 5450 56
Once the SPEAKER
DISTANCES
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
enables you to quickly and easily set
35 37 39
41 23) is on your screen,
submenu
(Figure
31
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
delay times without the need to calculate
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
unit43of measure for
30 note
33
22 the
29 that
34 default
them using a complex formula. Instead,
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
43 45 4729 distance
4930 51
53
55
57
32
42If your measuresettings
is
feet.
21 33
35
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
all you need to do is measure the approx42 44 4628 ments
4831 50
52
543156
32
20
are
in
feet,
proceed
to the
31 28 23 35
34 38 44
48 next
imate distance between your listening
35 37 39 step;
41 if your measurements
are
made in
30
33
43
22
29
34
position and each of the speakers in34your
51
37 41
47
36 38 29
40
47 ⁄
49/¤51Navigation
32
4253 55 57
meters,
214533the
3043press
system. When you enter those distances
46 50
40
33 26 25 37
28 3136
48
50
52 54 56›
q
until
the
1Controls
2 42 20
3443246
4 31
5
6 on-screen
35 39 45 49
below,
into the CVR700’s memory as shown 32
27 24 36
35
37
39
41 OF MEASURE
cursor
is
at
the
UNIT
7
8
9
10
11
12
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
the CVR700’s microprocessor does the
37 41 47 51
38 40
line on34the1536
menu.
the ‹/›
30
4316 Then,
17 press
rest of the work, calculating the proper 29 22 1334 1433
3618 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
29 30 21 Navigation
so that
34222 4 23 q
5 24 6
331 20322 21 Controls
19
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
delay time. The measurements need28not
318 is highlighted.
31 20 METER
327
When
the
9 23
103529 11 34
12
31
44 48
25
26
27
28
30
38
28
be accurate to the inch, as the system is
change 14in 33measurement
units
is made,
43
2915 22
31 13 32 30
34 163435 17 33
36 18
designed to accommodate a typical lis29 ⁄
32
42
/¤
21
19 38the
20 393021
223341 23 42 24 Controls
37press
40 Navigation
tening area rather than require the pre28
32 ›31
206 the
q
return
cursor
to the
1
2
3 25
4 26 to531
27
28
29
30
43
44
45
46
47
48
cise measurement to one “sweet spot”
FRONT
position.
With
the 36on-screen ›
7
8
9 31 10 32 11
33 12 34
35
position.
cursor
pointing
to
FRONT,
13
14
15 37 16 38 17 39 18 40
41
42press the
Due to the differences between the way
‹/›
Navigation
Controls
q
1
2
3
4
5
6
19
20
2143 22 44 23 45 24 46
47
48
surround modes operate, some modes
until
the
the
9
10 front
11 left
12 and
25
26
27
28 7distance
29 8 30 from
allow for a greater range of delay times
right
speakers
to the preferred
16
17 listening
18
31
32
33
34 13 35 14 36 15
than others. To avoid problems, we recposition
is
entered.
Next,
scroll
22
23 down
24 to
37
38
39
40 19 41 20 42 21
ommend that delay times be adjusted
CENTER
line and28enter29 the 30
disthe
43
44
45
46 25 47 26 48 27
using the Dolby Digital mode. It may be
tance from
the32 main33 listening
position
to
31
34
35
36
necessary to play a Dolby Digital disc so
the center
37 speaker.
38
39Repeat
40 the
41 procedure
42
that the CVR700 can process the signal
for all active
speaker
positions.
Note
that
43
44
45
46
47
48
and make the DISTANCES submenu
only the speaker positions that have been
accessible. If a different mode is selected
set to LARGE or SMALL in the
at a later time, the CVR700 will automatiSPEAKER CONFIGURATION
cally select the closest delay settings
submenu (Figure 21) may be adjusted.
available for the surround mode in use.
The appearance of five dashes next to a
50
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
35 37 39 41
37
34 36 38 40
36
33 26 25 37
32 27 24 36
speaker position in place
of a distance 35
31
34
23 35
setting indicates that30you28have
not config33
29 22 34
ured an active speaker
29 for30that
32
21location.
33
28 31 20 32
31
When the delay time for all speaker positions has been set you may return to the
master menu by scrolling to BACK TO
1
2 pressing
3
4
MASTER MENU and
then
you
the Set Button s 7 . However,
8
9 if 10
have a digital video source
or
13
14 a digital
15
16
video display that causes
lack
lip sync
19
20 of 21
22
you may use the Lip Sync
adjust
feature
25
26
27
28
to delay the audio signal
to
31 as32it is sent
33
34
all channels (as opposed
the individual
37 to 38
39
40
settings) so that the picture
43
44and sound
45
46
are brought back together. That adjustment is available in the LIP SYNC
submenu of the MAIN MENU, and
will be described on page 53.
Output Level Adjustment
Output level adjustment is a key part of
the configuration of any surround sound
product. It is particularly important for
a digital system such as JBL Cinema
Vision, as correct outputs ensure that you
hear soundtracks with the proper directionality and intensity.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Listeners are often
confused about the operation of the surround channels. While some assume that
sound should always be coming from
each speaker, most of the time there will
be little or no sound in the surround
channels. This is because they are only
used when a movie director or sound
mixer specifically places sound there to
create ambience, a special effect or to
continue action from the front of the
room to the rear. When the output levels
are properly set, it is normal for surround
speakers to operate only occasionally.
Artificially increasing the volume to the
rear speakers may destroy the illusion of
an enveloping sound field that duplicates
the way you hear sound in a movie theater or concert hall.
Before beginning the output level adjustment process, make certain that all
speaker connections have been properly
made. The system volume should be set
to the level that you will use during a typical listening session. While the CVR700
allows you to set output levels manually,
we recommend that the EzSet system be
used when the CVR700 is first installed
to establish the initial level settings.
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 51
Using EzSet
The JBL Cinema Vision EzSet (main)
remote makes it possible to quickly and
accurately set the output levels without
the use of a sound-pressure meter,
although manual adjustment is also available. However, for the easiest setup, follow these steps while seated in the listening position that will be used most often:
1. Make certain that all speaker positions
have been properly configured for their
“large” or “small” settings and turn off
the OSD system if it is in use.
2. Adjust the volume so that it is at –2dB,
as shown in the on-screen display or
Lower Display Line E.
3. Press and hold the SPL Button j
until the red LED under the SPL
Button j lights and the LCD screen
in the remote changes to the display
shown in Figure 24. (You may also navigate to the screen shown in Figure 24
by pressing and holding the Remote
Menu Button b for 3 seconds until
the main remote menu appears; then
scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS option
and press the Set Button s.)
SET SPKR LEVELS
E ZS ET
Figure 24
4. Press the Set Button j within 5
seconds so that the screen shown in
Figure 25 appears. Press the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls q until the
lower line of the remote’s LCD display
shows the number of speakers in your
system. (Don’t count the subwoofer.)
For example, if you have left, center,
right, side surround left and right, and
back surround left and right speakers
for a full 7.1 system, press the button
twice so that the bottom line reads
7 CHANNELS, as shown in Fig. 25.
SELECT # SPKRS
7 CHANNELS
Figure 25
5. Hold the remote in front of you at arm’s
length, being sure not to cover the
EzSet Microphone Sensor at the top of
the remote, and press the Set Button
j within 5 seconds to begin the
EzSet calibration process. At this point,
EzSet will take control of your system,
starting the test tone at the front left
speaker, and automatically adjusting
the output level so that it is correct.
During the adjustment, the Lower
Display Line E will display the
speaker position on the left side of the
display and the offset from reference
level on the right side of the display.
As the levels are adjusted, the speaker
position and a level indication will
appear in the bottom line of the
remote’s LCD display (Figure 26).
damage to your hearing or your equipment, it is important to avoid setting
the master volume above 0dB.
NOTE: The subwoofer output is not
adjusted when the test tone is in use. To
adjust the subwoofer output, you must
use an external source, following the
instructions on page 64.
E ZS ET C H A N N E L S : 7
SPEAKER:1 68dB
Manual Output Level
Adjustment
Figure 26
Output levels may also be adjusted manually, either to set them to a specific
level with an SPL meter, or to make fine
43 45
tuning adjustments to the levels obtained
44
using the EzSet remote. In order to 42
adjust
35 37
the subwoofer’s output level, you must
34 36
use the manual adjustment method.33
• The channel position being adjusted
will flash in the Speaker/Channel
Input Indicators F. If the test noise
is heard from a channel other than the
one shown in the indicator, there is an
error in the speaker connections. If this
is the case, press the Remote Menu
Button b to stop the adjustment.
Then turn the unit off and verify that all
speakers are connected to the proper
Speaker Outputs ¡™£¢.
• During the adjustment process for each
channel, you will see indications of
LOW, HIGH and a level readout in
.
This is normal, and it confirms that
EzSet is doing its job of changing the
levels to match the desired reference.
• If a channel cannot be adjusted to the
proper reference level, you will see
FAIL displayed in the remote’s bottom
LCD line before the test tone moves to
the next channel. This is usually an
43 45 47 49
indication that the volume
control was
42 44 46 48
set too low. When EzSet stops circulat35 37 39 41
ing the tone through all channels and
34 36 38 40
returns to normal, adjust
volume
33 the
26 25 37
level and repeat the procedure
from36
32 27 24
31 28 23 35
Step 3.
30
22
29
34
6. After the test noise has29circulated
once
30 21 33
through each channel, 28
it will
31send
32
20 the
tone to each channel once again, to
verify the settings.
7. After two complete circulations
1
2 of the
3
tone, the levels are set. Upon
7
8comple9
tion of the second circulation,
the LCD
13
14
15
will20 flash
Information Display 2
19
21
COMPLETE four times 25
and then
go27
26
out. The tone will stop and
the32 CVR700
31
33
will return to normal operation.
37
38
39
If you find that the output
43 levels
44 cho45
sen by EzSet are either uncomfortably
low or high, you may repeat the procedure. Return to Step 2 and adjust the
master volume either slightly higher or
lower to accommodate your particular
room layout and your tastes. You may
repeat this procedure as many times
as necessary to achieve a desired
result. In order to prevent possible
47
46
49
48
39
38
41
40
26 25
32 be27 24
Manual output level adjustment may
31 28 23
performed using either the on-screen
43 45 47 4930 5129 53
22
SPEAKER LEVELS
submenu,
42 44 46 4829 5030 52
21
or using the main remote
control.
35 37 39 4128 31 20
37 41
34 Menu
36 38System
40
Using the On-Screen
36 40
33 26 25 37
With the SPEAKERS
submenu on 35 39
32 27 24 36
1
screen, scroll down to
31the
34 238
23 35
28LEVELS
30 Button
line and press the Set
. 8
29 22s
34 7 33
29 30 21 submenu
The SPEAKER LEVELS
33 13 32 14
28 31 20 32
31
37
36
35
55
34
54
33
32
47
46
45
3
44
9
43
(Figure 27) will appear. All of the values
19
20
should be set at 0 dB. If not, you may
25
26
wish to scroll down to the RESET31
32
1
2
3 press
THESE SETTINGS
line
and
37 4
385
the Set Button s 7 effect
the
8
9 reset.
10
43
4411
13
51
50
*
S57
PEAKER
LEVELS
*
53 55
19
› FRONT
LEFT
: 200
52 54
C E N56
TER
:
0
FR
SI
BA
47
BA
46
SI
SU
45
RE
44
TE
BA
ONT
DE
C51
K
CK
50
DE
B49
WO
SET
S48
T
CK
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
32
31
42
Figure
27
4
10
16
22
28
34
40
46
14
43
S
S
S
S
O
T
T
R
U
U
U
U
F
T
O
O
I
R
R
R
R
E
H
N
25
GHT
: 260
R
RIGHT:
0
31
320
R
RIGHT:
R
LEFT
:
37
380
R
LEFT
:
0
R
: 440
43
ESE
SETTING
E
:
OF
SPEAKERS
ME
51
50
37
36
35
34
57 33
56 32
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
31
51
50
49
4
48
10
5
6
11
12
42
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
396
40
41
42
4512
46
47
48
15
16
17
18
d 21
B
dB
d 27
B
dB
33
dB
dB
39
dB
d 45
B
S?
F
NU
22
23
24
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
Scroll down to the TEST TONE line
and use the ‹/› Navigation Controls
5
q
so that ON appears. The inter6
nal
11 test
12 tone will begin to circulate from
speaker
17
18 to speaker in a clockwise direction
and
23
24 will be heard from all speakers
in
29 turn,
30 playing for two seconds in each
speaker
35
36 before continuing, and a blinking
on-screen
cursor will appear next to the
41
42
name
of each speaker location when the
47
48
sound is at that speaker.
Alternatively, you may leave the test tone
turned off and play a favorite piece of
program material, such as a CD music
selection or a DVD movie. With the
SPEAKER LEVELS submenu on
screen you will be able to adjust the output levels using the source material as a
reference.
51
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
43
42
Page 52
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
NOTE:32Remember
35 that
45 49
39 the
27 24 to
36 verify
speakers
been
properly
connected.
31 have
34
44 48
38
28 23 35
33 listen
43to
22 circulates,
As the30
test29
noise
34
29 30 21 33
32 comes
42 from
make certain
that the sound
28 31 20 32
31
43
42
45 47
44 46
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
25
24
23
22
21
20
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
the speaker position shown in the Lower
Display Line E. If the sound from a
speaker location does NOT match the
2
5
6 the
position 1indicated
in3 the 4display,
stop
7 by pressing
8
9 the10Test11Tone
12
test
tone
49
51 53 55 57
then
turn
the
Button
1352 54
14 twice,
16
17
18
48
50 h
5615
CVR700
the
20
21 Main
2357 24
41
43 45 19off
47 using
49
51
5322 55Power
41 and
51
37 2546
47
40
Switch
1
the
speaker
wiring
26 check
27 52
28 54
2956 30
42 44
48
50
36 31certain
40 46
5033 each
37
to
make
that
is
32
34 speaker
35
36 con35 37 39 41
35 39 45 49 41
36
37
34 36 to
38the40
nected
correct
37
38
39 output
40 47terminal.
4151 42
34 38 44 48
35
36
4046 46 4750 48
33 26 4325
37
44
45
After
checking
speaker
placement, let
33
43for 35
34
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
32 noise42
the
circulate
again,
33
31 test
34 38
44 and
48 listen
28 23 35
31
32
to
channels
30 see
33 sound
43 louder than
22 34
29which
29 others.
32 front 42
the
left speaker as
30 21 Using
33 the
31
31 20 press
32
a28reference,
the ‹/› Navigation
3
4
5
Controls
q
to bring all speakers to
6
the
same
volume
9
10
11
12 level. When the ‹/›
1 16 2 17 Controls
3 18 4
5
Navigation
q
are
6
15
pressed,
circulation
will
7 22 8 the
9 24 noise
10
11
12
21
23 test
pause
being
adjusted
to
13 28 on
14 the
17
18
27
29 15channel
30 16
give
the
19 you
22
23 adjustment.
24
33
34 20 time
35 21to36make
When
25 40 you
26 41release
27 42 28the button,
29
30 the circula39
tion
Continue
31 will
34 535seconds.
36
45
46 32resume
47 33 48after
to37adjust38 individual
until the vol39
40channels
41
42
ume
the
from
each
43 level
44 sounds
45
46 same
47
48
speaker. Adjustments should be made
with only the ‹/› Navigation Controls
q, NOT the main volume controls.
If you are using a sound-pressure level
(SPL) meter for precise level adjustment,
set the volume so that the meter reads
75dB on the C-Weighting, Slow scale.
Using the Remote as an SPL Meter
The EzSet feature on the main remote
may also be used as an SPL meter to
assist in accurate setting of the output
levels, when either the internal test tone
or favorite source material, such as a test
disc, is used. To use the remote as an
SPL meter, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the SPL Select Button
9 until the red LED under the Set
Button s lights and the LCD screen
in the remote changes to the display
shown in Figure 24. (You may also navigate to the screen shown in Figure 24
by pressing and holding the Remote
Menu Button b for 3 seconds until
the main remote menu appears; then
scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS
option and press the Set Button s.)
2. Press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls q to change the bottom
line of the remote’s LCD display to read
MANUAL SPL as shown in Figure 28.
52
SET SPKR LEVELS
MANUAL SPL
Figure 28
3. Press the Set Button s within 5
seconds to activate the remote’s manual
mode, so that it functions as an SPL
meter. The right corner of the bottom
line of the remote’s display will show
the output level of the speakers as the
test tone circulates. The level will
show as a direct SPL indication
between 66dB and 79dB. Below 66dB
the remote will read LOW and above
79dB it will read HIGH.
4. When all channels have an equal volume level, the adjustment is complete.
When you are finished with all adjustments, press the Test Tone Button
7 to return the remote to normal
operation. The word EXITING will
blink four times, and the remote will
switch to the DVD/MAIN mode.
NOTE: The subwoofer level is not
adjustable when the normal test tone is
in use. The subwoofer output level may
be adjusted when the channel levels are
being trimmed to a program source rather
than the test tone.
The output levels may also be adjusted at
any time using the remote control and
front-panel display. To adjust the output
levels in this fashion, press the Test
Tone Button 7. As soon as the button
is pressed, the test tone will begin to circulate as indicated earlier. The correct
channel from which the test noise should
be heard will be shown in the Lower
Display Line E. While the test noise is
circulating, the proper channel position
will also be indicated in the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators F by a
blinking letter within the correct channel.
To adjust the output level, press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q until
the desired level is shown in the display.
Once the buttons are released, the test
noise will begin to circulate again in 5
seconds. When all channels have the
same output level, press the Test Tone
Button 7 again to complete the process.
NOTE: Output level adjustment is not
available for the Surround Off mode.
Advanced Settings
The ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu (Figure 29) may be accessed from
the MAIN MENU (Figure 6). It contains some additional settings that will
enhance the convenience of the CVR700.
It is not necessary to make these adjustments during the initial setup, and you
may skip this section, returning to it later
when you have more experience with
the system.
*
› F
V
V
M
F
R
T
B
ADVANCED
R
O
O
A
A
E
O
A
N
L
L
I
N
S
T
UM
D
N
:
ET
FA
CK
P
E
E
M
M
NL
D
FA
EN
IN
AL
CTO
TO
SETTINGS
BRGH
EFAUL
ULT
L
U
TIM
IMUM
L
OF
RY
SE
MAIN
T
T
E
E
N
T
T
M
NESS:
:
:
VEL
OUT
:
OISE
HE
AB
TINGS
ENU
*
FULL
ON
Ð25
20
OVE
?
Figure 29
Front-Panel Brightness
The CVR700’s front-panel displays and
indicators are set at a default brightness
level that is sufficient for viewing in a
normally lit room. However, you may wish
to occasionally lower the brightness of
the display, or turn it off completely. The
FRNT PNL BRGHTNESS setting
defaults to full brightness, but you may
adjust it to dim the display to half brightness, or turn the display off altogether.
The LED inside the Main Power On/Off
Button 1 will always remain lit to
remind you that the unit is turned on. The
setting is temporary, and will only remain
in effect until the unit is turned off.
Volume Default
As is the case with most audio/video
receivers, when the CVR700 is turned on,
it will always return to the volume setting
in effect when the unit was turned off.
However, you may prefer to always have
the CVR700 turn on at a specific setting,
regardless
of what
was last
in use
43 45
47 49
51 53
55 when
57
44 turned
46 48off. 50
54 56
VOLUME
the unit42was
The 52
35 37 feature
39 41 may be turned on
DEFAULT
41 47
51
37
38 default
40
or off. 34
The 36
factory
setting
is OFF.
36 40 46 50
26 25 37
To set 33
the feature,
first turn
the OSD sys35 39 45 49
32
24 36
tem off31and27adjust
the system
volume to
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
the desired
default
turn-on
This
30 29
33 level.43
22 34
level will
29 be
42 panel
21 33 on32the front
30displayed
28 31 offset
as a negative
the reference
20 32from31
volume of 0dB, which is the system maximum. For example, you may find a level
of –25dB1 to be2 a comfortable
3
4
5default
6
turn-on volume.
Make
a
note
of this12 num7
8
9
10
11
ber, as you
will
not15be able
to17adjust
the
13
14
16
18
ADVANCED
volume 19
from within
the
20
21
22
23
24
SETTINGS
submenu.
25
26
27
28
29
30
Next, press
the
D 36 to
31
32 OSD
33 Button
34
35
and then
display the
37 MAIN
38
39MENU,
40
41
42
scroll to43the ADVANCED
line
and
44
45
46
47
48
select it to display the ADVANCED
SETTINGS submenu (Figure 29).
Scroll down to the VOLUME
DEFAULT line and set it to ON.
CVR700 OM
42
43
42
4543 4745 4947 51
49 5351 5553 5755
4:24 PM Page 53
4442 4644 4846 50
48 5250 5452 5654
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
3735 3937 413943 4145 47 49
51 53
3634 3836 403842 37
48 514750 5152
37 4741
4044 4146
36 4640
33 2526 372535 36
26
41 5046 50
3737 4039
35 4539
32 2427 362434 35
27
3636 3938
40 494537 4941
34 4438 484436 4840
2831 2328 352333 34
3526 3825
37
30 2229 342232 33
33 4336 4335 39
29
3427 24
32 4235 4234 38
3029 2130 332131 32
3328 23
3129 22
3128 2031 322030 32
31 34
33
12/17/04
Scroll down one more29line30to21
the 33
VOL32
28 31 20 32
31
DEFAULT LEVEL
line, and use the
1
21Controls
32
43
54
Navigation
q
65 to 6
select the
setting
chose
above1211 as a12
7
87
9you
109
1110
8
1
2volume.
3 Press
4
comfortable
default
turn-on
13
14
15
16
17
18
13
14
15
16
17
18
s
to
enter
your
the Set19 Button
7
8
9
10
20
21
22
2322
24
19
20
21
23
24
selection
memory.
Your1429setting
will1630
1328
15
25 into
26
27
30
25
26
27
28
29
be retained,
even
after
the
unit
is
pow19
20
21
2236
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
32
33
34
35
ered off.
2540
26
27
2842
37
38
39
41
42
37
38
39
40
41
3146
45
43Time-Out
44
45
Main 43
Menu44
37
444346 454847 5049 525154 535655 57
374239 444146 48 50 52 54 56
363538 374039 37
41 41 47 51
40 403746 415047 51
263425363738 36
393645 404946 50
273324 263625 35
37
43 45 47 49
51 53
283223 273524 34
36 38 3544 3948 45 49
42 44 46 48 50 52
3443 38 44 48
293122 283423 33
35
35 373342
39 4143
303021 293322 32
34
34 3632 38 4042 37 41
312920 303221 31
33
36 40
28 31 20 33
32 2631 25 37
35 39
32 27 24 36
appear. Use the ⁄/¤
31 28 Navigation
34 38
23 35
1Controls
2
3
430 to529
q
scroll
33
226 to34the desired
29 11
4 the
6 32
21
30
33 Button
7delay81setting
9 2 and
103press
125Set
28 31 20 32
31
57
56
5
11
17
23
29
3448
35
38
39
40
41
25
26 CVR700
27
28 and29CVPD50
30 also use
NOTE:
The
31
32saver
33 function
34
35
a screen
as an 36additional
37
38
39 to 40
41 burnout,
42
safety
measure
prevent
which
43 even
44 occur
45 if the
46 CVPD50’s
47
48 own startmay
up display is left on screen for too long a
period of time. After 2 minutes during
which no on-screen movement is detected,
the screen saver will appear. Simply press
any key on either remote or on the CVR700’s
front panel to wake the system and return
it to normal operation. The screen saver
time-out is not adjustable. Important: The
screen saver is not available for devices
connected to the DVI/Computer source
input, due to the nature of the digital
video interface. It is essential that you program your computer or other DVI source
device to enter the screen saver mode to
prevent burnout of the CVPD50 screen.
Fan Speed
The CVR700’s 700 watts of amplification
generate a significant amount of heat
that must be dissipated in order to prevent damage to delicate electrical components that could shorten the unit’s useful life, or even lead to failure. For this
reason, it is extremely important to place
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
CVR700 in a location with adequate
ventilation, and several inches clearance
on the top and sides.
33
48
47
28 31 20 32
31
SETTINGS
With
the ADVANCED
submenu on screen, scroll down to the
OSD TIMEOUT line. Use the ‹/›
1
2
3
4
5
Navigation
Controls
q
to select
6
a timeout
of1020, 1130, 4012or 50 sec7
8 period
9
onds.
Your
even
13
14 selection
15
16 will
17 be retained
18
after
the
unit
is
powered
off.
19
20
21
22
23
24
57
56
42
the
32
4746
The OSD menu system is used to simplify
43
44
45
46
the setup and adjustment of the CVR700
by using a series of on-screen menus.
The factory default setting for these
menus leaves them on the screen for 20
seconds after a period of inactivity before
they disappear from the screen (TimeOut). Time-Out is a safety measure to
prevent
the 57
menu text
43 45 image
47 49retention
51 53of 55
in
display,
42your
44 video
46 48
50 which
52 54might
56 happen
if35it were
left41
on indefinitely. This is of
37 39
41 47 displays
51
37 plasma
34 36 38concern
40
particular
for
36 However,
40 46 50
33 26
37
25 CVPD50.
such
as the
some
39 45 49
32 27 24 36
viewers
may prefer35a slightly
longer or
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
shorter
period before
the on-screen
dis30 29 22 34
33
43
play
disappears.
29 30 21 33
32
42
55
54
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
47
s 147 to158select
To12 retain
169 that
1710setting.
1811
setting
making
18 any
19the current
2013
2114
2215 without
2316
2417
changes,
scroll
to
the
BACK
TO
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1 and
2 29 3 the
5
line
25 MENU
30 4
31MAIN
32
3326
3427
3528 press
36
. 34 8 4235 9 36 10 11
31
37Set Button
38
3932s
4033 7 41
The CVR700 is equipped with a fan to
6
provide
cooling. The fan is always turning
12
at one of three speeds, depending upon
18 setting you choose for the FAN line
the
24
of the ADVANCED SETTINGS
30
submenu.
57
56
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
13
43
4437
*
36
The default setting is MINIMUM
42
NOISE. At this setting, the fan will
48
turn at its slowest speed when the volume is set below –20dB, and slightly
faster at a medium speed whenever the
volume is –20dB or higher. This intelligent cooling scheme minimizes distracting fan noise while maintaining proper
43 45 47
operating temperatures.
42 44 46
55
54
1
2
3
4
B
4538
463913 4740 14 4841 15
AUDIO
43
0
0
0
0
0
TIME
44
m
m
m
m
m
ACK
s
s
s
s
s
4519
TO
› 5
6
7
31 8
9
37
10
25
43
MAIN
DELAY
46 20
0
0
0
0
0
0
47 21
ms
s
ms
32m s
ms
38
ms
26m
44
27
33
39
45
MENU
42 16
6
12
17
18
23
24
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
*
48 22
Figure 30
49
48
You may choose the MAXIMUM
35 37 39
36 38
COOLING setting instead.34At this
33 26
setting, the fan runs at full speed
at all25
32 27 24
times. This setting is recommended
when
43 28
45 23
47
31
the CVR700 is placed inside a 30
cabinet.
42 44 22
46
29
41
40
37
36
49
35
48
34
51 53 55 57
This completes
50 52 54 56
the setup of the CVR700
audio section. There remain a few minor
adjustments
to be made, if desired, to the
37 41 47 51
43 45 47 49
51 53
setup
36 40menu
46 for
50 the internal DVD/CD
42 44 46 48 50 52
changer,
and49you may wish to make some
35 39 45
37 39 41
51 38
53 44
55
57 35to the
34
48
advanced
settings
Screen menus,
37 41
50 52 43
54 56 34 36 38 40
33
then you will be able
to
enjoy
the finest
36 40
33 26 25 37
32
42
in home theater entertainment.
35 39
32 27 24 36
55
54
57
56
47 51
46 50
29
35submenu
37 21
39 33
41
30
ADVANCED SETTINGS
45 49
37 41 47 51
34 31
36 20
38 32
40 31
settings may be reset to their28
factory
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
36 40 Setup
46 50
33 26 25 37 DVD
defaults by scrolling to the RESET
30 29 22 34
33
43
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
29
ALL OF THE ABOVE TO
32
42
Setup
are21accessed
by
33
31 28 23 35 The
34 DVD
38 44
48 menus30
28 31
31
1 line 2and 3
4 33 making
5
20 32 and
6 sure that
FACTORY SETTINGS?
the CVR700
30
43
29 22 34 first
pressing the Set Button s 297 . 308 21 933 10CVPD50
12 properly installed and con32 11 are
42
28 31 20 32 nected,
13
14
15
1631 17 and
18 then pressing the Power On
Lip Sync
(All) 23Button
to 2turn on
3 both
4
5
6
19
20
21
22
24 b 1
In addition to adjusting the delay
time
units.29Press30 the DVD
Button
25
26
27
28
7 Setup
8
9
10
11
12
for each individual speaker position,
the 333 34c
to366display13the SETUP
4
311
322
355
14
15
16
17
18
CVR700 allows you to adjust the
delay
for399 40MENU
31)19for the
377
388
4111 (Figure
4212
10
20 DVD/CD
21
22
23
24
the combined output of all speakers
as
a 45 46changer.
4313
4414
4717
4818
25
26
27
28
29
30
15
16
group. This feature is called Lip Sync
31
32
33
34
35
36
19
20
21
22
23
24
SETUP MENU
Delay; it allows you to compensate for
37
38
39
40
41
42
25
26
27
28
29
30
TV DISPLAY
16:9 WIDE
delays to the video image that may be
45C E D 46
47
48
31
32
33 43 3445 V35
36O U T 51 4353 I 55
I
D E O49
N44
T E R57
LA
47
caused by the processing in products
TV TYPE
MULTI
37
38
39 42 4044 V41
42M O D E
46
50 52 A 54
I
D E O48
U T O 56
such as digital video displays, video
PARENTAL LOCK
UNLOCK
43
44
45 35 4637 47
39 41
O48
RD
scalars, digital cable or satellite systems, 34 36 PD AV38SD S WA40
U D I O 37
ON
41
5151 53 55 57
43 45 47 5 47
49
SLIDE SHOW
SEC
or personal video recorders. With proper
33 26 25 3742 36
44 40
46 46
48 5050 52 54 56
URN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
adjustment of the setting for Lip Sync
39 45 49
32 27R E T24
3635 35
37 39 41
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
Delay, you can eliminate the loss of lip
Figure 31
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
30 29 22 34
33
43
sync that may be caused by digital video
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
29 Important
32
42 Setup
Note:
DVD
30 21 33
35 menu
39 45 49
applications.
32 27The
24 36
28 functions
31 20 differently
3231 31 from the CVR700
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
When the CVR700
used49with51the53 55 57 audio menu 30
43 45 is47
33 will 43
system.
Although
you
29 22
34
CVPD50 plasma
due 54
to 56 still use the 29
42 display,
44 46 the
48 delay
50 52
32
42
21 33
30 Navigation
⁄/¤
28 31 20 32
video processing
is a39known
35 37
41 factor, and
31 one
q
to5 scroll6 from
1Controls
2
3
4
41 47 51
34 Sync
36 delay
38 40time37of 50ms
the default Lip
to12scroll through
7line to
8 the 9next,10in order
11
33 26 However,
25 37 if36you40are46 50
should be retained.
the
options
available
for
each
setting,
14
15
16
17
18
39 45 49 13
32 27 24 36
using the CVR700
with another35display,
or
1
2 press
3 the 4Set 5
6
repeatedly
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48 19you must
20
21
22
23
24
if you are experiencing
sync33problems
30 29 22 lip
43
9 30 10
11
12
34
25Button
26 s
27 7 28. 829
with an external
source,
you may
to
29 30
32 wish42
21 33
1536 with
16 the
17
18
31If you32are using
33 13 34the 14CVR700
35
28 31
adjust the delay
time.20 32 31
2041 then
2142 you
22 should
23
24
37CVPD50
38 display
39 19 40screen,
With the MAIN MENU (Figure 6) on
2647
2748their
28 factory
29
30
43leave44the first
45 25four
46 lines
at
screen, scroll down to the LIP SYNC
31 These
32
33
34 should
35
36
default settings.
settings
3
4 Set
5
6
line and select1 it by2pressing
the
37 if you
38 are
39 using
40 the
41
42
only be adjusted
Button s 7 . The
8 AUDIO
9
10 TIME
11
12
44
45
47
48
CVR700 with a43 different
video46display
DELAY submenu
13
14(Figure
15 30)16will17
18
device.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
31
32
33
28
29
30
34
35
37
38
36
39
40
41
43
44
42
45
46
47
48
53
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 54
The first line of the SETUP MENU
is the TV DISPLAY setting, which
should be set to match the aspect ratio of
your video display device. For the CVPD50,
this setting should be left at its factory
default of 16:9 WIDE. If you are
using a different video display monitor
that has a 4:3 aspect ratio screen and is
capable of displaying a progressive scan
image, you may select the 4:3PS setting, or if your display monitor has a 4:3
aspect ratio screen but does not have
progressive scan capability, you should
select the 4:3LB setting, which will
display widescreen (16:9) images with
black bars above and below the image.
The second line sets the CVR700’s
Component Video Monitor Outputs
· to progressive scan or interlaced.
There is no need to adjust this setting if
you are using the CVPD50, but if you are
using these outputs with another video
display device, you must select the
INTERLACED setting if the display
monitor is not capable of displaying a
progressive scan signal, or you may
choose the PROGRESSIVE setting
if your display monitor is capable of displaying that type of video signal.
The TV TYPE line should be set to
MULTI if you will be viewing both
NTSC and PAL DVDs, or you may set it to
either NTSC, which is the video standard used for most discs available in the
United States, or PAL, which is the
video standard used for most discs available in other parts of the world.
The VIDEO MODE setting affects
the CVPD50 plasma display and the
Component Video Monitor Outputs
· (but not the other video outputs). This
setting allows you to compensate for
errors in the disc authoring where proper
maintenance of frame rate was not carried out in the film-to-video conversion
process.
The CVR700’s advanced adaptive interlacer will handle most of these types
of problems, and it is therefore recommended that you leave this line at the
factory default setting of AUTO.
However, if you observe problems with
vertical resolution on a specific disc,
experiment by selecting the FILM
mode for programs originally created
on film, or the VIDEO mode for programs originating on video.
54
Parental Control
The Rating Levels
The CVR700’s Password System is used
to control viewing of restricted programs
and offers the capability to change the
password itself and the rating. The
CVR700 is shipped with “1234” as the
default password and with the parental
control settings off. The following
instructions will show how to change
the password and lock the settings.
The five MPAA rating symbols are
“G” (General, Level 1), “PG” (Parental
Guidance, Level 3), “PG13” (Parental
Guidance and 13 years old, Level 4), “R”
(Restricted, Level 6) and “NC 17” (from
17 years old, Level 7). The CVR700 will
accommodate a total of eight rating
steps, as set by the DVD creators. These
additional steps allow for more critical
control of program playback for all
audiences.
NOTE: The DVD disc must be specifically
encoded with rating information for
Parental Control to work.
Password
43
45 47
Level 8: All DVDs, including adult
materials, can be played.
49
42 the
44 46 48
If you change the password from
35
37 39 41
factory default setting, please remember
36 38 40
to write the new password in34
a safe
33 26 25 37
place. You cannot access rated
or
32discs
27 24 36
rating/password menus or change
or 23 35
31 28
30 without
clear the password (see below)
29 22 34
21 33
30 forentering the correct password.29If you
28 31 20 32
get your password, you can reset
the
CVR700 to the factory default password
43 45 47 49
TO
(1234) by scrolling to the RETURN
42 44 46 48
1
2
3
and
FACTORY SETTINGS35line
37 39 41
pressing the Set Button s347 36
. 838 40
9
3313 menu
26 1425
NOTE: This will restore all DVD
19 27 2024
settings to the factory default32settings.
31 28 23
25
26
Any changes you have made will
30 be lost.
22
15
37
36
21
35
27
29
34
31
32
33
29
wish to30 21 33
39
2837 31 3820 32
younger view-
We recommend that if you
restrict access to DVDs for
43
44
45
ers, that you change the password as
part of the setup process. Scroll to the
3
PASSWORD line and select1it by 2
pressing the Set Button s 7 . The
8
9
display shown in Figure 32 will13appear,
14
15
prompting you to enter the old 19password,
20
21
and then the new. Enter “1234”25 for the
26
27
old password, and then enter a31new 32 33
password of your choice. Type 37
carefully,
38
39
as a mistyped entry will be retained
as 45
43
44
the new password, and it is not possible
to correct a mistyped digit without creating an entirely new password.
SETUP
MENU
TV DISPLAY
VIDEO OUT
TV TYPE
VIDEO MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
PASSWORD
DVD AUDIO
SLIDE SHOW
RETURN
TO
16:9 WIDE
INTERLACED
NTSC
AUTO
OLD: ---NEW: ---5 SEC
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Figure 32
If for some reason you forget your password, you may override the password
control by entering “2580” as the password, and then program a new password.
51 53 55 57
Levels
50
52 754to 2:
56 DVDs
for general audiences/children can be played.
51
37 411:47
Level
DVDs
for children can be played;
36 40 46 50
DVDs
for
adults/general
audiences are
35 39 45 49
prohibited.
34 38 44 48
33
43 or45changed
47 49 the51 53 55 57
After
you43have entered
32
42
42 the
44 level
46 of
48 50 52 54 56
password,
you may set
31
35
37
39
access (see Figure 31). The lowest41set41 47 51
34 36 38 40
ting,53“1G”
targeted 37
for
51
55 refers
57 to materials
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
43and
45considered
47 49 to
51 be53 55 57
a general
50
52 54audience
56
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
4
5
6
44 46 48 are
50 52 54 56
appropriate
for all.42Higher
31 28ratings
34 38 44 48
23 35
35
10
11to 47
12 51
3037 2939toward
given
materials
targeted
33
43
37 41
2241 34 older,
37 3241 47 4251
34 2936 38 2140
36 40
4618 50
16
17mature
more
audiences;
those
materials
30
33
33 28263125 203732 36 3140 46 50
35 39
49
22
23 45
may
not
be24appropriate
for younger view35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
34 38 44 48
28
29 described
30
ers, as
above.
More informa31
34 38 44 48
28 23 35
33
43
34
35
36
tion
about
ratings
is
available
at
30
33
43
22
29
34
32
42
29 130 212 33
3 324
5 42 6
40
42
www.mpaa.org/movieratings/.
Press
31 41
28 31 repeatedly
208 32 9 31
46
47 Button
48
the Set
s
to10 11 12
7
scroll through the rating
When
13 levels.
14
15
16
17
18
the
desired
level
appears,
simply
use
the
19
20
21
22
23
24
4
5
6
⁄/¤ Navigation1Controls
3 27 4 28to5 29 6 30
25 2 26 q
10
11
12
scroll to another line,
and8the
setting
7 31
32 9 33 10 will
34 11 35 12 36
16
17
18
be retained.
13 37 14 38 15 39 16 40 17 41 18 42
22
23
24
43 20
44 21
AUDIO19 line
may
be45set22 to46 23
The DVD
29
30
25
26
27
enable
playback
of
DVD-Audio
discs28or 29
34
35
36
31
32types33of discs.
34
35
disable
playback
of
those
40
41
42
37
38
39different
40
41
Some
DVD-Audio
discs
contain
46
47
48
44 and45audio
46
47
materials, including43menus
tracks, that are only available depending
on the capabilities of the player. For
example, when such a DVD-Audio disc is
played in a DVD-Video player that doesn’t
have DVD-Audio capability, a special
DVD-Video menu may be accessed, and
conventional audio tracks, such as Dolby
Digital 5.1 and 2-channel PCM, will be
available. However, when that same disc
is played in a DVD-Audio player, only the
DVD-Audio menu may be accessed, and
the only available audio tracks will be in
the high-resolution DVD-Audio formats.
28
JBL recognizes that there may be reasons
why you would wish to have access to all
of the materials on a DVD-Audio disc. To
access the DVD-Video materials on your
47
24 48
30
36
42
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 55
DVD-Audio disc, change the DVD
AUDIO line to OFF. You may switch
back and forth between the ON and OFF
settings at any time to access either set
of materials.
The SLIDE SHOW line allows you to
set the amount of time a JPEG still image
will remain on screen before the CVR700
automatically advances to the next image
on the disc. You may set this time to 2, 3,
4 or 5 seconds.
This completes the setup of the internal
DVD/CD changer.
Screen Setup
The CVPD50 plasma display screen utilizes state-of-the-art digital video pro43cessing
45 47that
49is contained
51 53 55within
57 the
42CVR700,
44 46 and
48 it is
50not52possible
54 56to use the
35CVPD50
37 39 without
41
the CVR700 processor.
41 47 51
37 processor
34Although
36 38 the
40 video
is extremely
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
flexible,
making
adjustments
to
video
43 27
45 24
47 36
49 35
51 39
53 45
55 49
57
32
display
devices
requires
knowledge
and
42 28
44 23
46 35
48 34
50 38
52 44
54 48
56
31
to avoid
30
33 making
43 mistakes that
35experience
37 22
39 34
41
29
to
29
51
32
37 41 42
47assistance
21
34could
36 require
38 33
40 professional
30
28
36
you40will46not50do any
31
32
33correct.
26 20
37 31
25Although
35 39 by
45making
49
32damage
27 24to 36
the CVPD50
these
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
adjustments, you could set the picture in
30 29 22 34
33
43
such a way that it is not possible to view
291 30 2 21 333 432 5 426
favorite materials. 12
287your
31 8 20 932 1031 11
To access
the
14
15 screen
16
17setup18menus, first
make20sure 21the remote
22
23 control
24 is set to
mode
by
pressing
the
25Screen
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6 Screen
e
.
If
this
is
not done,
31Selector
32
33
34
35
36
7
8
9
10
11
12
execute
37the remote
38
39will 40
41 the
42 commands
13
14
15
16
17
18
43programmed
44
45 for46the current
47
48 source
19
20
21
22
23
24
device,
or for
the28CVR700
audio
section.
25
26
27
29
30
13
SCREEN
I
P
45D
A
44I
E
43
42
NPU
ICT
I47
SP
DVA
46
NFO
XIT
MENU
TS/PIP
URE
SETTINGS
L49
A Y 51
S E T 53
T I N 55
G S 57
NCED
48 50 52 54 56
RMATION
35 37 39 41
34 36 4338 4540 47 37
49 415147 5351 55 57
33 264225 4437 46 36
48 4050465250 54 56
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
35 37 39 41
33 35 34 38 44 48
31 Figure
283423
37 41 47 51
36 38 40
30 29 22 34
33
43
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
29 IMPORTANT
The
Setup
32
42 Screen
303221 33 NOTE:
35
39 45 49
27 24 36
28 menus
31
313120function
32
from44the48
34 38
28 23 differently
35
30 audio
CVR700
Although
33
43
29 22menu
34 system.
32
42
Navigation
you 29
will still
use 33
the ⁄/¤
30 21
28 31 20 32
31
q
to5 scroll6 from one line
Controls
2
3
4
to the8 next,9 in order
to scroll
10
11
12 through the
options
available
for
each
13
14
15
16
17
18setting, you
1
2
3
4the Set
5
6
Button
must20repeatedly
press
19
21
22
23
24
s 267 . 278 28 9 2910 3011 12
25
1
7
3213
3314
3415 that
35 16 for3617
It is recommended
initial18setup,
20
23 video
24
3819
39
4021 any
4122 of42the
you avoid
changing
set25
26
27
28
29
43tings44and allow
45
46the CVPD50
47
48 and 30
CVR700
31
32
33
34 your
35 materials
36
to automatically
display
38
39default
40 settings.
41
42 As you
using 37the factory
43 more
44 familiar
45
46
48
become
with47the system
and desire to tweak it, you may wish to
explore some of these settings.
31
37
Inputs and Picture-in-Picture
Settings
Scroll to the INPUTS/PIP menu
and select it. The INPUTS/PIP
menu (Figure 34) will be displayed.
19
Button
Press 32the Screen
33
34 Setup
35
36
j 38 to39display
37
40 the
41 SCREEN
42
MENU
33).
If47the current
source
43
44 (Figure
45
46
48
is an external device that you are using
with component video, or if the source
has no video output, the background will
be black. If your source uses component
video, unless you have also made an Svideo connection from the source to the
CVR700, the menus will not be displayed.
Also, if the current source is the DVI/
Computer source, the menus will not be
displayed. Otherwise, the menus will be
transparent, with the program material
visible behind them. As described below,
you may adjust the transparency of
the menus from a setting in the
ADVANCED menu.
31
35a), or the DVI SETTINGS menu
(Figure 35b), depending on the type of
source device you have connected to the
DVI/Computer input. Scroll down to the
Connected device line and
select the appropriate source type: DVD
HDCP,43HD 45
tuner47or PC
a personal
49 for51
53 55 com57
puter.42
Any44
of these
devices
46 48
50 must
52 be
54 56
equipped
either
35 with
37 39
41a DVI video output
or a VGA
output
51
47 con37you41have
34 video
36 38
40 that
46
36
DVI
(HDCP)/
nected
CVR700’s
40
50
33to the
26 25 37
35 using
39 45
32 27
the 49
Computer
Video
36
24 Input
31 VGA-to-DVI
34 cable.
38 44This
48
supplied
28 23 35adaptor
22 size
29 the
34 and33
menu30
affects
position43
of
29 30 21 source
42the
32
33
the DVI/Computer
picture on
28 31 20 32
31
screen, and it is set by the CVPD50 automatically the first time you connect your
computer or other device to the DVI video
input. After
the
1
2 first3 use, 4these5 menu6 settings are
no
longer
user-adjustable
for
7
8
9
10
11
12
the DVI/Computer input.
13
14
DVI
Horizontal
Pixel
Back
to
screen
Digital
Off
17
18
polarities
Vertical
to
resolution
resolution
Connected
Back
SETTINGS
frequency
frequency
Horizontal
Main input
Input settings
PIP mode
PIP size
PIP horiz. pos.
PIP vert. pos.
16
Figure 35a
Vertical
INPUTS/PIP
15
& P C S21
E T T I 22
N G S 23
H D20
24
Horizontal Frequency
31.3kHz
0Hz
Vertical Frequency
25
26
27
28 5 0 .29
30
Pixel Clock
27.0MHz
H/V Polarities
Ð 7 Ð
31
32
33
34
35
36
0
Auto Setup
Horizontal Position
0 37
38
39
40
41
42
Vertical Position
0
0
Hirizontal Total
47
48
V e r t43
i c a l R44
e s o l u45
t i o i n46
Phase
Reset default settings
Back to screen menu
19
device
screen
33.7kHz
59.9Hz
+/+
1805
986
HDCP
DVD
menu
menu
Figure 35b
Figure 34
Main Input: The Main
Input line is informational only
and you should not attempt to change it.
The setting will reflect the video format
of the current source. For the internal
DVD/CD changer, this setting will read
Digital. For external sources, this
setting will indicate which video input is
in use: i.e., component video, composite
video or S-video.
Input Settings: The Input
Settings line will not be accessible when the internal DVD/CD changer is
in use. The available settings will vary
depending upon the video format of the
current source.
For DVI sources, selecting Input
Settings takes you to either the
HD&PC SETTINGS menu (Figure
This menu is also used to align an HDTV
picture if necessary. Great caution should
be used to avoid ending up with a video
image that is too small in size to be viewable. You may select the reset function
if you adjust these settings incorrectly.
The first four lines contain information
only and are not adjustable. The Phase
line simply reflects the settings of the
incoming signal and is not adjustable.
• Auto Setup: This initiates the
process of detecting the incoming video
signal and adjusting the horizontal and
vertical position and size of the display.
• Horizontal Position:
This temperature bar reflects the horizontal positioning of the image on
screen. When the dark square is completely to the left, the image is moved
as far to the left side of the screen as
55
43
42
CVR700 OM
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
45 47
44 46
49
48
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
12/17/04
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
2
51 53 55 57
4:24 PM Page
50 52 54 56
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
3
4
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
25
26
27
28
31
32
33
34
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
•
41
40
39
38
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
56
43
42
45 47
44 46
35 37 39
34 36 38
42
33 26 25
32 27 24
possible, and the numerical 31
value28is 23
0.
30 29 22
Use the
‹
/
›
Navigation
Controls
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
29 30the21
q
5
642 to44adjust
46 the
48 position
50 52 of
54 56
28 31 20
image
if it 37
is not
centered
on
11
12
35
39 initially
41
37 41 47 51
the
34 36 38 40
17 screen.
18
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
23
24
Position:
Vertical
This
35 39
32 27 24 36
1 45 2 49
29
30
temperature
reflects
the
vertical
31 28bar
34
44
38
48
23 35
7
8
35
36
positioning
of the
on screen.
30 29
33
43
22 image
34
13 42 14 to
29
41
42
When
the dark
square
completely
30 21
33 is32
28 the
19 far 20
31 as
31image
20 32
47 left,
48
the
is moved
to
25
26
the
43 bottom
45 47 of49the screen
51 53 as
55possible,
57
31
32
and
value
0. Use
42 the
44 numerical
46 48 50
52 is 54
56 the
37
38
‹
/
›
Navigation
Controls
q
1
2
3
4
5
6
35 37 39 41
43
44
4110the
37
47image
to
the 40
position
34 adjust
36 738
8
9 of
11 51 12if it
36 40
46 50
33not26initially
is
on
1325 37
14centered
15
16 the17 screen.
18
32
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
27 24 36
35 39 45 49
19
20
21
22
23 This
24
• Horizontal
31 28 23 35
34Total:
38 44 48
26 reflects
27
28the
29
30
temperature
bar
30 29 2522 34
33
43horizontal
29 of
3121 displayed
32
33 image.
34 42When
35
36
32
size
the
30 the
33
28 31
31
32
3720 is
38completely
39
40 to the
41 left
42
gray
square
44
45
46is 0, 47
48
and the 43numerical
value
the image
is at maximum width. Use the ‹/›
Navigation
Controls
q
to
1 55 257
3
4
5
6
51 53
adjust
of10 the 11image12 until it
7 54 the
856 width
9
50 52
fills
13 the14screen.
15
16
17
18
37 4119 47 2051 21
22
23
24
• Vertical Resolution:
36 40 46 50
25 temperature
26
27
28 reflects
29
30the vertiThis
bar
35 39 45 49
34
35 image
36 in
cal31 size
of the33 displayed
34 38
44 3248
37
38
39
40
41
42used.
terms
of
the
number
of
pixels
33
43
32
31
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
25
26
27
28
31
32
33
34
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
43 42 the
44 gray
45 square
46
47 completely
48
When
is
to the left and the numerical value is
0, the image is at maximum height.
Use the ‹/› Navigation Controls
q
to adjust the vertical height
5
6
of
11 the12image until it fills the screen.
17
When
a18composite or S-video source
24 selecting the Input
is 23
in use,
29
30
Settings
will take you to the
35
36 SETTINGS menu (Fig. 36).
VIDEO
42
The41 Video
Standard line is
47
48
informational
only, and will reflect the
video standard for your country. The
VCR Stability feature may be
set to either On or Off. Turning it on
improves the display of VCR materials.
VIDEO SETTINGS
Video Standard
Auto
VCR Stability
On
back to input menu
Figure 36
56
PIP Mode: This line of the
INPUTS/PIP menu turns the picture-in-picture feature on or off. In order
to use this feature, you must connect the
composite video output of a source that
you desire to monitor to the Picture-inPicture (PIP) Composite Video Input
49
48
41
40
37
36
35
34
33
32
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
37 41 47 51
36 40 46 50
35 39 45 49
a.
is only available when the
34 PIP
44 48
38 mode
33
43
current
source
input is using composite
32 (not42component or S-video). PIP1
video
31
mode
enables you to monitor the source
7
connected to the PIP input while watch13
ing another video source. When desired,
19
4
5 swap
6
you
may
the images by pressing
25
10 holding
11
12the PIP Swap Button 31
and
c
several
seconds.
This
will
16
17 for
1843
45 47
49
51 53
37 55
display
main
source
PIP 52
win22
23 the 24
42 44
46 in
48the50
43 54
dow
and
PIP 37
source
39 in
41the main
28
29 the
3035
37 41 47
viewing
34
35 area.
3634 36 38 40
33
36 41
40 46 51
50
37
47 46
34 36
26 38
37
25 40
43 The44temperature
45
PIP
Size:
bar47 at 48
35 40
45 50
39 46
49
32 26
36
33
27 25
36
24 37
this
reflects
the
the49
PIP win31 line
34size
44
38 of45
48
35
39
32
23 36
28 24
35
27
dow.
When
towards
30 28
33 square
43is 48
31
34
22 the
38 44
29
34 dark
23
35
29 right
30
32bar, the
42window is
the
side34
of the
33
43
21
30 22
33
29
28 31 21
29
31 when
32
32
42the square is
increased
size, and
30 20in 33
28 31 20 32
31 of the bar, the wintowards
the left side
dow is decreased in size. Use the ‹/›
Navigation
Controls
q
to adjust
1
2
3
4
5
6
17 setting.
28
39
4
5 Set612Button s
this
Pressing
the
10
11
repeatedly
will
the
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 only
17 increase
18
size
it.
14
15
17
18
19 of
2047 window,
21
22
23not55decrease
24 57
4313
45 the
49 16
51but53
4219
44Horiz.
46 47
48 49
50
52
54The
56tempera51
57
20
21
22
23
24
25 43
2645
27
28
29 53
30 55
Pos.:
PIP
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
35
37
39
41
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 bar32at this
33 line
34 reflects
35
36 relative
ture
the
51
37 41
4736
3431
36 32
38 39
40 41
33
34
35
37 35
3837
39
40
41 PIP
42window on
horizontal
position
of the
36 37
46 47
40 41
50 51
33 34
36 38
26 38
37 40
37
39
40
41
42
43 CVPD50
4425 screen.
45
46 When
47 the
48 dark
the
45 46
39 40
49 50
32 33
27 26
36 3735 36
24 25
43
44
45
46the right
47
48 of the
square
is23towards
side
31 32
44
45
38 39
48 49
28 27
35 3634 35
24
the
is33
positioned
bar,
30 31
43 toward
34 38
44 48 the
22 23
29 window
34 35
28
29 30
43 the
42when
right
side29
the
21of 22
30
33 screen,
3432 33and
28 29
31 32
31 is30
32 33the
20
21
square
towards
left side42
of the bar,
28 31 20 32
31 toward the
the window
is positioned
left side of the screen. Use the ‹/›
Navigation
Controls
q
to adjust
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
this
setting.
Pressing
the
Set
Button
7
8
9
10
11
12 6
s
repeatedly
will
only
7
8
9
10
11
12 the
13
14
15
16
17
18move
window
but
14 21 15the
1623 17
18
19 13 20towards
22 right,
24 not
towards
25 19 26the20left.
27 2128 2229 23 30 24
29 36 tempera30
31 25Vert.
32 26 33 27
34 2835 The
PIP
Pos.:
31 38at this
32 39 line
3340 reflects
3441 35the
36
37 bar
42 relative
ture
37
38
39
40
41
42 on the
43
44
45
46
47
48
vertical position of the PIP window
43 screen.
44
45
46the 47
48
CVPD50
When
dark square
is
towards the right side of the bar, the window is positioned toward the top of the
screen, and when the square is towards
the left side of the bar, the window is
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
43
28
42
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
45
31
44
37
36
35
34
33
49
32
48
25
24
23
22
21
47
20
46
20
positioned toward the bottom35of the
37 39 41
screen. Use the ‹/› Navigation
34 36 38 40
3
Controls
q
to adjust this
3
4
5
6
331 setting.
26 2 25 37
repeatPressing
8 24 36
9
9
10 the
11 Set
12 Button s327 27
31 upwards,
35
edly will
only
the window
13 28 1423 15
15
16
17 move
18
30 29 22 34
but not
19
20
21
21
22 downwards.
23
24
26
27
32
33
2
8
14
57
38
4456
51
36 40 46 50
33
26
37
25
40
41
42
There
are two
available PIP modes:
35 39in 45 49
32 27 24 36
46 mode
47
one
a4831
small28inset
window
34will
38 44 48
23 35
30 CVPD50
appear on the
and it will
33
43
29 22 screen,
34
29 30connected
32the PIP42
21 33 to
display the source
28 31 20 32
31
input. The second mode splits the screen
into two equal halves, displaying the
main video signal on the left side and the
2
3
4
5
6
Set
PIP source on 1the right.
Press
the
Button s 7 repeatedly
while
at
8
9
10
11
12
the PIP Mode
line
to15cycle16 through
13
14
17
18
Off
these
modes
and
the
19
20
2257 23The 24
43 45 47 49
51 53 21 55setting.
remaining
42 45
44 47
46settings
48
50in
52 27INPUTS/
54 2857
56 29
25
26 the
30
43
49
51
53
55
PIP
enable
adjust
42
46
5032you
52to
35 44
37menu
39 48
41
31
33 54
3456 the
35 size
36
and
of
PIP 41
window.
34 position
36 39
38 41
40
35
37
37 the37
38
39 47 4051 41
42
51
50
28 Settings
29
30
Picture
34
35
36
29 30 21 33
27
2825 31 2620 32
31
32
33
With the SCREEN MENU (Fig. 33) on
37
38
39
40
41
42
screen, scroll down to the PICTURE
43
44
45
45
46
47
48
3
SETTINGS line and select 1it by 2
pressing the Set Button s 7 . The
8
9
PICTURE SETTINGS 13submenu
14
15
(Figure 37) will be displayed. 19
20
21
39
PICTURE SETTINGS
Digital Video Input
Mode
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
Color
DNC
Photo CD
Reset input
Back to screen menu
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
32
42
51 53 55 57
31
50 52 54 56
37 41
5
40
35 39
10
11
34 38
16
17
33
436
47
466
4512
44
18
43
22
23
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
4
47
5
48
6
10
11
12
16
17
18
22
23
24
32
31
24
42
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
Broadcast
0 37
38
8
1 43
44
15
5
Off
Figure 37
You may wish to use a test disc to guide
you through the adjustment process.
Several are available from Internet
retailers.
Alternatively, we recommend that you
select one of the three factory preset
modes designed for optimal display of
various types of programs. These modes
are also directly accessible from both
remote controls. The Sports mode is
designed for the types of images normally
used in sporting events; the Movies
mode displays the images found in many
movies, which are often darker than
normal; and the Broadcast mode offers
the best display of broadcast television
programs.
Contrast: This setting is also
known as “white level”, and is most easily
set using a test pattern containing a
grayscale – monochrome bars in different
shades of black, gray and white. Adjust
this setting between –64 and 63 to the
point just before the brightest bars of
your test pattern start to bleed into the
surrounding black background. If you do
not have a test pattern, adjust it to the
lowest level where all shades of a given
color remain visible.
Brightness: This setting is also
known as “black level”, and it should be
adjusted using a PLUGE pattern found on
a test disc. Adjust this setting between
–64 and 63 to the lowest point where
one of the moving lines in the black field
remains visible, but before both disappear. If you do not have a test pattern,
51
50
49
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 57
adjust it so that a typical video picture
has about the same appearance as the
surroundings in the room. That way the
eye is relaxed when watching the TV picture. This setting may be reduced when
the surrounding light is dimmed, thereby
usually improving the sharpness significantly.
recommend for most installations.
However, you may prefer the colors to
appear more blue overall, or more red
overall. Select the Cold setting for
more blue content, or the Warm setting
for more red content. Alternatively, if you
prefer to adjust the degree of red, green
and blue more precisely, select the
USER setting, which will activate user
color temperature settings for each color.
Sharpness: This temperature bar
and numerical value (ranging from 0 to 4)
reflect the sharpness of the picture. Due
to the pixel structure of video images,
lowering the sharpness setting will tend
to improve the quality of the picture.
Picture Contrast: This setting has three options: Ideal, Light and
Dark. The factory default setting is
named Ideal, and is what we recommend for most installations. However,
you may prefer images to appear either
lighter or darker.
Color: This temperature bar and
numerical value (ranging from 0 to 31)
reflect the saturation of the color.
Decreasing this setting to 0 will remove
all color and make the picture appear
monochrome (black and white). Increasing
it will brighten the intensity of the colors.
It may be adjusted using a blue filter and
color bars. If you do not have access to a
test pattern, you may adjust this setting
so that red objects are not too bright and
fuzzy around the edges.
User Color Temp. red: This
setting is only active when the User
settings has been selected at the
Color Temperature line
above. The temperature bar and numerical value (ranging between 0 and 255)
reflect the intensity of the red pixels.
DNC: This temperature bar and numerical value (ranging from 0 to 15) is used to
adjust dynamic noise control. Leave this
setting at its factory default, unless you
43 45 47
have a video image with interference
that 49
44 may
46 48
is causing video “noise”. This 42
setting
37 39 41
be used to reduce the amount35of noise
34 36 38 40
displayed.
33
26 25 37
The reset line may be used to32reset
27all24of 36
31 current
28 23 35
the settings in this menu for the
30 29 22 34
video input.
Display Settings
29
28
30 21 33
31 20 32
With the SCREEN MENU (Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll down to the DISPLAY
3
SETTINGS line and select1it by 2
pressing the Set Button s 7 . The
8
9
DISPLAY SETTINGS 13submenu
14
15
(Figure 38) will be displayed. 19
20
21
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Color Temperature
Picture Contrast
User color temp. red
User color temp. green
User color temp. blue
Back to screen menu
User Color Temp. green:
This setting is only active when the
User settings has been selected at the
Color Temperature line
above. The temperature bar and numerical value (ranging between 0 and 255)
51
53 the
55 intensity
57
reflect
of the green pixels.
50
31
28
31
32
33
34
38
39
40
44
45
46
Color Temperature: This
setting has four options: Ideal, Cold,
Warm and User. The factory default setting is named Ideal, and is what we
30 21 33
32
31
42
With the SCREEN MENU (Fig. 33) on
5
6
screen,
scroll
down to the ADVANCED
10
11
12 1
3
4 Set
5
6
line and
select
it by2pressing
the
16
17 s
18 7 . The
Button
8 ADVANCED
9
10
11
12
22
23
24
submenu
(Figure
be displayed.
13 39)14 will 15
16
17
18
27
This menu enables you to precisely adjust
the color display.
29
4
26
Figure 38
56
28 31 20
Advanced Settings
Menu
32
25
Ideal
Ideal
37
128
12743
113
52 54
43 45 Temp.
47 49 blue:
51 53 55 57
User Color
42
44 active
46 48when
50 the
52 54 56
This
setting
is
only
37 41 47 51
35
37
39
41
User
settings
36 40 46
50 has been selected at the
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
35 39 45Temperature
49
Color
line
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
34 38 The
44 temperature
48
above.
bar
and
numeri35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
33
cal
value43(ranging
31 28between
34 255)
38 44 48
23 35 0 and
32
42
30 29 of
reflect the intensity
22 the
34blue33pixels. 43
29
30
35
36
19
25
20
21
26
27
ADVANCED
Screen menu time out
41
42
On Screen Status
31
32
33
Show startup screen
47
48
37
38
39
OSD Transparency
DVD auto picture resize
43 LED44
45
Screen status
4:3 scaling
Reset all
Back to screen menu
22
28
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
On
47
On 46
Non-Linear
48
20s
3s 34
t/0
Yes
40
Figure 39
This menu is used to adjust the appearance of the on-screen menus.
Screen menu time out: This
setting allows you to adjust the amount
of time the Screen menus remain on
screen, with options of 20, 40 or 60 seconds available. It is particularly important
with plasma displays to avoid leaving a
still image, such as a menu, on screen for
an extended period of time, as the image
may be “burned” into the screen permanently. Therefore, it is not possible to
set the menus to remain on screen
indefinitely.
On Screen Status time
out: This setting allows you to adjust
the amount of time the various system
status banners remain on screen, or to
disable them altogether. These banners
appear when a source is selected and a
new audio or video signal is detected.
The aspect ratio banner will first display
the aspect ratio of the source, and then
the aspect ratio in which it will be displayed, depending on how you have configured the system. The source banner
will display the name of the source, the
audio input, and the video input or other
information as appropriate. This setting
does not affect the status bar displayed
by the CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer
when a disc is being played. You may
choose to remove the status banners
from view after 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds, or
you may choose the Off setting, in which
they are not displayed at all.
Show Startup Screen: This
setting may be set to On or Off, and it
determines whether the JBL logo screen
appears when the CVPD50 is powered up.
OSD Transparency: This temperature bar reflects whether the Screen
menus appear transparent, so that the
current video image may be seen behind
them (dark square to the left), or opaque,
so43that45they
47have
49 a black
51 53background
55 57 that
42 44
50 video
52 54
56 (dark
blocks
any46
view48of the
image
35 43
37
39 right).
41 49There
square
to the
a reset
line
45
47
51 is53
55 57
41the
51 56in
47settings
34 may
36 be
38used
40 to
42
44
46
4837
50
52
54
that
reset
33 35
26 37
37 4136 40 46 50
25
this
menu
only.39
45 49 51
39 41
32 34
27 36
36 4035 37
24 38
47
DVD
auto35 picture
31 28
34 36
44 46
38 40
48 50
33 23
26 25 37
30 29 22JBL
33 35 43
resize:
that45you49
34recommends
39
32 27 24
36
29 this
32 34 42
21 33in the
30 setting
leave
31
44 posi38“On”
48
28 23 35 default
28 31 20 32
31 33
22 34
tion so30
that29images
(video
and still)43on
32 will be
42auto21JPEG
33 discs
DVDs, 29
VCDs30and
28 31 20 32
31
matically resized
by the CVR700
to fill the
1
2
3This 4setting
5 only
6 applies
CVPD50
screen.
7 CVR700’s
8
9internal
10 disc
11 changer;
12
for
to the
1video
2sources,
3 16 you
4 17 will5 18
external
still 6need
13
14
15
7 20Frame
8 21 Button
9 22 1023
12 the
to use
`1124 or
19 the
Letterbox
13 26Button
1427 z
1528
1629 to17select
18 a dis25
30
play31mode
each
source
19 32for 20
24
33 21
34 2235that23fills
36 the
screen.
25 38 note
2639 that
2740 some
2841 DVDs
2942 include
30
37 Also,
a letterboxed
version
which
black
32
3346 in 34
36 bars
43 31 44
45
47 35 48
above and
37 below
38 the
39 picture
40 are
41 part
42of the
43
44
45
46
47
48
57
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
4:24 PM
45 47
44 46
49
48
Page 58
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
4337 4539 4741 49
51 53 55 57
4236 movie
4438 4640
48 37For
5041this
5247reason,
5451 56it is not possiframe.
36 40 46 50
3526 ble
3725 to
3937
41
remove
those black bars, and you
45 49 51
36 40 35 3739 41
47
3427 may
3624 38
prefer
to
watch a non-letterboxed
ver34 38 44 48
23
28
35
36 40 46 50
33 sion
26 25
37
of
the
movie
if
provided
on
the
disc.
33
43
22
35 39 45 49
3229 27 2434 36
32 34that42the
21 may
33 notice
jumps as
3130 You
38 44 picture
48
28 23
35
31 33
32
20 resized,
3031 it
this is43normal. If the pic29is 22
34 and
29 ture
42 particularly
30 21
has 33
large32
dark areas,
28 31 20 32
31
1
7
13
1
19
7
25 13
near the frame edges, the picture may be
2
3 frequently.
4
5 In 6that case, you may
resized
8
9 to turn
10 off
11 the 12
prefer
Auto Resize function
2 15watching
3 16 4 17
while
that5 disc
14
18 6 and use the
8 21 Button
9 22 10 `
Frame
20
23 11 24 12or the Letterbox
Button
26
30 18 a display.
14 27 z
15 28 16 29 to17select
Screen status LED: Some
38 26 39 27 40 28 41 29 42 30
people may find the status LED on the
44 32 45 33 46 34 47 35 48 36
front panel of the CVPD50 to be distract40
41movies,
42 and this seting38while39watching
44
45
46
47
48 LED off. If posting allows you to turn the
sible, it is recommended that you leave
the LED turned on to alert you to its status, such as flashing red and yellow to
indicate that it has come unplugged.
31 19 32 20 33 21 34 22 35 23 36 24
37 25
43 31
37
43
4:3 Scaling
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
The 4:3 SCALING setting is only
needed for sources where the original
program material is in the 4:3 aspect
45 47 49 ratio.
51 The
53 default
55 57 setting is NORMAL,
44 46 48 50 52 54 56
where 4:3 materials are displayed in their
37 39 41
original aspect ratio, with black bars
37 41 47 51
36 38 40
appearing
on the left and right sides of
36 40 46 50
26 25 37
the 35
image.
45you
39 If
49wish to have the image
27 24 36
stretched
to
fill
the CVPD50’s 16:9 screen,
34
44
38
48
28 23 35
33 LINEAR
43
scaling to have the
29 22 34 select
42 53at55
21 45
30 43
33 picture
the 57
same rate through47 3249stretched
51
31 42
32 out
20 44
46 31
48frame,
50 or
52NON-LINEAR
54 56
the
to
35 4337 leave
39 4741
the49center
45
51 of53the55frame
57 virtually
47degree
34 4236 untouched,
38 4640 48 37
44
5041the
52
5451 56of scaling
with
36 6 40 46 50
37
233 3526
3 increasing
4
5
25
37 39 41 towards the edges. You may
45 49 51
39 41
32 3427 36
36 1140 35 1237
241038
47
8
9 override
this
setting
manually
for a
31 28 23 35
34 36
44 46
38 40
48 50
33 26 25 37
specific
disc
by
using
the
Frame
14
15
16
17
18
30 29 22 34
33 35 39
43 45 49
32 27 24 36
.
Button `
29 30
20
3121 2122 33 23 32 2434 42 44
28
26
37
43
44 1
31
7
13
19
25
31
28 23 35
38
37 25 38 26 39 27 40
28 41 29
Information Menu
43 31 44
37
43
58
48
20 32 29 31 3033the black
43 bars on screen
NOTE:
29 2822 Leaving
34
36
32 of time,
42 especially during
21 3533
30 34long
for
periods
31 4020 41
the
first 32
1,0004231
hours of operation, may
45 cause
47 4 48of
2 46 3 burnout
5 the 6CVPD50 plasma
8
9
10
11
display, which is not 12
covered under
1 14
2 15 3 JBL
warranty.
using the
16 4recommends
17 5 18 6
7 20
8 21 Button
9 22 10 23
Frame
`11 24 12or the Letterbox
Button
13 26
14 27 z
15 28 16 29 to17select
30 18 a display mode
for 20each
source
that
19 32
23 fills
33 21
34 22 35
36 24the screen.
27
3031
32 2933
38 2839
25
32 45
42 30
33 46 34 47 35 48 36
The38last 39submenu
in
the42Screen menu
40
41
system is the INFORMATION
44
45
46
47
48
menu. It does not contain any useradjustable settings. In the unlikely event
that you have a problem with your CVPD50
screen, a customer service representative
may ask you to access this screen and
report the information it contains.
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
With the SCREEN MENU (Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll to the INFORMATION
1 it by2 pressing
3
4
5
6
line and select
the
Set
Button s 7 . The
8 INFORMATION
9
10
11
12
submenu (Figure
40)
13
14 will15be displayed.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Rev02
2 5 34
1004R
35
36
INFORMATION
Hardware
Software
Back
to
Version
V e r s i32
on
31
33
37
39
40
41
42
s43
c r e e n44 m e n 45
u
46
47
48
38
Figure 40
This menu displays the version numbers
of your screen and its software drivers.
Your JBL Cinema Vision system is now
completely configured, and you are ready
to begin enjoying the finest in home theater entertainment.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 59
43
42
BASIC OPERATION
Plug the CVPD50 and CVR700 power
cords into unswitched AC wall outlets.
When using the system for the first time,
you must make sure that the power
switch on the underside of the CVPD50
next to the AC power cord is switched on
to the “1” position. Use a mirror to assist
you in locating the switch and ascertaining whether43
it is 45
on or47off.49This 51
places
53 the
55
CVPD50 in a42Standby
mode,
as
indicated
44 46 48 50 52 54
by the amber35color
of the LED located on
37 39 41
the front of the
41 47
37picture.
34 screen,
36 38 below
40 the
In addition, the
LED
in
the
middle
the 46
36of 40
33 26 25 37
Main Power
Switch
1
on
the45
35
39
32 On/Off
27 24 36
CVR700 will31
turn28
red.23 35 34 38 44
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
controls and in the CVR700’s menu
system.
• As the input source is changed, the
new input name will appear momentarily as an on-screen banner display
along with the audio input and video
screen format. The input name will
also appear in the Main Information
Display Ô
mode, as indicated by the red color of the
LED on the CVR700 and the amber color
of the LED on the CVPD50.
Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50
On or Off
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
49
48
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 Control
40 46 1
50 will
33Main
26 Power
37
25
On/Off
35 on
45front
39 the
49 of
32turn
27red,
24and36the LED
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
the CVPD50 will turn
amber. When the
30 29 22 34
33
43
remote is used to turn the unit “off” it is
29 30 21 33
32
42
actually placing the system in a Standby
28 31 20 32
31
Once you have completed the initial
setup and configuration of the JBL
Cinema Vision system, it is simple to
operate and enjoy. The following instructions will help you maximize the enjoyment of your new home theater system:
43
42
45 47
44 46
1
2
3
4
5
6
To program
the
CVR700
for automatic
7turn-off,
8 press
9 the10Sleep
11 Button
12
Y 14 on15the remote.
13
16
17 Each18press of
43 22
45 47
4924 51before
53 55
the button
will
19
20
21 decrease
23 the time
42
44 46 48
50 52
shut-down
in
the
following
sequence:
90 54
25
26
27
28
29
30
35 37 70
39 minutes,
41
minutes,
80
minutes,
60
min31
32
33
34
35
36
41 47
34 36
38 40 30 37
utes, 50 minutes,
40 minutes,
minutes,
37
38
39
40
41
42
36
40 46
33
26 25Sleep
37 Timer Off.
20 minutes, 10 minutes,
43
44
4532 46
47
45
3648 35
The sleep time
will27be24
displayed
in the39 43
57
31 28 23 35
44
34 38 42
Lower Display
Line E, and it will
56
30 29 22 34
43
33
count down until the time has elapsed. 35
• When an audio source is selected, the
last video input used remains routed
57
to the VCR Video Outputs ¤, the
56
Digital Recorder Video Ouptuts ‚
and the Video Monitor Outputs ›.
51
This permits you to simultaneously
50
view and listen to different sources.
49 47 49
45
• When
a
48
44
46 48
51
53 55
57
video
source is selected, the
50 52 54 56
video signal for that input will be routed
39 41 43 45 47 49
51if it53 55
to
the CVPD50
for
viewing, and
41 47 51
37 44
38 40 42
46 48source,
50 52 54
is a composite
or
S-video
36 40 46 50
25 37 35
37will39be routed
41
the video
signal
to the
45 49
35 39
24 36 34
41 47
37may
36
38
40
Video
Monitor
Output
¤
and
44
34
38
48
23 35
36 40 46
33 26 25 37
be
on
TV monitor
43
33 an external
22 viewed
34
35 39 45
32 27 24 36
connected
to
42
32 the CVR700.
21 33
37
57
42
34 36
56
51When the
33 26
elapsed,
the
system
will
automatically
50
32 27
51
49turn off. The CVR700’s front-panel display31
28
50
48will dim to one-half brightness when the 30
2
3
5
6 29
49
30 29 22 34
33 may 43
Sleep function 1is programmed.
To4 cancel
29 30
Once the units
are in Standby, you
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
29 30 21 33
7
8
9 hold
10 the11
12
42
32
the
Sleep
function,
press
and
28 31 20 32
begin a listening session by pressing the
31
Volume Control
30
43
33
28 31 20 32
29 22 34
31
Sleep Button 13Y 14 until
15 the16informa17
18
Main Power On/Off
Switch 1,
which
29
42
32
21
30
33
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
Adjust
4322 45 2347 24
49 • 51
53 the
55volume
57 to a comfortable
tion display returns
to20normal
19
21 brightness;
45 47 49 will
51 turn
53 on55both
57the CVR700
43and
45the47 49
51 53 55 57
31
42 52
445428
46
48 2050 3252
54 56
Volume
level
using
the5631
front-panel
4228disap44 2946 30
48 50
the Sleep indicator
numbers
will
25
26
27
On
(All)
44 46 48 CVPD50,
50 52 or54press
56 the Power
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 43 45 47 49
5139 53
552Control
57 3 37a439
1
5
6Volume Up/
35
41
or
remote
SLEEP
OFF
will
pear
and
the
words
35
37
41
hold
3 5 416
2
3 it for
31
32
33
34
35
36
37 39 41 Button b 1 . If you
35 437 39
42 Display
444346Line
5655
Down
Buttons
u 37
41
7 40
45
5154853
57
9 36
11
12 . 41 47 51
471038 5140
3734
344847
36
38 52
appear in the Lower
E.5049
programmed
into
51
37 41 all47devices
36 38 40 seconds,
37
38
39
40
41
42
41
51
7
8
9 34 10
11 4012 37
47
36 38
36
40 46 50
33
35 374239 44
41
46
36
40
37
48
50 1452 54
33 46
25
1 50
4
5
26 an
25 1337
6
15 265616
17 2
18
36remote
• To temporarily
silence
all3 speaker
out40 46
will50
also turn on.33The26LED25in 37 36
When
from
26 25 37 the
46will
40you
5043be away
4538home
46 for47
48 47 3532
35 39 45 49
41
51
37
13
14
15
16
17
18
3444 3635
40
27
36
45
39
49
32
24
27
36
37 39a 41
24 19
35center
43 36
45 the
47
49
55 Power
5732 On/Off
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
39 45
Mute
Button
.
puts,
press
the
20
21
22
23
24
of51the4953
Main
7
8
9
10
11
12
27 24
extended
period
of
time
it
is
always
27 24
3624 35 39 45 49 33 26 25 3137
31 382851
34 38 44 48
4423 4835
3450
19
20
21
22
23
23 40
28 36
353746 41
47
34 36 38
40
34 48
42 35
44 Switch
46
50
5631and
38144
42
44
48 33
54 56
will
the
output
all 17
will4852
turn 54
orange,
LED35 34
28 23
good38idea44to completely
turn
the
unit off
25
26This
27 interrupt
28
29 14
30
48 32
30
13 46
1550 to
1652
18
28the23
43
45
35
39
49
22
30
29
34
43
33
27
36
22 3436 40 46 50
29 37
3324 26 25
26
27
28
29
30
43
33
29 22
30 turn
35 34
37 on39
speakers
and
the
headphone
jack,
but
the41
front43
of25the
CVPD50
will
green.
43
33
by
unplugging
the
CVR700,
and
switching
22
29
29
34
35
37
39
41
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
44
34
38
48 453049
21
19 3320 3221
2242 23
24
283223 29
35
45 47 49
51 53 55 57
42
32
21
35
30
33
39
27 24 36
4237
32 will
31
3247 33
34 return
35 it 36 32
51
30 21
34 33
36 This
38
40 turn
it31will
not36
affect
any recording
or dub42
the41
CVR700
on29and
2834
off the master
power
305221
30 switch
47 51
2834 31on33
32
20
39 3148
40
41 2640 31
42 27 37 2841 29
293122located
42 444346 454847 5049
5433
20 373234433838
25 38
30
44
28 23 35
51
53425655 57
31
31 20
36
5028last
33 3226 to25
37 40 that
3846 was
39
4031
41 32
31
bing33
that may
be47in37
progress.
When
20
the 37
input source
used.
the
underside
of
the
CVPD50
next
29 303021 33to the
46 50
36
42
32
40
26
43
44
45
46
48
25
43
33
3535 3739
31
32
33
34
35
36
29 22 34
423945
444149
46 48 50 52 54 56
32 27 24 36
43
44
45
46
47
48
the system
is muted, the word MUTE
power plug. NOTE:28Preset
3129memories
20 303221 31
45 49
32
The system may
also
be
turned
on from
42 2737 24 3836 39 35 4039 41
32
33
42
353844
374048
39 37
41 41 47 51
31 28 23 35 3434 3638
will flash
in the23Main
Information
retained indefinitely.
28 31 20 32
31 28
34 38 44 48
43
45
51 should
53 55be 57
46 4150
36 47
4037
by33pressing
holding
of49
31
35
30 29 Standby
47 51
43
33 263425and
3637
38 40any
1 5
2 643 3 44 4 45 5 46 6 47
48
22 34
1
2
3
4
Press the Mute
Display
30 43Ô.
42 44
48
50 4Source
52 554 Selection
56
2
3
4 Input
5 32
6
4534049
35 46
51 Button
53 43
55 57
39 36
Selector
Buttons
29 4522473449 33
6
29 30 the
50
3324
42
45 2747
49
511d
53 2 55
57 46
21 3343 32
263625
37
7 11
857
9 adjust
10 the
11 volume
12 to
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
again,
or
7
8
9
10
12
29 4230 442146 3348 32
44 3948 45 49
34 39
50 52 42
54 56
38 35
35 37
41
2348
will
not46
35
8 28 9 31 10
114231
12 28
32only
2
3 the 4
5
31
44
507 on
52the
8 54 56
9
10• To 11
32
27power
36
20 . This
24
select12a source,1 press
43 6return
45
47
49
51
5316 55 17 57 18
42 any
44of
52 1328
54
to35normal
1456
15operation.
3053 29
43 3744 41 47 51
33 unit
43 45 47 CVR700,
49
51CVPD50
55
13 46 1448 1550 16
17
183720
34
36
38
40
2257
34
39
41
31
and
any
source
31
32
31
34
38
48
28 23 13 35 14
14
15
16
1735 37
18 39 41
Selector
Buttons
7
81d 9 2
103 . 11 4
12
5
16 Input
18
44
466 48
50
52 54 23 56 41
4215 3643
32
40 1746 50
33 it26
42 44 46 associated
48 50 29
52 30
54
2138 22
24 47 51
35 3719 39 2041 2142• 22
40 may37
302156
37
25also
The19unit’s
tone
be taken
23 3420
2436 controls
with
that
button,
will
33
29332237
3441
51
47
20
21
22
23342836
24 38 40
19
20
21
22
23
24
35
37
39
41
13
14
15
16
17
18
7
838 40
9
1037 11
1233 51
3542•39
45
The
input
also
be
changed
49source may 34
31 24
3221
3129
20 3032
41
36
40
27
36
47
36
35 37 39 begin
41 play
25
26
27
28
29
30the46 50
out
of
the
signal
path
by
pressing
32
of
the
currently
loaded
disc
25
26
27
28
29
3026 25 37
36 3340 46 50
33 26
37
26
27
28
30 25
51 39 45 49
37 4136 47 35
34
36
38
40
44 48
29
30rotating19the 33
329
441
5 516 31 25
by
slowly
front-panel
2013
2114
2215 2316
24
28
2326 31
2832
35 27 3428 38
32
46
36
40
50
17
18
47
37
34 361 38 if2 40
27
24
31
Tone
Mode
Button
m
.
The
20
the internal
DVD/CD
changer
was
31
32
33
34
35
36
26
37
25
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
31
32
33
35
36 36
40 46
50 538 446 48
33 3426 25
34
35
36 46 50 30 31
1243137
2 show
4 34
Selector
&.
Each
29 2232 34 33 3334 Input
40
3543 Source
36
3332 267 3325 selected
23 3 a40
45
28
35message
25 322619
272024 step,
2836
292235 30
39
49
837 9 36
11
12
21
23
first
press
will
in
the
as 10
the
source.
27
31
44
34
37
38
39
41
38
48
28 23 35 29
37
38
3932 40
41
45 33
49 42 43
27 24
42 42 may feel as31
30364229 35
42 45 49
30 2138 33 39 3240 which
a32tactile
detent
39
22 93934
3238 27 3924 40
36 154135
37
41 you
38 43 44
48 8 45Line
30 16
31
3326
3427
352834 36
Lower
E
with
the
43
33
730Display
10
1148 cur-12
23
28
35
25
29
13
14
17
18
22
29
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
44
46
47
After38pressing
one
the Input
28of 31
43
44
4531 46
47 293548 34 38 44 32
48
28 23
31 or click, will move the 30
20 32
3144 28 4523 NOTE:
input
selection
30 21
33controls.
46
48 44 48
35 4734
43
33 rent
29 2230
43
4442 45
46
47
48
tone
The 4218
37
3831 29393222 4034
21
33249 2 32
33 4134
35 status
3628 of14the
19
20
21 Buttons
2381d
30 42
33
15 32 43
16 31 17
7
103 to11turn
125
4
2213
6
29
34
30 29 22 Selector
43
33
31
20
through
the
available
inputs.
34
28 31 20 32
2944 3045 21 4633 47 29
42
32 48
31
system
is TONE42IN, which
43
37
38
39
40
41 21
42default
26 unit
27 on, 28
29the System
30
press42
30
33 20 32 21
29 3025 21 the
19
22
23
24
32 13
147
158
16Selector
1710
1811
9
12
33
28 the31CVR700
indicates
that
the
31
32
20
•
As
the
input
is
changed,
28
31 bass and treble
31
control to the
28 3131 20 f
43
44
45
46
47 2048 32
3232 3331to34set the
35 remote
36
19
2013
21141 2215 2 2316 3 2417 4
25
26
27
28
29
185will automatically
controls are active. Press the ⁄/¤ 30
6
switch to the digital
37
43
1
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
CVR700
38
39 functions.
40
41Press
42the DVD Input
25
2619
2720
2821 2922
30
7
8
96 23 10
Selector
44
45 1d
46 2 47 to 3control
48 4 the 5internal
31
32
3326
3427 3528
3629
25
DVD/CD changer.
1310
14
1512
16
7
8
9
11
3
4
375
38
6
31
3932
4033
4134
4235
19 of20
21
22
To turn the13 unit 14off at 15the end
a listen16
17
18
4311
4412
4538
4639 4740
4841
9
10
37
25
26
27
28
ing session,
19 simply
20 press
21 the
22 Main
23
24
43
44
45
46
47
15
16
17
18
Power
On/Off
Control
1
31 on the
32 front
33
34
25
26
27
28
29
30
21
24 Off Button a
Power
panel
or22the 23
37
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
28
29 You30may also press and
on27 the remote.
43
44
45
46
37
38
39
40
41
42
hold
33 the
34 Power
35 Off
36 (All) Button a
43
45
46
47
48
off 44any42external
source
units.
39 to40turn 41
The
in
45 LED
46 indicator
47
48 the center of the
29 30 21 33
32
programmed
28 31 20sleep
31has
32 time
2411
input 12
(if
selected), surround mode,
30 speaker configuration, and night mode
17
18
1
2
3
36 status that were entered during the
23
24
8
9
42 configuration process for7 that source.
29
30
13/Video
14 Inputs
15
Audio
•4835The Front-Panel
36
$ may
be used to temporarily
19
20con- 21
42
nect a device such as a 25video game
or
26
27
47
48
camcorder to your home entertainment
31
32
33
system. This source is called the
37
38
39
Game/Cam input source on the remote
41
43
44
45
4 1
10 7
31 1 32
34 4 to
355
366
Navigation
Control
2 33 q
3
change37the7 setting
to 9TONE
38 8 39
4010 OUT,
4111
42
12
3
4
5
6
5 2 is6 “flat”
which
response
without
the
43 13 44 14 45 15 4616 4717
4818
10
11
12
tone
being
active.
11 8 controls
129
19
•
16 13
22
19
25
28
31
34
37
40
43
46
20
21
22
23
17 are18active,
When
17 14 the
1815tone 16controls
25
26
27
28
29
20
21 treble
22
23
24 may be
the
bass
and
boost/cut
23
2431
32
33
34
35
26
27 first
28 pressing
29
30 Tone
adjusted
by
the
29
3037
38
39
40
41
m 35 until
Mode
32 Button
33
34
36 the
35
3643
44
45
46
47
desired
setting
(BASS
or
38
39
40
41 MODE
42
41
42 MODE) appears in the
TREBLE
44
45
46
47
48
47
48
24
30
36
42
48
59
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
42
44 46
4:24 PM
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
1
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
50
37
36
35
34
33
52 54
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
Page 60
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
Lower Display Line E. Next, use
the ⁄/¤ Navigation Control
q
3
4 to 5change
6 the setting as
desired.
will return to normal
9
10 The
11 unit 12
operation within 5 seconds after the
15
16
17
18
setting is changed.
21
22
23
24
• 27For private
listening,
plug the 1/4"
28
29
30
stereo phone plug from a pair of stereo
33
34
35
36
headphones into the front-panel
39
40
41
42
Headphone Jack %. When the
45
46
47
headphone’s plug48is connected, the
word HEADPHONE will scroll once
across the Lower Display Line E
and all speakers will be silenced.
When the headphone plug is removed,
the audio feed to the speakers will be
restored.
Surround Mode Selection
One of the most important features of the
CVR700 is its ability to reproduce a full
multichannel sound field from digital
sources, analog matrix surround-encoded
programs and standard stereo programs.
Selection of a surround mode is based on
personal taste, as well as the type of
program source material being used. For
example, motion pictures or TV programs
bearing the logo of one of the major surround-encoding processes, such as Dolby
Surround or DTS Stereo may be played in
either the Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II
Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS
Neo:6 Cinema, or Logic 7 Cinema surround
modes, depending on the source material.
NOTE: Once a program has been encoded
with matrix surround information, it
retains the surround information as long
as the program is available in stereo.
Thus, movies with surround sound may be
decoded via any of the analog surround
modes such as Dolby Pro Logic II or IIx
Movie, Logic 7 Cinema or DTS Neo:6
Cinema, when they are broadcast via conventional TV stations, cable, pay-TV and
satellite transmission. Also, a number of
TV programs, sports broadcasts and radio
dramas are recorded in surround sound.
Even when a program is not listed as carrying intentional surround information,
you may find that the Dolby Pro Logic II,
Logic 7, DTS Neo:6 and the Hall or Theater
modes often deliver enveloping surround
presentations through the use of the
natural information present in all stereo
recordings.
Surround modes may be changed at any
time by using either the front panel or
remote control. To select a new surround
mode from the front panel, press the
60
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
444353
46 4555
4847575049 525154 535655 57
43 45 47 4942 51
42
50
52
54
56
43 44
45 46
47 48
49
5142
45
5344
47
55
49
574851 50
53 52
55 54
57 56
35 43
37
39
4146
42 37
44 43
46 45
48
4250
4438
5237
46
48
504157
5247 5451 56
5154
535637
55
3447
3649
4039
35
39
41
35
41
4136
5136
3346
50
52
54 4056
3746415047 51
47
34
38
40
34
40
35 36
37 42
39 44
41
3537
3725
39
41
2648
3738
35
39
32
36
36
46
40
50
41
51
414540
51 50
33
33
27
36
37
37
47
474946
34 26
36 35
38
40
34
36
38
40
37 39 4124 26 25 37
25 37
31 3335
35
45
39
49
32
32
3640
363851
4624
464845
4027
5034
404439
50 49
23
28
35
41
33 27
36
36
37
47
24
26 34
37 38
26
37
25 36
25
30 3234
31
31
34
44
22
38
48
3537
35 50
4523
45 44
3928
4933
3943 38
49 48
34
32 28
36
46
40
23
35
35
27 33
36
27
36
24 26
24
25 29
29 3133
30
30
33
43
21
31 29
3436
34 49
4422
30
33
22
3829
4832
3842 44 43
48
35
45
39
34
34
23 27
23
28 32
35 24
28
35
28 3032
29
29
30 30
31
31
32
20 30
32 43
42
42
3335
33 48
4321
21
31
34
44
33
33
22
22
38
29
34
29
34
23
28
other
channels,
but since it is intentionally
Surround Mode Selector * repeatedly
28
28
29 31
2931
31 42
32
20
3234
32 bandwidth-limited,
4220
33
43
21
21
30 30
33 22
30is 31
33 32
29
sound designers have
until the desired
surround
mode
selected.
28 31 2920 30
283133
31
32 21
31 20
32 32 42
given
it
that
unique
designation.
To select a surround
28 31mode
31
32 the
20 using
1
2
3
4
5 Dolby
6 Digital
remote, press the button
for the
surround
1
2
3 7 4
15
26
4
6 is a standard part of DVD,
9you
103
11Dolby
125Digital
mode group
that
includes
the 8mode
1
4 10
5
63
6 on12specially encoded LD discs
82 Dolby
93 13
1041 147115,2 DTS
8
12
9
11
available
p
wish to 7choose:
15
16
17
18
1
2 10
3 118 4 129 5
6
7
12 18broadcasts, and is a part
Neo:6
e
Digital13o
148 , DTS
159 19
167 20
13
17 211418 , 2215 10 23and
1611 satellite
2417
9 171410 or18
11
12 of17the high-definition
television (HDTV)
Logic 71913i 2014 7 , Stereo
p
15 825 22
13
16
15
16
21
19
23
20
24
21
22
23
26
27
28
29
30 18 24
system.
DSP Surround
g2721 14 .2822
The
15 25first
16press
17 27 2218 28
19
2013
19
23
20
24
21
23
24
25
26
29
26
30
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
of the button
will
show
the
current
mode
An29 optional,
25
2619 33
27 2037 34
25
28 2138
29
2622393236
30
27234033 28244134
31
32
3135
4235 30 36external RF demodulator is
from that group 25if it is26already
in use,
or
required
use the CVR700 to listen to
31
32
33 43 40
31
34 2744
353228453842
36
33294639 34304740
35 4841 36to 42
37
38
39
3741
the first available mode if you are curthe
Digital soundtracks available
37
3831 45
39 32 46
40
37 33 4347
41
3834 4448
42
3935 45 4036 46
41 Dolby
43
44
47 42 48
rently using another mode. To cycle
on laser48discs. Connect the RF output of
4437 45 38 43
46 39 47
4440 48
4541
4642 47
through 43the available
modes
in that
the LD player to the demodulator and
44
45
48
group, press the43button
again
until46the 47
then connect the digital output of the
desired mode appears in the Lower
demodulator to the Optical or Coaxial
Display Line E and in the front-panel
Inputs cefhij9) of the
Surround Mode Indicators G.
CVR700 corresponding to the source (e.g.,
The Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS
5.1, DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete
modes may only be selected when a digital input is in use. In addition, when a
digital source is present, the CVR700 will
automatically select and switch to the
correct mode, regardless of the
43 mode
45 47
that has been previously selected.
42 44For 46
more information on selecting35
digital
37 39
sources, see the Digital Audio34Playback
36 38
section below.
33 26 25
24
When a DVD-Audio disc is in32
use,27
there
23
is no surround processing, as31
the 28
analog
30 29 22
output signal from a DVD-Audio
disc is
29 30 21
carried straight through to the preamp
28 31 20
section.
49
48
41
40
37
36
35
34
33
32
To listen to a program in traditional twochannel stereo, using the front left and
1
2
3
right speakers only (plus the subwoofer,
7 the 8
9
if installed and configured), press
Stereo Mode Select Button13m 14
15
until SURROUND OFF appears
in20 the 21
19
Lower Display Line E. From 25
the front
26
27
panel, press the Surround Mode Selector
31
32
33
* until SURROUND OFF appears in
37
38
39
the Lower Display Line E.
43
44
Digital Audio Playback
Digital audio is a major advancement over
analog surround processing systems. It
delivers up to six discrete channels, and
each channel reproduces full frequency
range (20Hz to 20kHz) and offers dramatically improved dynamic range and significant improvements to signal-to-noise
ratios. In addition, digital systems have the
capability to deliver an additional channel
that is specifically devoted to low-frequency information. This is the “.1” channel referred to when you see these systems described as “5.1,” “6.1” or “7.1.”
The bass channel is separate from the
45
AUX) you wish to use for your LD player.
No demodulator is required for use with
DVD players or DTS-encoded laser discs.
The CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer
will automatically detect and play any
Dolby DVD loaded into it, and no external
connections
51 53 55 need
57 to be made. However,
the
CVR700
is
not capable of playing a
50 52 54 56
laser disc, and an external LD player
must
41 connected
47 51 to the CVR700.
37 be
36 40 46 50
DTS
45 49audio system capable of
35 is39a digital
DTS
34
38
486.1 discrete or matrix
delivering 44
5.1 or
33 field43reproduction. Although both
sound
42 Digital are digital, they
32 and Dolby
DTS
31
use different methods of encoding the
signals, and thus they require different
decoding circuits to convert the digital
signals
4
5 back6to analog.
10
11
12 soundtracks are available
DTS-encoded
on
16 select
17 DVD
18 and LD discs, as well as
on
audio-only
DTS discs. The CVR700’s
22
23
24
internal
DVD/CD
changer will automati28
29
30
cally detect and play any DTS-encoded
34
35
36
DVD loaded into it, and no external con40
41
42
nections need to be made. If you are con46
47
48
necting an external
device to the CVR700,
be aware that you may use any LD or CD
player equipped with a digital output to
play DTS-encoded discs with the CVR700.
All that is required is to connect the
player’s output to either an Optical
or Coaxial Input on the rear panel
cefhij or front panel 9).
In order to listen to DVDs encoded with
DTS soundtracks, the DVD player must be
compatible with the DTS signal, which is
indicated by the “DTS Digital Out” logo
on the player’s front panel. Some early
DVD players were not able to play DTSencoded DVDs. This does not indicate a
problem with the CVR700, as those play-
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 61
data that is present. Using this information, the correct surround mode will automatically be selected. For example, DTS
bitstreams will cause the unit to switch
to DTS decoding, and Dolby Digital
bitstreams will enable Dolby Digital
decoding.
ers cannot pass through the DTS signal.
If you’re in doubt as to the capability of
your DVD player to handle DTS discs,
consult the player’s owner’s manual.
NOTE: Many DVD players have a default
setting that does not pass through the
DTS data, even though the machine is
capable of doing so. If your external DVD
player has the “DTS Digital Out” logo but
does not trigger DTS playback in the
CVR700, change the player’s settings in
the “Audio” or “Bitstream” configuration
menu so that DTS playback is enabled.
The method for doing this will vary with
each player. In some cases, the proper
menu choice will be “Original,” while in
others it will be “DTS.” Consult the
owner’s manual for your player to find
the specific information to find the
proper setting.
Selecting a Digital Source
To use either digital mode, you must have
properly connected a digital source to the
CVR700. Connect the digital outputs from
external DVD players, HDTV receivers,
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
satellite systems or CD players to the
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Optical or Coaxial Inputs cefh
35 37 39 41
ij9). In order to provide a backup
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
signal and a source for analog
stereo
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
recording,
the
analog
outputs
provided
on
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
digital31source equipment should
also
be
44
34
38
48
28 23 35
connected
to the
corresponding
inputs
30 29
43 on
33
22 34
the CVR700
rear43
29 30
42the53
21panel
45
4732connect
49
51
33 (e.g.,
analog28stereo
output
from
a
digital
31
31 audio
32
20 44 46 48 50 52
42
recorder to the35
Digital
Recorder Inputs
37 39 41
ª on the rear34
panel
37 41
36when
38 you
40 connect
the source’s digital
outputs).
36 40
33 26
37
When the unit senses PCM data from
CDs or LDs, you may select any of the
standard surround modes, such as Dolby
Pro Logic II or Logic 7. Since the range of
available surround modes is dependent
on the type of digital data that is present,
the CVR700 shows you what type of
signal is present. This will help you to
understand the choice of modes.
When a digital source is first detected,
the CVR700 will indicate the type of bitstream being received by switching to the
appropriate surround mode, depending on
the bitstream and how you have configured your system. The Speaker/Channel
Input Indicators F will light to indicate which channels are contained in the
digital bitstream. For example, for a
Dolby Digital EX bitstream, the L, C, R,
SL, SR, SBL, SBR and LFE indicators will
light with a line between the SBL and
SBR boxes to indicate that those two
channels are in mono. This is the only
indication of the number of channels
present in the signal. The Surround
Mode
Indicator G that identifies the
57
bitstream
will also light. The Lower
56
Display Line E will indicate the surround
mode you have assigned to that
51
source
using the AUDIO MODE sub50
menu
49 system or the remote.
55
54
47
46
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
35
27 configured
If you have not32
already
an 39 45
24 36
7
831 9
10
11
12
48
28 23using
35 the 34
Dolby Digital 5.1 or DTS or DTS-ES
input for a digital
source
on- 38 44 When
33
13
1430 15
16
17
29 22
34 46, 18
screen menus as shown
on page
first 43 signals are being played, the CVR700 will
3224
42
30 21
19 desired
2029 input
21
22 33the
23 remote
automatically switch to the proper surselect the
using
28 31 20 32
31
25
26controls,
27 as28outlined
29
or front-panel
in30this
manual.31Next,32press33the Audio
34
35Input36
Button37k 38 and
39 then40using
41 the 42
⁄/¤ Navigation
Control
q
, 5
1
2
3
43
44
45
46
47 4 48
choose the OPTICAL,
COAXIAL
7
8
9
10
11
or ANALOG input you wish to assign to
13
14
15
16
17
that source, as it appears in the Upper
19
20
21
22
23
Display Line H. When the digital
26
27
source is playing,25the CVR700
will 28auto-29
31
32
33
34
35
matically detect which type of digital
37
38
39 and 40
41
display
data stream is being
decoded
43 the Upper
44
45Display
46
47
that information in
Line H. However, the CVR700 will not
automatically detect which digital or analog audio connection you have made.
Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode
Indicators
When a digital source is playing, the
CVR700 senses the type of bitstream
6
round mode, and no other processing may
be selected. When a Dolby Digital signal
with 4.0 or 2.0 channels is detected, you
may select any Dolby surround mode.
12 When
the digital audio data stream has
interrupted or is no longer present,
24 such as when a DVD disc is paused or
stopped, the Speaker/Channel Input
30
Indicators F will flash to indicate that
36
no signal is present. This is normal and
42
does not indicate any problem with your
48
system.
18 been
PCM Playback
PCM is the abbreviation for Pulse Code
Modulation, which is the type of digital
signal used for standard CD playback,
and other non-Dolby Digital and non-DTS
digital sources such as Mini-Disc. When
a PCM signal is detected, the Lower
Display Line E will briefly show a
message with the letters PCM, in addition to a readout of the sampling frequency
of the digital signal.
In most cases, this will be PCM
44.1kHz or PCM 48kHz, though
in the case of specially mastered, highresolution audio discs, you will see a
PCM 96kHz indication.
During PCM playback, you may select any
surround mode except one of the Dolby
Digital or DTS/DTS-ES modes.
Speaker/Channel Indicators
In addition to the bitstream indicators,
the CVR700 features channel-input indicators that show how many channels of
digital information are being received
and/or whether the digital signal is interrupted (see Figure 41).
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Figure 41
These indicators are the L/C/R/LFE/
SL/SR/SBL/SBR letters that are inside
the center boxes of the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators F on the
front panel. When a standard analog signal is in use, only the “L” and “R” indicators will light, as analog signals have
only left and right channels.
Digital signals may have two, five, six or
seven channels, depending on the program material, its method of transmission
and the way in which it was encoded.
When a digital signal is playing, the letters in these indicators will light in
response to the signal being received. It
is important to note that although Dolby
Digital, for example, is referred to as a
“5.1” system, not all Dolby Digital DVDs
or programs are encoded for 5.1. Thus, it
is sometimes normal for a DVD with a
Dolby Digital soundtrack to trigger only
the “L” and “R” indicators.
NOTE: Many DVD discs are recorded
with both “5.1” and “2.0”, and Dolby
Digital and DTS versions of the same
soundtrack. When playing a DVD, always
be certain to check the type of material
on the disc. Most discs show this information using icons on the back of the
disc jacket. When a disc offers multiple
soundtrack choices, you may have to
make some adjustments (usually with the
“Audio Select” button or in a menu
screen on the disc) to access the full 5.1
Continued on page 63
61
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 62
AUDIO SURROUND MODE CHART
62
MODE
FEATURES
Dolby Digital
Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data. It provides up to five separate main
audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency effects channel.
Dolby Digital EX
Available when the receiver is configured for 6.1/7.1 channel operation, Dolby Digital EX is the latest version of
Dolby Digital. When used with movies or other programs that have special encoding, Dolby Digital EX reproduces
specially encoded soundtracks so that a full 6.1/7.1 sound field is available. When the receiver is set for
6.1/7.1 operation and a Dolby Digital signal is present, the EX mode is automatically selected. Even if specific EX
encoding is not available to provide the additional channel, the special algorithms will derive a 6.1/7.1 output.
DTS 5.1
When the speaker configuration is set for 5.1-channel operation, the DTS 5.1 mode is available when DVD,
audio-only music or laser discs encoded with DTS data are played. DTS 5.1 provides up to five separate main
audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency channel.
DTS-ES 6.1
Matrix
Discrete
When the speaker configuration is set for 6.1/7.1 operation, playback of a DTS-encoded program source will
automatically trigger the selection of one of the two DTS-ES 6.1 Discrete DTS-ES modes. Newer discs with
special DTS-ES discrete encoding will be decoded to provide six discrete, full-bandwidth channels plus a
separate low-frequency channel. All other DTS discs will be decoded using the DTS-ES Matrix mode, which
creates a 6.1-channel sound field from the original 5.1-channel soundtrack.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Music
Movie
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic II decodes full-range, discrete, left, center right, right surround and left surround channels from
either matrix surround-encoded programs or conventional stereo sources when an analog input is in use. The
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie mode is optimized for movie soundtracks, while the Pro Logic II Music mode should be
used with musical selections. The Pro Logic mode re-creates original Pro Logic processing for those who prefer
that presentation.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music
Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is the latest extension of Dolby Pro Logic II technology that creates a discrete 6.1 and 7.1
sound field from matrix surround or two-channel stereo sources in systems configured for surround back
speakers. Both Movie and Music versions of Pro Logic IIx are available.
Logic 7 Cinema
Logic 7 Music
Logic 7 Enhance
Logic 7 is an advanced mode that extracts the maximum surround information from either surround-encoded
programs or conventional stereo material. When the system speaker configuration has been set for 6.1/7.1
operation, you may choose between either 7.1 or 5.1 versions of the Logic 7 modes, while only the 5.1 versions
are available for 5.1-channel systems. The Logic 7 C (or Cinema) mode should be used with any source that contains Dolby
Surround or similar matrix encoding. Logic 7 C delivers increased center channel intelligibility, and more accurate placement
of sounds with fades and pans that are much smoother and more realistic than with other decoding techniques.
The Logic 7 M or Music mode should be used with analog or PCM stereo sources. Logic 7 M enhances the listening
experience by presenting a wider front soundstage and greater rear ambience. Both Logic 7 modes also direct low-frequency
information to the subwoofer (if installed and configured) to deliver maximum bass impact. The Logic 7 E (or Enhance) mode,
available only when the 5.1 option is chosen, is an extension of the Logic 7 modes that is primarily used with musical
programs. Logic 7 adds additional bass enhancement which circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz range to the
front and surround speakers to deliver a less localized soundstage that appears broader and wider than when the subwoofer
is the sole source of bass energy. The CVR700 features 96kHz-capable Logic 7 processing, for improved imaging and
accuracy when used with 96kHz source materials.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS Neo:6 Music
These two modes are available with analog sources playing to create a three-channel, five-channel or
six-channel surround presentation from matrix-encoded or stereo sources. Select the Cinema version of Neo:6
when a program with matrix surround encoding is present. Select the Music version of Neo:6 for optimal
processing when a nonencoded, two-channel stereo program is being played.
Theater
The Theater mode creates a sound field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a standard live-performance theater.
Hall 1, Hall 2
The two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small- (Hall 1) or medium-sized (Hall 2) concert hall.
5-Channel Stereo
7-Channel Stereo
These modes take advantage of multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the front and back of a room.
They place the same signal at the front-left and surround-left, and front-right and surround-right speakers.
The center channel is fed a summed mono mix of the in-phase material of the left and right channels.
Surround
Off (Stereo)
This mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left- and right-channel presentation of
two-channel stereo programs.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 63
feed to the CVR700 or to select between
Dolby Digital or DTS. It is also possible
for the type of signal feed to change durinh the course of a DVD’s playback. In
some cases, the previews or special
material will be recorded in 2.0 audio,
while the main feature is available in 5.1
audio. The CVR700 will automatically
sense changes to the bitstream and channel count and reflect them in these indicators.
The letters used by the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators F also flash
to indicate when a bitstream has been
interrupted. This will happen when a digital input source is selected before the
playback starts, or when a digital source
such as a DVD is paused. The flashing
indicators remind you that the playback
has stopped due to the absence of a digital signal and not through any fault of the
CVR700. This is normal, and the digital
playback will resume once the playback
is started again.
When a 6.1-channel mode, such as Dolby
Digital EX, is detected, a line will appear
connecting the SBL and SBR channels to
reflect that the same signal is being outputted through both back surround channels. The line will disappear when a 7.1channel mode, such as Logic 7, is in use.
At this time, there are no 7.1-channel digital formats available.
SURROUND menu. See page 47 for
information on using the menus to set
this option.
MP3 and WMA Compressed
Audio Playback
The CVR700 is one of the few audio/
video components equipped with onboard
decoding of the MP3 and WMA audio
formats used by computers and portable
audio devices. By offering MP3 and WMA
decoding, the CVR700 is able to deliver
precise conversion of the digital signals
to an analog output, along with the benefits of listening to the MP3 or WMA
audio through the CVR700’s high-power
amplifier and the speakers from your surround system, rather than the smaller
speakers and low-powered amplifiers
typically used with computers.
To take advantage of the CVR700’s MP3
and WMA capabilities, simply insert a
disc containing MP3 or WMA audio files
into the changer drawer. When the digital
signal is available, the Lower Display
Line E will indicate that an MP3 or
WMA bitstream is present, and the audio
will begin playing.
NOTES:
• The CVR700 is only capable of playing
signals in the MP3 (MPEG 1/Layer 3)
format, or in the Windows Media
Audio (WMA) format compatible with
Windows Media player version 9 or
53greater.
55 57
It is not compatible with other
52computer
54 56 audio codecs.
43 45 47 49
51
Night Mode
42
44
46
48
50
A special feature of Dolby Digital is the
35 specially
37 39 41
Night mode, which enables
• Due to the wide variation in MP3 and
34 36
38 to
40be 37 41 47 51
encoded Dolby Digital input
sources
WMA formats and encoding speeds,
36 40 46 50
33 26
25 37
played 43
back45
with47full 49
digital
51intelligibility
53 55 57
it is possible that the CVR700 may not
35 39 45 49
32 27 24level
36
while reducing
42 44 the
46 minimum
48 50 peak
52 54 56
compatible
with all MP3 or WMA
31 28 23 35
34 38be44
48
by 1/4 to
1/3. This prevents abruptly
files.
35 37 39 41 30
43 Some may produce unacceptable
33
22
29
34
loud transitions
from disturbing others,
51 32
results
34 36 38 40 29 37 41
42 or may not be decoded. This is
21 4733
30 the
without33
reducing
the 49
impact
36of 53
46 50
40 digital
43 45
not a fault of either the computer or
28 51
26 47
25 37
31 20 5532 57 31
source.32
The 44
Night
available
only49
35 52
45
39 54
42
46mode
48 is 50
56
27
36
the CVR700, but rather a by-product of
24
when Dolby
Digital
signals
with38special
31 37
34
44 48
23
28
the unpredictable nature of compressed35
39 35
41
data are30
33 41 47
43 51
22
29 played.
37
34being
36
38 34
40
audio playback.
29 30 21 33 1 32
2
5
6
42
463 a50 4
36 40
33
The Night
mode
may37
be engaged
when
26 25
• Even when your computer does not
28
31
32
20
45
35
39
49
32 31
7
8
9
10
11
12
27DVD
36
Dolby Digital
is
playing
by
pressing
24
have a digital output that is compatible
31 Mode
4415 48 16
34 14
38 on
28 23Button
35 13Z
the Night
17
with 18the CVR700, you may connect the
30 29 22 34
33
⁄/¤ 43
the remote.
Next, press the
19
20
21
22
23analog
24 audio output available on virtu29 30 21 33
42
32
Navigation
Button
q
to265select
1
2
3
4
6
25
27
28
29
30 computers to one of the analog
ally all
28 31 20 32
31
either the7 middle
range
or3110full
compres8
9
11
32
3312
34
35audio36inputs using an optional adaptor
sion versions of the Night mode. To turn
3716
38
3918
40
41cable42that converts the stereo mini
13
14
15
17
the Night mode off, press the ⁄/¤
commonly used for computer
44
4524
46
47plug 48
19
20
21 4322
23
Navigation
Button
q
until
1
2
3
4
5 the6
audio
connections to the left/right RCA
29
30
message257in the268lower279 third28
10of the
11 video
12
jacks used on the CVR700. Connecting
31 in the
32 Lower
33
34
35 Line
36
display and
Display
your computer to the CVR700 will
13
14
15
16
17
18
38
39
40 OFF.
41
42
E reads37NIGHT
MODE
enable you to take advantage of the
19
20
21
22
23
24
46
47
48
The Night43
mode44
may45
also be
selected
to
25
26
27
28
29
30
always be on at either level of compres31
32
33
34
35
36
sion using the options in the DOLBY
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
high-quality audio reproduction possible with a home theater system, as
well as enable the use of surround pro-
cessing modes such as Logic 7, to
greatly enhance downloaded or
streaming audio playback.
IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL
PLAYBACK:
• When the digital playback source is
stopped, or in a pause, fast forward or
search mode, digital audio data will
momentarily stop, and the channel
position letters inside the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators F will
flash. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with either the CVR700
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
or the source machine. The CVR700
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
will return to digital playback as soon
35 37 39 41
as the data is available.
34
36 38
40
37 41 47 51
•
36 particularly
40 46 50 cable
33Some
26 source
25 37devices,
45 49
boxes,
switch
and
39 back
32set-top
27 24
36 will35
31forth
34 and
44 48audio
38 analog
23 35 digital
28 between
30outputs,
33on the 43
channel
29 22depending
34
29being
32
42
21
30 watched.
43 33
45 To47
49 losing
51 sound
53 55 57
avoid
28 31 20
31 48 it 50
3244of product,
46
52 54 56
with this42type
is recom43 35
45 37
47
49 4151both
53 the
55digi57
mended
that
you 39
connect
42 analog
44 36
46audio
48 outputs
52
54 47
56 51
41
34
38
4050 37
tal and
of the
35 to33
37
39
41 37
36 digital
40 46 50
source
the
CVR700,
with
the
26
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
41following
51 49
47 45
37 35
34input
36 set
38as24
40
39
32
27
audio
the 36
default
7
8
9
10
11
12
46 44
36 34
40
50 48
33
31
38
26
37
25
23
28
35
the steps shown on page 46. If the dig39
13
1529
1735 33
18 45 43
3214 30
27
36
22
24 is16
34
ital data
stream
interrupted
and the49
31 29
44 42
38
48
32
23
28 2130
35 need
21
19
2334 to
24manually
33
sound20mutes,
you 22
will
30 28
33 31 43
22
29
34
31
32
20
25
26to the
27 analog
28 audio
29 input
30 by
switch
29 30 21 33
42
32
31
34 Input
35 Button
36
pressing
the33Audio
2832 31
31
20 32
k 38 and
37
39 using
40 the41⁄/¤
42
Navigation
Buttons
q
1
2
347
448 to5
6
43
44
45
46
select the 7analog8 audio9 input
for
the
10
11
12
2 Press
3 the
4 Set 5Button
6
current1 source.
13
14
15
16
17
18
s 7 to enter
your
selection
8
9
10
11 and
12
19
20
21
22
23
24
return13to normal
operation.
14
15
16 When
17
18
25
26
27
28
29
30
switching
to
a
digital
channel,
follow
19
20
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
34
35
the same procedure, except select the 36
25
26
27
28
29
30
37 digital
38 audio
39 input
40 for41the 42
appropriate
31
32
33
34
35
36
43 switching
44
45is not46a fault
47 of 48
source. This
37
38
39
40
41
either the CVR700 or the cable box,42
44 by 45
46 of different
47
48
as it is43 caused
the use
audio technologies on different channels by the cable company or program
supplier.
• Although the CVR700 will decode virtually all current DVD movies, CDs and
HDTV sources, it may not be compatible
with future digital sources.
• When a digital source is playing, you
may not be able to select some of the
analog surround modes such as Dolby
Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Hall,
Theater or Logic 7.
• When a Dolby Digital or DTS
source is playing, it is not possible
to make an analog recording using
the Digital Recorder Analog
Audio/Video Outputs ‚ or the
63
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
1
2
7
8
9
13
14
15
19
20
21
25
26
27
31
32
33
37
38
39
43
44
45
4:24 PM
29 22 34
30 21 33
31 20 32
33
43
32
31
42
4343 45454747 4949 5151 5315355552 5757 3
4
5
6
4242 44444646 4848 5050 52525454 5656
7
8
9
10
11
12
3535 37373939 4141
43 45 47
57
13 4914 5115 53 1655 17
18
3434 36363838 4040 3737414147475151
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs
36
46
MANUAL
TUNED
will
nevertheStations
194046
205050 21
22
23
24 Selector Button 8t
26
37
25
36
40
3333
26 25 37
3539
45
¤. However, the digital signals will be
35
37
39
41
32
less 27
appear
in36
the35
Lower
h 30 on the front panel or remote.
2539Display
264949 27
28
29
2436
45
43 45 47 49
51 3253 27
55 2457
3438
444848
37 41 47 51
38
34
36
38
40
passed through to the Digital Audio
E.
Line
23
When36using the front-panel controls,
28
35
3131
34
44
31
32
33
34
35
42 44 46 48 50 52 28
54 2356 35
36 53
33 25
43 51
40 46
50
33
Outputs ¶bg.
3030 292922223434
26
37
to first press the Tuning
33
43
43
45
47
49
55
57 42
37
38
39
4. 29
Stations may also be tuned
directly
in 40 41remember
35 37 39 41
35 52
39 45
32
32 24
42 50
27
36
29 303021213333
42
Mode
Selector
6 to select Preset
42 32
44
46
48
54 49
56
either
the
automatic
or
manual
mode.
51 31
43
44 3445
48
Tuner Operation 34 36 38 40 37 2841
28 47
38 4644 47
48
31 23 35
3120203232
28
as the function of the Tuning/Preset
35 31
37
39 41directly,
To 31
enter
a station’s
frequency
36 40
46 50
33 26 25 37
30 29 22 34
43
33
The CVR700’s tuner is capable of tuning
8.
51
34
36
38 band
40 as 37 41 47 Buttons
35 39
49 the29
first45
select
AM30
or FM
32 27 24 36
42
32
21 33
43 45 47
49
51 53 55 57
AM, FM and FM Stereo broadcast
sta36
46
40
50
33
26
37
25
31 28 23 35
34 38
44
48 pressing
desired be
Tuner
28 31the20
31
32 Button
42 manually,
44 46 48 50 52 54 56
tions. Stations may be tuned
49
32 27
36 6 35 39 45Recording
30 29 22 34
33 1d
1 432 2. Next,
3 3 press
4 4 the
5245Direct
6
or they may be stored as 35
favorite
37 station
39 41
31
34
44
38
23
28
35
29
32 Button
42 l
30 21 33
In 48
normal operation, the audio or video
. Within 5 seconds of
7 7 478 851 9 930 10 10 11 11 12 12 33
37 41
36 38 40
presets and recalled from34
a 30-position
43
28
29 22 34
31 when DIRECT IN
31 20 32
source
selected for listening through the
scrolls
in
the
16 1721
17 18 18 32
4013 4614 1450 15 15291 16 30
33 264325 4537 47 36
426
memory.
33
3
4
5
49 13Lower
51 53Display
55 57Line 2E,
CVR700
is sent to the record outputs.
enter
the
28
35
45
3919 20 2049 21 21 22 31
32 274224 4436 46 48 19
22 23
2023 32
24 24 31
50 52 54 56
Station Selection
7 by pressing
8
9 the 10
11
12
This means that any program you are
station
frequency
31 28 23 35
34 38
44
48
25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30
35 37 39 41 25Numeric
watching or listening to may be recorded
Keys13l 14 . If 15you press
16
17
18
301d
1. Press the Tuner Button
3
433
5 436
29 222on34
32 47
33 5134 34 35 35 36 36
34 36 38 40 31an3137
3241
33button
simply by placing machines connected
incorrect
while
entering
a
29 tuner
the remote to select the
as
an
32
42
19
20
21
22
23
24
21
33
7 3033
8
9
10
1137
12
36 38
40
50 40 241 41 342 42 4
38 46
26 25 37 37direct
5
39 39 1 40
6 the Digital Recorder Analog Audio/
28selected
to
Exit/
frequency,
press
the
31
31
32
input.
The
tuner
may
be
from
20
25
26
27
28
29
30
43 45 47 49
51 13 53 32
55 57
4545 49 46
35 1839
14 2715 24 1636 1743
44Button
47to start
48 over.
43
44
45
46
47
48
Video
Outputs ‚ or VCR Analog
Cancel
r
9
10
11
12
Source
the
the 31
43 454447 317 49 328 51 33
53
55
42front
44 panel
46 by
48 turning
52
54 56 23 53
34 5735
36
38
48
43 5045
19 47 20 492821 51
2235 55
23 345724
Audio/Video
Outputs ¤ in the
Selector
q
tuner
is active.22 52Preset
42Tuning
444346 13 48 1450 15
52 54
16 5641
17
18
35 5537 57
39 until
41 42the44
37
38
39
40
42
51 53
4630 4829 50
543356
25
26
27
2834 29
30
record
mode.
35 374239 19 41 20
413929
51
34 54
36 Tuner
38 40
21
22
23
24
the
Button
or30
502. Press
52
56
1d
24741
3 21 4 33Using
5 32the
6 remote, 43
45
46
47
48
35 3737
up to 44
30 stations
may
31
32
33
34
35 3436 36 38 40
41 47 51
28
37 27
46 31
40
50
33 26
When
a digital audio recorder is connected
3151 in the CVR700’s
32be47
20 41
37 34 3636
25Selector
Tuner
Band
!
to
switch
25
26
28
29
30
37
38
40
stored
memory
for
7
8
9
10
11
38
39
40
41 3312
40 46 50
45 4549
3537that
39 the
32 4727 AM
37 32 36 33
47
49 46
51 5042
53 2655 2557
36FM
to
24 and
36 40
41
51
33 so
37 between
31 front-panel
34
35
36 the Digital Audio Outputs bg7,
26 2543
37
easy
recall
using
the
controls
14
15
16
17 3218
35 39 45 49
31 4628 50
44 48
3413
43 38 42
44
45
4639
23 35 band
48 47
50 4948
52 2754 2456 36
you
are able to record the digital signal
3553
36 desired
40
frequency
is
selected.
24 493644 5146
or
the
remote.
4332 4527
47
5545
57
37
38
40
41
42
31
34 39
30 29 22 34 31 3319
38 44 48
43
20
21
22
23
24
23
28
35
44
34
using
a CD-R, MiniDisc or other digital
35 39 45 49
38
48
35
37
39
41
23
28
35
42 44 46controls,
48
502 52 3 54 456
44 33
45
46
47
48
1
3. When
front-panel
6 43
30a5station
43
29 using21the33
enter
into
memory,
first
42
34 the
25 2234
26
27 38
2840To 29
30 3251
43
33
41 29472251
34 38 4344304548
37 30
recording
system.
36
29
34
47
49
53
55
57
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
35Button
37 39
29 station
Mode
6 41
is7
the28Tuning
42
32
the
832 34 9 tune
11 304621
12using
31 20
32
29 3130
43
33
36
40
50 33the steps outlined
4210
33
31
32 54
3356
35
36
21
3326
37
25
42
44
46
48
50
52
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
41
51
NOTES:
47
37
28
34
36
38
40
used 42
to select the 28
function of the
31
31 20 32
35 Then:
39
1424
15 above.
16
17 4518 49
32
31 4036
31 2032
381332273936
35 37353937
41392637
40 4641 50 42
4125
33
• The digital outputs are active only
37
Tuning/Preset
Up/Down
Buttons
3119 28 2023 35
44
34
38
48
31
2249 48
23 Memory
24
1.4547
Press
the
Button @k
514739
43
44
4535
4621
51
37
3634
403827
37
3632
402441Button
3647 41
when a digital signal is present, and
8.34
Press
the38Tuning
Mode
30 29 22 34
43
33
will flash in the
36
2546
26 463827
29 underlines
30
50
1
331
5 4036
5044 2848; two
6 4034
35
2623325
3725428
26
3723
they do not convert an analog input to
6 33
to
toggle
between
TUNING
and
29 30
42
32
21 33
1 35
2 36 Line
3
4
5
6
Display
H.
30
35
3935
49
43Upper
32
3933
49
3224 27
22
27
36
3145
324 45 33
34
36
29
34
24
1
2
3
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
6
a digital signal, or change the format
PRESET. Press the Tuning28Mode
31
31 4820
31
3123 2829
44 32
4842 40 7 41
35233034
35213834
3344 3832
8 42
9press10the Numeric
11
12
4
5 13 6 28
39
5 seconds,
of the digital signal. In addition, the
Selector
o
716the remotes
817 37918to 38
10
112. Within
12
14
15 on
30 293022 2928
3243 3143
34223133
3420 33
Keys
digital recorder must be compatible
1448 corresponding
15
16
17to the
18
43 24
44
45
46 13l
47
tuning.
10 select
11 19 manual
12 20 or21automatic
22
23
13 32 14 3242
15
1642 17
18
29 302921 303321
33
memory
location
where
you
wish
to
with the output signal. For example,
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
16 In17either
18
28
25
26 2031
27
28 31
29
30
mode,
each
of the
19press
31
3220
31
3220
1 21
222
323
424
5
6
3
1
23 31 24Selectors
Tuning
32
33 8vf
35
36
2534
26
27
28
1
2
37
48
28
29 37 will
30 increase
38
39 or31decrease
40
41 the
42 fre-34
32
33
13
7
8 When
9 the 1014
by44one increment.
34 quency
35 43 36
47 5 39
48
1
21 45 3 2 3746 4 3 38
6 5 40
4
19
Mode Selector
Tuning
o 15 has
13
14
1620
40
41
42
43
44
45
87 539 8 55 10957 111025 1211 2646
45 been
47 7pressed
49
51
TUNE
so
that
AUTO
19
20
21
22
46
47
48
44 appears
46 1348 in the
50
521514 54Display
1413 Lower
161556 171631Line
1817 32
25
26
27
28
4543
4745
4947 20
51
575522 572423
49 53holding
515522
53
37
39
41
19
E,
pressing
19and 21
20
21 the23Tuning
37
31
32
33
3438
4442
46 4440
4846 8vf
50
525047
54 5251
5654 will
48 41
56
37
36
38
Selectors
25
26
2726
2827
292843 302944
25
37
38
39
40
46 for
3735
393737
4139 36
50
41 40 scan
26
25
cause
31the tuner
32
3332
3433 the
3534 next
3635
31 to
43
44
45
41
51
41
51
35
45
47
37
36
38
40
39
49
37
47 an 46
40 frequency
2734
24 3636or38lower
higher
with
37
38
3938
4039 4140
42
37
46
36
40
50
36
46 50 41
34
44
40
38
48
23
28
35
2633
37
25
26 25 signal.
37
acceptable
Release
the
button,
43
44
45
46
47
43
44
45
46
45
35
393543 4945 494847
22
2732
3624 33
36
29
34
24 27
and
AUTO
TUNED 39
will appear in
44 384844 48
34
31
32
21
23
28
35
35 383442
30 the 28
33 23 Display
Lower
Line
E to indi33
3343
43
22 2932
31
293020
3422 31
34
has
been
tuned.
cate
that
a
station
3242
42
302921 303321 32
33
AUTO
ST
TUNED
will
appear
in
312820313220 31
31
32
the Lower Display Line E for FM
2stereo3 stations.
4
5
6
7
1
13
7
19
13
25
19
31
25
37
31
43
37
8When9the Tuning
10
11 Mode
12 Selector
21
32
43
54
65
6
o 15 has
so that
14
16 been
17 pressed
18
87
98
109
1110
1211
12
MANUAL
appears
in the
20
21
22TUNE
23
24
14
1514
1615 Line
1716 E,
1817
13
18
Lower
26
27 Display
28
29
30 pressing
20
2120
22the
2322
2423
Selectors
and
19 holding
21 Tuning
24
32
33
34
35
36
8vf
26
2726
2827
2928 will
3029cause
25
30the
38
39
40
41
42
tuner
to32 scan
32
33
3433up or
3534down
3635 through
31
36
44
45
46
47
48
all
frequencies,
stopping
when42you
38
3938
4039 4140
4241
37
43
44
43
22
43
42
43
35
42
34
35
33
34
32
31
33
30
32
29
31
28
30
29
28
64
30
29
28
Page 64
release
the 46button,
even48 if no accept4544
4746
45
47
48
able signal is present. The message
store 25this station’s
26
27frequency.
28
29The pre30
29
30
11
12 appear in the Upper
set
will
59
610 number
31
32
33
34
35
36
35
36
Display
Line18 H.
1115
1216 3717
38
39
40
41
42
42
6 41
23 Memory
the
@k
1721 3. Press
1822 43
4424
45 Button
46
47
48
47
48
1227
again
to30store the preset station.
29
23
2428
1833 4. Repeat
35the process
36
after tuning any
29
3034
2439
40
41
42
additional
stations
to be preset.
35
36
3045
48
41 NOTE:
4246 By47its nature,
plasma display
36
tend to interfere
with47
AM 49
radio 51
47 devices
48
43 45
42 reception. In any event, as mentioned
42
48
44 46
48
50
elsewhere in this manual,
35 37it is39preferable
41
to leave the screen off
avoid
37
34 to36
38 burn-in
40
when no video signal33is present
26 25 and
37 the 36
startup screen may be
32 displayed
27 24 for
36a 35
long time. Therefore,31when
23AM
28 the
35tuner34
30source,
33
band is selected as the
the CVPD50
29 22
34
29 the
32
21 33mode.
will automatically enter
30standby
28 31
31
To wake it, simply select
any 20
other32source
(including the FM tuner band).
Recalling Preset Stations
2
3
4
• To manually select a1 station
previously
8
9
10
press
entered in the preset7 memory,
the Numeric Keys13l 14 for15the 16
desired station’s memory
location.
19
20
21
22
25
26the list
27 of 28
• To manually scroll through
Preset
preset stations, press
31 the 32
33
34
the PCM digital input from a CD
player may be recorded on a CD-R
or MiniDisc, but Dolby Digital or
DTS signals may not.
• Please obey the copyright restrictions
on any material you copy. Unauthorized
duplication of copyrighted materials is
prohibited by law.
53 Output
55 57 Level Trim Adjustment
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
52 54 56
Normal
level48adjustment
42 output
44 46
50 52 for54the 56
CVR700 is37
established
39 41 using the test tone,
41 47 35
51
as outlined
on 38
pages4050–52.
47 51
37 In41some
34
36
40 46 50
36
cases,
however,
it
may
be
desirable
40 46to 50
33
26
37
25
39 45 49
45 49
35 39
adjust32the output levels using
program
38 44 48 27 24 36
31 such
44 48
34 or38
material
as
a
test
disc,
a
selection
23
28
35
43
30 familiar
43
33
22
29
34
the
you
are
with.
Additionally,
42
32 can42
30for21
output29level
the 33
subwoofer
only
28 31 20 32
31
be adjusted using this procedure.
To adjust the output levels using program
material,
first set the reference volume for
5
6
2
3 right
4 channels
5
6
the front1 left and
front
11
12
using the
Volume
Control
Óu
7
8
9
10
11
12 .
17
18
13 using
14 a disc
15 with
16 test
17 signals
18
If you are
24
or an external
19
20signal
21 generator
22
23as the
24
29
30
source 25used when
the
levels
are
26
27 output
28
29
30
35
36
being
trimmed,
you
may
use
the
remote
31
32
33
34
35
36
23
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
43
42
45 47
44 46
Page 65
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
49
51 53 35
55 37
57 39 41
43
45
47
49
34
36
38 53
40 55 375741 47 51
48 50 52 54 56 51
42 44 4633 4826 50
52
54 3656 40 46 50
37
25
35 37 39 41
32
27
36
35
37
39
41
43 45
49 51
51 2453 55 35
57 39 45 49
41 47
37 47
34 36 38 40
31
34
41
23
28
35
47
37
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
5651 38 44 48
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
30 29 36
43
22 40
34 463350
352639
3925 45
3533 37
4137 49
32 27 24 36
29 30 35
42
32
21
45
33
39
49
32
27
36
41 49
51 53 55 57
31 28 23
34 49
44
47 51
3747
382443
48
34 47
36
38
40
43 35
45
51 45
53
55
57
28
314852 54 56
31 34
32
31 33
28 to23
3544
42
46
48
as an30
SPL 29
meter
guide
you
464450
3620
43
4038
50 SPEAKER LEVELS
Once
the
33 46
22
26
37
25 the
42to 34
44
48
50cor52
54
56
30 29 22 34
33 39 4543 49
29 settings.
43 appears
45 47 on49your 51
55 57
35
rect level
To
the
EzSet
32use32
42
submenu
video53screen,
35
37
39
41
27
36
30 21
33
24
35 37 2939 41
302321
33363432
28as 31
31 follow
4442
42⁄41
44
46 51
48 50Controls
52 54 56
¤ 47
38
48
31
remote
an SPL
meter,
the
32
37
20
34
38
40
/
Navigation
use
the
28
35
37 41 47 51
34 36 2838 40
31 20 32 3331
30
43 36
46
50
instructions on 33
page26
51. 45
35 to40
37
396the
41on-screen › cursor
29 22 33
34
q
move
1 26
350
46
36
40
37
43 25
47 49
512 25
53 37
55 457 5
29 30 21 32
42
32
35
45
39
33
47 51
37 41TONE
34
36
38
40 TEST
27
36
so
that
it is11next 12
to 49
the
45
35
39
32 27
36
7
8 24
949
1056
Once the reference
level
has
been
set,
24
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
28 31 20 31
34
44
3123
32
46 50
36 40Controls
38
48
33
28
35
‹
›
26
37
line.
Press
the
/
Navigation
31
25
44
34
38
48
28 23
press the
and
1 Level
2 Button
4374735
5 4930
39
41
13651 14
15 5716
18
433 3545 p
55
33
43
35 39 45 49
32 so17
22
29 53
34
27
36 is highlighted.
30 29 22
24OFF
43
33
q
that
1
2
3
4
5
6
34
SP LEVEL
FL 0 will3646
appear
in
the37
4154
51 23
38
40
52
7
191250
21 475622
8 29 429 3444 10
114829
31 28 42
32
34 38 44 48
21
30 20
2324 35
42 33
This
21
30
338FL32
7 26
9
10 4011
12
36
46 will
50 turn off the test tone and allow
Lower Display Line
with
0
33E
37
28
25
30
33
35
37
39
41
31
2518 31 2620 32
27
28
29
30 34
22
29
13
14 28 1531 20
16 3217
31
you
use your external test disc or43other
3press
5 17
456to1849
39
321 13
flashing. To change
the
level,
first
27382 24
36
14
1537 435
16
29
41
51
47
34
36
40
42
32
30 21
33 reference.
3124
32
33
34 material
35
36 the
20
2131 22
23
source
as
Then,
4412 51
35
the Set1943
Button
451034
4738
49
55
57
to25
select
7 1928
28 53
8 23
9the
1146
36
40
502448
33 49
2037
21
22
23
31
45 s
47
51
5343
55
57
31
32
20
26
37
38
39
40 ⁄/41¤ Navigation
42
25
26
2730 28
29 42
use
43the
49
51 53 55 57
22
3430
4433
46 45
48
50 52 5443 5645 47Controls
and29then
use
the
front left
channel
35
39
32 ,48
42(FL)44
46
50
52
54
27
13
14 2636
15 27
1656
17 29 49
18 30
28
29 25343024 21
43
44
45
46
47
48
q
to
select
the
channels
to
be
42
44
46
48
50
52 54 56
32
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
31
32 131
33
35
36
33
⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls
q
to
2
3
4 34
35
375 38
39 644
41 48
28
35 37 39 28
41
19
20 3235 21 33 22 34 23 35 24 36
31 23
adjusted.
At
each
channel
position,
use
31
31 NOT
3274233
20
35
37
39
41
38the30
39 2940
41
41
51
8
9
10
11
12
raise or3734
lower
level.
DO
use
the
43
47
37
34
36
38
40
229 34
41103947 28
1151
1241 30 42
36 738 40
25837 37
26 38 27
40 29
24634 50
336
4
5q 37
the ‹ / › 1Navigation
Controls
6
41 47 51
38
40
331348
32
volume4333
control,
this30will
alter
the
44 as29
45
46 21
4733
26 50
37 1636 40
36
46
1425 42
15
17
18
40
26 13
25 37
14
15
16
17
31 43 32 44 32
33 45 34 46 351847
36 48
36
to
change
the
output
level.
Remember,
the
33
28
45
35
39
49
26
37
7
25
8
9
10
11
12 40 46 50
31
31 20
2745
36
reference
35 32
45
39 1943
49
32 setting.
27 19
57
202447 21 49 22 51 2353 55
24
24 36
21
22
23
24goal42is34
45 49
35 45
39 47
49
32 output
3720
38
39
40
41
to
have
the
level
at
each
31
44
27
36
43
38
48
24
23
28
35
34
44 444
13 295214 54
17
18
38press
48
1
2
325
5 27 486 28 50
28 23
42
Once the31change
has 35
been
made,
26 46
30 1556 16
44 48
34
38 46
48
27
28 29
29 22 47
3034
30
channel
when
at
the
lis23 35
4331
28 heard
42
44
4326
44
45
46
48 33 be equal
30 29 25
33
43
22 34
22
23
24
the Set Button k
35 10
37
7 and8 then29
9press
11 33 411234 19 35 20 30
31
322139
36 2129 22
43
33
34
42
32
tening
position.
31
32
33
34
35
36
35 37 39 41
29 30 21 33
32
423036 38 3340
51 28
47
37 4126 29
34
29
30
the ⁄/¤ Navigation
1 13Control
2 14 q
3 28
4 16385 17 396 1840 25
42 40
32
1537
42 2730 21
33
31 41
28 31 37
34
36 38
38
39
40 3141 20 4232
31
32
20 55
If
you
wish
to
reset
all
the
levels
to
their
46
36
40
50
33
43 45 to47select
49 the
51next
53
57
28 3331 20
output-channel
26
37
25
31
32
34
35
36
31
32
7 19 8 20 9 location
10
11
12
2143
2244 23 45 2446
47
48
33 26 25 37
43 5444 56 45
4632 47
48original 35
factory
45 49of 0dB offset,
39 default
42 44 that
46 you
48 wish
50 to52
27 24
36
adjust. To adjust the
37
38
39
40
41
3242 27 24 36
13 25 14 26 15 2731
16 28 17 29 press
18 30 the
⁄
¤
/
Navigation
Controls
44
34
38
48
28 23 35
35 37 subwoofer
39 41 level, press the ⁄/¤
3148
43
44
45
46
47
35 q
19 31 20 32 21 33130
22 34
43
so5 that the
on-screen cursor is 28 23 35
223 22
3 243436 4 33
6
34 36 Navigation
38 40 1 37
Control
q
241 47
3 51 4 until
5
6 29
30 29 22 34
43 45 47 49
51 53
55
57
29
1
2
3
4the 5
6
42
32 11RESET
26 38 27 39 28 40
29 41 303342to the
line and press29
30
36 SUB
40 2546
50
33 26 SP
7
8 21 next
9
10
12
037 appears
in
37
25 LEVEL
11 the
12
30 21 33
42 44 46 487
508 52 94354 1056
28
31
31
32
20
Button s 7 . After
35 39
8 the9 levels
10 are11
12
3145
32 44 33 45 34 46 35 47 Set
36 48
32 27 Lower
28
24 36Display
Line
E.49
31 20 32
13
14
15
16
17
18
13 34 14
15
16
17
18
31 3528 3723 3935 41
reset,
resume the 13
procedure
outlined
38 3744
48
38
39
40
41
42
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Repeat
the
procedure
as
needed
until
all
41
51
47
37
19 33 20
21
22
23
24
30 3429 3622 3834 40
43
above
to reset the19levels20to the21 desired
43
44
45
46
47
48
22
23
24
channels
requiring
46 50 have25been 26
3643 adjustment
4042
27 57 28
29
29 3330 26
45
25 32 26
27 4728 49 29 51 3053 55 settings.
21 2533 37
When
all30 adjustments
are done,
1
2
3
4
5
256
26
27
28
29
30
3542 3944 4546have
4948
set.
When
all
adjustments
43been
45
47
51
53
55
57
28 3231 27
31
32 49
33
34
35
36 MASTER MENU
50
52
54
56
1
2
3
31
32 36
20 24
scroll BACK TO
31
32
33
34
35
36
31 28
44 48 42 are
34 38adjustments
7 46 848
950 52
10 54
11 563112
32
33
34
35
36
made
44
23and
35no further
37
38
39
40 press
41
42 Set Button s 7
35
37
39
41
and
then
the
8
9
37
38
39
40
41
42
30 29
33
22for34
made
5 seconds,
the43CVR700
3718
39
40
41
42
13 39
15
16 47to17go 48
35 will
37
41
37
4745
34 36
38 40
43
44 1441
if 51
you46wish
back
to38the main
menu
43
44
45
46
47
48
13
14
15
29 30
42
32
21 to33
return
normal33
operation.
41 47
514324
37 22
34 36
44 If 45
46
47
48
36
46 to21
40 2040
50
19 38
26 25 37
make
other23adjustments.
you have
1 28 31
2
5
6
19
20
21
203 32 4 3132
36 40 46 50
33 may
35
45
39
49
26
37
25
27any
36
24input
The channel output
for
25
26 no27other28adjustments
29
30 to make, press the
25
26
27
7
8
9
10
11
12
45
35
39
49
32
31
34
44
27 24
38 36 OSD
48
23on-screen
28the
35
also be adjusted using
D 36 to exit the menu
31
32
33 Button
34
35
31 28
34 38 44 48
30
31
32
33
33 23 35
43
22 volume
13
14
16 First,
17 set
2918the
34
menu15system.
to
system.
37
38
3933 40
41
42
30 29
43
29 30 21 33
22 34
32
42
37
38
39
19 1 20
21
22
23
24
2
3
4
5
6 using the
a comfortable listening level
43 21 4433 NOTE:
4532 46
47levels
48may be separately
29 30
Output
28 31 20 32
42
31
43
44
45
25 7 26
27
28
29
30
Volume
Control
Óu
.
Then,
press
8
9
10
11
12
28 31 20 32 trimmed
31 for each surround mode. If you
43
42
45 47
44 46
the14OSD
to
31 13 32
33 15Button
34 16 35D
17 36 18
37 19
43 25
31
37
43
bring up the
MASTER
MENU
(Fig.
1). Use the
38
39
40
41
42
20
21
22
23
24
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q
3
4 to 5
44 26 45 27 46 28 471 29 482 30
1 line,2
scroll down to the7SPEAKERS
8
9
10
11
35
36
and32 press33 the 34
Set Button
s 7 to 8
13
14
15
16
17
38
40
41
42
select
it.39The confirmation
menu13(Figure14
19
20
21
22
23
45
46 and47you should
48
18)44will appear,
scroll
19
20
26
27
select
it.28 This29
down to the YES25 line and
25
26
31
32
33menu
34
35
will cause the SPEAKERS
31
37
38 Scroll
39 down
40 32 41
(Figure 19) to be displayed.
37
44 select
45
it,46 38 47
to the LEVELS43line and
43
44
which will bring up the SPEAKER
LEVELS submenu (Figure 27).
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
42
4
5
6
10
11
12
16
17
18
22
23
24
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
wish to have different trim levels for a specific mode, select that mode and then fol6
low the instructions shown above.
12
4
5
6
Memory
Backup
10
11
12
18
This
is18equipped with a memory
16 product
17
backup
system
that preserves the system
22
23
24
30
configuration information and tuner pre28
29
30
36
sets if the unit is accidentally unplugged
34
35
36
42
or subjected to a power outage. This
40
41
42
48
memory will last
virtually indefinitely.
24
46
47
48
65
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 66
OPTICAL DISC CHANGER PLAYBACK BASICS
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
51
50
Loading Discs
35 37 39 41
34 36 38 40
To load discs in the CVR700,
first turn the
33 26 25 37
CVR700 on by pressing 32
the Main
Power
27 24 36
On/Off
Switch
0.
31 53
23 57
28 55
35
43 45 47 49
51
30 52
22 input
29 54
34
44 46 to48the DVD
50
56
Set 42
the CVR700
source
29 30 21 33
either
slowly
the Source
35 by37
39 rotating
41
28 31 20 32
Selector
in 47
the 51
37 41
34 36&38until
40it engages
36
46
40
50
33 and
appears
in
the
notch
26DVD
37
25
35 or
39by 45
49
32 27 24
36 Ô,
Information
Display
pressing
34d
44
23 Selector
35
the 31
DVD28
Input
1 38 2 . 48
3
30 29 22 34
33
43
7 and8 you 9
Eject
Button
6,
Press
the
29 30 21 33
32
42
will28
be prompted
to select
14 number
15
3113 a disc
31 20 32
53 55
52 54
57
56
the quality of the disc. On some occa41 47it is51possible that these discs may
sions,
46 on
40 play
50 the CVR700. This does not
not
45
39
49 problem with the CVR700.
indicate any
4
10
16
will only play discs that
are42coded for Region 1 or discs that are
open to being played in all regions.
Discs that contain any other Region
Code will not play.
Figure 41
•5 Both65-inch (12cm) and 3-inch (8cm)
43 45
discs may be used.
11
12
47
44 46
42
•17When
18 loading CD audio discs, load the
35 37
discs
with the label side up.
23
24
39
36 38
by a message in the Lower
19 Display
20
21
22
34
either
Line E. You must enter 25a number,
•29When30 loading DVD discs with printed
26
27
28
33 26 25
by pressing one of the front-panel Disc
34
35labels,
36 load them label side up. 32 27 24
1
2
3
4 31 5 32 6 33
Selectors 5, or by entering a number
31
37
38
39
40
•41Some42 DVD discs are double-sided. 28 23
7
8
9
10
11
12
between
1 and
5 using
the Numeric
30 29 22
43
44
45
46
47The title
48
information for these will
be
29 30 21
Keys13l 14 . If15you don't
enter
a18num16
17
43 printed
45 47 on49the inner
51 53
57 disc,
ring55
of the
28 31 20
ber, the
CVR700
will
cancel
the
command.
19
20
21
22
23
24
42 very
44 46
50 center
52 54
close48to the
hole.56The43title45 47
Indicator
D28corresponding
to
The Disc
25
26
27
29
30
for
the
side
you
wish
to
play should
35
37
39
41
42 44 46
the tray number you selected will flash.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37 41 47 51 35 37 39
34 be
36 facing
38 40
up.
The door will drop forward and the maga1
2
36 40 46 50 34
37
38
39
40
41
42
33 26 25 37
zine tray corresponding to the disc posiOnce a disc is properly loaded, press
the36 38
35 39 45 49 33
32 27 24 36
43
44
45
46
47
48
7
268 25
tion you have selected will slide forward. 31Eject Button 6 34
to close the
disc drawer.
38 44 48 32 27
28 23 35
13 to 14 24
Note that the door will open only enough
the drawer closes,
you
30After
43 will need
33
29 22 34
31 28 23
to allow the correct tray to slide forward,
19by
20
the
CVR700
to
play
the
disc
29instruct
42
32
30 21 33
30 29 22
so that the door opens wider for the higher 28pressing
Button !e 29
25 . 26
31 20the32Play31
30 21
numbered trays located further down.
The Lower Display Line E will prompt
31 3132 20
28
This is perfectly normal.
you for a disc number. You may enter
37
38
the number of any loaded disc either
by 44
Hold the disc by the edge, and gently
43
1
2
4
5
6
pressing
its 3corresponding
Disc
Selector
place it into the disc drawer, making sure
2
75 or 8by using
9 the
10 Numeric
11
12Keys 1
the disc is properly seated in the tray’s
l
.
If
you
don't
select
a
disc,
the
7
8
13
14
15
16
17
18
insert. If the disc is not correctly centered,
CVR700
will
load
the
last
disc
played.
19
20
21
22
23
24
13
14
you may damage both the disc and the
player when the drawer closes. When
loading discs, please note the following:
• The CVR700 will play discs with the
following logos, as well as most WMA
and JPEG discs. It will play Kodak
Picture CDs, but not Photo CDs. DO
NOT attempt to play another type
of disc.
28 discs
29 are
30 loaded19and
if27no other
!e
press
the
32
33 Play
34 Button
35
36
25
6 to close
37instead
38 of the
39 Eject
40 Button
41
42
31
the
will close
43the disc
44 drawer,
45
46 CVR700
47
48
37
the door and begin play of the disc you
43
just loaded.
25However,
26
20
31you
26
You will briefly see LOADING in the
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
Information Display K to alert you to
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
the fact that the unit is determining the
35 37 39 41
type of disc (DVD, DVD-Audio, CD, VCD,
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
JPEG, WMA or MP3) and is36
reading
the
40 46 50
33 26 25 37
title
and
other
track,
chapter,
data for
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
information
about the disc.34 38 44 48
31
28 23 35
30 Bar
33
29 22 34
Status
29 30 21 33
32
Once the
data has been
28 disc’s
31
31 20 32
43
42
read, the
type of disc will be displayed by the
Disc-Type Indicator A and the disc
will begin playing. The disc’s track timing
1
2 other
3 relevant
4
5data will
6
information
and
Line
H.
appear in
7 the Upper
8
9 Display
10
11
12
• The CVR700 will play discs in the NTSC
and PAL video formats.
• Playback capability for CD-RW, DVD-RW
or DVD+RW discs will vary according to
66
15
16 may
17 access
18
While a13disc is14 playing,
you
Status24
the Status
19 Bar20by pressing
21
22 the 23
Button25S 26 to 27view 28
information
on
29
30
to
change
the current
title
and
chapter,
31
32
33
34
35
36
the current
title
or chapter,
or to41 view42
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
47
48
45 47
44 46
35
37 39
49
48
51
50
41
40
49
37
48
32 27 24 36
35 37
39 41
31 28 23 35
34 36
38 40
30 29 22 34
33 26
37
29 30 25
21 33
32 27
36
28 31 24
20 32
31 28 23
35
30 29 22 34
29 30 21 33
first
in the
28item
1 31 220 32
3
32
38
44
53 55
52 54
37
51
5036
35
34
37
33
36
32
35
31
34
33
34 a45
36
38
time elapsed or remaining43
for
title47
or
33 44
26 46
chapter (see Figure 41). 42
25
37
36
35
34 38 44 48
33 • The
43CVR700
32
31
43
42
41
53
40
52
39
38
41
40 46
1036 11
12 50 29 22 34
29 30 21 33
32
45
35
39
36
15
16
17 Number:
18 49 The second item is
B Chapter
28 31 20 32
34 38 144 482
3
4
531
35 current
the
Chapter
21
22
23
24 Number. When this
43
33
34
7
8you may
9
10 the11
number
use
27
28 is highlighted,
29
30
42
32
33
Numeric
Keys
l
to
enter
the 17
13
14
15
16
3332 3431 35
36
1
2
3
4
51
57
50
56
49
48
51
47
55
46
54
45
44
47
43
40 46
42
39 45
38 44
43
32
50
49
48
42
A Title Number: The
31
4
5
Status Bar is the current Title Number.
7
8
9
10
11
When51this53
number
is highlighted, you
49
55 57
may use the Numeric Keys13l 14 to 15
16
17
48 50 52 54 56
1
2 and
3
4
5
enter the number of the desired
19 title,
20
21
22
23
41
press 37
the Set
Button
725 to switch
826
9
10
11
41 43
51 I
47 45
40
47 49
51
5327 55 2857 29
to that36title.
Some
discs
may
prohibit
this
46 44
1432 521533 54 163456 1735
40 42
50 46 13
31
48
50
37
action35
during
as20 the 21 22 23
45 49titles, such
39 certain
36
37
38
39
40
41
35 37
39 19
41
warnings
disc. Note
44 copying
34 against
38 34
48 38 the
35
25
26
2745 47
284651
294757
36
40
4347 37
44 41
43
45
49
51
53
55
that when
the 46 50
43 Audio setting in
33 the DVD
34
36 40
33 26
3746 32
33
42 2544 31
48
50
5234 5435 56
DVD32
SETUP
menu
(Figure
31)
has
42
33
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 37
3639 38
39
35
37
41
been set
item will be 34
the 38 44 40 48 41
31 to ON,
32
31 this
28 2336 3538 40
37 41
49 number.
51 53 When
55 34
57the DVD
43 Audio
44 set45
46 4747 51
Group
30 29 22 34
43
33
36 40 46 50
33
48
50
52
54
56
26
37
25
the disc
ting has been 29
set to30OFF,
32 will35 42
39 45 49
32 2127 3324 36
41recognized 28
be
as a 31
DVD-Video
disc,
31and 34
32
20
31
3
4
541
6
38 44 48
23
28
35
51
37will be47
40 item
this
the30
title number.
43
33
937
57
56
6
12
18
6
24
1230
1836
2442
3048
36
42
48
42
6
12
18
5
6
number
of the
desired
1942
20chapter,
21 and
22 press
23
24
39
40
41
the Set Button25I 26
switch
to that
7 to 27
8
10
11
12
289
29
30
45
46
47
48
chapter. Some discs
may
prohibit
this
13
14
15
16
17
18
31
32
33
34
35
36
3
4
5 certain
6 titles, such as the
action
during
19
20
21
22
23
24
37
38
39
40
41
42
warnings
copying
the disc. Note
9
10 against
11
12
25
26
27
28
29
30
43
44
45
46
48
that
when
the
DVD
Audio
setting
in the47
15
16
17
18 31
43 45
57
32 4733 49 34 51 3553 55
36
DVD SETUP menu (Figure 31) has
42 44
56
21
22
23
24 37
38 4639 48 40 50 4152 54
42
been set to ON, this item will be the
3945 41 46
27
28
29
30 4335 37
44
47
48
Track number. When the DVD Audio set37 41 47 51
33
34
35
36 34 36 38 40
OFF, the disc will 36 40 46 50
ting
has
been
set to
33 26 4325 4537 47 49
51 53 55
39 recognized
40
41 as a42DVD-Video disc, and
be
32 27 4224 4436 46 3548 39 5045 5249 54
45 item
46 will
47 be the
48 chapter number.
this
31
34 38 44 48
28 3523 3735 39
30 29 22 34
34 36
C Elapsed Time: The29third
item
is the38
30 3321 33
26It is
25
chapter.
Elapsed Time of the current
28 31
20 32
32 27 24
not possible to display other time
vari31 28 23
ables. When this item is highlighted,
you
30 29 22
may take advantage of the Time
Search
29
303 21
1
2
feature, which allows you
to begin
play28 31
20
7
point
back from a specified
Use the Numeric Keys13l 14 to 15enter 16
the hour/minute/second19indication
of21 the 22
20
1
2fol- 3
time at which you wish 25
play to26begin,
27
28
lowed by the Set Button31 I 327 . 33 8 34 9
Playback from that point will begin
imme37
3813
3914 40 15
diately. (See Figure 42).
19
20
21
43
Figure 42
on 8the
44
9
disc.
41
43
33
37 41
40
42
32
36 40
37
31
35 39
36
34 38
35
33
34
4 33 5 32 6
31
32
45
10
46
11
17
18
24
35
47
46
45
44
43
42
12
23
29
57
56
4
10
5
30
11
36
6
12
41 16
4217
18
47 22
4823
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
D Audio: The fourth item is the Audio
track currently in use. The audio track is
51
50
49
48
CVR700 OM
43
42
45
44
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37
36
26
27
28
29
30
31
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 67
denoted by a number preceding it to indiNOTES:
• The full Status Bar is only available
cate its order of availability. Next, the
while a disc is playing. If you press the
language is displayed, such as ENG for
Status Bar in Stop mode, an abbreviated
English or SPA for Spanish. Following this
Status Bar will appear (see Figure 43)
is the bitstream type, which may be PCM
that only indicates the current title, and
for a two-channel format; or DTS or the
does not permit you to change the title
Dolby logo for one of those formats. Next
47 53
49 5551
number.
to the format is an icon that reflects the
43
45 4743 4945 51
435753
45 55
47 57
49
51 53 55 57
46 52
48 5450
number and location of the channels in
42 44 4642 4844 50
425652
44 54
46 56
48 50 52 54 56
the bitstream. The icon is in the shape of
35 37 3935 4137 39 41
35 37 39 41
Figure 46
38 41
40 4737
a square that represents a listening room,
37 41 47 51
34 36 3834 4036 37
345141
36 47
38 51
40
Status banners may also appear on
365040 46 50
with the front channels at the top. A
37 4633
25 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 2533 3726 36
26 25 37
screen35briefly to
display messages such
354939 45 49
36 4532
24 39
small block will appear at the location of
39 45 49
32 27 2432 3627 35
27 24 36
as “Disc
Loading”,
“Play”,
“Stop”, “Pause”,
44 48
23 38
35 4434
31 28 2331 3528 34
314838
34
44
38
48
each channel encoded in the bitstream,
28 23 35
“Feature
Not
Available”
or
other status
30
33
43
22 34 4330 29 22 34
30 29 22 3429 33
33
43
with only one block at each top corner for
29 30 32
messages.
These
messages
are generated
32
42
21
33
29
29
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
32
42
42
30 21 33
30 21 33
a 2-channel format. Figure 41 depicts that
by
the
DVD
changer
section
of
the CVR700,
31
20 32
28 31 2028 3231 31
28 31 20 32
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
31
a Dolby Digital 5.1-channel bitstream has
and are separate from banner messages
35 Note
37 39
been detected.
that 41
while the disc
generated by the CVPD50 screen.
41 47 51Figure 43
37 to
38 also
40 appear
is playing, a34
0 or36
1 may
46
36
40
50
33
26 to
37
25indicate
For Playback
the right of the icon
whether
13
24
46 1 5 2 6 3Selecting
2
53
4
5 a Disc
• If 1you press
the
Audio
Button
U
43
456 47 49
51 53 55 57
32 27 24 36
an LFE channel
is present (0 if no35LFE39 45 49
7
8
9
10
11
12
several
Button
7 , the
8 Subtitle
9
10
11 V12 7 or 8
9There10are 42
11 4412methods
46 48 for50playing
52 54 56
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
channel
43 is
45present
47 49or “1”
51if the
53 LFE
55 chan57
a loaded
disc
in the CVR700:
the
Angle
Button
E
without
30
1315
14
15
16
43
33
35
29 22 34
13
14
16
17
18 13 17 14 18 15
16
17 3718 39 41
nel is
the disc
42detected).
44 29
46 If48
50 has
52 more
54 than
56
the
Status
Bar
on screen,
the
42
32
37 41
1921being
20
21
22
3624 38 by
40pressing
30 21 33
• Turn
the
the 47 51
19
20
22
23
24 19 23 20 24 21
22 on34
23 CVR700
one 35
audio37track;
such
as
2.0-channel
39 31
41 20 32
28
segment of the
Status
Bar
relating
to
36 1.
31
40 46 50
33 26On/Off
2527
26
27
28
29 26 30 27 Main
25 37
Power
Button
25
26
28
29
30
25
28
29
30
PCM,
Dolby37
Digital
41 or
47a 51
345.1-channel
36 38 40
35 39 45 49
the function 31
you selected
will appear
32 27 24 36
32
33
34
35
36 33
32
33
34
35
35
36 loaded in the
director's
commentary;
you
46 50
36 may
40 cycle
33 26
• Any34discs
25 37
31 already
34 38 44 48
on31 screen
by itself,
and you
will36 31
be 32
28 23
3545 47
43
49
51 53
37
38
39
40
45 is49
35 the
through
39 disc
32 these
37
41
42 37 41 38 42 39 changer
40
41
will 29
be42indicated
27 24tracks
36 while
30
43
22 34 by33the Disc
able
to 38
change39 the 40
setting
for that
42
44
46
48
50
52
1
4 44Audio
548
6
31 by
343 38 the
4345
44
playing
23
28repeatedly
352 pressing
29
43
44by continuing
46 to45
47press46
48the
43 47 44 48 45 Indicators
46
47 D.
32 for the42
21 indicator
3048 The
33
function
35
37
39
41
30
43
33
Button U
29 22
7 . 348
9
10
11
12
last disc28played
31 Note
31 will
32 flashing.
20 be
corresponding button. (See examples
37 41
34 36 38 40
29 30 21 33
42
32
that the Upper Display
Line H will
13
14 item
15 is the
16 current
17
18
of
the
Subtitle
segment
in
Figures
44
E Subtitle:
The
fifth
36 40
28 31 20 32
33 26 25 37
31
indicate that the unit is in Stop mode,
43disc
45
4722 49subtiand57
45.)
Subtitle status.
19 If the
20
21contains
23 51 2453 55
35 39
32 27 24 36
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
even when no discs
are loaded. Check34
42 44
4628available
48 29 50 3052 54 56
tles, you may 25cycle through
26
27 the
31 3 28
38
1
4 53 35
555 57
6
43 45
47 2 49
51 23
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
for lit Disc Indicators
D 22
to deter- 33
35
3934 41by
languages while
disc37
is playing
30 29
31 the32
33
35
36
34
44
46 8 48 9 50 1052 11
54 56
7
12
35 37 39 41
mine42whether
any29
discs30are21available
1
2
3 34
538 Button
6
47 51
37 41 Figure
36
40
repeatedly
pressing
the 4Subtitle
32
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
41 47
51 51 53 55 3557 37
39
41
47 49
3444 36 38 40 4337 45
13
14
15
16
17
18
for play. Play will not
automati28 begin
36 40 46 50
V 7 . In 8addition
to 10displaying
the
31
31 20
32
26 11
25 37
9 33
12
46 48
40 46
50 50 52 54 3456 36 38 40
37 41 47 51
33 26 25 37 4236 44
43
44
45
46
47
48
Play
Button
cally.
If
you
press
the
19
20
21
22
23
24
45
35
39
49
32
36
24 feature
available
languages,
the1627
Subtitle
35 39 45 49
13
14
15
17
18
40 46 50
32
33
37 be36
25 will
31
34 38 44 48 27 24 36 35 37 39 41
!e 26
25 ; you
26
27 prompted
28
29 on 30
28 23 to35
may be
set
to
Off
by
continuing
press
3145 28 23 35 3434 36
35 39 45 49
44 40
38 38
48 37 41 47 3251 27 24 36
19
20
21 30 22
23
24
Figure
43
33
43 45
4732 49 Line
51 E
53to 35
55 57
Lower
Display
enter
the
29 22 34
31
33
34
36
the button.
30 29 22 34 33
3150 28 23 351
34 38 344 48
43
33
36 49
40 46
4
5
25
26
27 29 2830 29
30
26 25
37
43 on
45 47
51number
5344 55
5748
32
21 33
42
46the
50 240wish
52 41
54
56
the
of
disc
you
to
A42
different
Bar
is
displayed
29 30 Status
30
37
38
39
43 42
33
32 27 42 36
21 33 32
29 22 34
35 48
39 45
49
F Angle:
The
item
the
current
24
31
32 sixth
33 28
3431is 35
36
42
44
46
50
52
54
56
31
32
20
7
8
9
10
11
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
play.
If
you
enter
a
disc
number
using
35
37
39
41
screen
a CD32is playing
Fig. 46). 34
28 when
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
42 48
31 28(see
31 20
43 2144 33 45 32 46
47
31
38 44 2948 30
23
35
camera
angle. This feature is only avail37 4638 48 39 50 4052 41
42
35items:
37 39 41
42the44Numeric
4838
50
5237145441
51 17
Keys
47 16
34
4013l
or56
the
15
This Status Bar only contains
two
28 4636
42 44
54 56
31
31
32
20
30
43
33
22
29
34
able on
certain DVD discs;
check
the
DVD
412647
51
3733Selectors
36
34 by36
38 40
40 2146
50 23
,
the
CVR700
will
43 3944 41 45
46
47
48
35
37
39
41
Disc
S
37
the current Track number
followed
the
25
19
20
22
35 37
29 30 21 33
42
32
jacket to determine whether this feature
46
3632
4027
33and26the25 37
45 49
4135
4739 51
37
3625do
34play
36
38
4024If50
that
disc.
you
nothing,
the
on the
disc
371 41 2 47 51
34 36 38 40
3
4
5 total
26
27
28
29
6 number of tracks 28
31
31 20 32
is available on the disc. You may change
4523 49the
3531 39will
1
2
3
4
5 326 27 24 36
48
4638 5044disc,
36
4034selected
33CVR700
35 last
26 2528 37play
36 40 46 50
elapsed
time.
When
the
Track
number
is
33 26 25 37
31
32
33
34
35
7 time 8by repeatedly
9
10
11
12
the angle setting at any
31 28 23 35
34
38
2 22 4835
3
433 45 5 49436
39D
32whose
29 44
34
2730124
36
7
8you may
9
10 the11Numeric
12
Disc
Indicator
will be
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
highlighted,
use
37
3942 40
41
30 29 22 3431 3329 304321 34
pressing
the
Angle
Button
E
.
13
14
15
16
17
18
32384411 48
38
33
28 723 35
8
9
10
12
31
34 38
flashing.
Keys13l 14 to 15enter 16the number
47 28
49 2351 3553 55
57 44 48
17
18of
29
28
42
32
43
44
45
46
47
the on-screen
only 22 23
However,
30
31 43
32
33
1
2
330 21
4
5
19 view
20 will 21
24
6 2231 3420 33
29
30
a track
wish to
13
14 play15a different
16
17
18
46 29
48 2250 3452 33
54 56 43
19 you 20
21 skip22to. The
23 Time
2824 31 20 32•
wish
to
31
29If you
change
portions
disc27where
42 disc,
32
21 33
29 30 during
30
32
25 of the
2642
28
29 Search
30 function is also available
21
7
8
9
10
11
12
33
for30 CDs.
19
20
21
22
23
24
39 41
you
may
skip
to
the
next
numbered
25
26
27
28
29
28 31 20 32
the
feature
has been activated.
31
28 multi-angle
31 203732
31 51 32
33
34
35 Use36the Numeric Keys13l 14 to 15
enter 16 17 disc18by25 pressing
41 31
47
38 40
26
27 Disc
28 Skip
29 Button
30
the
31
32
33
34
35
36
At the beginning of a passage where
36 40 46
37 50 38
39
40
41 the 42
2
3
4
5
hour/minute/second19indication
of21 22 23 T24 311 . If 32
6
25 37
20
you
wish
to
skip
to
a
differ33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
multiple camera
angles are available, a
1 begin,2
3
4
5
6
35 39 45
time at which you wish
play
to
43 49 44
45
46
47 the 48
24 36
7
8
9
10
11
12
disc,
25
26
27
28
29 ent 30
37 press
38 the39Disc40Direct
41 Button
42
Status Banner
will appear indicating
43
45
46
47
48
3 12 4
5
6
Button
I
followed
by44the Set
231 35 2 34 3 38 444 48
7 .
8
9 1a
10 2 11, and
5
6
desired48
31
32
33
34
35
36 43
13
14 then
15enter
16 the 47
17
18
“Angle
Area
In”.
At
any
time
after
this
44
45
46
33
43
22 34
Playback from that point will begin13
8 17 9 using
12 Keys
1541 7disc
1642number
18 10
the 11
Numeric
7
8 appears,
9
10
11 Angle
12
37
38
39 1440
19
20
21
22
23
24
message
press
the
32
42
21 33
immediately.
l 25 23. If 1526
there
is no 17disc
in1829that 30
24 16
the program
Button
13 32 E
14 3115 to16view 17
18
43
44 19 45 2046 2147 13 2248 14
27
28
20
location,
the
CVR700
will
do
nothing.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
using
a
different
camera
angle.
Another
19
20
21
22
23
24
31
19
Status
Banner
with 28
the message
25
26
27
29
30 "Angle
Area
Out"
will
appear
at
the
end
of the
31
32
33
34
35
36
2
3
4
5
6
passage.
After
this
second
banner
37
38
39
40
41
42
8appears,
9 pressing
10
11the Angle
12
Button
43
44
45
46
47
48
E 15 will
the
14
16 change
17
18 setting, but the
on-screen
image
will not
20
21
22
23
24 change.
25
26
27
31
32
37
38
43
44
1
7
13
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
35
36
26
27
2940
30
JBL On
37 35Screen
38 36 28
39Library
41
42
31
32
33 25 34
37
38
39 31 40
43
44
32
33
34
55
54
57
56
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
42 34
32
3546
36
43 41
45 available,
47 it is
48
With five
disc3344positions
37 46to 38
39
40
41
45easy
47
48
forget the location of a42desired
43 Rather
44
45 having
46
47 scan
48 through
disc.
than
to
all five positions, the CVR700 offers the
67
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
32
Page 6827 24 36
4:24 PM
31
30
29
28
23
22
21
20
28
29
30
31
35
34
33
32
35
34
33
39
30
38
29
28
32
31
45
29
44
30
43
31
42
1
1
2
3
4
5
7
13
7
8
9
10
11
JBL On Screen Library, which conveniently 19
15
16
17
displays the loaded13discs14without
your
25
19
20
21
22
23
having to look at each disc individually.
31
25
26 may27use the
28
29
When play is stopped,
you
37
31 feature.
32
33
JBL On Screen Library
Press34the 35
43
OSL Button d 37 , and
CVR700
38 the
43
4539
47 4049 41 51
49
33
43
22 34
43 45 47 49
51
48
32
42
21 33
42 44 46 48 50
31
20 32
35 37 39 41
37
34 36 38 40
36
33 26 25 37
2 32 327 4
6
35
24 365
31
34
8
928 23
10 35
11
12
6
30 29 22 34
33
14
15
16
17
18
12 29
32
30 21 33
Button
#M
20Stop
21
22
23
24
31
18 28 31 20 32
30 29 22
53 55
29 57
30 21
52 54
28 56
31 20
43 45 47
42 51
44 46
41 47
40 46
35 50
37 39
39 45
341 49
36 2 38
38 44
337 48
26 8 25
43
3213 27 1424
31 28 23
42
20
once.30If19 you
29 22
Button
26press27the Play
28
29
30!e2925 , 26
30 21
24
the disc
will
resume
playing
from
2831 the
32
33
34
35
36
31 3220
30
point39at which
it41was stopped.
Resume
37
38
38
40
42
36 mode
1 is not
2 preserved
3
4 if you
5 turn6 off
43
44
44
45
46
47
48
42
to another
disc,
or
53the55
578 change
7CVR700,
9
10
11
12
1
2
will read and identify
loaded
a 47 50 4852select
43 all42
44
4445 discs,
46 4648
54 another
5614
source.
13
15
16
17
18
process which may take 35
several
7
8
37 minutes,
39 41
• Press
19 the20Stop21Button
22 #M
23
24
but which only needs to 34
be performed
51
47
37 41
36 38 40
13
14
twice
to30 stop
25 (once
26 for27CDs and
28 VCDs)
29
once. A thumbnail for each
36 40 46 50
33 disc
26 position
25 37
19you 20
playback
and
enter
Stop
mode.
If36
31
32
33
34
35
43 appear
454347
4947 5149
5755
will
on45screen,
including
thumb45 49
325351
2755a53
36 5735 39
24
Play
Button
!e
press
the
25
26
4346 45
47
49 5256
51 535634
55 38
57 37
39
40
41
42
42 image
444246
504831
52
4448
44 4838
nail
representative
of 50
the
23 54
2854disc
35
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
with the disc in Stop mode, play31will 32
42
46
50 a 52 33
54 56
30
43
35 3735if39one
43
44
45
46
47
48
materials,
exists
on
the2948
disc,
3741
39 4441
22or
34
begin
from the beginning of the 37
disc, 38
2939
3538
37
41
41 37
4151 47
42
37
47 21
34 indicating
363438 36the
40
40
logo
disc
type;
the
disc’s
30
33 5132
and
also
to
select44
43
45 4747 51
49 you51will53
55be prompted
57
28
41
37
34
36
38
40
36
46
40
50
46
36
33
40 32 5031
43
31 disc
20
title, if 26
it 33
is25
on26
the
disc;37and the
3725
42
44 4646 50
48 50
54 56 its number.
another
disc52by entering
36
40
33
35
45
39
49
45
35
32
39
49
32
26
37
25
27
36
27
36
24 47).
type (see Figure
24 Both MP3 and
35
35
3223 27
31 discs
44
44 3937
38 34
36
3848
48 4539
• 49
To41move forward or backward through
283123
2835
35
WMA
will
cause34
an24
icon
called
51
37 on41a CD,
47 VCD
3122 28
44
34
34
36
38
40tracks
30 293022 2934
38
48
33
43
43
33
23
35
the
or DVD-Audio
COMPRESSED to 34
appear.
When the
1
3
4
5
6 36 40 46 50
3021 29
33
29 302921 3033
22
32
422 33
37 or
42 26 4325 disc,
3234
33
through
the
chapters
on a DVDdisc
is
selected,
its
compressed-audio
2920 30
28 312820 3132
32
7 31
9
10422411 36 12 35 39 45 49
27
338 32
31
32 21
disc,
or
through
the
still
images
Video
type will be displayed
usual 31
28 31in the
28 23 35 18 34 38 44 48
20
13 3214 3115
disc, press the Track Skip
on-screen information display
for the 30 2916 2217on34a JPEG
33
43
20
21
22
23
24
Forward/Reverse
Buttons 8J
/¤/‹/›
disc contents. Use the ⁄19
29
32
42
30 21 33
43 not
45 work
47 on
49MP3
51 53
h
. This will
27 6
28
Navigation
1
21 Controls
32
4q
3 255 4 266 5 to28
31
2029 32 30 31
42 44 46 48 50 52
and
WMA
discs,
which
are
navigated
1
2
3
4
5
6
highlight
the
disc,
321211 the
33 12 34
35
36
7
87 desired
98
10 9 31and
1110 press
37 described
39 41 on
using42a special 35
screen
Set Button I 7 to select
8 37
9it38for 10 39 11 40 12 41
13
1413
1514
1615 1716
1817
18
37 41
34
36
38 40
page 48
72.
immediate playback.
Select
Exit 45
43 the 44
46 18 47
36 40
19
2019
212013 222114 2322 15 2423 16 12417
2
3
4
5 33 6 26 25 37
Library icon if you 19wish to
leave
the22 23
• To scan quickly 32
forward
or backward
35 39
20
21
24
27
36
24
25
2625
2726
2827 2943
28
294347730
45
5357
57
9535155
1155 12
library
display
without
selecting
a30
disc. 4549478 5149
within
a10track
or31chapter
on a35CD, 34 38
23
28
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
3231
3332
3433 3542
36
34
3542461336
44
444846
4815525054
56
56
14 50
16 52WMA
1754
18
DVD, VCD,
MP322disc,
30 or
33
29
34press
34 4235
36
37
3837
393831 403932 4135
40 33 42
4135
37
3919374139
41
29
20
21 Forward/Reverse
22
23
2430 Search
the
32
21 33
39 48
40 4536
4147
4237
43
51
53 4151
55475751
413747
36
4038 49
40
43
4443
454437 464538 4734
46
473438 48
Buttons
31
32 will
20 press
25
26
27
28 Jh
29 28 3031. Each
44 26
462548
50
52 4050
54 465650
40 3646
43
44 3345 42
4625
4737
4836
2633
37
increase
the
scan
speed
by
one
step,
31
32
33
34
35
36
32 35
372736
39244135
273224
36 39 3545 3949 45 49
through
available scan
38 34cycling
4144the
31 34
44
413848
5142
48
47
373440
36372835
3823
40353938
283123
speeds
for
each
disc
type (see below).
30 33
30
432934
4437
474350
43
33
40 46
1 48
2
3
4
5
29 22
3445 363346
26
2522
If you
press
the42opposite-direction
29 32
29
45
35
42
32
32
39
49
21
21
3033
33 57
24533655
7
8
9
10
11
43 45 47 30
49 2751
search button while in Search mode,
28 312820 313220 31
32 343138 44 48
42 44 46 48 2850 23523554
56
13
14 scan
15 in the
16
17
CVR700 43
will begin
to
30 29 22 34 the33
35 37 39 29
41
20 the 21
direction.
Play 22 23
42 19 Press
32
30 21 33 opposite
34 4336 4538 47
40 49 37 5141 5347
5551 57!e 25 to 26
51Figure
53 4755 57
stop scanning.
28
27
28
29
31
31 20 32 Button
50
52 54
56
43
455504 56
47 6 549
33 4226 4425
1 4637 248
1 36350
2 40 52
4 46
3 54
68
2
3
53 55
57
13
1413
1514
1615
1716Each
1817
18 the44Forward/
speeds.
47
30 29 22
33
37 41 4745 51 46
36
385 press
40 6 43of
34
1
2 36 334
4
4043 46
50
33CVR700
46 50 using the
36Basic
40 playback
26 25involves
37
19 332019 322120 33
2242
21 2322 Search
2423
2436 40 8Lf
Reverse
Buttons
29 30 21
46 50
26
37
25
45
35
39
49
32
45
35functions
39
49 to those you
9
10
11
12
similar
27may
24 7be36 8
28 31 20
will cycle to the next speed in
2827 44
2928 24
322625 312726
27
31 2825
34 32
38
48 302936 3035 39 45 49
34familiar
38 44
with48for conventional
CD23players
13 35 14
15
16
17
18
31
the
order:
2x, 16x,
200x.
44 48
38 64x,
28
32
3433 following
3534 23 363535
3634
30 2931 22 3231
43
43
33or changers:
34 3333
19
20
21
22 22
23
24 33
30
43
29
29 3037 21 3837
42
38
4039 CD
4140
424134 playback,
42
42
32
33 3932
For
and VCD
there
are three
. 26 31 2729 30
• Press the Play Button
28 21
29 33 30 32
42
28 !e
31
203254432
31
forward
reverse
43
4544
4645 4746and4847
48 search speeds: 2x,
1
2 43
to select
a31disc 432 5 3328 6 31
You will be prompted
34 20
35 32 36 31
7 Selectors
8
9 5 10
number; use the Disc
or38
37
the Numeric Keys13l 14 . 1543 1644
1
651
31
32
33
34
35
For
DVD-Video
– 37
Playing
a359 8 39 42
Transport Controls
4449 46 48and 50
52 54 playback,
56
45DVD-Audio
32 3527
24
7 3936 841
7
109
1110
1211
12
37 and
38 reverse
39 search
40
41
there
are
four
forward
Disc
31 28 23 35
44
34 38 35
48
37
39
41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
37 41 47 51
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
13
14
15
19
20
21
25
26
27
19 playback
20
21
• To momentarily pause
(and 22
7
8
9
10 freeze
11
12 current picture
25
26
27on a 28
the
frame
15 34
16 DVD),
17
18
@M
press
the Pause
31 13Button
32 14 33
20 39the
21 40
22
23 . To24resume playback,
37 19 38press
!e
28 Play
29 Button
30
43 25 .44 26 45 27 46
31
32
33
34 •
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
31 a Resume
32
33
35 CVR700
36
The
also provides
37
38 does
39
mode
that
but
41
42 pauses playback,
not
picture
43
44
45
47 freeze
48 a DVD's current
frame. Resume mode is not available
for CDs or VCDs. To enter Resume
mode for any other disc type, press the
4x, 8x.
12
11
39
4
10
16
22
28
34
40
46
40
41
42
MP3 and WMA compressed-audio17 For 18
45
46
47
48
5 playback,
6
file
there are four forward and
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
reverse
11
12search speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
29
30
7
8
9
10
11
12
discs only, you may play
17 For
18
35 •
36 DVD-Video
13the program
14
15material
16
18 or
in17 forward
41 23 42 24
19reverse
20 slow
21 motion.
22
23
24 Slow
Press
the
47 29 48 30
25Play 26
27
28
29 Controls
30
Forward/Reverse
35
36
cycle 34through
31g 32 to 33
35 the36three
41
42
37available
38 speeds:
39
401/2x,411/4x,421/8x.
47
48
43
44
45
47
48
NOTE:
There
will be46 no audio
playback
during forward or reverse fast- or slowplay of DVDs, as it isn't possible to decode
33
34
33
32
49
48
43
32
42
31
51 53 55 57
50 52 54 56
41
3
40
437
5 476 51
41
40
11 4612 50
35 39 45 49
16
17
18
34 38 44 48
process
digital
22
23 the 24
33
43
36
10
9
37
36
15
35
audio streams
34
during
these
modes.
However,
audio will
27
28
32 29 4230
33
be
heard
during
fast-play
of
audio
CDs
33
34
36
31 35
32
21and
(slow-play is not available for CDs).
39
40
41
42
The46 front-panel
47
48 Skip/Search Buttons
8 function slightly differently than the
3
4
5
6
remote
buttons.
When the disc changer
9 is the
10 source,
11
12
press and release these
to move
15 buttons
16
17
18 (skip) either backward
21 (left
22 button)
23 or24forward (right button)
the tracks
on a DVD-Audio, CD
27 through
28
29
30
or
VCD
disc
or
the
chapters
on a DVD33
34
35
36
Video disc. Press and hold either but39
40
41
42
43
45 at47least
491 second
51 53to search
55 57
ton for
45 42 4644 47
48
46
48
50
52
56
either backward (left button)54or forward
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
35
37
39
41
(right button) the current track or57
chap41 hold
51
42
442x38
46
48 Press
50
52
54
56
37 and
47 again
34
36
40
ter at
speed.
36 40
46 4350
45 47
33
35
39
41increase
26
37
25 to
and 37
release
the scan
speed
35 39
45 4249
44 46
32
41
51
27
36
47
37
34
36
38
40
24
to 4x. Repeat this procedure while in
31 28 23 35
34 38
44
48
46
36
40
50
33
35
37 39
26
37
25
scan mode to cycle through these scan
30
22
45 3449 36 38
35 39 43
34
32 29
27 2x,
3616x,33
24 4x,
speeds:
100x,
2x
and
so
29
32
31 30
44 3348 26 25
34 38 42
33
23 and
28 21
35 release
forth.
the button
55 30
57 31Press
28
31
43 32 27 24
33
22 32
29 20
34
while
tracks or chap54 29
56 scanning to skip
42 31 28 23
32
21 33
ters.30
To stop searching,
you must
press
28
30 29 22
31
31 20 32
Button
51 Play Button !, the Stop29
47 the
30 21
1 or the
2 other
3 Search
4
5Button
6288.
46 #
50
31 20
45•
49
48
41
40
51
50
53 55
52 54
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
47
46
45
44
43
37
36
35
34
33
32
32
31
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
42
45
•
44
43
7 advance
8
9
10 frame
11 while
12 a
To49
frame
by
1
2
3
4
5
6
48
13
14
15 is playing,
16
17 press
18 the
DVD-Video
disc
7
8Button
9
10
11
12
Pause
19
20
21 @M
22
23 once,
24 and
1
2
42
13 each
14 subsequent
15
16 press
17
18the
then
of30
25
26
27
28
29
7
8
Pause
Button
19
20
21 @M
22
23 will
24 step
31
32
33
34
35
36
13
14
one
frame
forward
through
the
pro25
26
27
28
29
30
37
38
39
40
41
42
19
20
gram.
Reverse
step34is not35 available.
31
32
33
36
43
44
45
46
47
48
6 Press the Play Button !e 25
26
37
38
39
40
41
42
12to resume normal play.
31
32
43
44
45
46
47
48
37
38
•18While a disc is stopped, a Stop icon
Í
(
)
will
appear
on
the
left
side
of
the
43
44
24
30Upper Display Line H. During playback, a Play icon (›) will appear, and
36
when the disc is paused, a Pause icon
42
(±) will appear. During Search modes,
48
the Play icon will remain in the display,
and the Lower Display Line E will
indicate that the disc is being scanned
either forward or in reverse.
• During normal play, the Upper
Display Line H will indicate the
track number and elapsed time for
CDs; the group and track numbers and
elapsed time of the track for DVDAudio discs; the title and chapter numbers and elapsed time of the chapter
for DVD-Video discs; and the WMA,
MP3 or JPG file number (and elapsed
time for audio files).
Random Play
The CVR700 allows you to randomly play
the tracks on an audio CD or a VCD, or
MP3 or WMA compressed audio files.
Random playback is not available for
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
43
42
4:24 PM
45 47
44 46
49
48
Page 69
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
30 3529 3722 3934 41 33
43
DVD-Audio,
DVD-Video
or
JPEG 41
discs.
47 51
29 3430 3621 3833 40 32 37
42
When
Simply
press
36 the
40 46 50
33 26 25
37
28available,
31
31 20 32
35 Random
Random
39 45 49
32Button
27 z36to enter
43 45 24
47 49
51 53 55 57
31
34
38 44 48
mode (a banner
on screen),
23 appear
28 will
35
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
30 to29
33
43
and again
exit22
Random
34 mode.
35 37 39 41
213 33 4 325
1 29 30
2
642
may40
enter37
or exit
Audio CDs:
You38
41 47 51
34
28 36
31
209 32 10 3111
7 mode
8 either
Random
while 36
the disc
46 50
40 12is
33 26
25 37
35
1332
14 24
15 36
playing,
or after
play
has16 been17 stopped
39 1845 by
49
27
3423 38 2444 48
Stop
pressing
2321Button
28
35 22 #w
1931the20
43
3
433
5
twice.25301 26
29 2 2227 34
28
29
30 6
29 30 21 33
32 11 4212
7
8
9
10
32 mode
33 is34only 35
36 in
VCDs:31Random
available
28 31
31
20 32
16 41 stopped
17 42 18
Stop mode,
37 13 after
38 14 play
39 15has
40 been
Stop
Button
#w
by pressing
the
19
20
21
22
23
43
44
45
46
47
48 24
twice. 25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
32 discs:
33 You
34 may
35 enter
36or
MP3 and31WMA
7
8
9
10
11 disc
12
exit Random
either
while
the
37 mode
38
39
40
41
42
13 or after
14 play
15 has46
16been47
17stopped
18
is playing,43
44
45
48
Button
by pressing
19 the20Stop21
22 #w
23
24
twice. 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 C
34 will35
Indicator
light 36
The Random
when the37CVR700
mode.
38 is in
39 Random
40
41
42
43
44
Repeat Play
45
46
47
48
The CVR700 offers several repeat options
that allow for unattended playback, even
on a continuous basis. There are two basic
types of Repeat modes: conventional
Repeat, which allows you to repeat discs
and their existing subdivisions; and
Repeat A-B, in which a passage you
select is repeated. The available Repeat
modes will vary depending on the type
of disc.
The conventional Repeat modes are
accessed by repeatedly pressing the
Repeat Button ` to cycle through the
available modes or exit Repeat mode.
DVDs: The conventional Repeat modes
are only available while the disc is playing. Each press of the Repeat Button
` will cycle through the Chapter
Repeat On, Title Repeat On and Repeat
Off modes.
Audio CDs: The available conventional
Repeat modes vary depending on whether
the disc is in Play mode or Stop mode.
In Stop mode, only the Repeat All
Tracks and Repeat All Discs modes
are available.
VCDs: The conventional Repeat modes
are only available in Stop mode. As with
audio CDs, only the Repeat All Tracks and
Repeat All Discs modes are available.
MP3 and WMA discs: The conventional
Repeat modes are available in both Play
and Stop modes. Unlike other disc types,
the folders and files on a compressedaudio disc are displayed on screen and
may be navigated (see page 72). Thus, it
is possible to program Repeat One File
mode while the disc is stopped. The other
available repeat modes are Repeat All
Files (in a folder), Repeat Disc and
Repeat Off.
The Repeat Indicators C will light to
indicate the current Repeat mode.
Repeat A-B
The Repeat A-B function allows you to
select any portion of a disc (except for
VCD, MP3 and WMA discs) and have it
repeat until play is stopped.
While the disc is playing, when the
beginning of the desired passage is
reached, press the Repeat A-B Button
R once. A banner with the message
“A to B Repeat Set A” will appear on
screen momentarily. When the end of the
desired passage is reached, press the
Repeat A-B Button R once more. The
message “A to B Repeat On” will appear
briefly. The passage will continue to play
repeatedly until you manually stop play,
or press the Repeat A-B Button R
once again so that the message “A to B
Repeat Off” is displayed on screen.
NOTE: The A-B Repeat range may cover
several titles or chapters on a DVD, as
long as the DVD disc’s control program
does not force the CVR700 to return to a
DVD menu in between.
While a disc is playing, each press of the
Repeat Button ` will cycle through
the Repeat One Track, Repeat All Tracks,
Repeat All Discs and Repeat Off settings,
as displayed on screen in a banner and
on the front panel. The selected Track or
disc will be repeatedly played until play
is stopped, or the Repeat mode is exited.
In Repeat All Discs mode, if the CVR700
detects a DVD in a succeeding tray, it
will play it, but it will automatically end
Repeat mode.
69
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 70
DVD PLAYBACK
43
45 47
49
42 44 Menu
46 48
Using a DVD’s
51
50
53 55
52 54
35 37 39 41
One of the unique
features of the DVD
37 41
34 36 38 40
system is that it offers a producer the
36 40
33 26 25 37
opportunity to include a wide range
of
35 39
32 27 24 36
features on a31
disc, including multiple34
38
28 23 35
language tracks;
in a variety
30 subtitles
33 of
29 22 34
languages; special
29 30information
32 as
21 33 such
movie trailers28and31
cast20information;
31 as
32
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
70
32 press
33 the
34Disc
35
When
a disc49is3153
playing,
454347
454947 51
5155535755 57
j
to54
pause
Menu
Button
39
444246
50
525054385256
444846
48 37
5640the 41
Notes on DVD
Playback
47
46
45
44
43
42
well as other customized information. In
addition, producers may divide a movie or
program into chapters that allow for quick
1
2
3
4
5
access to specific
parts
of the
program.
7
8
9
10
11
These chapters may be accompanied by
thumbnail pictures
of14a scene
13
15 from
16 the17
specific chapter19 to help
20 you
21 select
22 the23
desired spot on25the disc.
26
27
28
29
43
42
57
56Important
6
12
18
24
30
36
51
The sensitive CVPD50 plasma display
50
screen is vulnerable to “burn-in” if any
49
still image remains on screen for any
48
length of time. It doesn’t take very long
for an image to burn in, and it is important to avoid leaving certain displays on
screen for more than a few minutes, as
“burn-in” cannot be repaired, and will not
be covered by your warranty. Therefore,
DO NOT leave DVD menu screens on display for more than a brief period of time
unless they contain movement. Either
begin play of the movie, or turn off the
system (especially the screen) after 5
minutes.
The CVR700 is capable of all the features
playback
and
display
the
disc’s
menu.
As
44
45
46
47
48 and options covered by the DVD standards.
373539374139 41 43
However, it is up to the producer of a
there
are
no
hard
rules
about
style
and
363438364038 37
40 413747415147 51
DVD disc to decide which of those feacontent
for
DVD
menus,
the
way
they
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
46
36
40
50
46
36
40
50
33
26 25 263725 37
tures and functions are available on any
appear
on
the
screen
and
the
information
42
46 3948
504945
52 49
54 56
354539
273224 27
362444 35
36
given disc. For that reason, not all discs
they
contain
will
vary
from
one
disc
to
44
34
31
38
48
44
34
35
39 41 38
48
28 23 28
352337 35
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
will function identically, and some discs
another.
However,
the
general
43 following
33
51
33
37 4341 47
34
38 40
293022
342236
29
34
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
will not have many of the features of the
rules
apply
to25most
menus:
36 4240 46 50
33
3242
302921
33
212632
30
33
37
35 37 35
39 41 45
DVD system. For example, most current
39
49
31282031
32202731
32
31
32
24 36
• The first menu
that appears
the
41 47 51
37 Main
38 40 is44
31 28 2334 3536 34
DVD discs do not take advantage of the
38
48
Menu,
and you may move
through
36 the
40 46 50
25 37
30 29 2233 3426 33
43
multiple-angle feature. When you press
⁄¤
options
the Navigation
35‹›
39
32
43 24
45 36
47 42
49
51 45
53 49
55 57
29 30with
21 3327 32
a button and the player displays the
34 38
21 Buttons
,
as
3 315 4 28
426 531
44
46 disc’s
48
50 44
52 48
54 56
6the
23
35
283 2 314 q
20 32
“Feature Not Available” message, this is
30
43
33
22
allows.
The
selected
34
351211
37 option
39 41
87 programming
98
109
1110 29
12
indication
that55the 57
disc has not been43
43 454247an49
51 53
32
30
will typically29be highlighted
certain
37 41 47 51
3418 21
36 33
38in a40
14
1514
1615 28
1716
13
17
18
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
programmed
for
that
feature,
or that the
42
31 36 40 46 50
32
20
color or inside an31
outline
33
26 box.
25 37
20
2120
2221
2322
24
is
not
capable
of
executing
that
19
24
35 35
37 39CVR700
41
1
2
3 32 23
4
5
35
6
39 45 49
27 24 which
36
• To27select
a highlighted
that47
disc51
in the current 34
37on 41
34 34
36 38 command
40
26
2827
2928 313029 option,
25
26
30
44
38
48
7
8
9
10 28 11
12
may
either
play
a portion of23the35disc
36 40 46 50
33 or
33
32
3332
3433
3534 303635 29 36
31
4337
3326 25mode.
22 34
13 to a
14 submenu,
17
115
216
3the Set
418 32 5
6
move
press
35 39 45 49
27
36
24
32
29
38
39
40
41
42
42
32
21 33
37
38
39
40
41 30 42
In addition,
it is common for the produc19
20
23
24 31 11 28 23
34 38 44 48
Button
s
Play
Button
721 or
822
9
10
12
35
31
2848
31
31
32
20
44
45
46
47
ers
of
DVD
discs
to
block
the
use
of
cer43
44
45
46
47
48
30 29 22 34
43
33
!e
30
25
26 . 1327
28
29
30
14
15
16
17
18
functions
during
only some parts of a
29 30 21tain
42
32
29
33
34you 21
35
• On31some 32discs,
select2236the
1933when
20
24 disc. For example, many discs prohibit the
28 2331 20
31
28
32
37 menu
38 during
39 the
40
41
42 a
DVD
of
25
26 playback
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5 use6 of fast-play buttons or prohibit access
43
44 disc45will return
46
47
48
movie,
the
31
32
33to the
34 point
35
36 to the Chapter Menu display during the
7
8
9
10
11
12
in the program37where
the
menu
was
38
39
40
41
42 playback of copyright notices, studio
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
selected by offering a “Play Movie”
1
43
44
45
46
47
48 logos, movie credits or trailers. The
19 Button
20
21
22
23
24
s
option. Press the Set
7
8 appearance
9
10
12
of11the “Feature
Not
7
or Play Button !e
resume
25
26 to 27
29 Available”
1328
14
1530
16 message,
17
18 or the inability of 13
all discs
play. However, not 31
32 offer
33 this
35 certain
features
when the disc
1934
20
2136
22
23 to operate
24
19
feature, and selecting
37 the38menu39while
40
41 itself
42 has prohibited them, does not indi25
26
27
28
29
30
25
playing a movie may
mean
that45you will
43
44
46
47 cate
48 a problem with the CVR700, as these
31
32
33
34
35
36
either have to go back to the beginning
features are outside of the unit’s control.31
37
38
39
40
41
42
37
of the program or the start of a chapter.
43
44
45
46
47
48
This feature is out of the control of the
• Some DTS discs contain incorrect digi-43
CVR700, as it is set by the disc’s intertal flags that may initially cause the
nal programming.
CVR700 to display incorrect information
on the available surround modes or
other features. This is the fault of the
disc author and not the CVR700, which
will correctly process the disc’s bitstream once it has been detected and
identified.
42
NOTES ON DVD-AUDIO DISCS:
43 45 47 49
51 53
• Some DVD-Audio discs contain two
42 44 46 48 50 52
menus, one used when the disc is
35 37 39 41
played on a DVD-Audio player, and a
37 41
34 36 38 40
DVD-Video menu used on older players
36 40
33 26 25 37
that do not recognize
the DVD-Audio
35 39
32 27 24 36
format. You may
the DVD-Video
31 view
34 38
28 23 35
menu by turning
the CVR700’s33DVD30 off
29 22 34
Audio capability
29 temporarily,
32 the
30 21 33 using
28 31
DVD Setup menu
(see 20
Figure
You
32 31).31
may wish to do this in order to access
certain audio surround tracks, such as
Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM on the disc.
1
2
3
4
5
When you have finished exploring the
7
8
9
10
11
DVD-Video capabilities of the disc,
13
14
15
16
17
remember to restore
the CVR700’s
DVD-Audio capability.
19
20
21
22
23
25 discs
26 do 27
28
29
• Some DVD-Audio
not permit
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
31
32
33
34
35
you to access the disc menu using the
42 44Button
46 37
48
5239 54 40 56 41
j 50
Menu
38 . However,
35 37 the
39 Title
41
pressing
y or46 the 47
43 Button
44
45
41 47 menu
51
37 provide
34 36Button
38 40
Audio
U may
46
36
40
33
26
37
25
access. In addition, you may simply50
39 45 49
32 27
36Stop35mode
24 in
place
the disc
and play
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
the tracks in order.
30 29 22 34
29 30
21 33
Zoom
Feature
28 31 20 32
33
43
32
31
42
The CVR700’s advanced digital video processing circuits include a Zoom feature
that allows you to enlarge the image for
2
3 of a4 particular
5
6part of
closer1 examination
454347
4947 51
53steps
5553of57enlargement
49
51
55
57
the45picture.
Four
are
7
8
9
10
11
12
444246444846 50
48 525054525654 56
available.
13
14
15
16
17
18
373539374139 41
19
20 Zoom
21 feature,
22
23
24
• 36
To40
use
the
press
the
363438
38 37
40 413747415147 51
Zoom
Button
k
while
a
disc is
25
26
27
28
29
30
46
36
40
50
46
36
40
50
263325 263725 37
paused. Each
press
35
31 24 or
32
344945
35 49of36the
273224playing
2736
36 3933354539
the
zoom-in
34
3839344438
4844
283123button
37 23 will
38
40
41 48 42effect.
2835
35increase
you
have
zoomed
through
all
43
33
43
33
293022When
34
22
2943
34 45
44
46
47
48
42 will
32
steps,
picture
42 return to
302921four
303321
33the 32
31
312820normal
31
313220 size.
32
• When in any of the Zoom modes, you
may use the Navigation ⁄¤‹›
21 Buttons
32
4q
54
6 5 to navigate
3
6
the
87 around
98
109 frame.
1110
1211
12
14
13•
20
19
26
25
32
31
38
37
Some
a way that
1514 discs
1615 are
1716created
1817 in 18
prevents
the Zoom
feature
2120
2221
2322
2423
24from operating.
Zoom
feature will
2726In addition,
2827
2928the30
29
30
not3332operate
on3534disc 36menus
and may not
3433
35
36
operate on subtitles.
3938
4039
4140
4241
42
is
for
44
4544Zoom
4645function
4746
4847not available
43• The
48
VCD or JPEG discs.
55
54
57
56
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 71
43
42
45 47
44 46
49
48
35
37 39
36 38
41
40
34
CD PLAYBACK
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
53 55 3357 26 25 37
52 54 3256 27 24 36
31
37 39
41
43 45 47 49
51 53 2855235735
Audio
CD Playback
Features
30 29 22 34
41 47
37 48
36 38
42 40
44 46
50 51
52 54 56
29 DVD
21 33
When
playing
audio
CDs,
your
36 41
40 46
50 30 player
26 25
35 37
37 39
28 31 20 32
has
same
features
as
a
CD
player,
35
45
39
49
27 the
36
24
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
34 repeat
including
skip,
38 44
48
28 23
35
36play
40and46 50
33 track
26 25 37
33
programmed
playback,
as43
described
29 22
35 39 45on 49
32 34
27 24 36
32
42
these
pages
68–69.
30 21
33
31
34access
138 44
2 48 3
23 may
28 You
35 also
31using
31 20
32
functions
30 directly
43
29 22
34 the33remote
7
8
9
control.29 30 21 33 32
42
13
14
15
28 31 20 32
31
45 47
44 46
49
48
31 28 23
45 47 49
51 53 55 3057 29 22
44 46 48 50 52 54 2956 30 21
51 53 55 57
28 31 20
35 37 39 41
50 52 54 56
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
49 4051 4653 5055 57
33 2643 2545 3747 36
41 44
47 51 48 3950 4552 4954 56
32 372742
24 3646 35
2
40 46 50 34 38 44 148
31 362835
2337 3539 41
392245 49 33
30 352934
43
7
37 41 47 851
36 3438 40
382144 48 32
29 343033
36424013 46 1450
33
37
25 function
The Time26
Search
enables you to
28 333132 204332
31
35 39 45 49
27
36
24
19
begin
play
at
a
specific
time
point
on20the
32 31 42
34 38 44 48
23Status
28the
35 Button
x 26
disc.
Press
25
31 30
33
43
29 22 34
to display
the Status Bar. Use 31
the ‹/›
29 30 21 33
32
42 32
1Navigation
4
5q 6 37 to high282 31 3 Controls
38
31
20 32
43
42
51
50
34 38 44 48
43
33
35
34
33
32
42
32
31
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
track 11time, 12
then
simply
7light the
8 elapsed
9
10
43
44
45
46
47
4
5
6
enter
the time
from which you wish
13
14
15
16
17
18
10
11 begin
12 using the Numeric Keys
play to
19
20
21
22
23
24
5
6
l 171 , and
Button
16
182 then3 press4 the Set
25
26
27
28
29
30
s 237 to 24enter
it.
begin12imme8
9 Play
10 will 11
19
20
21
22
31diately
32 from33that 34
1
2
3
4
5
point 35in the3617current
During
Stop,
Resume
or
Play6 mode,
25 4326 45 2747 28
30
13
14 55 15 57 16
18
49 29
51 53
37track.38
39
40
41
42
7 enter8 the track
9
10
11
12
number directly31with
the
32
33
34
35
36
19
20
21
22
23
24
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
1 Keys
2 l3
4
5
6
43
44
45
46
47
48
13 Numeric
14
15
16
17 on18the remote.
37 3538 37 3939 40
42
25
26
27
28
29
30
41 41
7
8
9
10
11
12
The
track
selected
will
be
played
at
once.
19
20
21
22
23
24
41
51
37
47
40 47
43 3444 36 4538 46
48
32
33 4334 45 35 47 36
49
51 53 55 57
During31CD playback,
the JBL logo screen
14 2851 1529
17 33 or
18
25 You
2749through
30
36 40
can4713skip
tracks
forward
43
4526
53 1655
57
26 25 37 37
38 46 39 504240 44 41 46 42
48 50 52 54 56
will remain
on
display.
After
a
few
min35 39 45 49
19 33
20 3450 2135
23 32 2427 24 36
42
4432 46
52
54
by48pressing
the 22Forward/
31 backward
36 56
44
45 35
46 37 47
39 48
41
utes, 43
the
saver
image
should
31
34 screen
38 44 48
23
28
35
Reverse
Skip
Buttons
8Jh
.
25 3941 26 40 2741 28 42 29
30
35
37 3738 39
37 41 47 51
48
Selecting a Track
Video Off Feature
51 30 3629
47
34
31 4540 32
334741 34
43 In 36
44 38
4637
48 35 Line
Upper
Display
Stop
mode,
the
36 40 46 50 29 30
33 26 25
37 38
39
40
41
42
H will 37
show
the number
of tracks
35 39 45 49 28 31
32 27 24 36
recorded43on a 44CD and
total 47time on
45 the 46
48
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
the disc.
30 29 22 34
33
43
29During
normal
32the Upper
42 Display
30 21
33 play
1
28Line
31 the track number
31 H
32indicate
20will
34a moving
36 38 image
40 is
begin 33
automatically,
as
43
22 34
36 40 46 50
33
26
37
25
necessary
32 to avoid
42 “burn-in” of an image
21 33
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
on
the
sensitive
CVPD50
plasma
display.
31
20 32
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
Some users may wish to turn the video
30 29 22 34
33
43
display off if they find29the visual display
32
42
30 21 33
distracting or unnecessary
during audio
28 31
31
20 32
2
3
4
5
6
playback.
7
8
and elapsed time. The Lower Display
13
14
Line E will indicate the currently selected
audio surround mode.
19
20
1
2
3
4
CD Status
8
9 Bar
10
7
5
6
11
12
25
26
31
32
13While14a
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
16
17 may
18 view its
CD15is loaded,
you
37
38
19Status
20Bar by
21 pressing
22
23
24
the Status
Button
43
44
47 25x
49
51 53the55
57 29Stop30mode, the
28
43 45 2647. If 27
49 CD
51is in
53 55 57
46 Status
48 50Bar52
54
56 the total number
will
display
35 5436 56
4231 44 3246 33
48 34
50 52
39 37of
41 tracks on the disc,
and
the42total time
41
35 37 3839 39
41 40
41
51is 51
47 CD
37
38 of
40 the
disc.
If
the
playing,
the
43
45
47
49
55 first
57
41
3443 36 4438 45
40 4637 47 4753
48 51
46be
364440will
50
37 42
shown
the
current
track
num2533item
46
48
50
52
54
56
46
36
40
50
26 25 37
35 39 by45a slash,
49
36 35
2432ber,
45 then
49 the
37 3639 35
41 39 and
27followed
24
34 38 44 48
2331total
35 34number
of tracks
on37the
disc.
51
4441
34
4847The
40 38
28 2336 3538
43
2230second
34 3333item shown
46 50
be43
the
40 elapsed
29 2226 3425 33
37will 36
42
32
212933
35 4239 45 49
32time
32
track
2127(see
36 46).
30
3324Figure
45
44
37
36
9
10
11
12
The CVPD50 screen may be placed in
17
18
Screen16 Standby
mode
by first making
1
2
3
4
21
22 remote
23
24
sure the
control
is in Screen
7
8 Selector
9
10
27
29
30the Screen
mode28by pressing
13 Screen
14
15
16
e 34 . Then
33
35 press
36 the
Standby
Y 19 to 20
place 21the 22
39
40 Button
41
42
screen46in Standby
25 Press
26 it again
27
28
45
47
48mode.
to return the screen to normal
viewing
31
32
33
34
mode. The front-panel displays
on the
37
38
39
40
CVR700 will remain lit to remind you
43
44
45
46
that the system is on.
15
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
26
27
28
29
30
31 202832 3131
34 38 44 48
28 3223to 31
35
To 31
skip20
directly
a specific track,
make
30 29 22 34
43
33
sure29
the remote control is in DVD mode
42
32
30 21 33
by pressing
DVD Input Selector
28 31 the
31
32
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
of the
1d 2 , then
3 enter
4 the
5 number
6
9
10 wish
11 to 12
Numeric
track
you
play
using
the
7
8
9
10
11
12
Keys
l 17 . If 18the Status Bar is on
15
16
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5 Button
6
Set
screen,
press
the
21
22 you23must 24
19
20
21
22
23
24
s
after
the
track
number
to
enter
7
10
11
12
27
28
298
309
25
26
27
28
29
it. If the
Status
Bar
is not
on 30
screen,18
13
14
15
16
17
33
34
35
36
31
34
35 skip 36
the CD32
will 33immediately
to the24track
19
20
21
22
23
39
40
41
42
37
38
39
40
41
42
you entered.
25
26
27
28
29
30
45
46
47
48
43
44
45
46
47
48
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
71
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 72
MP3/WMA PLAYBACK
43 45 47
42
44 46
49
48
35
37 39
38
41
40
51 53 55 57
43 45 47 49
50 52 54 56
42 44 46 48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
4137 4739 5141
NOTES ON MP3 AND WMA
37 41 47 51
36 4638 5040
40
PLAYBACK
25
36 40 46 50
3926 4525 4937
24
During
43 45 35
47 3949 45 5149 53 •55
57 playback, the front-panel display
3827 4424 4836
23
4235 44 34
46 3848 44 5048 52 54
56
and
the time indicator on the screen
23
28
43
22
above the list will show the elapsed
3534 37 33
39 41 43
22
29
42
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
21
time51of the track being played. Other
38 40 42 37 41 47
30 21 3433 36 32
20
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
36 40 46
31 20 3332 26 31
time50display options are not available
25 37
35 37 39 41
35 39 45
32 27 24 36
Figure 50
with4941
MP3/WMA
playback.
47 51
37
34 36 38 40
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
36 CVR700
select
a
track,
press
the
only
compatible with
To
⁄/33
¤ 26 25 37 • The
40 46 is50
495
516 30
53 29
55 22
57 34
33
43
2 43 345 47
4
45 49and WMA-encoded
35 39 MP332
standard
Navigation
Controls
q
until
the
1
2
3
4
5
27
36
6
24
42 944 46
48 50 29
52 30
54 21
56 33
32
42
8
31 If28
44 compressed
34 38Other
48
audio formats
desired10track11name12is highlighted.
the23 35 discs.
35 37 39 741 8 289 31 1020 1132 1231
43
33 for Internet
13
14
15 of tracks
16
17
18 than will30
22 34 used
29the
audio
downloads
will
list
is
longer
fit
on
41
51
34 36 38
1340
1437 4915 47
18
43
45
47
5116 29
53 17 30
55 21
57 33
Important Note on MP3 Playback:19
42the CVR700.
32 play on
20
21
22
23the Page
24
not
Down/Up
screen,
press
36 40 46 50 23
33 26 25
20 4821 5022 28
24
42 1937
44 46
52 31
54 20
MP3 and WMA discs may contain 20025
31
to jump
a56 32 • Due
26 32Buttons
27
28 Jh
29
30 39
45 through
35
49
to the differences in various ver27
36
24
tracks or even more. To get the best
2537 39
26 4127
28
293
30
35
1
2
4
5
6
of the
44 48 or back34
31
32 31list
3328
34 track
35 numbers
36 38 forward
23
35
sions
of the MP3 and WMA formats,
41
51
37
47 10
overview about all tracks on the disc and
34 3136the38
32list.4033
7
11
12
43348 51 359 53 36
33
43
55 57
22
37
38 30ward
3929 through
40 34
41 45
42 47 49
and
the many differences between the
36
46
40
50
33 3726 25
their names and to select or program
3739 48
3832 46
41 52
42
29 30 21 33
4340
45
49 356
576
42of the
44
50
54
1 on
2 16
453
5
13 42
15 47
1751 CD-R
18 55
machines
used to record
start32
the
43 45discs
47 on49
46play 47
48track
3514 39
45
49
27 24
36 selected
them comfortably, use the on-screen 43
dis- 44 28To4531
4246 4447 46 4848 50 52 54 56
4332
4431 3945 41
20
35
37
19 I
20 38
21or
22
23 a
24
42
44
46 48
Set
Button
computer,
it
is
possible
that
some
list,
press
the
7
8
9
10
11
12
31
34
44
48
28 23 35
play rather than the front-panel display.
41 47
41 51
37 39
36 3825 .4035
Play
Button
!e
may
not
play
on
the
CVR700
even41
30 34
33
26 13 2743 14 28 1529 discs
30 17
35
37
39
22
29
34
16
18
The front-panel display will only show the
36 38
40 46
40 5037 41 47 51
43 45 47 49
51 53 2955 3357 26 25 3734
a computer.
36 38 40
42the34
30 21 playback,
3331 3232some
33of
35 though
36 23 they24will work on34
During
MP3/WMA
number and the elapsed time42of the
track
19
20
21
22
40 46 50
35
39 45
44 46 48 50 52 2854 32
56 27 32
26 25
37 4936 This
245 3633
33 indicate
normal and does not
31
26 25 37
1standard
2 CD/DVD
331 20
4
6
37
38
41
42 is45
controls
operbeing played.
25 3924
26 40
4930
31 28playback
32
34
44
38
27
36 274835 2839 29
23
35
35 37 39 41
3251 2753 2455 3657
a
fault
with
the
unit.
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
43
45
47
49
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
7ate in 8their normal
9
10 fashion:
11
12 33
48 35
44 4836
30
43
2243
28
35 334734 3438
31 45 2332 46
343144
Important Note on WMA Playback:
51 29
37 41 47 42
34 36 38 40
444246 444846 5048 525054 525654 56 42 44 46 48 3150 2852 2354 3556
3018 32
•
When
a multisession
disc30with both
2950 forward
43
33
42
22
21
29
34
13
14
15
16
17
30
33
46
36
•
You
may
skip
to
the
next
track
37
38
39
40
41
42
40
The supported bit-rate is between
32k
33 26 25 37
29 22 34
373539 3741
39 and
41MP3 or
39 4121
28352 31
audio
4235CD37
32 standard
31
1disc
3 23 32
42924Skip
5
30
6 33
29 30WMA
32 27 24 36 1935on39
20
21 49
22 20
the 45
by
pressing
the
bits and 192k bits.
4337 41
44374745
46 514734 48
51
4121473351
41
37
34 363438 3640
36
38
40
47
38
40
28 31 20 32
31 content is in use, the CVR700
will
play
28 31
31 28 23 35 2534Forward
38
48
7 27Button
9 29 10 30 .1136 12 46
7h
26 44
36 4020463250
40 36 4050 46 50 33 26 25 37
338 282633
37
25
26
37
25
MP3 or WMA Disc Playback
only the CD audio sections of the disc.
30 29 22 34
43
33
13 33
15
18 3545 394945 49 32 27 24 36
35 39 45 49
31• You32may
342732
35the
36
3214back
skip
to24
current
36
2716
36or39
24 1735
Track numbers will be visible in the dis42 31
32
30 21 33
After the disc is loaded and 29
the tray
34 38 44 48
1 20 on
322
4pressing
538
6 3848 44 48 31 28 23 35
35
37 previous
38 19 39
4028231
41disc
42
2123
2334
24 3444
23
28
35
track
the
by
28
play, but30the files will not be
decoded.
31
20 32
closed, the CVR700 will read the31
disc’s
30 2930Button
332
122
343 4 43 5
33
6
3448
29 22 34 133 2 43 3
Reverse
7J
43 the44Skip
47 29
25 45
7 26 46 82722
928
1029 34 1130
12
29 302921 303321 32
table of contents (TOC). A listing of all
• When a29
disc with multiple directories
42
32
7 35 33
8 36 32
942 10 42 11
12 30 21 33
once or31 twice.
13 32
1433
1534
16
17
18
8
9
28
28 only
is playing,
from 7one
the directories on the disc will be dis31 directory
312820 313220 31
31 tracks
31
20 32
32
13 2241 14 2342 15 24 16
17
18
37 Pause
39
•57Press the
Button
19 38
20
2140@M
13 at a14time.15
53
55
57
4347
4549
47 51
49
51
53
55
can
be
displayed
and
played
played if43
the 45
disc
was
made
with
several
1
2
3
4
5
6
20 2948 21 30 22
23
24
43
2544 stop
2645 playback.
2746 19 2847Press
42 (see
4442
464448
46 50
48 525054525654 56to momentarily
Select
the
desired directory19 and 20
press 21
directories
Figure
48).
7
8
9
10 the11Play12
Button
!e
to
25
26
27
28
29
43 35
45 47
49
51
53
55
57
31
32
33
34
35
36
373539374139 41
the Play30Button !e 25 to 26
start 27
3 2 Button
43
54
1
2
3
4
5
65
1 Stop
6
6
13 41 1456 15
16
17
18 1Press 2the
42 34
44 46
483640
50
35 first36
37
363438
3747415147 51resume play.
38 52
40 54
track. To see and play tracks
37
38
39 31 40 32 41 33 42 34 the
The CVR700 is among those DVD players
34 36
33 26
that are able to play back discs recorded
with MP3 or WMA files. This means32that27
discs28
you may enjoy the latest music using31
30 29
created in your computer through the
29 30
high-quality audio components in your
28
home theater system. As the way that 31
MP3 and WMA files are recorded on
discs differs from the way conventional
CD audio discs are structured, MP3/WMA
1
playback is slightly different from that7 of
standard CDs.
35 33
37
34 32
36
33 31
26
32 30
27
31 29
28
30 28
29
2948 30
Figure
28 31
39
41 263725
263325
38
40 273637
273224
24
23 283536
283137
23
25
22 293435
293036
22
24
21 303334
302935
23
21
312834
20313233
22
20
21 33
20 32
19
36
37
41
35
25
36
34
40
35
31
33
39
34
37
32
38
33
43
31
32
20464021
4036
5046
453927
3935
4945
47
2651
443833
46
3834
4844
3250
43
45 3349
43
38
39
443248
42
42
44
45
43 31
19
20
2120
2221
2322
2423
19
13
14 expand,
15
16
17 all of18the
The folder
will
listing
25
26
2726
2827
2928
3029
25
tracks19within
directory,
20 the 21
22 each
23 preceded
24
31
32
3332
3433
3534
3635
31
by a logo
to26identify
MP3 file
25
27 it as
28 an 29
30 or
37
38
3938
4039
4140
4241
37
WMA31file. (See
Figures
49 and
50.)36
32
33
34
35
43
44
4544
4645
4746
4847
43
37
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 49
72
44
45
46
47
48
35
37
34
36
33
35
32
34
31
33
30
32
29
31
28
2250#M
23
24
7
87 enter
9 8 stop
109mode.
1110
1211
twice
to
43
44
45 37 46 38 47 39 48 40
28
13 through
1413
15
1443 16forward
1544 171645 181746
•49You29may 30search
tracks
3448or in
35
2423
40
36 19by pressing
2019
21the
2221 2322
reverse
20 appropriButtons
ate41Search
42 25
26
2726
2827 2928 .
25 Lf
3029
32
3433
31 or 33
32
You47may 48play31an MP3
WMA
disc35in34
3938 CD4039
random mode37 like a3837normal
(see4140
page 68). 43
4443
4544
4645 4746
3635
46
•
42
32
31
To select a directory (if any), press the
1
21 Controls
32
4q
54
⁄/¤ Navigation
65
3
until the desired
directory
name
is
high7
87
98
109
1110
1211
1 then2 press3the Set
4 Button
5
6
lighted,
13
14
1514
1615
1716
1817
13
I 7 . 8
9
10
11
12
43
37
36
35
34
33
32
• The Repeat function may be accessed
6
during playback of an MP3 or WMA
12
disc.
18
24
30
36
42
48
4241
4847
31
32
8
9
11
1241
427 directories,
from
other
first3710you must
38
14
15
16
17the
1847
4813 directory,
select
that
then 43
select
44
21
22
23
24
Button
track
and19press20the Play
33
12
39
18
45
24
!e
30
30
25
.
26
27
28
29
31 audio
32 playback
33
34is available
35
36
36 stereo
• Only
37 WMA
38
39
40
41
42
42 MP3 and
for
discs.
48
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
32
31
4
5
6
10
11
12
16
17
18
22
23
24
28
29
30
34
35
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 73
Programmed Playback With
MP3 or WMA Discs
The CVR700 is capable of creating playlists of the files on a properly recorded
disc. To create a playback list for MP3
or WMA titles, follow the same steps as
for programming a playlist for any other
43 45
4947 51
53page
5755
4347
49on
515553
format
disc
as45described
75.
57
51 5253
4243 4445
424647
444849
46 50
48
505455
525657
54 56
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
JPEG
44 3946 4148 50 52 54 56
3542 37Playback
4235 4437 4639 4841 50 52 54 56
39
4137available
47415147 51
3435
3637
4041
3438is
36one
38of 37
40 few
The
CVR700
the
35 37 39 41
41
47
37
38
40
36
46
40
3334
46 50
36
405051
3325that
DVD
players
is
capable
of
recogniz2636
37
47 51
34 3626 3825 403736 3740 41
33 2732
35
4546
3935
45 49
394950
26
273637
36 and
2425
ing32JPEG
still-image
files
displaying
24
46 50
33 26 25 37 35 36 40
39
49
3132When
34
4445
44 48
34JPEG
2723a24
3848
2831
3536
23containing
28
35 38
them.
disc
files
45
35
39
49
32 27 24 36 34
3031 2930
38
33
4344 48
43
33
23
28
35
22
34
22
29
34
CD23ROM
Disc-Type
is loaded,
31 the
34 38 44 48
28
35
43
33
2930 302921
22
32
42
34
42
303321
33The3332
list of direcIndicator
30 A
43
22light.
29will
34 32
2829 3128
302021
31 42
313233
32
20 31
29
tories
on
the
disc
will
appear,
and
may
42
32
21
28 31 30
20 32 33 31
28 31in the
be navigated
31 as for a
32 way
20 same
compressed-audio disc. Use the ⁄/¤
1
21 Controls
32
4q
54
Navigation
6 5 to 6
3
1a folder,
2 and
3 press
4 the 5Set Button
6
select
7
1 87
29 8
3109
41110 51211
6 12
I 7 to expand
folder11and display
8
9 the 10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
13
14
15
16
17
7
8
9
10
11
12 18
the tracks.
JPEG
are
with
an
14 21files
15 22
16 listed
19 13 20
232217 242318
19
20
21
24
13 icon
14 preceding
15
16the file
17 name
18
appropriate
20 27 21 28 22 29 23 30 24
25 19 26
25
26
27
28
29
30
19 51).20Press21the Play
22
23
24
Button
(see Figure
26 33 27 34 28 35 29 36 30
31 25 32
31
32
33
34
35
36
!e 25 to 26
begin 27displaying
the
28
29
30
31 38 32 39 33 40 34 41 35 42 36
37
37
38
39
40
41
42
images in31the expanded
You
32
33 folder.
34
35 may
36
38 45 39 46 40 47 41 48 42
44
43
44 time45each46
47
48
set 43
the37 amount
of
image
37
38
39
40
41
42
43 visible
44 on45screen
46 using
47 the48DVD
remains
43
44
45
46
47
48
Setup menu (see Figure 31).
Figure 51
73
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 74
VCD PLAYBACK
VCD, a format that predates DVD, is
based on a different compression format
than DVD and a recording method that is
similar to CD. Although the DVD has, for
the most part, replaced VCD as a format,
the CVR700 offers VCD playback so that
you may play your existing library of
VCD discs.
There are two versions of the VCD format:
an early version which is simply called
“VCD” and a later version with Playback
Control which is called “Version 2.0” or
“PBC.” The CVR700 is compatible with
both forms of VCD, although playback will
vary according to which version is used
and the specific way in which the disc
was created.
Even though VCD discs provide video,
because the format is based on CD technology, the playback functions for a VCD
disc are similar to CD. To play a VCD disc,
place it in the CVR700 as you would do
with any other CD or DVD disc. The unit
takes a few seconds to read the disc’s
contents. The VCD Disc Type Indicator
A will light in the front panel. If the disc
has playback control, a PBC ON banner
will appear on screen briefly.
NOTE: Some VCDs are created without
playback control, so that only a VCD file
exists on the disc. The CVR700 may identify this disc with a CDROM Disc Type
Indicator A, similar to a compressed
audio disc. In that case, the disc is navigated the same way as an MP3 or WMA
disc. A screen similar to the one in Figure
52 will appear, and you will need to
select the VCD file and play it manually.
42
44 46
48
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
41
40
26
27
28
29
30
31
37
36
35
34
33
32
25
24
23
22
21
20
50
52 54
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
32
31
47
46
45
44
43
31
30
29
28
283523 373539
293422 363438
303321 263325
313220 2732
24
31 28 23
30 29 22
29 30 21
1
2
3
28 31 20
42
7
You may select the track number and
change it to skip to another track.
7
You will be able to see the current track
number, followed by a slash and the total
number of tracks on the disc. You will
also be able to see the elapsed time for
the current track. However, you may not
be able to change the track number or utilize the Time Search function as with an
audio CD.
Use of functions when the PBC is on will
vary according to the disc type. Note that
if the disc was created with Playback
Control (PBC – see below), it is not possible to change track numbers directly.
Playback Control
VCD discs made under the Revision 2.0
specification will usually offer PBC playback control.
The PBC ON banner will appear when
the disc is played.
With PBC, you can select titles and
navigate the disc as with DVDs. However,
the access to some functions may be
prohibited by the PBC playback control;
in that case, the FEATURE NOT
AVAILABLE banner will appear
on screen.
When the VCD is made without PBC,
the disc can be controlled the same as
an audio CD, but direct track access by
entering a number is not possible without
opening the Status Bar.
Figure 52
Keep in mind that the exact level of functionality for any VCD will vary widely and
it is ultimately determined by the way the
disc was created, not by the CVR700, particularly if the disc has been created
under VCD Version 2.0 with Playback
Control (see “Playback Control”).
74
When playing VCD discs, most standard
DVD/CD playback controls are used,
including Play, Stop, Pause, Track Skip
Forward and Reverse and Fast Forward or
Reverse Search. The functions Slow Play
and Step and the Zoom function are not
available with VCDs.
49
51
With PBC, many discs include chapter
42 44 46 48 50
selection menus that are similar to those
35 37 39 41
on VCD discs
found on DVDs. However,
37
34 36 38 40
the disc menu (if any) is accessed and
36
33 26 25 37
controlled differently than on DVDs. 35
•
33 5 32 6
31
32
10
11
42
12
53 55
52 54
41
40
39
32 27 24 36
34 38
Play will start with31the28
first23track
35
33
(which may be an30
intro),
to
22 leading
29then
34
29 automatically.
32
the VCD menu (if any)
30 21 33
28 31 20 32
31
57
56
47
46
45
44
43
42
• NEXT (Skip Forward) will skip to the
VCD menu from the intro (Track 1)
directly.
1
2
3
appear
on
the4
• Once the menu options
7
8 by pressing
9
10
screen, make your selection
the Numeric Keys13l 14 that
15 corre16
spond to your desired
The
19 choice.
20
21
22
desired selection will
25 begin
26 playing
27
28
automatically.
31
32
33
34
8
9
10
11
31 is on,
32 the
33 Disc
34 Menu
35
36
• When PBC
16
17
Button37j 3813 will3914have4015the 41
same
42
19
20
21
22
23
function43as with
44 DVDs,
45 making
46
47the 48
26
27 menu.
28
29
player return to25the latest
disc
31 pressing
32
33
34
35
When PBC is off,
the Disc
Menu Button37j 38 will39 turn40the 41
PBC on and the43disc will
44 be45played
46
47
from the beginning.
13
14VCD discs
15
17
18 to
When playing
it16 is possible
20 Bar.21Press22the Status
23
24
view the19 Status
Button 25N 26 to 27see the
28 Status
29 Bar.
30
Note, however,
is36on,
31
32 that33when34the PBC
35
some features
not be40available
with
37
38may 39
41
42
that VCD.
43
44
45
46
47
48
45 47
9
4
13
14entry15without
16 any
17 VCD18
• Direct number
menu shown
on
effect24–
19
20 screen
21 has
22 no 23
1
2
3
4
5
even when
is29 on. 30
25 the
26 Status
27 Banner
28
2
3
4
6
Using1the Status
Bar
for5 VCD
7
8
9
10
11
12
Playback
43
8
34
41 38 44 48
33
3743 41 47 51
40
32
3642 40 46 50
37
31
35 39 45 49
36
34 38 44 48
35
33
43
34
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
50
49
48
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
43
42
4:24 PM
45 47
44 46
Page 75
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
35 37 39 41
37 41 47 51
34 36 38 40
36 40
46 50
PROGRAMMED
PLAY
33 26 25 37
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
30 29 22 34
33
43
Programmed
play allows you to select
29 30 21 33
32
42
any track from
an audio CD for playback
28 31
31
20 32
in a specific order. This type of programming is particularly useful for parties or
43 other
45 situations
47 49 in51which
53 you
55 desire
57 con1
4
of2 specific
42 tinuous
44 46playback
48
50
523 54selections
56 5 for6
a
long
period
of
time.
7
8
9
10
11
12
35 37 39 41
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
43 45 47
37
34 Begin
36 by
38 stopping
40
13
14play41
15 47
1651 17 the 18
and
pressing
42 44 46
46
36
40
50
33Program
2643 2545Button
37
S 51
list
of 24
1947 49
20
21 and
23 57
5322 a55
35
35 37 39
39disc45types
49
32 loaded
2742 24
36
discs
with
their
44 2546 48
50
5228 54will
26
27
29 56 30
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48
34How36 38
appear
(see Figure
53).
35 on
37screen
3139 41
32
33
36
30 29 22 34
43 34 33 35 26 25
33
ever,34
you36
may
only40
program
the42
41
43
45
47
49
53 tracks
55 47
57on 51
37
3738
3851 39
29 30 21 33
42 40 32 4127 24
32
current
44 disc.
46 25
48 3750 36
52 40
54 46
56 50
26
2842 3133
43
44
45
46 31 47 28 23
48
31
20 32
35 39 45 49
24
35
37 27
39 Display
41 36 Line
The 32
Upper
H will
30 display
22
29
31
34 38
44
48
3537
51
47 29
34
36 28
38 23
40 the
T– followed
by
disc41
number.
This30
21
30 29 22 3436 33
43
46
40
50
33
28
26
37
25
represents
the
track
number
on
the
disc,
31
20
43 4521 4733 49 32 51 5342 55 57
132 29
2 30
3 36 4 35 5 39 645 49
27
24appear
which
will
in 48
the order
pro42
44
46
50
52
54
56
28
31 20
3234 31
31 28
44 48
7grammed.
8 23Use
9 35
11 38 12Keys
the10 Numeric
41
30 293522 373439 33
43
to 15enter38
number
the first
13l
1434
16the40
17
18of41
45
49
55 37
57
29 4730
42 1 47 251
21 3651
33 5332
track
you
wish
to
program
into
your
47
49
51
53
55
57 46 50
1943
20
21
22
23
24
36
40
33
44
4645
48
50
52
54
56
28
37
31 20 2632 25 31
76
8
1 and
2press
3 50 Set
4 Button
5
playlist,
42
462727
4824
54
25
2632
28 the
30 3956 45 49
362952 35
37
3944
41
13
14
s
to
enter
it.
Continue
entering
31
44
34
7
8
9
10
11
12
48
35 3837
39332841
47 51
3723
36
31
32 40
34413535
36 38
3038
19 43
tracks
in
this14
to46create
your
list,20
41 3347
51
37
34
36
40
29fashion
34
3622
13 37
17
18
26
37 2538
39
401540 4116 50
42
1 press
2 the
335
436
5 32
29
and
Play
Button
e
to 26
466 50
40
2139
33
25 42
3037
3345
49
26
25 20
27
19 36
21
23
24
43 2444
45
46
4722
48
28
4512 49
35
31
31
32
20
39
32
play
the
list.
8 24 36
934 38
10 4411 48
31
32
28 7 2327
35
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 2228 34
44 48
33 1634 4338
35
29
38
1423list,
15
17Program
18 37
To13edit31 the
press
the
33 33 34
35
36
30 2129 33
43
22 32 34
42
32
30
Button
S
⁄ 44
19
20
21 followed
22
23 by the
24 43
37 21 38 33
41
42
29 2030
42
31 39 32 40
31
32
Navigation
Button
3
25
261
272
28q
29 4 to
305view 6the
28
43 20 44 32 45 31 46
47
48
31
49
48
41
40
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
37
36
35
34
33
32
32
31
3
4
5
6
12
42
9
10
11
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
next
track to
9 to35add
10 a3611
12
31 track
327 in the
338 list34or
the
end
of
the
list,
or
the
¤ Navigation
37
3813
3914
4015 4116
4217
18
Button
q
2
3
4 to5view 6the previous
43
4419
4520
4621 4722
4823
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
track
list.
8 in the
9
10
11
12
25
26
27
28
29
30
7
8
9
10
11 a list,
12 you
Once
14 you
15 have
16 programmed
17
18
31
32
33
34
35
36
13 repeatedly
14
15 press
16 the17Program
18
may
20
21
22
23
24
37
38
39
40
41
42
Button
S 28
toggle23
in and
19
20
21 to29
22
24 out of
26
27
30
43
44
45
46
47
48
programmed
play
mode.
However,
25
26
27
28
29
30 to
32
33
34
35
36
cancel
the
program,
you
must
remove
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
the
disc38from 39the CVR700.
37
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
43
44
45
46
47
48
Figure 53
75
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 76
PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R2 REMOTE
The CVR700R2 remote is factory-programmed for all functions needed to
operate the unit. In addition, it is also
preprogrammed to operate most recent
JBL DVD players and changers, CD players and changers, CD recorders and cassette decks. The codes for other brand
devices may be programmed into the
CVR700R2 remote using its extensive
library of remote codes or a head-to-head
learning process for codes not in the
internal library.
Important Notes on Using the
CVR700R2 Remote: The CVR700R2
remote control is capable of operating
up to nine devices, including the CVR700.
In order to segregate the control commands for each device, the remote’s logic
contains a separate “page” of commands
for each device that is called up when
that device’s selector has been pressed.
For example, in order to access the
commands that control the CVPD50
screen, such as Letterbox or PIP, you must
first press the Screen Selector e, so
that the word SCREEN appears in the
upper line of the LCD Information
Display c.
Most of the programming functions in
this section begin by using the remote
control’s own menu system, which is
accessed by pressing and holding the
Remote Menu Button b until the
Main Menu appears. In order to access
this function, you must first press the
System Selector f.
Programming Product Codes
Thanks to the remote’s advanced technology and two-line LCD display, it is no
longer necessary to look up cumbersome
codes when programming the remote; following the steps outlined below, you simply search for the brand name from the
remote’s memory. We recommend that
you first try the preprogrammed code
entry method. If that procedure is not
successful, then try the code-learning
method.
Preprogrammed Code Entry
The easiest way to program the remote
for operation with a source device from
another brand is to follow these steps:
76
1. Turn on the power to the device you
wish to program into the remote. This
is important, as in a later step you will
need to see whether the device turns
off to determine whether the remote
has been programmed for the proper
remote codes. In order to program
codes for a game console or cam-
corder, which do not have remotecontrolled power on/off codes, you
must insert a disc or tape and
begin play.
2. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
HOLD BUTTON
FOR 3 SECONDS
Figure 54
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Set Button s to begin the process
of selecting a device and locating the
proper remote codes.
MAIN MENU
PROGRAM CODE
Figure 55
4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the
LCD display (Figure 56). Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q to
scroll through the list of source inputs
and press the Set Button q when
the source you wish to set the codes
for appears. For this example, we will
select “AUX” to enter the codes needed
to operate your HDTV tuner. As a
shortcut, once the screen shown in
Figure 56 appears, you may jump to
the desired source by pressing its
Input Selector d.
PROGRAM CODE
AUX
Figure 56
NOTE: Each source may be programmed
with certain device types:
• AUX: Used to program a TV, HDTV tuner,
VCR, TV/VCR combination device, external DVD or CD player, cable box or satellite receiver.
• VCR: Used to program a videocassette
recorder or TV/VCR combination device.
• CBL/SAT: Used to program a cable television box, satellite television receiver or
HDTV tuner.
• GAME/CAM: Used to program a video
game console or camcorder.
• DR: Used to program a digital recorder,
such as a DVD recorder, CD recorder,
D-VHS recorder, TiVo, or personal video
device (digital video recorder) containing
a hard disc drive.
• DVI/COMPUTER: Used to program an
external device equipped with a digital
video interface (DVI) video output, such
as an external DVD player, cable television box, satellite television receiver or
HDTV tuner.
5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in
the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q to
scroll through the list of device types
available for the source you have
selected, and press the Set Button
s when the device you wish to set
the codes for appears. For this example, we will select “HDTV-Tuner” to
enter the codes needed to operate your
HDTV set-top tuner.
SELECT A DEVICE
HDTV-TUNER
Figure 57
If you make a mistake at any time, press
the Exit/Cancel Button r to return to
the previous menu screen, or press the
Remote Menu Button b to exit the
remote menu system.
6. At the next menu screen on the
remote (Figure 58), press the Set
Button s to enter the Manual
mode, which means that you will
select the brand name of the device
from the list programmed into the
remote’s memory.
PROGRAM CODE
MANUAL
Figure 58
7. The next menu screen on the remote
(Figure 59) will show the start of the
list of available brands. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Buttons q until
the brand name of the device you are
programming into the remote appears
on the lower line of the display and
then press the Set Button s. As a
shortcut, once the screen shown in
Figure 57 appears, you may jump to
the first letter of the desired brand
name by pressing the corresponding
Alphanumeric Key l repeatedly
until the brands beginning with the
desired letter appear. For example,
to jump to the brand “RCA”, simply
press the “7” key three times, until
the first brand beginning with an “R”
appears, and then scroll to the
desired name.
SELECT A BRAND
RCA
Figure 59
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 77
NOTE: If the brand name for the product
you wish to program does not appear in
the list, the codes may still be available,
as some manufacturers share codes.
If the desired brand is not listed, press
the Exit/Cancel Button r to exit the
programming process, and skip to the
instructions shown at right for the
“Automatic” method of programming the
remote. If desired, or if the codes for your
brand are not part of the remote’s library
at all, you may still use the remote to
program most infrared-controlled products by “learning” the commands from
the product’s original remote into the
remote. The instructions for Learning
Commands are on page 78.
ask whether the game has stopped. For a
camcorder, the remote will ask whether
the camera has zoomed in.
8. The next step is important, as it
determines which codes will operate
the source device or display. Point
the remote at the device being programmed and, following the instructions shown in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c (Figure
60), press and release the Numeric
Keys k shown on the menu screen
one at a time, starting with the “1”
button. After you press the “1”
Button k, the remote’s LCD screen
will briefly go blank as the code is
being transmitted, but you will see
the “transmit” icon
in the upper
right corner of the display to serve as
confirmation that the remote is sending out commands.
Remember that the codes may still be
stored in the remote’s library under
another brand, and you can have the
remote control search for them by following the instructions below for
automatic programming. You may
also manually “learn” the codes for
most devices into the remote by following the Learning Commands
instructions on page 78.
PRESS A NUMBER
CODE 1 OF 10
Figure 60
9. After you press and release the number key, watch the device being programmed to see whether it turns off.
As shown in the instructions that will
appear on the next menu screen
(Figure 61), if your device has turned
off, press the Set Button s, and
then skip to Step 11. If the unit does
not turn off, proceed to Step 10.
POWER OFF? Y:SET
N: NEXT# OR CLR
Figure 61
NOTE: Since game consoles and camcorders have no remote control power
on/off codes, the test command used to
program a remote code will be different.
In order to program codes for a game
console or camcorder, which do not have
remote-controlled power on/off codes,
you must insert a disc or tape and begin
play. For a game console, the remote will
10. If the device being programmed into
the remote does not turn off after you
have pressed the “1” Button l,
repeat Steps 8 and 9 by pressing the
available numeric keys shown until
the device turns off. If the device still
does not turn off after all choices
have been tried, or if there is only one
number key shown as available to try,
the code for this specific device is not
in the remote library under that brand
name. If that is the case, press the
Exit/Cancel Button r to exit the
manual programming mode.
11. When the device being programmed
does turn off after a numeric key has
been pressed, you must press the Set
Button s within five seconds to
enter the setting into the remote’s
memory. After you press the Set
Button s, the top line of the LCD
display will read SAVING… and
then the word SAVED will flash four
times in the center of the bottom line.
12. When the codes are saved, the
remote will return to normal operation, and whenever you press the
Input Selector Button d that was
just programmed, the codes for the
new device will be used.
NOTE: Some brands share a common
remote control code for “Power Off” for
many models. For that reason it is possible that even though the remote appears
to be properly programmed, you may find
that some buttons do not appear to issue
the correct command. If this is the case,
repeat the procedure outlined above, but
if more than one numeric key selection is
suggested in Step 8, try a different number to see whether the remote operates
correctly. Although the remote is preprogrammed with an extensive library of
codes for many major brands, it is also
possible that you may have attempted to
program a product that is too new or too
old, and thus not all of its commands will
be in the code library. You may fill in the
codes for any button that does not operate properly by using the learning technique shown on this page.
Automatic Code Entry
In addition to manual code selection using
the brand name list, it is also possible to
automatically search through all the codes
that are stored in the remote’s library to
see whether a device will respond even
if it is not listed among the brands that
appear when you program the remote
manually. To automatically search through
the codes that are available for a specific
device type (e.g., DVD, VCR), follow these
steps:
1. Turn on the power to the device you
wish to program into the remote. This
is important because in a later step you
will need to see whether the device
turns off to determine whether the
remote has been programmed for the
proper remote codes. In order to program codes for a game console or
camcorder, which do not have
remote-controlled power on/off
codes, you must insert a disc or tape
and begin play.
2. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Set Button s to begin the process
of selecting a device and locating the
proper remote codes.
4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the
LCD display (Figure 56). Press the
⁄/ ¤ Navigation Controls q to
scroll through the list of sources and
press the Set Button s when the
source you wish to set the codes for
appears. For this example, we will
select “AUX” to enter the codes
needed to operate your HDTV
set-top tuner.
5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in
the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q to
scroll through the list of device categories and press the Set Button s
when the device for which you wish
to set the codes appears. For this
77
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 78
example, we will select “HDTVTuner” to enter the codes needed to
operate your HDTV set-top box.
6. At the next menu screen on the
remote, press the ⁄ Navigation
Button q so that the bottom line of
the LCD display reads AUTO (Fig. 62)
and then press the Set Button s to
enter the Automatic programming
mode.
PROGRAM DEVICE
AUTO
Figure 62
7. As instructed on the next menu
screen, press the ⁄ Navigation
Button q to begin the automatic
code search process. Your confirmation that the remote is sending out
commands is the movement of a
square block across the top line of
the LCD display screen while the bottom line reads PLEASE WAIT….
You will also see the transmit icon in
the upper right corner of the LCD display’s top line to remind you that the
remote is working even though you
may not see anything happening to
the device being programmed.
8. It will take a few seconds for the
remote to send out the first group of
commands, after which you will see a
new display in the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 63. Following the
instructions, if the device being programmed has not turned off, press
the ⁄ Navigation Button q again
to send another group of codes (see
Step 9). If the device being programmed
has turned off, press either the “1” or
“0” key and skip to Step 10.
POWER OFF?
Y-> 1~0 N->
Figure 63
9. By pressing the ⁄ Navigation
Button q again, the remote will
send out a new set of commands.
When it pauses, follow the instructions shown in Step 8. Depending
on how many codes are stored for
a specific device type, you may have
to repeat this process as many as 15
times. Remember, if the device turns
off, skip to Step 10. When all the
codes for the device being programmed have been tried, the
instruction shown in Figure 64 will
appear. This means that the codes for
the product you are trying to program
are not in the remote library and you
78
will have to “learn” them into the
remote following the instructions
shown in the next section. Press the
Remote Menu Button b as
instructed to exit the programming
process.
REACH END POINT
PRESS REM KEY
Figure 64
10. If the device being programmed does
turn off after following the instructions in Step 7, you will need to
verify the code set by pressing the
Numeric Keys l in sequence,
as instructed in Figure 60. Point the
remote at the device being programmed, and press the “1” Button
l to see whether the device turns
back on.
11. After pressing and releasing the “1”
Button l, check to see whether
the device has turned back on. If it
has, skip to Step 12. If it does not
turn off, press the “2” Button l,
or the next button in the numeric
sequence if you are repeating the procedure, as instructed by the LCD
screen in Figure 65.
POWER ON?
Y->SET N->1~0
Figure 65
12. When pressing the “1” button does
not turn the device being programmed
back on, repeat the procedure by trying the remainder of the Numeric
Keys l in sequence, each time
pressing and then releasing the button to see whether the new device
turns back on. When it does, skip to
the next step. However, if you try all
10 numeric keys and find that the unit
will not turn on, you won’t be able
to use this method to program the
device. Press the Remote Menu
Button b to exit the programming
process. You’ll need to follow the
Learning Commands instructions below
to enter the codes for this device into
the remote.
13. When pressing one of the numeric
keys in Step 11 or 12 causes the
device being programmed to turn
back on, follow the instructions
shown in Figure 65 and press the Set
Button s within five seconds of
the device turning on. After you press
the Set button, the top line of the LCD
display will read SAVING… and
then the word SAVED will flash four
times in the center of the bottom line.
14. When the codes are saved, the
remote will return to normal operation, and whenever you press the
Input Selector Button d that was
just programmed, the codes for the
new device will be used.
Learning Commands
On occasions when the remote does not
contain the codes for a particular product’s remote in its built-in library, or when
you wish to program a missing or special
function into one button of a device, the
remote’s learning capability allows you
to do that. To teach commands from one
product’s remote into the remote, follow
the steps below:
The process requires that both the
device’s original remote and the
CVR700R2 remote be available. Before
pressing any buttons on either remote,
place them so that the IR transmitter on
the remote from the device to be programmed is facing the Infrared Lens
s on the CVR700R2 remote, pointing to
the area next to the slots over the EzSet
Microphone Sensor r. The two
remotes should be no more than an inch
apart, and there should not be any direct
sunlight or other bright light source near
the remotes.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ Navigation Button q until
LEARN appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
66. Press the Set Button s to
begin the process of learning commands from another device’s remote
into the remote.
MAIN MENU
LEARN CODE
Figure 66
3. LEARN CODE will appear in the
LCD display (Figure 67). Press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q to
scroll through the list of sources and
press the Set Button s when the
source you wish to set the codes for
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 79
appears. The available options are
DVD/MAIN, SYSTEM, SCREEN,
DVI/DVD, TIVO, GAME, CABLE, VCR,
TV and FM/AM [TUNER]. We recommend that you learn new codes only
for devices that are external to the
JBL Cinema Vision system. For this
example, we will select “DVI/DVD” to
enter the codes needed to operate an
external DVD player with a DVI output.
LEARN CODE
DVI/DVD
Figure 67
4. The next menu screen (Figure 68) will
prompt you to select the button on
the remote that you wish to program.
Press that button on the remote.
PRESS BUTTON
TO BE PROGRAMMED
Figure 68
5. Once you press the button to be programmed on the remote, press and
hold the button on the remote control
for the device to be programmed
within five seconds, as instructed on
the next menu screen (Figure 69).
PRESS BUTTON ON
ORIGINAL REMOTE
7. If the message shown in Figure 71
appears in the display, press the Set
Button s to try programming the
button again. When the remote
prompts you to press and hold the key
on the original remote again by showing the display shown in Figure 69,
immediately press the button on the
source remote again. To avoid another failed attempt, make certain that
the windows on the two remotes are
facing one another.
8. Continue to hold the button on the
original remote until the LCD display
changes again. If the code was successfully learned, you will see the
display shown in Figure 70. In that
case, go to Step 9.
If the CODE FAILED display (Fig. 71)
appears again, you may either try to
program the key again, or press the ⁄
Navigation Button q to stop the
process. It is possible that some
remotes may use code sequences or
infrared frequencies that are not compatible with the CVR700R2 remote,
and those codes cannot be learned.
When the display shown in Figure 72
appears, press the Set Button s
to exit the Learning system.
Figure 69
6. Continue to hold the button on the
original remote until the menu on the
CVR700R2 remote’s LCD screen
changes. If the code is successfully
learned, you will see the display shown
in Figure 70.
CODE LEARNED
CONTINUE
Figure 70
If you see that menu, proceed to Step 9.
If the code is not successfully learned,
you will see the display shown in Figure
71. If that menu appears, proceed to
Steps 7 and 8.
CODE FAILED
AGAIN
Figure 71
If you don’t attempt to “teach” a remote
code to the CVR700R2 remote within 5
seconds, the words “TIME OUT” will
appear briefly on the second line of the
LCD display, and you will be prompted to
start over by pressing a button on the
CVR700R2 remote (see Figure 68).
You may exit the process at any time by
pressing the Remote Menu Button b.
CODE FAILED
EXIT
Figure 72
9. When a code has been learned successfully, you have three options.
When the display shown in Figure 70
is on the LCD screen on the remote,
you may press the Set Button s to
learn additional codes from the buttons on a original source remote into
the CVR700R2 remote. Follow Steps 4
through 6 as often as needed to complete the code-learning process.
10. If you wish to change the name that
appears in the LCD display when the
button that has just had a new code
learned is pressed, press the ⁄
Navigation Button q until the
display shown in Figure 73 appears in
the LCD display. Press the Set Button
s to be taken to a EDIT BUTTON
display. Enter the new name for the
key following the instructions shown
in the Renaming Individual Keys section of this manual on page 86. If you
find it more convenient to rename the
buttons at a later time, you may do
that separately by following the
instructions on page 85.
CODE LEARNED
EDIT BUTTON
Figure 73
11. When you have programmed all keys
for the desired device, press the ⁄
Navigation Button q repeatedly
when the LEARN MENU (Figure 70)
appears until you see the display
shown in Figure 74. Press the Set
Button s to return the remote to
normal operation.
CODE LEARNED
EXIT
Figure 74
12. If you wish to program the codes for
another device, repeat the procedure
outline above, but select a different
device in Step 3.
Note on Learning Function: Remote
control signals can vary from one controller to the next due to different standard formats adopted by each manufacturer. For example, some manufacturers
repeat the code sequence in the initial
transmission, and others insert a special
code to identify the brand or model. Due
to the variety of formats, occasionally an
error may occur in the learning process
even though the CVR700R2 remote has
indicated that the code was learned correctly. Therefore, it is recommended that
you test the newly learned codes with
the source component. If the code was
not learned correctly, try relearning it.
Usually, after several tries, the code
can be learned correctly.
Changing Devices
In the factory default settings, the remote
is programmed so that the commands
transmitted correspond to the device
selected by pressing one of the Input
Selectors 3. This is logical, as you
want the remote to control the device you
have selected. However, in some circumstances you may have configured your
system so that the devices connected
to the CVR700 do not correspond to the
default device settings and the legends
printed on the remote. For example, if
your system has two VCRs you may
connect the second VCR to the digital
recorder input. There is no problem in
doing that, but in normal operation the
commands issued after selecting the digital recorder input are not for a VCR.
The remote allows you to correct that situation through the “Changing Devices”
process. This enables you to assign the
codes from one type of device to a differ-
79
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 80
ent button. For example, in the steps
below, we will explain how to program
the digital recorder buttons to provide the
commands to operate a VCR. Of course,
you may program the remote to have any
of the devices take on the code set of any
other device, as your system requires.
And, with the remote’s “Edit” function,
you can even change the way the name
of the device appears on the remote’s
LCD display so that you see exactly which
commands are being sent.
NOTE: You may not change the device
types for the DVD/MAIN device
(CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer), the
FM/AM (TUNER) device, the SCREEN
device (controls CVPD50 functions) or the
SYSTEM device (controls CVR700’s
receiver functions).
To program the buttons normally assigned
to one device for the commands of
another, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ Navigation Button q until
CHANGE DEVICE appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 75. Press the Set
Button s to begin the process of
reassigning the commands used for a
particular device.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE DEVICE
Figure 75
3. Next, you will select the Input
Selector d for the device that you
wish to change. When the display
shown in Figure 76 appears, press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q to
scroll through the list to find the
device you wish to use for another
function. In this case, we will select
“TIVO,” and show how to change it to
take on the codes for operating a
VCR. When that device’s name
appears, press the Set Button s.
OLD DEVICE TYPE
TV
Figure 76
80
4. Once the “old” device type has been
selected, you need to tell the remote
which set of remote codes to use as a
replacement for the device just selected.
When the instructions shown in
Figure 77 appear, press the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q to scroll
through the list of device categories
to find the name of the device that
you wish to use. The old device name
will remain on the left side of the
LCD screen, while the replacement
device list will scroll to its right. For
example, press the ⁄ Navigation
Button q until the display screen
reads TIVO<-VCR to have the digital recorder Button transmit the commands used to control a VCR. Press
the Set Button s when the
desired device combination appears.
NEW DEVICE TYPE
TIVO<-VCR
Figure 77
5. Once the new device is selected, the
remainder of the process will select
the codes for the specific brand to
be used, and for that reason they
are identical to the way a device is
programmed using manual entry.
Continue the process as outlined in
the next few steps, remembering that
if the codes for your specific device
are not found, you may select any
brand and then “learn” the proper
codes into the remote using the
process outlined on page 78. To begin
the process, start by selecting the
brand of device, as shown in Figure
57. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the brand name of
the device you are programming into
the remote appears on the lower line
of the display and then press the
Set Button s.
6. The next step is important, as it
determines which codes will operate
the source device or display. Point
the remote at the device being programmed and, following the instructions shown on the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2, press
and release the Numeric Keys l
one at a time, starting with the “1”
Button l. After you press the “1”
Button l, the remote’s LCD screen
will briefly go blank as the code is
being transmitted, but you will see
the “transmit” icon in the upper right
corner of the display to serve as confirmation that the remote is sending
out commands.
7. After you press and release the number key, watch the device being programmed to see whether it turns off.
As shown in the instructions that will
appear on the next menu screen
(Figure 61), press the Set Button
s, and then skip to Step 9. If the
unit does not turn off, proceed to the
next step.
8. If the device being programmed into
the remote does not turn off after you
have pressed the “1” Button l,
continue Steps 6 and 7 by pressing
the available numeric keys shown
until the device turns off. If the device
still does not turn off after all choices
have been tried, the code for this
specific device is not in the remote
library under that brand name. If that
is the case, we suggest that you
press the Set Button s to accept
the codes from another brand so that
the programming is completed, but
remember that you will then have to
program the remote manually by following the Learning Commands
instructions on page 78.
9. When the device being programmed
does turn off after a numeric key has
been pressed, you must press the Set
Button s within five seconds to
enter the setting into the remote’s
memory. After you press the Set button, the top line of the LCD display
will read SAVING... and then the
word SAVED will flash four times in
the center of the bottom line.
10. When the codes are saved the remote
will return to normal operation, and
whenever you press the Input
Selector Button 3 that was just
programmed, the display will show
the original device type code at the
far left side of the display, with the
name of the new code set type in
brackets. For example, the display
will read TIVO<-VCR in our example of replacing the TiVo codes with
those for a VCR.
Macro Programming
Macros enable you to easily repeat frequently used combinations of multiple
remote control commands with the touch
of a single button. Once a macro is programmed, you may send up to 20 commands with one press of the Power On or
Macro buttons. This will greatly simplify
the process of turning on your system,
changing devices or other common tasks.
Thanks to the remote’s two-line display, it
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 81
is easier than ever for you to take advantage of the power of macro commands.
Recording a Macro
To record a macro into the remote’s memory, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ Navigation Button q until
MACRO appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
78. Press the Set Button s to
enter the main macro menu branch.
MAIN MENU
MACRO
Figure 78
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 79)
press the Set Button s to begin
recording a macro.
MACRO
RECORD A MACRO
desired device name appears to move
to the next programming step.
Figure 81
Begin entering the individual commands for the macro, in the order
you wish them to be transmitted.
Remember that when you want to
change devices, you must first press
the Input Selectors d for that button, and then press the Command or
Function key.
6. The next display (Figure 82) and the
subsequent screens are where the
actual macro programming takes
place. The words at the left side of
the top line of the display show the
button that is being programmed
(e.g., one of the Macro Buttons
R) and the indication at the right
side of the top line shows the number
of macro steps available of 20 possible steps. Following the instructions
on the remote’s LCD screen, press the
first key you wish to be transmitted in
the macro. In our example, we first
want the CVR700 to turn on, so the
Power Button 1 should be
pressed.
RECORD A MACRO
MICRO 1
Figure 80
5. The next screen that appears (Fig. 81)
is where you select the device for the
first command that will be sent out as
part of the macro. Press the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q until the
name of the device appears on the
left side of the lower line in the LCD
display. For this example, the first
button we want to have the macro
“press” is the Power On button, so
the DVD/MAIN is selected. Press
the Set Button s when the
MICRO 1
PRESS A BUTTON
• System 5
• Logic 7 f
SELECT A DEVICE
DVD/MAIN
Figure 79
4. The next display screen (Figure 80)
is where you select the button that
will be used to recall the macro.
The choices are one of the discrete
Macro Buttons X. Press the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q until the
name of the button you wish to program the macro into is shown. For
this example we will show how to
program a series of commands that
will automatically be sent out every
time the M1 button is pressed.
• Power On 1
00/20
Figure 82
7. Once the first command button for
the macro has been pressed, continue
to press the buttons you wish to be
part of the macro, in the order they
will be used. Press each button
within 5 seconds of the last button,
remembering to press the Input
Selector 3 when you are changing device functions. As the buttons on
the remote are pressed, the remote’s
display screen will show the steps in
the macro as they are programmed
(Figure 83).
[M/DVD] POWER ON
Figure 83
8. For our example, we first want the
CVR700 Power On button pressed,
followed by the Cable Box On, followed by the selection of the Logic 7
mode. To do that, press the buttons in
this order:
• Power On 1
• Cable/Sat 3
As each button is pressed to enter it
into the macro, you will see the button names appear and then scroll up
on the LCD display as your confirmation of the key entry (Figure 83).
9. When all commands for the macro
have been entered, press the Set
Button s to save the macro. The
display screen will show the button
to which the macro has been programmed and the number of steps
used, and the word SAVED will blink
four times in the lower line of the
LCD display. When the display returns
to normal, the macro has been
entered and the remote is ready for
operation.
10. As the macro plays, you will see the
steps appear in the remote’s LCD display. Macros programmed into one of
the four discrete Macro buttons may
be activated at any time by pressing
the appropriate button.
Preprogrammed Macros
Several macro-type commands have been
preprogrammed into the remote, and they
may be activated not by pressing one of
the Macro Buttons X, but rather by
pressing and holding certain other buttons as described below:
1. Pressing and holding the Power On
1 or Power Off 0 buttons will
execute the Power On (All) or Power
Off (All) commands to either turn on
or turn off all devices whose product
codes have been programmed into the
remote. Note that if you are not using
any external devices, you may simply
power on the CVR700, and the CVPD50
screen will automatically be triggered
to turn on as well.
2. Pressing and holding certain Input
Selectors 3 will cause the CVR700
to switch to the selected source input
device, and the device will begin
playing:
a. Press and hold the DVD Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch
to the internal DVD/CD changer
source. If you do not enter the number for a disc you desire to play, the
last played disc will begin playing.
b. Press and hold the CBL/SAT
Selector 3, and the CVR700 will
switch to the source device connected
81
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 82
to the cable/satellite inputs. If you
have programmed the cable or satellite set-top box’s remote control
codes, the device will be turned on.
c. Press and hold the VCR Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
VCR inputs. If you have programmed
the VCR's remote control codes, the
device will be turned on, and the play
command will be transmitted to it.
d. Press and hold the DR (Digital
Recorder) Selector 3, and the
CVR700 will switch to the source
device connected to the DR inputs.
If you have programmed the DR's
remote control codes, the device
will be turned on, and the play command will be transmitted to it.
e. Press and hold the AUX Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
AUX inputs. If you have programmed
the device's remote control codes,
the device will be turned on, and the
play command will be transmitted to it.
f. Press and hold the Game/Cam
Selector 3, and the CVR700 will
switch to the source device connected
to the Game/Cam inputs. If you have
programmed the device's remote
control codes, the play command
will be transmitted to it. Note that
for video game consoles and camcorders, there are no power on or off
commands. Therefore, only the Play
command (or start/stop command for
camcorders) will be transmitted.
g. Press and hold the DVI Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
DVI inputs. If you have programmed
the device's remote control codes,
the device will be turned on, and
the play command will be transmitted to it.
3. The PIP Swap Button c is activated
while in screen mode by pressing and
holding that button until the video source
in the picture-in-picture frame swaps
position with the main video source.
Erasing a Macro
Once a macro has been created and
stored in the remote’s memory, you have
the option of erasing it (except the preprogrammed macros). You may do this
at any time by following these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
82
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ Navigation Button q so that
MACRO appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
78. Press the Set Button s to
enter the main macro menu branch.
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 84),
press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button
o until the bottom line in the
remote’s LCD display reads ERASE A
MACRO. Press the Set Button q
to begin the process of erasing a
macro.
MACRO
ERASE A MACRO
Figure 84
4. The next display screen (Figure 85) is
where you select which macro will be
erased. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the number of the
macro you wish to erase appears. For
this example we will erase the Power
On macro created in the previous section. When the name of the macro to
be erased appears, press the Set
Button s.
ERASE A MACRO
MICRO 1
Figure 85
5. The word ERASED will flash four
times in the bottom line of the
remote’s LCD display, and then the
display will return to its normal condition. When that happens, the macro
is erased and the remote is returned
to normal operation.
Read a Macro
To check the commands stored in the
remote’s memory for one of the macro
buttons, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ Navigation Button q until
MACRO appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
78. Press the Set Button s to
enter the main macro menu branch.
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
the bottom line in the remote’s LCD
display shows READ A MACRO
(Figure 86). Press the Set Button s
to begin the process of reading a
macro.
MACRO
READ A MACRO
Figure 86
4. The next display screen (Figure 87)
is where you select the macro to be
read. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the name of the
macro you wish to read appears. For
this example, we will read back the
Micro 1 macro created in a previous
section. When the name of the macro
to be read appears, press the Set
Button s.
READ A MACRO
MICRO 1
Figure 87
5. As soon as the Set button is pressed,
the first two steps in the macro will
be appear in the remote’s LCD
screen. You may then use the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q to step
up or down through the list of commands stored as the macro. As you
read the display, you will see Input
Selector Buttons 3 appear in
brackets, (e.g., [M/DVD]). When
the step in the macro is a function,
navigation or any other button, it
will appear next to the bracketed
read-out of the underlying device
(e.g., [M/DVD] POWER ON).
6. When you are finished reviewing
the macro’s contents, press the Set
Button s to return the remote to
normal operation.
NOTE: It is not possible to edit the steps
in a macro. If you notice an error, you will
need to erase the macro as described
above, and reprogram all of the steps.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 83
Punch-Through Configuration
Punch-through is a capability of the
remote that allows the Volume controls,
Channel Up/Down buttons or Transport
keys (Play, Stop, Record, Pause, Fast
Forward and Reverse, and Skip Up/Down)
to link to a different device. For example,
if your TV, cable box or satellite receiver
is connected through the CVR700, you
will most likely want to use the CVR700’s
volume control commands even when the
remote has been set to issue all other
commands for the video device. “Punchthrough” enables you to easily program
the remote to do this.
Volume Punch-Through
Follow these steps to enable the Volume
Up/Down and Mute controls from one
device to be used when the remote is
otherwise programmed for a different
device.
NOTE FOR VOLUME PUNCHTHROUGH: The remote’s default settings
are for the CVR700’s volume controls, to
be used when any input or device is
selected, with the exception of the
Game/Cam button. There is no need to
program the remote for volume punchthrough for the CVR700’s controls with
other sources, such as DVD. To have the
CVR700’s volume commands used when
the Game/Cam device is selected, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
Button s to enter the main punchthrough menu branch.
MAIN MENU
PUNCH-THROUGH
Figure 88
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 89),
press the Set Button s to begin
programming the remote for Volume
punch-through.
PUNCH-THROUGH
VOLUME
Figure 89
4. The next display screen (Figure 90) is
where you select the device that will
receive the punch-through commands.
In our example, that is the Game/Cam
button, as that is where we want
the CVR700’s volume controls to be
active. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the name of the
base device appears and then press
the Set Button s.
DEVICE IN USE
TV
Figure 90
5. At the next display screen (Fig. 91),
you will select the device whose
Volume Up/Down and Mute commands will be used. Press the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q until the
desired device’s name appears to
the right of the device in use. In
our example, that is the CVR700
(indicated by M/DVD). When the
desired combination of devices
appears, press the Set Button s.
PUNCH-THROUGH
GAME<-M/DVD
Figure 91
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control commands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 92. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
GAME<-M/DVD [VOL]
SAVED
Figure 92
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the Volume Up/Down and
Mute buttons of the second device
named will be used when those controls K are pressed while the master device is in use.
Returning the Volume Control
Settings to Default Operation
If you wish to remove the Volume punchthrough so that the commands for Volume
and Mute are returned to the factory
default setting, follow the steps shown
above, except that in Steps 4 and 5,
select the same device for both the
DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the
bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH
device. In the example used, the display
to return the remote to default settings
will appear as shown in Figure 93.
PUNCH-THROUGH
GAME<-GAME
Figure 93
Channel Control Punch-Through
Channel punch-through allows the
Channel Up/Down buttons to send commands to a different device than the one
that has been selected for other commands. For example, you may wish to use
a cable box or satellite receiver as the
source for a VCR, so you would want the
Channel Up/Down Controls g to
transmit commands to the cable box even
though the other button commands are
programmed to operate the VCR.
To program the remote for channel
punch-through, follow these steps. This
example will show how to program channel punch-through so that the commands
programmed for Channel Up/Down for
the Cable device will be transmitted
when the VCR device has been selected
as the current device.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
Button s to enter the main punchthrough menu branch.
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
CHANNEL appears on the bottom
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 94. Press the Set Button s
to begin programming the remote for
channel punch-through.
PUNCH-THROUGH
CHANNEL
Figure 94
4. The next display screen (Figure 95) is
where you select the device that will
receive the punch-through commands.
In our example, that is the VCR button,
as that is where we want the cable
83
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 84
box’s channel controls to be active.
Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button
q until the name of the base
device appears and then press the
Set Button s.
DEVICE IN USE
M/DVD
Figure 95
5. At the next display screen (Fig. 96),
you will select the device whose
Channel Up/Down commands will be
used. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the desired device
name appears to the right of the
device in use. In our example, that is
the cable box. When the desired combination of devices appears, press the
Set Button s.
PUNCH-THROUGH
VCR<-M/DVD
Figure 96
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control commands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 97. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
VCR<-CBL [CHAN]
SAVED
Figure 97
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the Channel Up/Down
Buttons of the second device named
will be used when those controls g
are pressed while the master device
is in use.
Returning the Channel Control
Settings to Default Operation
If you wish to remove the Channel PunchThrough so that the commands for
Channel Up/Down are returned to the
factory default setting, follow the steps
shown above, except that in Steps 4 and
5, select the same device for both the
DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the
bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH
device. In the example used, the display
to return the remote to default settings
will appear as shown in Figure 98.
PUNCH-THROUGH
VCR<-VCR
Figure 98
Transport Control Punch-Through
The Play e, Stop M, Fast Forward/
Reverse Lf, Pause M, Record
84
M and Skip Up/Down Jh
Transport Controls are set at the factory
to operate your DVD player, or the controls of a specific device such as a VCR
or CD player when they are selected.
However, by using the Transport PunchThrough feature you may program these
controls to transmit the commands for a
different device. For example, you may
wish to operate the transport of a VCR
connected to the VCR input as the
default, rather than the button for the
internal DVD player, as shown in the
following example.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
Button s to enter the main punchthrough menu branch.
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
TRANSPORT appears on the bottom
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 99. Press the Set Button s
to begin programming the remote for
transport punch-through.
PUNCH-THROUGH
TRANSPORT
Figure 99
4. The next display screen (Figure 100)
is where you select the device that
will receive the punch-through commands. In our example, that is the
System button, as that is where we
want the VCR’s transport controls to
be active. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the name of the
base device appears, and then press
the Set Button s.
DEVICE IN USE
M/DVD
Figure 100
5. At the next display screen (Figure
101), you will select the device
whose transport commands will be
used. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Button q until the desired device
name appears to the right of the
device in use. In our example, that is
the VCR. When the desired combination of devices appears, press the Set
Button s.
PUNCH-THROUGH
SYS<-M/DVD
Figure 101
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control commands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 102. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
SYS<-M/DVD [TRS]
SAVED
Figure 102
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the transport buttons of
the second device named will be
used when those buttons are pressed
while the master device is in use.
Returning the Transport Control
Settings to Default Operation
If you wish to remove the Transport
Punch-Through so that the transport commands are returned to the factory default
setting, follow the steps shown above,
except that in Steps 4 and 5, select the
same device for both the DEVICE IN
USE on the left side of the bottom line
and the PUNCH-THROUGH device. In
the example used, the display to return
the remote to default settings will appear
as shown in Figure 103.
PUNCH-THROUGH
SYS<-SYS
Figure 103
EzSet Configuration
JBL’s patented EzSet feature makes it easier
than ever to calibrate the output levels on
your new home theater system for maximum playback accuracy. In addition to
automatically setting the levels, the
remote’s LCD display allows the unit to
be used as a direct readout SPL meter.
Complete instructions for using the EzSet
features of the remote are found on page
51 of this owner’s manual.
In most cases, you will find it easier to
access the EzSet capabilities directly by
pressing the SPL Select Button 9
and following the menu prompts as
detailed on page 51. However, there is
one function of the remote that is avail-
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 85
able only through the remote’s menu system being described in this section.
To avoid having the calibration settings
created with EzSet changed accidentally,
the remote allows you to disable the SPL
Select Button 9 on the remote. To
de-activate the button, follow these
steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
SET SPKR LEVELS appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 104. Press the Set
Button s to enter the main EzSet
menu branch.
MAIN MENU
SET SPKR LEVELS
Figure 104
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 105)
press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation Buttons
q once so that EZSET DISABLE
appears in the lower line of the LCD
display.
SET SPKR LEVELS
E ZS ET D I S A B L E
Figure 105
4. Within 5 seconds, press the Set
Button s to disable the SPL
Select Button 9. Once the Set
Button s is pressed, the word
EXITING will flash four times in
the lower line of the LCD display
and then it will return to normal
operation.
Once these steps are completed, when
the SPL Select Button 9 is pressed,
the remote will show EZSET DISABLE
and it will not be activated.
To restore the EzSet feature to normal
operation, repeat the procedure outlined
above, except that in Step 3 you should
press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q
so that EZSET ENABLE appears in the
lower line of the LCD display. When that
display appears, press the Set Button
s and the EzSet feature will be reactivated. You may then press the Remote
Menu Button b to exit the remote’s
menu system and return to normal operation or press the Set Button s again
to immediately use the EzSet feature
to calibrate the system as shown
on page 51.
Renaming
While the names given to the buttons
and inputs on the remote represent recognizable categories of audio/video products, system operation may be easier if
the displays shown in the remote’s LCD
screen are customized to reflect the specific characteristics of a playback source’s
brand name or the new function given to
a specific button when one remote’s controls are programmed into the remote.
The CVR700R2 remote allows you to
change the name of either a master
device or any button on the remote
using the following steps.
Renaming a Device
To rename a specific device/input source
button, follow these steps. For this example, we will show you how to rename the
Device/Input Selector normally shown as
“TV” to “HDTV TUNER.”
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
RENAME appears on the bottom
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 106.
MAIN MENU
RENAME
Figure 106
3. Press the Set Button s and
RENAME DEVICE will appear on
the bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 107. Press the Set
Button q to begin renaming a
device.
RENAME
RENAME DEVICE
Figure 107
4. The next display screen (Figure 108)
is where you select the device that
will be renamed. In our example, that
is the TV button. Press the ⁄ / ¤
Navigation Button q until the
name of the base device appears and
then press the Set Button s.
RENAME DEVICE
TV
Figure 108
5. At the next menu screen, you will see
the device name on the bottom line of
the display with a blinking cursor box
to the right of the device name. Press
the ‹ Navigation Button q to
return the blinking cursor to the far
left side of the display line. You may
then retitle the device name as
shown in the next step.
6. To enter the new name, press the
Alpha Numeric Keys l. The letters above the numbered buttons
indicate which letter or symbol will
appear when the button is pressed
during the renaming process. The first
press of the button will enter the first
letter shown, subsequent presses of
the same button will change the display to the other letters above that
numbered key. For example, since the
first letter we need to rename the
input to HDTV Tuner is an “H,” you
would locate the “H” above the “4”
button, and press the button twice.
The first press shows a “G,” the
second press changes it to an “H.”
Consult the table at the end of this
section to see which characters
pressing a particular button
generates.
7. After you enter the first letter of the
new device name, there are three
options for entering the next
character:
a. To enter a letter that requires a different numeric key to be pressed,
simply press that button. The cursor will automatically move to the
next position and the first letter
accessed by the new button will
appear. Following our example, the
next letter needed is a “D,” so you
would press the “3” button once.
b. To enter a letter that uses the
same numeric key, you must first
press the › Navigation Button
q to move the blinking cursor
block to the next position. Then
press the Numeric Key l as
required to enter the desired letter.
c. To enter a blank space, press the ›
Navigation Button q twice.
The first press will move the cursor
to the right, and the second press
85
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 86
will move the cursor one more
space to the right, leaving a blank
space between the last letter and
the next one.
8. Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all
the needed letters, numbers, characters and spaces.
9. When the text entry is complete,
press the Set Button s. The
LCD display will blink DEVICE
RENAMED three times and then
return to normal operation.
Once a device is renamed you will see
the new name on the top line of the
remote’s LCD display whenever the
Input//Device Selector 3 is pressed,
or when any other command/function
button on the remote is pressed after the
main Device Selector is pressed. Note
that renaming a device in the remote will
not change the name of the input used
by the on-screen menu system of the
CVR700.
NOTES ON RENAMING DEVICES:
• To move the cursor to the right or left
of the display during the renaming
process, press the ‹ / › Navigation
Buttons q as required.
• The table below shows the letters,
numbers and characters that may be
accessed by pressing the Numeric
Keys:
Key Characters Key Characters
1
[,],/,1
6
M,N,O,6
A,B,C,2
7
P,Q,R,S,7
2
D,E,F,3
8
T,U,V,8
3
4
G,H,I,4
9
W,X,Y,Z,9
5
J,K,L,5
0
-,.,#,0
There is a limit of nine characters (including spaces) for any new device or button
name.
• Renaming a device changes the name
of the device only, not any of the individual key functions within that device
memory. To change the name of an
individual device, follow the instructions in the next section.
86
Renaming Individual Buttons
Thanks to the programming flexibility of
the CVR700R2 remote, an individual button on the remote may be assigned a feature or function that is different from the
name that appears as the factory default
when the button is pressed. With the
Rename Button function, it is possible to
rename almost any button on the remote
so that when the button is pressed you
will see a more descriptive or appropriate
name displayed.
To rename a specific button on the
remote, follow these steps. For instance,
this example will show you how to program the remote so that FULL SCREEN
appears in the remote’s LCD display when
you press the Tone Button H while in
CABLE mode to match the original cable
remote. Of course, remember that you
will first have to learn the codes for that
function into the Exit button, following
the instructions shown on page 78.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
RENAME appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 106.
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
RENAME BUTTON appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 109. Press the Set
Button s to continue.
RENAME
RENAME BUTTON
Figure 109
4. The next display screen (Figure 110)
is where you select the device within
which the button to be renamed
exists. Press the ⁄ / ¤ Navigation
Buttons Q until the name of the
base device appears. In our example,
since we want to rename a button
within the DVD device memory,
DVD/MAIN should appear in the
lower line of the LCD. When the
desired device name appears, press
the Set Button S.
SELECT A DEVICE
DVD/MAIN
Figure 110
5. At the next menu screen you will
select the first button within the
device to be renamed, as instructed
in the display shown in Figure 111.
Select the button (in this case, the
Exit/Cancel Button H) by simply
pressing it on the remote.
PRESS A BUTTON
Figure 111
6. Depending on whether or not the button pressed already has a named
function within the device selected,
one of two things will happen.
a. If the button to be renamed already
has a pre-programmed, or previously renamed title in the remote’s
memory, you will see that name on
the top line of the LCD display, and
a blinking block cursor will appear
on the far left side of the bottom
line of the display, as shown in
Figure 112.
b. If the button to be renamed does
not have a function in the device
selected, the top line of the LCD
screen will be blank, and a blinking
block cursor will appear on the far
left side of the bottom line of the
display.
EXIT
Figure 112
7. To enter the new name for the button,
press the Alphanumeric Keys l.
The letters above the numbered buttons indicate which letters or symbols
will appear when the button is
pressed during the renaming process.
The first press of the button will enter
the first character shown, subsequent
presses of the same button will
change the display to the other letters above that numbered key. For
example, since the first letter we
need to rename the Exit button to Full
screen is an “F,” you would locate the
“F” above the “9” button, and press
the button four times. The first press
shows a “D,” and subsequent presses
step through the other letters available until the “F” appears. Consult
the table at left to see which
characters are available by pressing
a particular button.
8. After you enter the first letter of
the new device name, there are
three options for entering the next
character:
a. To enter a letter that requires a different numeric key to be pressed,
simply press that button. The cursor will automatically move to the
next position and the first letter
accessed by the new button will
appear. Following our example, the
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 87
next letter needed is a “U,” so you
would press the “8” button twice.
b. To enter a letter that uses the
same numeric key, you must first
press the › Navigation Button
q to move the blinking cursor
block to the next position. Then
press the Alphanumeric Key l
as required to enter the desired
letter. This is the way you would
enter the second “L” in the word
“FULL”.
c. To enter a blank space, press the ›
Navigation Button q twice.
The first press will move the cursor
to the right, and the second press
will move the cursor one more
space to the right, leaving a blank
space between the last letter and
the next one.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to
complete entering the needed letters,
numbers, characters and spaces.
10. When the text entry is complete,
press the Set Button s. The new
name will be entered into the
remote’s memory, replacing the
default name.
11. At this point, you have two options:
a. The screen shown in Figure 113
will appear, prompting you to continue renaming. Press the Set
Button s to select CONTINUE.
RENAME BUTTON
CONTINUE
with which it is used. There is a limit
of nine characters (including spaces)
for any new device or button name.
Resetting the Remote
Depending on the way in which the
remote has been programmed, there may
be a situation where you wish to totally
erase all changes that have been made
to the remote and return it to the factory
defaults. You may do that by following
the steps shown below, but remember
that once the remote is reset, ALL
changes that have been made, including
programming for use with other devices,
learned buttons, macros, punch-through
settings and button names, will be
erased and any settings you had previously made will have to be reentered.
To erase all settings and reset the remote
to the original factory default settings
and displays, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display 2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button s appears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button s will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ / ¤ Navigation Button q until
USER RESET appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown
in Figure 114.
Figure 113
The remote will return to the PRESS
A BUTTON menu option (Fig. 111)
as shown in Step 6. Repeat the instructions in Steps 6 though 11 to
rename the next button.
b. If you have no additional buttons to
rename, press the ⁄ Navigation
Button o until the menu screen
displays EXIT on the bottom line
of the display. Press the Set
Button s to return the remote
to normal operation.
NOTES ON RENAMING KEYS:
• Renaming a button does not change its
function. You may change the function
of an individual button by “learning” a
new code into the remote. See page 78
for more information.
• When a button is renamed, it will only
apply to the specific device selected in
Step 4. The same button may be renamed
as needed for each individual device
MAIN MENU
USER RESET
Figure 114
REMOTE RESET
COMPLETE
Figure 116
If the remote locks up for some reason
and you wish to reset it without losing
any programming or removing and replacing the batteries, you may perform a soft
reset by removing the cover from the battery compartment and gently pressing the
small black rectangular button labeled
“RESET”. This should return the remote to
normal operation.
Additional Notes on Configuring and
Operating the Remote
• In normal operation, the last selected
device will appear in the upper line of
the LCD Information Display 2.
After one minute with no activity, the
remote will go into standby mode and
the display will go blank to conserve
power. Simply press any button to
return the remote to normal operation.
• When the remote is being programmed,
it will automatically time-out if no button
is pressed within a 30-second period.
The message shown in Fig. 117 will
appear briefly, and the remote will then
exit the feature being programmed and
any data entered will be lost.
TIME OUT OR
REM KEY PRESSED
Figure 117
3. Press the Set Button s to reset
the remote. Note that once the Set
button is pressed, the process may
not be stopped. A RESETTING...
message will appear in the upper line
of the remote’s LCD screen, as shown
in Figure 115, while the remote’s
memory is being cleared. It may take
a few minutes for the reset process
to take place, and the length of time
will vary depending on how much
customization and programming has
taken place. Please be patient; as
long as the message appears in the
display the remote is functioning
properly.
RESETTING...
Figure 115
4. When the remote has been totally
reset and returned to the factory
default condition, a REMOTE RESET
COMPLETE message will appear
(Figure 116) briefly, and then the
remote will return to normal
operation.
• The programming or configuration
process may also be stopped at any
time by pressing the Remote Menu
Button b. The message shown
in Figure 117 will appear, the data
entered in the current process will be
lost and the remote will return to normal operation. Any process that was
underway when the button will be
pressed must be restarted.
• In most situations, you may press the
Exit/Cancel Button H to simply
exit the current function and return to
the previous menu screen. The Cancel
function is not always available, in
which case you may need to exit
the remote's menu system altogether
by pressing the Remote Menu
Button B.
87
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 88
• Extensive use of the programming,
learning and configuration functions of
the remote may consume significantly
more battery power than normal remote
operation. While the batteries should
last for four to six months in normal
operation, you may find that they need
to be changed sooner after the remote
is programmed for the first time.
• When the batteries approach a level
below which the remote will not function, the remote’s LCD screen will display a LOW BATTERY warning as
shown in Figure 118. We strongly recommend replacing the batteries as
soon as this message appears to avoid
the loss of programming and configuration settings. These settings are not
lost when the batteries are changed
quickly.
DVD/MAIN
LOW BATTERY
Figure 118
• The remote has a built-in backlight that
may be activated by pressing the Light
Button W. This button is made from
a special “glow” material so that it is
easier to find in dark rooms. This glow
feature does not consume any electricity, but the glow will fade when the
remote is kept in a dark location for an
extended period of time. The “glow”
feature may be restored by placing the
remote in normal room light for a few
hours.
• The remote’s backlight will remain lit
for approximately 5 seconds after the
Light Button W is pressed, and it
will stay lit for another 5 seconds if
any key is pressed while the backlight
is on. You may keep the backlight lit by
holding the Light button, but extensive
use of the backlight will reduce battery
life.
• The LCD display will remain on for 10
seconds after a key is pressed and
then turn off to conserve battery life.
• When any button is held for more than
30 seconds, the LCD will turn off and
the remote will stop transmitting the
codes to conserve battery life.
Programmed Device Functions
88
Once the CVR700R2 remote has been
programmed for the codes of other
devices, press the appropriate Input
Selector 345 to switch the
remote to control the audio section of the
CVR700 (System Selector 5), the
CVPD50 screen (Screen Selector 4),
the internal DVD/CD changer of the
CVR700 (DVD Selector 3) or to control additional products. When you press
any one of the selectors, its name will
appear on the upper line of the LCD
Information Display 2 to indicate
that you have changed the device being
controlled.
When operating a device other than the
CVR700 or CVPD50, the controls may not
correspond exactly to the function printed
on the remote or button. Some commands, such as the volume control, are
the same as they are with the CVR700.
Other buttons will change their function
so that they correspond to a secondary
label on the remote. For example, the
Slow Play controls also function as the
Channel Up and Channel Down controls
when operating most TV sets, VCRs or
cable boxes. The Channel Up/Down
indication is printed directly on the
remote. For many standard CD players,
cassette decks, VCRs and DVD functions,
the standard function icons are printed
on top of the buttons. For some products,
however, the function of a particular button does not follow the command printed
on the remote. Even though the name of
the function will appear on the lower line
of the LCD Information Display 2
when the button is pressed, in order to
conveniently see which function a button
controls before you press it, consult the
Function List tables on pages 89–91.
To use those tables, first check the type
of device being controlled (e.g., TV, VCR).
Next, look at the remote control diagram
in Figure 119. Note that each button has
a number on it. To find out what function
a particular button has for a specific
device, find the button number on the
Function List and then look in the column
for the device you are controlling. For
example, button number 37 is the Zoom
button for the CVR700’s internal DVD
changer, but it is the Memory button for
the tuner; the +100 button for many TVs,
VCRs, HDTV tuners and PVRs, and the
Enter button for many video game consoles and D-VHS players.
NOTE: The numbers used to describe the
button functions in Figure 119 for the purposes of describing how a button operates are a different set of numbers than
those used in the rest of this manual to
describe the button functions for the
main remote.
Figure 119
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
39
41
42
43
44
46
45
47
49
48
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
60
62
61
63
57
59
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Game/Cam
DR
DVI/Comp
Test
Surr
Dolby
DTS Surr
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT Sel
Screen Sel
Power On
Power Off
Mute
System Sel
Test Tone
Surround
Dolby
Audio Input
1
2
3
Direct
4
5
6
Tone Mode
7
8
9
SPL
Logic 7
DTS Neo:6
Stereo
DTS Surround DTS Surround
Test Tone
Surround
Dolby
Game/Cam
Game/Cam
Sel
Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp Sel DVI/Comp Sel
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT Sel
Audio Input
Audio Input
1
1
2
2
3
3
Direct/Brigh/Win
Direct
4
4
5
5
6
6
Tone/Color/List Tone Mode
7
7
8
8
9
9
DVD
FM/AM(Tuner)
Aux
VCR
CBL/SAT
06
07
08
09
10
Screen Sel
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Screen
05
Power On
Power Off
Mute
System Sel
FM/AM
(TUNER)
VCR
CD(R)
DVD(R)
DVHS
GAME
4
5
6
List
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
Clear
7
8
9
1
2
3
Track Direct
4
5
6
Track Inc
1
2
3
>
4
4
5
5
6
6
Next Chapter Display
7
7
8
8
9
9
1
2
3
Display
Start Down
Stop Down
Date Down
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
Audio
Next
Power On Power On Power On Power On Power On
Play
Power Off Power Off Power Off Power Off Power Off
Stop
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
System
System
System
System
System
System
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Screen
Screen
Screen
Screen
Screen
Screen
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel DVD Sel
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Tuner Sel Tuner Sel
Tuner Sel Tuner Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam
Game/
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
CamSel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp DVI/Comp DVI/Comp DVI/Comp DVI/Comp
DVI/
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Comp Sel
TV/DVD IEEE1349 Input
L1
Thumb Up CDP Select
Audio
Start Up
L2
Thumb
CDR
Action
Stop Up
Start
Down
Select
Back
Return
Date Up
Repeat
TV
4
5
6
R.A Edit
7
8
9
1
2
3
Index
Effect Off
Memory/
Card Down
PVR
1
2
3
Windows
4
5
6
Return
7
8
9
AOL TV
Live TV
Slow
1
2
3
Jump Up
4
5
6
Jump Down
7
8
9
Mark
CM Skip
Return
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp
Sel
Clear
Thumb Up
Thumb
Down
Window
Screen Sel
Power On Power On
Power Off Power Off
Mute
Mute
System Sel System Sel
TIVO
System
Sel
Screen
Screen Sel
Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Game/Cam
Game/
Sel
Cam Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp DVI/Comp
Sel
Sel
Next
Hope
Audio
Thumb Up
Effect On
Thumb
Down
Memory/
Back
Card Up
Start/Stop
Start/Stop
CAM
SCREEN
4
5
6
100
7
8
9
1
2
3
Caption
PPV
Music
Back
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
Alt
Next
1
2
3
Brightness
4
5
6
Color Temp
7
8
9
Sports
Broadcast
Movies
System
Sel
Screen Sel Screen Sel
Screen
Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Tuner Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Sel
Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam
Sel
Sel
Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp DVI/Comp DVI/Comp
Sel
Sel
Sel
Info
Clear
Bypass
SAT
Power On Power On
Power Off Power Off
Mute
Mute
System Sel System Sel
CBL
Audio Input
1
2
3
Direct
4
5
6
Tone Mode
7
8
9
Logic 7
DTS Neo:6
Stereo
DTS Surround
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp
Sel
Test Tone
Surround
Dolby
Screen Sel
Powerr On
Power Off
Mute
System Sel
SYSTEM
1
2
3
Program
4
5
6
Help
7
8
9
Caption
Aspect
MTS
Back
DVD Sel
Tuner Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Comp
Sel
Dash
Caller ID
Quick
Screen Sel
Power On
Power Off
Mute
System Sel
HDTV
4:24 PM
SPL
SPL
Logic 7/Sports
Logic 7
DTS Neo:6/B’Cast DTS Neo:6
Stereo/Movies
Stereo
All On
All Off
Mute
System
01
02
03
04
DVD
(MAIN)
12/17/04
18
19
20
21
BUTTON
NAME
NO.
CVR700R2 Remote Function List Table
CVR700 OM
Page 89
89
Left
Right
Down
Exit/Cancel
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
53
54
55
56
57
58
50
48
49
Play
Random/LtrBox
Repeat/Frame
Title/Freeze
A-B/Auto
OSL/Favorite
DVD Setup/PIP
/Swap
Play
Random
Repeat
Title
A-B
OSL
DVD Setup
Rew/Tune Down Scan Backward
FF/Tune Up
Scan Forward
Rec
Stop
Stop
Pause
Pause
Status/Settings/-/– Settings
Slow Up
Vol Down
Play
Random
Repeat
Title
A-B
OSL
DVD Setup
Stop
Pause
Settings
Tune Down
Tune Up
Slow Up
Vol Down
Ch/Pic/Slow Up
Vol Down
Left
Right
Down
Exit/Cancel
OSD
Tuning Mode
0
Memory
Level/Guide
Up
Menu/Info
51
52
Left
Right
Down
Exit/Cancel
41
42
43
44
OSD
Angle
0
Zoom
Level/Guide
Up
Menu/Info
FM/AM
(TUNER)
Set
Set/Enter
Set/Enter
Distance/Last Ch Distance/Last Ch Distance/Last Ch
Preset/Page Down Skip Backward/ Preset Down
Pic–
Vol Up
Vol Up
Vol Up
Preset/Page Up Skip Forward/ Preset Up
Pic+
Ch/Pic/Slow Down Slow Down
Slow Down
OSD/Contrast
Angle/Tune(*)
0
Zoom/Mem(#)
Guide/Level
Up
Menu/Info
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
DVD
(MAIN)
CD(R)
DVD(R)
DVHS
Favorite
PIP/
PIP Swap
Favorite
PIP/
PIP Swap
Repeat
Random Play
Title/Info
Repeat
OSL
Setup
VCR/TV
Navi
Video
Input
OSD
Prev Chapter OSD
Select
Angle
Rec Link
0
0
0
0
+100
(+10)
Zoom
Enter
Guide/Display Intro Scan
Chapter Rec Speed
Up
Up
Up
Up
Menu/Program Menu
Disc Menu Menu
VCR
GAME
CAM
TIVO
Left
Right
Down
Exit
OSD
*
0
#
Guide
Up
Menu/Info
CBL
0
Info
Up
Menu
0
Guide
Up
Menu
Rew
FF
Record
Stop
Pause
Instant
Replay
Play
Ch Up
Vol Down
Ch Down
Vol Up
Next Clip
Play
Rew
FF
Record
Stop
Pause
Settings
Ch Up
Vol Down
Ch Down
Vol Up
Page Up
Favorite
Play
Rew
FF
Record
Stop
Pause
Info
Ch Up
Vol Down
Ch Down
Vol Up
Page Up
PIP
Play
LetterBox
Frame
Freeze
Auto
Set/Enter
Left
Left
Right
Right
Down
Down
Exit/Cancel Exit/Cancel
Contrast
SCREEN
OSD
SAT
Select
Select/OK
Enter
Enter/Last Prev Ch/Last Ch Last Ch
Last Clip Page Down Page Down
Left
Right
Down
Exit
Info
AV
0
100
Guide
Up
Menu
PVR
Title
Title
Top Menu Top Menu
A-B
After Record VCR Plus
Audio
X
Zero Set Memory DVD
TIVO
Favorite
Shuffle
Change
PIP
Setup/
PIP On/Off/
Screen
Timer Record PIP Swap
Display
Display
Info
Angle
Photo
Angle
0
0
0
0
100
Enter Zoom/Search Mode 100
Guide
Data Code
Guide
Up
Up
Up
Up
Menu
Menu,
Menu
Menu/List
DVD Menu
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Exit/Cancel
Cancel
Clear
Clear
</Cancel
Exit/
Cancel
Exit
Cancel/Next
Set/Enter
Set/Enter Set/Enter
Set/Enter
Enter
Select
Set/Enter
Select
Last Ch Prev Ch/Last Ch
Last Ch/Prev Ch
Info
Enter/Last
Scan Down
Skip
Skip
Index
Skip
Skip
Last Clip
Backward Backward
Down
Backward
Backward
Vol Up
Vol Up
Vol Up
Vol Up
Vol Up
Scan Up
T (Zoom In)
Vol Up
Scan Up
Skip
Skip
Index
Skip Forward
Skip
Next Clip
Forward
Forward
Up
/Prev
Forward
Ch Down
Ch Down
Slow Down Ch Down
Slow
Scan/Slow
Ch
Down
Down
Down
Ch Up
Ch Up
Slow Up
Ch Up
Slow Up Scan/Slow Up Ch Up
Vol Down
Vol Down Vol Down
Vol Down
Vol
Scan
W (Zoom Out)
Vol
Down
Down
Down
Rew
Rew
Rew
Rew
Rew
Rew
Rew
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record, In/Out Record
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Action
Continuous
Status
Back
Return/
Memory
Instant
Info
Replay
Play
Back
Play
Play
Play
Play
Play
Play
Play
Play
TV
OSD/Display
Status
Vol Down
Vol Up
Set/Enter
Distance
Left
Right
Down
Exit/Cancel
Level
Up
0
OSD
SYSTEM
HDTV
Freeze
Search
Favorite
PIP/
PIP Swap
Play
Rew
FF
Record
Stop
Pause
Info
Ch Up
Vol Down
Ch Down
Vol Up
Set/Enter
Last Ch
Left
Right
Down
Exit/Cancel
OSD/Display
Ratio
0
100
Guide
Up
Menu
4:24 PM
45
46
47
BUTTON
NAME
90
12/17/04
NO.
CVR700 OM
Page 90
DVD
(MAIN)
Audio
Subtitle
Sleep
Night
Program
Disc Skip
Disc Direct
FM/AM
(TUNER)
VCR
CD(R)
DVD(R)
DVHS
TV/VCR
Sleep
PIP Ch
Down
TV/VCR Input Select Subtitle On/Off TV/Video
Slow
Time Subtitle On/Off Timer
PIP Ch/
Prog Down
Program Disc/Top Menu Program
Disc Skip
Disc Skip Skip Search
Disc Direct
Q.V
PIP Ch Up PIP Ch/Prog Up
Rec Length
TV
Î
Í
⁄
Time
Subtitle
Program
R1
R2
GAME
TIVO
TV/Input
Slow/Natural Rec Clear
Edit
TIVO
X2
Skip
Display Date CM SKIP
Quick Rec
CAM
PVR Replay
PVR List
PVR Live
PIP Ch Up
CBL
VCR Plus
Dual
CATV
A/Yes
B
C/NO
TV/Input
TV/Cable
Slow
PIP Move
Quick Record PIP Ch Down
Repeat
Skip
Live TV
DVD
PVR
TV/SAT
SAT
Screen Saver
Input Select
Screen Standby
SCREEN
Sleep
Night
Audio
SYSTEM
TV/VCR
Sleep
PIP Ch
Down
Replay
List
CC/Date
PIP Ch Up
HDTV
4:24 PM
Light
M1/A
M2/B
M3/C
PVR Replay/Prog Program
PVR List/D.Skip
Disc Skip
PVR Live/D.Direct Disc Direct
PIP Ch+/Rem Menu
Audio/Screen Saver Audio
Subtitle/TV-Video Subtitle
PIP Move/Sleep
Sleep
PIP Ch-/Night
Night
BUTTON
NAME
12/17/04
74
75
76
77
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
NO.
CVR700 OM
Page 91
91
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:24 PM
Page 92
PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R1 REMOTE
In addition to its powerful CVR700R2
remote control, the JBL Cinema Vision
system also includes a smaller CVR700R1
remote intended for everyday use. This
remote features many of the same func43 45 47 49
51 53
tions as the main remote, including the
42 44 46 48 50 52
capability of controlling most popular
39 41
brands of audio35
and 37
video
equipment,
37 41
34 36 38 40
such as CD players,
cable boxes, digital
36 40
33 26 25 37
recording devices, VCRs, satellite
35 39
32 27
43 45 47 49
51 24
53 36
55 57
receivers and HDTV
set-top tuners, 34
but in
31 28
38
42 44 46 48
50 23
52 35
54 56
a more compact30design. 22
33
Direct Code Entry
This method is
the easiest way to51 53
43 45 47 49
43
45 your
47 remote
49
51to 53
program
work55with57
42 44 46 48 50 52
42
44
46
48
50
52
45 47 49
5154 5356 55
different43products.
ume, channel and transport controls
work as they should. If functions do
not work properly, you may need to
use a different remote code.
55 57
54 56
57
35 37 39 41
35 37 4239 4441 46 48 50 52 54 56
1.
the tables
in the
pages
41 47 517. If a code cannot be entered to turn
37
34 36
38 following
40
55 34
57Use
51
36 3538 3740 39 37
41 41 47 code
36
to
determine
the
three-digit
or
33
2636254051
374653 5055 4057 46 50 the unit off, if the code for your prod54 33
56 26
43
45
3747
37 4135 4739 5145 49
3425
36
38 49
40
32match
uct does not appear in the tables in
codes
that
both
the
27
3645product
24
4954 56
32 27
42
48 4739
5036
3646 4535
33244426
43
49 524051
53 5044
55 48
57
37
25
31
34 4638
this manual, or if not all functions
(e.g.,
VCR,
and
the
specific
23
28TV)
35
51 type
34
44
47 31
38
48
28
3539 4441
43 4345 4547 4749 49 51 5153 5355 5557 57
35
35
4943
32233727
42
46 34
48 39
50
54 56
36
24
30
33 4552
22
operate properly,
try programming
name.
If29
there
is more
than
one
46 30
33
43
50 brand
22
29
34
41
51
42 4244 4446 4648 48 50 5052 5254 5456 56
31
34
44
47 48
37
34 3628
38
40
38
2330
35
29
35
37
39
41
42
32
21make
33
43Auto
45Search
47 49
51 53 55
the
remote
with
the
for
a
brand,
note
of
the
45 29
49 number
32
42
30
33 22 37
302126
36
33
434150 47 51
33
35 3537 3739 3941 41
29
28
3746
3425
36 34
38 32
40 40 31
31
20
42 44 46 48 50 52 54
Method.
choices.
44 28
48 different
31
3132
32 21 36
292027
32 39 3645
424049 46 50
30
34 3436 3638 3840 40 37 3741 4147 4751 51
3324 26 3325 35
37
43
35 37 39 41
34
28 28
31
34
38program
35 37 39 41 29
Auto Search33Method
the
unit
you
31to
313223
32
20
3544 3948 45 49
43 2.
45Turn
47on49
512735
5324wish
55
57
25 2537 37 36 3640 4046 4650 50
36
3326 26
29
32
42
37 41 47
The
remote
is capable
34 36in the
38
21
30
30the29
43
33
41 33
51
37control
47
22
34 CVR700R1
36 38 40
35 40
34
39 3945 4549 49
If
the
unit
you
wish
to
include
into
secondary
remote.
32
31
44
34
27 24 36 36
42 44 46 48 5028 5223 5435 56
38 45 47
48 49
28
43
51 5332 5527
5724 26 25 35
36 40 46
31
33
31
32
20
of33operating
up
to
nine
devices,
including
29
37
42
32
36
46
121 33
2
3
4
5
40
50
34 3438
3030
listed
code
in 3844 4448 48
26 25 37
436 remote is not31
23 23
28in the
35 tables
29
1 Press
3
4 22
5 34
6 33 42 44
35 3.
37
392 41
Input
hold
both
the
5231
56 552735
35 39 45
32
28 and
36
4346 4548 47 504930
515428
53
57
the
order35
to segregate
the
24
39 45 49
31 29720 328 21 31
32 CVR700.
33
43
27 24 In36
22 22
the
does
not seem
29 code
34 34
9 51
1032 11 4212 this manual or if30
41for1151
33
33
47
3730
34 36
388 1 45
40 9 47
29
Selector
the
product
7
10
12
2
3
4
5
31
3443 38 44
43
49
53
55
57
6
35
37
39
41
23
28
35
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
control
31 28commands
44 48the
29 2930you21may
38 device,
28 36
32
42 42
23 35 for34each
33wish
to operate properly,
to
pro31
31 1440
32VCR,
20
46
50
33 26you42
32
21
13
15
16
17
18
30
33
37
25
30
wish
to
control
(e.g.,
TV)
and
43
33
489 471750
47 51 29 22 34
30 29 logic
13
147 44 43
1546
16
18115154 34
8 45
10
1256 36
33 a separate
43 “page”
49 52
53
55 3538
57 3740 39 37
remote’s
contains
41284128
22 34
31 31
31 31
20 2032
gram the correct
code
using
the
1
2
3
4
5
39 45
49
326 27the24
32Auto
36 19 35
29
Program
Button
at
the
46
36
40
50
42
32
20
21
22
23
24
33
21
30
33
3520 37 42
26 25 3637 38 40
442241
4623 1648 241750 52
32device 42
37 41 47 51
of29commands
called up
213934
30 21 for
33 each
15
18 54 3456
3112 19
44
Search method
that
follows:
38
48
23 13 35 214
28same
28
326
437
549
7
8
9
10
11
39
the
under
31
32
41
28 31
45 light
47
51
53303324
55 2636
5725 35
27
28 476the
2951 27
341 time.
36 3525When
38 43
40
3645 4049 46315020 32
31
32 selector
when
that20
device's
has been
37
39
41
37
26
27
28
29
30
30 25
43
33
21
22
23
24
22 19Selector
29Input
34 20
31
44
34
38
48
1.
Turn
on
the
unit
that
you
wish
to
stays
lit,
46
36
40
50
23
28
35
33
7
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
13
14
15
16
17
18
6
35
45
39
49
32
26
37
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
41
51
27
36
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
47
37
pressed. For example, in order to access
3634 38354240 36
24
29 31
3326 32
30 213225 33 34
27
29 4530
3049
432
33in the
1 34
3 484
5
6
22 include
35
39
2912
release
the33
buttons.
is2839
important
remote.
32 27
31
36
38 2 44
24
35
37It42
1
3
4
5
19 control
20 the
21 CVPD50
22
23
36
6
7 31
46 1840
5050 28
5234 23
54 35
56
1437
15
1639
1741
9 44
10
1148 4642
388 25
40
41
the commands that
2824 31 2013 32
26
37
43
45
47
49
51 4253 55 57
37
38
39
40
41
42
29
31 28
32
33next34
34
35
3648 30
32
21
31you
44
33
38
30
that
begin
the
step
within
23
33
43
35
41
51
7
8
9
10
11
12
47
37
34
36
38
40
22
4548 492.29Press the
35
39
34Input7 Selector
32
25
26 or PIP,
27 you
28 must
29
30
272144
36 37
for
screen,
such
as
Letterbox
24
35
39
41
19
20
2245
2346
24
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
43
47
6
13
14
15
16
17
18
42 2044 3246 31
48 50 52 54 56
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
43 20 30
4437 29 4538
46
39 4733
40 48413443 38
42 31
34
seconds.
46 30
4029
5021
32 14 to be
42
3122 33
44
33
48
2634
37 38 3036
25 36
23
2827
35
41
51
13
15 entered
16
17
18
the
type
of
product
and
47
37
Selector
first press the Screen
40
31
32
33
34 , 35
36
25
26
28
29
19
20
21
22 42 23
24
13
147
15 8
16 9
17 10 1811
12
35
37 49
39 41
29 43 303044
2845
32
21 32
7
8
9
10
11
12
39
31
4522
46
4733
48 43
32
20
2733
36
24
2933
34
46
36 31
40
50
Program
Button
at22the 23
the
remote
toward
the26unit
to35
be
and an orange light
20 4721 51
24
37 34
37 underneath
38
39 that
40 but-41
42 4. Point
2831the
3225
3326 34
36 48
38 40 193719 41
276 35 28 25 3634
29 38
30 44
2013
2114 2215 23 16 2417
31
31
32
20
18
31
29
1
2
3
4
5
42
32
23
28
35
21 32the
14 45
15 47 16
17 51 another
18
49 press
53 55 57
30 enter
33 27
45 time.
39
49 Hold both
36 3335
same
buttons
the 30
programmed,
and
first
threeton13will 43
light.
When
24
26 5346
27 50 28until 29
43 you
44
45
46
47
48
37
3831 303932 4033
41 34 4233
26 4525 4737 492536255140
28
35
36 43
2619 55272057 2821 29 22 3023
43
22
24
29
34
31
31
32
20
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
31
44
34
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
7
8 code
9 using
10 the11Numeric
12 28
1 49 2 51 38
3 light
19
21
22that
6 Input
2347 35
red
under
the32
Selector
43
45Keys
53
5543648
573153550
43 45
4723is used
49 24 to
51con53 55 57 digit
button
on20the remote
45
32 42
46
48
56
34 5135 53 3655 57
4331 39
4552
47335449
49
43
4538 3030
4639
4733
4227 442443
21 29
37 29
40 22 4832
41
4233
3225
33
26 34
27 35 28 3629
30
4452 4654 134856 50
52the44
54
56
39 light
42
46 34
52
5410
56
42
44
26 3727
284146
29 48 304250the
unit
turns
correct
stays
lit.
The
next
step
must
trol25the 35
screen,
the
underneath
14 . If 15
16 28
17 off,
18the44
44
34
7 48 31850
9
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
38
23
28
35
35
37
39
41
3742 44
38
39 48
40 50 41 52 4254 56
46
48
31
31
32
20
29
43
49 41 34
51 4253
5536
43
44
45 30
4621 6 4733
4832
37
3831 45393247 4033
42
41
51
47
37
35
34
36
38
40
35
37
39
41
1
2
3
4
5
30
code
has
been
entered.
Press
the
take
place
while
the
light
is
on,
and
it
Screen
Selector
43 47
33
35
35 37
3935 blink
41 36 to con31
32
33
34 will
19
20
21
22
23
24 37 39 41 1434
349 4043
7 29 36
1522
1735
18114139
8 3816
10 3744
12 4151
4544
46
47
48 52 54
28 31 20 13
37
42
48
50
31 must
32
36 40
51
33 2634mode.
37 41 47
4442
453846
4639
47 40
4841
34 46
36 50
38 40
37
37
42
51within
begin
seconds
3730 41
324336 20
firm
364 and
38
21 47
11
125 40 29
330again,
33 37
6 33
37 the current
38
39 25 36
40 3841 40 42 37 41 4725 51 Input
46
40
50after
26 7 Selector
27 8 1 28 9 229 1034
41 47 51
26
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
34
13
14
15
16 36
173538 37
18 40 39 37
35 39
49
32 273324 36
46
36
40
50
41
333645
28
2640 2546 3750 note that the red light will
46
36
40
50
33 flash
31
31
32
the
light
appears.
three
20
43
44
45
46
47
48
26
37
26
37
25
25
45
35
39
49
43
44
45
46
47
48
27
122632 27
46
36
Programming
Product
31
32 13 33 147 34 15 835 16 936 17 10 1811
25
28 362933 30233425 36
31
34 Codes
19
20 24
24 37 38 40 40 37 4150 47
35 39 45 491
38
323544
283223 2735
273948
45 21 49 22 3426
356 39
2445 3649 times
232
3
27
before
going
dark
to
confirm
244the36 5 31
24 36
44
38
48
23
28
35
3. Point
the
remote
the36unit 35
to be39 3645 4049 46
32 toward
211441 221542 23 16 2417
38
39 20
27
30 is29
1340 48
183225
313443
44
3419 38
31
3427 4835 28 36
The remote
factory-programmed
all
26 44
293324 30
2838 2344373548 entry.
26 25 37
31 28
34 33
3122 283423 33
38
35 for
If the Input
43
33 press
7 Selector
81
9 2 23
10 3 3511 4 30 125programmed,
6
29 22
34 31
⁄ 38 44 48
and
283223either
35 the34
3033
42
43
3325 45 26
43
44
46 2720
47 2830
48 29 22 3023
22
303021as29well
3322as32
19
21
24
27
36 or 35 39 45
29
34
CVR700 29
functions,
those
of
JBL
37
38
39
40
41
42
24
43
33
43
22 34 31
32 21 33
34 32 35
36
34
29 ¤
flashes nine times
instead
of29
three
42
30
33 430
33
22
28 31 20 32
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
8
9
10
11
12
29
34
Button
.
Each
press
will
send
29
1
2
3
5
31
6
3443 38 44
31
42
3231
28 23 35
30 2142 33
32
3326 3429
3629
DVD players. In29
addition,
by following
42
32 45
25
27 3530
32 one
21
28
43 33 304437
4639324729
30 21
33
40 314841
3138 20
it means
that
the
code2128was
not
42
32
21 42
3030
33 22
28 31 20 32 times,
out
a
series
of
codes
from
the
remote’s
43
33
19
20
22
23
24
31
28
28
13
14
15
16
17
18
29
34
9
10
11
12
of the methods below,
31
31
37
3831
3932 4033 41
4235 32 367 31 8
31 you
32 program
20
20may
34 to
28
accepted.
Check
the code table
ver43
44
45
46 31
472920 4832
31
built-in
database.
When
the
unit
being
42
32
21
30
33
25
26
27
28
29
30
19
20
21
22
23
24
the remote to operate a wide range of
43 code,
4437and45reenter
14
15
16
17
18
38 4639it. 47
4213
ify the
If40you 4841
28 release
programmed turns off,
the32 31
31 20
31
32
33
34
35
36
devices from
1 other
2 manufacturers.
3
4
5
6
The Input 7Selectors
81
92
10 3 each
11 41 may
125 2
be programmed
with
one
of
several
device
7
13
147
158
16 9
1710
18118
types, as listed in the table below. Unlike
13
19
2013
2114
2215 2316
241714
the main remote control, the device19types 20
25
26
2720
2821 2922
30
on the secondary19remote
control
may not23
25 362926
31
3225
3326
3427 3528
be reassigned. It is important to program
31 423532
37
3831
3932
4033 4134
your external
devices
into
the
correct
cor37 484138
4437 buttons
4538 so
4639
40
responding43 source
that47the
43 be4744
desired remote control
commands
will
43
44
45
46
available for use with your device.
Source
Button
AUX
Device Types
TV, HDTV, VCR, DVD, CD,
Cable, Satellite
VCR
VCR
CBL/SAT Cable, Satellite, HDTV
Game/ Game, Camcorder
Cam
DR
DVD-R, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVD
(DVR/PVR – Personal Video
Recorder)
DVI/
DVI/DVD, DVI/CBL, DVI/SAT,
COMP HDTV
92
The DVD, Tuner, Screen and System selectors may not be reprogrammed.
25
26
27
28
2920
3021
22
23
24
wish to exit43the program
44
45 mode,
46 press
47
4819
1 ⁄ /¤
2 Button
3
4 , as
5 that 6is your indi43 45 47 37
49
51
5339 55 40 57 41
38
42
31
32
33
34
35
3627
4 hold
5 any 6Input Selector
and
254
265
28
29
30
1
2
3
6
63
that the 110correct
42 44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 5154 5356 55 577 cation
2 code12
3 is in 4use. 5
11
43
4437
4538 4639 47 40 4841 8 42 9
for
2
seconds.
9
10
11
12
31
32
33
34
35
36
7
11
12
1243 4535 4737 4939 51
578 52 9 54 10
42 4441 4653 4855 50
56
716Selector
81
92
10 3 ; 11 4
134.47Press
14 48the15Input
17
18
43
44
45
46
37
38
39
40
41
42
1634
17 video
18 game
NOTE:
Since
consoles
and
44
4838
5441
47
40
13
15
16
17
18 under it will flash three
181542
434636
4535
473750
49395237
51
535614
55 51
57
41
19 the20light 21
22
23
24
13
147
15 8
16 9
17 10
44
45
46
47
48
camcorders
do
not
have
Off
codes,
36
46 21
2135
2233
23
24
37
41
26
37
25
51 times
19 40
20544150
23
24
4239
4434
4636
4838Power
50
5237
5647 4322
24
before
going
dark
to30
confirm
40
25
26
27
28
29
19
20
21
22
23
13
14
15
16
35execute
45the49
look for
your37
game
device
to
36
4739 51
36
4024
2734
2832
30
36
50 the
33
25
26 40 27 46 28
29 entry.
30
35382927
392637
412541 37
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
25
26
27
28
29
31
34
44
19
20
21
22
“Stop”
and
your
camcorder
4638 50
36
28
35 to3948
49 35
26function,
3723
5145 34
3333 34
35
36
36
3425
3632
382735
402440 37
31 41 3247 33
36 the functions on the remote
36
all of
30the29
43
375. Try 38
39
40
41
42
22 28
31
3225
3326 3427 35 28
45 4049
35 23
3933
34
execute
“Zoom
In”
function.
32
31
44
34
27
36
38
48
24
36
46
50
35
33
39
40
41
42
26 25 37
37
38
39
40
41
42 certain that the product oper42
to
make
29
42
21 2933
31 2832233030
44
34 223832
48
43
44
45
46
47
48
37
38
3932 4033 41 34
43
33
35
31
35 39 in
45 49
34
to be36programmed
24
45 5. If46the
47 27 48
28 device
Keep
in mind that many manu43
47
48
48
30 29
20 3032
43 324444 4542 46 ates.
33 21 31
29
2231
34
31
34
43
44
45
33
38
48
37
38 4639 47 40
23off,35continue to enter
does NOT28turn
facturers use a number of different
29 303021 28
42 31 43
33 223132
32
20
33
29
34
codes until the equipment
43
46
28 three-digit
combinations of codes,
and 44it is a45
31 20 32 21 31
32 correct
42
33
turns29off.30At this
point,
the
good
idea
to
make
certain
that
not
28
2 20entered.
332 4 31
5 the 6
code1has31been
Press
only the power control works, but also
Input7 Selector
81
92
10 3 again
11 4 and
125
6
the volume, channel and transport
1 note 2that the
3 light
4 under
5 the6 Input
13
147
15 8
16 9
17 10 1811
12
controls, as appropriate. If all func7 Selector
81
92
10 3 will
11 4flash
125three6
tions do not work properly, you may
19
2013
2114 2215 23 16 2417
18
times147before
going
dark
to confirm
13
15
16
17
18
8
9
11
12
need to Auto-Search for a different
25
2619
2720
2810
29
30
21
22
23
24
the entry.
code, or enter a code via the Direct
19
2013
21
23
24
14 22
16
17
18
31
3225
3315
34
35
36
26
27
28
29
30
6.25 Try all
functions
on
the
remote
Code Entry method.
2619of the
27
29
30
20 28
22
23
24
37
3831
3921
40
41
42
32
33
34
35
36
to
make
certain
that
the
product
oper31
3225
33
35
36
26 34
43
4437
4527
38 4628
39 4729
40 4830
41
42
ates38properly.
Keep in mind that many
37
3932 4033 41 34 4235
31
36
43
44
45
46
47
manufacturers use a number of differ- 48
43
4437
4538 4639 47 40 4841
42
ent combinations of codes, so it is a
43
44
45
46
47
good idea to make certain that not 48
only the power control, but the vol-
6
125
6
1811
12
2417
18
3023
24
3629
30
4235
36
4841
42
47
48
57
56
51
50
49
48
57
56
51
50
49
48
CVR700 OM
43
42
45 47
44 46
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39
36 38
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
25
24
23
22
21
20
2
7
8
13
14
19
20
25
26
31
32
37
38
43
44
12/17/04
4:24 PM
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
Page 93
41 47 51
40 3746 4150 47
39 3645 4049 46
38 3544 3948 45
3443 38 44
3342
43
36 3538 3740 39 37
41
263425 3637 38 36
40
35
273324 2636
25 37
34
283223 2735
24 36
293122 2834 23 33
35
303021 2933 22 32
34
31 2920 32 21 31
30
33
28 31 20 32
43
42
51
50
49
48
45 47 49
51 53 55 57
44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 5154 5356 55
57
35 37 4239 4441 46 48 50 52 54 56
41 47 51
34 36 3538 3740 39 37
41
40 3746 4150 47 51
33 263425 3637 38 36
40
35 39 3645 4049 46 50
32 273324 36
26 25 37
32
42
31 28 23 35
34
44
32 27 24 36 38 35 3948 45 49
4330 4529 4722 49
51 53 5543 57
31
31 2834 23 33
34
38 44 48
35
4229 4430 4621 48
50 52 5442 56
30 2933 22 32
43
33
34
3528 power
3731 29
3920
41
32 CVR700,
1 secondary
2
3remote,
4 press
5 the6 Input
For future reference, enter the setup
on 30
the
42
32the CVPD50
21 31
33 and
37 41 47 51
34 screen
36 28
38will40automatically
codes for the equipment in your system
be triggered
31
31 20 32
7 Selector
81
92
10 3 you
11 4pressed
125 in 6
36 40 46 50
33 26 25 37
here:
Step
2.
It
will
blink
three
times
and
go
to
turn
on
as
well.
13
147
15 8
16 9
17 10 1811
12
35 39 45 49
32 27 24 36
dark,20exiting
learning mode.
2
3
4
5 44 6Input
Source
Device
Product
2.1Pressing
certain
19
2114 2215 23 16 2417
31
34
38
48
13
18
28 23 and
35 holding
43 45 47 49
51 53 55 57
30
Button
Type
Code
will
8.25 Repeat
Steps
1
through
7
for
any
addiSelectors
33
43 125 the 6
7
8
9
10
11
3
4cause
2619
2720 2821 29 22 3023
29 221 34 2
24
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
29 CVR700
switch
to the selected
tional
remotes
you wish to “teach”30
42 1811
217 to33
13 30 14
15 8 32
16 9 17 10
31
3225
3326 3427 35 28 3629
12
AUX
35
37device,
39
28
source
input
and
the
device
into
the
secondary
remote.
31 41
31 20
32
37
3831
3932 4033 41 34 4235
19
20
21
22
23
24
36
13
14
15
16
17
18 51
41
VCR
47
37
34 playing.
36 38 40
will begin
Note
on
43
4437Learning
4538 46Function:
25
2633
27
28
29
30
46
36
40
50
39 47 40 48Remote
41
42
19
20
21
22
23
24
26 25 37
CBL/SAT
and27
hold
the DVD Selector30 49
control signals
can vary
from
one47controller
31a. Press
3232
3326
43
44
45
46
48
2434273635 28 35362939 45
25
GAME/CAM43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 to the next, due to different standard for, and
the 4CVR700
to 48
1 37
2 3831
328
5 41 will
34
6 switch
38 44
3932 23
403335
31
34 4235
36
30
the
internal
DVD/CD
changer
source.
mats
adopted
by
each
manufacturer.
For
43
33
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
22
29
34
7
84437 94538 104639 1147 40 124841
DR
42
43 43 45 47
49
51 53 55 57
29 do
If you
not 21
enter33the number
for42a
example, some manufacturers repeat the
32
30
35 37 39 41
15 44 50
16 45 52
17 46
18 56
4213 44 1446
48
54
DVI/COMP
43
47
disc28
you 31
desire
play, the
31 last 48
20 to32
37 41 47 51 code sequence in the initial transmission,
34 36 38 40
19 37 2039 21
22
23
24
35
41
36 40 46 50 and others insert a special code to identify
played disc will begin playing.
33 26 25 37
41
47
37
34
36
38
40
25
26
27
28
29
30 51
45
35
39
49 the brand or model. Due to the variety of
27 24 36
Learning32Codes
and hold36the40CBL/SAT
3331 b.26Press
3225 37
33
34
35 4636 50
31 28 23 35
34 38 44 48 formats, occasionally an error may occur
, and
1
2 35
339the
4CVR700
6
45
495 will
32 27Selector
In addition to
codes from 33
the
30using
43
37
3824 36
39
40
41
42
29 22 34
in the learning process, even though the
switch
to
the
source
device
connected
31
44
34
38 10 48
23
28
35
code
library,
the
remote
remote’s internal
7
8
9
11
12
29 30
42
32
21 33
CVR700R1 remote has indicated that the
45
46
47
48
3043 29to4422
the
cable/satellite
inputs.
If you
43
33
28 31
is able to “learn”
codes
that
4313 34
45 1447 15
49 16
51 53
31
32 remotes
20 from
17 55 18 57
code was learned correctly. Therefore, it is
29 30have
programmed
the
cable
or
satel42
32
21
33
may not be in the code library. Also, you
4219 44 2046 21
48 50
52
54 56
22
23
recommended that you test the newly
set-top
box’s
remote control 24
3157
32 55
20
43 45 4728 4931lite51
53
may use this function to “learn over”43the 45 47learned
49 codes
51 53
3525 37 2639 27
41 28
with55the 57
source component.
29
the device
on.30
42 44 46 48 codes,
50 52
54 56will be37turned
codes from a preprogrammed device42
to 44 4346If45the
41 47 51
48 47
5049
52 not
54learned
56 55correctly,
34 36 38 40
51
53
57
code
was
try
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
2
3
4
5
6
35 37 39 41
add functions not included in the prepro40 46 50
Selector
c. Press
33and26hold
35 37 4239relearning
25the37VCR 36
4441 46 48
50 52
54several
56 tries,
it.
Usually,
after
37
38
39
40
41
42
51 will
7
10
11
12
37 41the47CVR700
35
39 45
grammed codes.
To 8learn 9or transfer
to 49
36
41 learned
4
5
24
47 51correctly. 34 36 38 1 40 2 32and3 27
6 switch
34 4736 35
38the
40
code
can
49
57
3751
395337
4155be
43 45 47 49
51 53 5543 5745
46
36
43
44
45
46
47
40
50
33
4448 48
34 38
26 25 37 the 31
14 remote
15
16 the33
17sec-26
18
codes from an13 original
to
23
28device
35
source
connected
to the
37 385236
25 3650
7
8
9
10
11
12
48
5646 4150 47 51 32
405440 37
42 44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 515442
45
35
535644
55 46
57 34
39
49
Erasing
Learned
Codes
30
27
36
43
33
24
29 If22
35 39 3645 4049 46 50
ondary remote,
VCR inputs.
you34
have programmed
32 27
19 follow
20 these
21 steps:
22
23
24 24 36
35
39 33
41 26 remote
25 37allows
37 42
39 44
41 46
1434
15 44
16 48 17
18
52 37
54
29 38
you48
to remove or31
erase28 23 1335 the
4935 51
53
55
57 48 50 43
42
32
21
30remote
33
31 4756
44
4529
4923The
51
53345538 57
VCR’s
control
codes, the
28
35
25
26
27
28
30
45
35
39
49
32
1.
Place
the
front
of
the
original
remote
273724413647 51
41
51
34
36
38
40
47
37
34
36
38
40
30
43
33
28
22
19
20
21
22
23
24
34
the50
code
set54for
all55
the 57
codes that have 29
48 50 35
52 37
54 39
56 41
31 be20turned
32 on,31and the
43 4645
47
49
51
53
43
33
42 4430
48
52
56
22
29
34
device
will
31 being
3236 sent
33 so
34
28362340 3546 34
50 38 44 48 29 30 21 33
the
that it35
is 25513631
4633
33with
37
2634
25code
47
3637 38 40 40 37 415026
4325 45 2632
49 4228
51 53
5530 57
programmed
into
specific
device
27
29 39
44
46been
48 47
50
52 51
54
41
42
32
3030
33
43
45
4945
5356
55
play47command
will29be transmitted
35
3742
4121
43 57 28
33
22
29
34
35
39
49
45
35
32
39
49
IR
Transmitter
on
the
the
32facing
37
38
39
40
41
42
27
36
273341
36
24
31 2042 3244 31
46
36 40 35
28 50
46
48
50
52
5436 56
buttons.
51 37
47 25
37 24 26
40
31
31
32
20
31
32
33
34
35
37
41
51
29
4641
4847
34
38
4039
42 5643 45 47 49
32
43 36
45
47 42
49 44
5121
5333
55 50
31
3037
44
34
31secondary
38
4857 52 54
38 to44
remote
“head
head.
”47
The
23
51to it.
53 55 57
283223 43
35 504434
46394828
48 35
45
49
46
24 36 45 35 33
35
37
39
41
41
51
47
37
34
36
38
40
28
3730 36 40 27
46
36
40
50
37
38
39
40
41
all32
within a single
31erase
3042
37
39 52
41codes
26
3748To
44
46 35
5020
54 3156
43
33
256 the3 DR (Digital
4 42
5
22
6
29
42device,
44 46 48 d.
50Press
52 1and
54 hold
293122should
34 23
remotes
be3335
between
and
3 25
44
3443138
48 34
45
49
47 51
46 4150 47 51
36 4540 49
3443 36 4438 45
40 4637 41
33
3629 35 39 28
35
39
32
26
37
25
27
36
29
37
follow
these
steps:
24
47
48
34
363238 4042
42
32
21
35
37
39
41
21
30
33
30
33
30
inches
apart.
Recorder)
Selector
,
and
the
43
33
7
8
9
10
11
12
35 37 39 41
44 22
36 40 46 50
48 34
35 4439 48
49
32 232733
3528 34 38 29
31
36
24 34
28 28
1
2 33 3 26 425 37
5
3645
50
6
51 40the46
31
32
37 hold
31 20 32 21 31
2538
47
37
361 2038 35
2 401.26
331
441
5 both
4113 47
37CVR700
42
32 3034 that
Press
and
will1451
switch
the
Input34Selector
36 38 40
33the remote
43
33 29the30
35 1539to 45
4917
32
31 222832
4463948
16 source
18
38 35
342. Select
button
on
27
36
43
23 2733
3536 34
24
29
34
45
49
36
46
40
50
24
33
7
8
9
10
11
12
28 31 20 32
267 25 8 137 9 2 10333 within
46 5034 to
40 connected
33 26 25 3731 36device
31 29 selector
the
DR48
inputs.
which
the
individual
11
12
4
5
44
30
32wish to42use as the device
6
43
38
33 you
28 2319 35 20
22 2832
2931
3435
42
21
22
23
24
21
30
33
44
34
38
48
23
35
49
32 27
36 button 39
45
35If 16
39 have
4933
13 24 14 36
17 programmed
18
30 15 29
you
to9 be45
erased
has been32
pro- 27
43the DR’s
32 for31the codes about to be entered.
28 3129132024
32
3030
33834
31
7 29
1421
15
17 10
32
3342
45 472225
4934 51
26 5327 55 28 57 29
30
22 16
34 44
31 28 23
38
481811 4312 31 28 23 43
35 grammed
44
34
38
4832
35
29
28
remote
control
and
the
Learn
Button
.
42 device will
1955 20
21 30 2221 33
23
24codes, the
43
45
47
49
51
53
57
1
2 31 29
320 32
4
531
6
1This may
2
4 the 5Input630
be3 any of
42
32
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56 35
19
20
21
22
23
24
21 15
33 4316
33
17
18 30
31
32
33
34
36
29 22 1334 30 14
43
33
22 563428 31be 20
turned
and the play command
31
32
43 8 145 947
49
51 531229
57
42
4431
46 the
48 Input
50 5229
2554 26
27
29 on, 30
under
the
LED
75 55 30
32
919
10
12
20 11
7Selectors
10 3 . 11 4
2
68 21 28
32
37323928 37
4142
25
26
2720
28
29
332.31When
21 42
22 3023
24 29 30 21 35
38
39
40
41
42
33
transmitted
to it. 51
42 44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 28
54 5356 55 57 Selector
35 turns
37 39 release
41
31
32
33 will
34 be
51
the buttons.
49 31
51
57 517
47 46
3736 41
31
4035 44
3255416
3 3. 13
4
1828 on,
75 chosen
14
1568 43
16
9 4517Selector
1047 18113
11
12 2053
31
32
3326
3427 635
3629
Press
the
Input
32 363138 43
30 28 31 20 34
214
31525
45
47
48
51
37 41 37 47 38
35 37 4239 4442
41 4644 4846 50
40
54 2 5654 3 56 4 34 536 38
46 Selector
3642the
e. Press
and
40 AUX
50
40 37
41 hold
48 47
33 39
26
120
25
6the
45
49 52
513. 10
53
55
57
Learn
at523750
the
Press
and
release
Input
Selector
2131
22
23
2434 42
38
39
40
41
2013
2114
2215Button
2343
24719
9 19 10 and
11 the
12
16
17
18
32
33
35
36
8
9
11
12
41
51
46
36
40
50
47
33 26 25 37
34 36 3538 3740 39 37
35448
39 5 45will
and
CVR700
4139 4441
27 24
246 , 36
3 the
35
37buttons
649switch to
43
4432 145
47
42
46 72648 44
50
52
same time.
Hold
these
until
for47
837
9 2 54
10
11
12
1
3 56
4 seconds.
25
27
28
29
303
6
2821 29
45
4639
485
40
20
23 46 43
24
15 25 1633 2619
1726 27
18 37
3622 403013
50 4715
14
1827
2441 36 42 35 39 45 49
25
31 28 the
44 48 to the
34 38connected
41
514716 3851 17 32
37
34
36
38
40
source
device
41
23
35
37
34
36
38
40
the light
under
the
device
7
8
9
10
11
12
35 selector
37
39but32
3373
34
35
36
145
2
48 light
59
646
34 1 38 44
35
33
3427 35
3631
4941
13
14
1544
1631
17
1847
48
10 the
11
12
The
Input
Selector
26
28 39
30
21 31 2232 3225
232733
24 36
23
28
35 48
2
3
30
24
43 programmed
36
40
1929
20
2143504.
23 45 under
22 5 inputs.
4622
36 4640
294 AUX
34 6 33
If you have
33 2526
26
3725
37
4150 47
5124
Release
the
buttons.
on.
ton
turns
34
3637
38 38
40 39 37 43
30
31
13
14
15
16
17
43
33
44
34
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
38
48
40
41
42
22
will
39
4033 41 34 4235
23
29
34 18 and 7go dark,
35
29
19
20 9 452110
2211
23
2417 times
12
357 39
32
36
27 37 28 3831
292832
30 27
42 18 codes,
14 29
15 blink
16three
21 11
358 4539
3010 the
33 12 32
3624 2536
32
8
9
device’s
remote control
242733
26
271349
36 284049 46
5030
26 43
37
25
29
30 the
33
42
32
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
21
22
28
30
33
29
34
4.
Press
button
on
the
secondary
19
20
21
22
23
and
all
of
the
learned
codes
for
that
43
44
45
47
4818
34
4538
4639
31 be turned24on, and the
484446
31 the
32 will
20 device
25
2619
2716
2821 29
31
34
4023 48
42
23284732
35
48 45
33 43 34 4437
35 31
36 28
20
22 3023
24
13 38
14 4438
15
35
3141
35 17
39
14
15
16
17
18
27
28493631 20 32
24 32 36 33 35 34
29 30
42
32program.
31 13
33
3021
remote
that
you
wish
to
35
37
39
41
device
will
have
been
erased.
43
33
25
26
27
28
30
30
22
43
33
34
34
31
3225
3524
44
4622 3747
4820
39
4028 43
41
42 29 45 2931
play23command
will29be transmitted
26 44
27 4842
28 3629
30
34 403338
19 23 38
21
22
413423
35 39
21
22
24
31 2920 29
32 21 31 28
37 41 4719 51 20
34 36 38 40
42
32
30
33
42
32
31
32
33
34
35
36
21
30
33
5 seconds,
press30
and hold
the
33Macros
to it.29
37 34 3831
3928
4033 4130
4235
45 5. Within
46
47
48
32 43
36
43 25 22 44 26
45 27 46
47 29
48 34
27
28
30
28 3128 2031 32 29
4625 50 26
36 40
33 26
31 you
25 37
31
2920 3032
37
38
39
40
41
42
button on the original
remote
that
32
42
33 4437
4534
4639 4736
48
1
2
3
4 the
5 Game/Cam
6
38 macro-type
40 commands
42 have
31 21 43 32
33 Several
been
f.34Press
hold
4531 49
32
32
33
35 and 36
2735
36 4135 39
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
wish to “teach” into the28secondary
31
31 20 32
43
44
45
46
47
48
into the
and48they
3140
43
44 2841
4523 42
46
4734remote,
48 44
37
38
39 preprogrammed
38
8
11 the12CVR700 will
35
37
38
397
40Selector
41 9
4210 , and
1
2
5 the 6
remote.
When
the3 light4 under
7
8
9
10
11
12
3046be29
43 holding
33
activated
and
switch to the source
device
connected
34by pressing
43
44
45 may
47 22 48
17
18
43
44
4513
4614 47 15 4816
Input7 Selector
81
9 12
10 32 blinks.
11 43 1254
65 certain
29
6
32
15described
16 42 below.
17
18
other1321buttons
to
the
Game/Cam
inputs.
If
you have
30
3314 as
19
20
21
22
23
24
28 31 20 remote
31
13 If the
147 Input
15 78 Selector
16 98 1 17 109 2 1811
32
NOTE:
does not allow you
programmed the device's remote
10 3 12
11 4 (The
125 secondary
6 19
flashes
Step155,8 the
19 nine
2013times
2113
2215
241716 9
14during
147 23 16
programming
not
successful.
25
2619 was
2719
28
29
20
21
22
2013
2114 3023
2215
Repeat
the32steps
to
see
whether
the
31
33
34
35
25
26
27
28
25
2619
2720 3629
2821
code37will “take.
”39 40 41
38
42
31
32
31
33
3225
34
3326
35
3427
6. Repeat
6 for each
43 Steps
4437 4 through
4537
38 4639
3831 47 40
3932 4841
4033
button on the
source
remote
that
you
43
44
45
43
4437 46
4538 47
4639
wish to transfer to the remote.
43
44
45
7. Once all codes have been transferred
from the original source remote to the
23
24
program
new macro
functions.)
18
26
27
28
29
17 10 to 18
11
1225
20
21
22
30
32
33
34
35On 36
holding
the Power
or 24Power
Off 4 39 buttons
will 42
237
3 38
5 40 6 41
execute
the Power
or Power
48
9 44 On
1045(All)
11 46
1247
36
297
30843
Off (All) commands to either turn on
4235
13
14
15
16
17
18
36
or turn off all devices whose product
4841
42
19
20
21
22
23
24
codes have been programmed into the
25
26
27
28
29
47
48
remote. Note that if you are not30using
31 external
32
33
34 you35may simply
36
any
devices,
24
Pressing
and
23 16 1. 24
17
1831
30
29 22
36
35 28
42
41 34
48
47 40
46
1
3023
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
25
31
37
43
26
27
28
29
30
control codes, the play command
34
35
will be33transmitted
to it.36Note that
38
39
40
41
for video game consoles42 and cam44
45 there
46 are47no power
48
corders,
on or
off commands. Therefore, only the
Play command (or start/stop command for camcorders) will be
transmitted.
32
93
CVR700 OM
34
36 38
31
30
29
28
28
29
30
31
35 4237 44
39 4641 48
37 41 47 51
40
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
52 54
56
4441
46 26
48 365037 35
52 36
54 40
56 46
45
39
49 50
34 38 44 48 35 37 423932
3327
35
24
25
43 45 47
49
5134 53365538 5740
37 41 473451
31
44
35
45
33
43
38
48 49
39
35
37
39
41
32
23 24
35 36
34
42 44 46 48 503352 54 56 28 27
36 40 463350
26342530
43
51 44 48
3129
32
42
3637
38 28
40 23
22
3437
35 41 3447 38
33
35 37 39 41
35 39 45 49
32 27 2429 36
40 3346 42
50 43
33 263030
21
31
32
3336
29
34 32
37 22
5135 25 34
3731 4128472328
34 36 38 40
38 3544 3948 45 49
32 272931
31
32
32
20
21
36
30
33
43
45
47
49
51
5342 55 57
3630 402946225034 24 33
33 26 25 37
43
31 282823
34
38 3144
48
3135
32 48
20 46
42
44
50
52 54 56
3529 39 45 49
32 27
32
36
3342
43
43 45 47 49 24
51 53 55 57 303021 2933 22
34
35
37
39
41
28
4832
356 34 383144
31
2
3 31 hold
428 23
5
g. Press
Device
Functions
32 40
42
42
44 and
46 48 the
50DVI/Comp
52 54 56 2920 30Programmed
21
37 41 47 51
342 33
36 3 38
30 29 22 34
43
33
1
4
5
6
28 31
Selector
,
and
the
CVR700
will
8
9
10
11
12
31
32secondary
20
35 37 39
41
36
46 50
40
33
Once
the
remote
has
been
pro29 30 21 33
37 4
42
32
1 8 26
2 9 253 10
5 12 6
7
11
switch
to
the
source
device
connected
41
51
37 18 47
3414 36 1538
16
17
35
45
39
49
32
28 40
27
36
grammed
for
the
codes
of
other
devices,
24
31
31 20 32
8 15 9 16 10 17 11 18 12
to 26
the21DVI
inputs.
If you
have pro- 2 133 731144 28
36
40
3320
34 Selector
5 23 35
38 44 48
6
25 37
22
23
24 46 150
Input
press the appropriate
grammed
the
device’s
remote
35 39 45 control
49
32 27 24 36
133020 29
14 212215 22
16 233317 24 18
19
34
to43
control
7
81
92
10 3 to11switch
125the remote
26
27
28
29
30
4
6
the device
will 38
be turned
31 codes,
34
44 48on,
28 23
35
42
2121 28
1929
20section
22 2932
23 30 24
30
33
25
26
27
CVR700
(System
the
audio
of
the
32
33
34
35
36
13
14
15
16
17
18
7
8
9
10
11
12
30 and
28
1 34command
2 33 3 will43
4be trans5
6
29the22play
32 28 3129 screen
25 32 31
26 3320),
27the
31Selector
34 CVPD50
35
36 30
39
40
41
19
2013
2114
2215 23 16 2417
2938
32 9 42 42
18
mitted
to7it.33
30 21
8
10
11
12
(Screen
Selector
),
the
internal
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
2844 31 4520 32
46
47
25
2619
2720 2821 29 22 3023
31 48
24
23
22
21
20
3. The Screen13Saver
14 Button
15
16 is 17
31
activated while
in
screen
mode
19
20
21
22 by23
37
holding
that
button
until
pressing and
25
26
27
28
29
43
the1 screen
on
2 saver
3 image
4 appears
5
6 the
31
32
33
34
35
CVPD50
screen.
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
30
source.
43
44
45
46
47
48
1
7
2
1
6
9
8
7
37
13
11
15
16
17
19
18
20
22
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Figure 120
60
25
31
10
12
14
13
19
5
4
3
61
(DVD
changer
of the
37 44 38
40 47CVR700
41 48 42
43DVD/CD
45 39 46
3225
3326 3427 35 28 3629
30
43
47 49
51 53 control
55
additional
24 45Selector
4 4757
5 48 6
43 1 44 2 )45or 3to 46
38
393246 4033
4150
42
34 you
35press
4231 44products.
48When
52
54 36any
56 one of the
4437
35
36
3443
37
38
39
40
41
42
33
4. The
activ13 PIP14Swap
43 15 Button
44 16 45 17 is
46 18
47
3248
ated
19 while
20 in screen
21
22mode
23 by pressing
24
31
and
holding
that
button
until
the30video 30
25
26
27
28
29
source
in32 the picture-in-picture
frame
29
31
33
34
35
36
swaps position with the main video 28
37
38
39
40
41
42
94
50
51 53 55 57
12/17/04 334:24 PM Page369440 46 50 43 45 4734 49
38 3940 41 37 41 47 51
3536 37
26 25 37
42 44 4346 4548 47 5049 52 5154 5356 55 57
46 47
40 41
50 51
35 39 45 49
33 3426 36
32 27 24 36
25 3837 40 36 37
43
7
8
9
10
11
12
Notes
on Using the Secondary
43 45 47 49
51 53 55
Remote
With Other Devices
42 44 46 48 50 52 54
43
45 47
49
51
57
5356 55
• Manufacturers
may
use 48
different
35 37 4239 44
41 46
50 code
52 54
sets
the
same
product
category.
41 47 For
51
37
34for36
38
40
35 37 39 41
36 that
40 46
that33reason,
it is
important
you 50
263425
37 41 47
3637 38 40
45 you
35 code
39 36
32 to27see
check
whether
set
36 the
4049 46
3324
26 25 37
31 entered
34
38 3544
have
as
many
controls
283223operates
35
3948 45
27 24 36
293122
34 23 33
as 30
possible.
If it28appears
that only
3443 a38 44
35
32
303021operate,
few29functions
see 43
3342
2933 22 check
34 to
28
31 will 32
2920 3032
whether31another
code
work 42
21 set
33
with more28
buttons.
31
31 20 32
4841 flash
3839 4639
40 briefly
42 in red to indi3745
41 it47will
selectors,
• When a button
is pressed on the sec13
14
15
16 4717 49 18 51 4353 4555 4757 49
51 53 55 57
45
41
47
37
36cate
38
40
have43
changed
the device
44 that
45 you 46
47
48 51
1 remote,
2
3 red4 light5under6 the
ondary
the
42
44
4623 48 24 50 4252 4454 4656 48 50 52 54 56
19
20 36 21
22 50
40 46
26being
37
25 controlled.
Input7 Selector
81
92
10 3 for
11 the
125
4 prod35 37 39 41
35
37
3929 41 30
28 49
39 45
27 2425 36 26 35 27
uct
being
operated
should
flash
briefly.
When operating
a
device
other
than
the
13
14
15
16
17
7
9
10 1811
37 41 847 51
34
36
3835 40 36 3734 4136473851 40
38 44
28 2331 35 32 34 33
34 48
If
the
Device
Control
Selector
flashes
CVR700,
the
controls
may
not
correspond
46
36
40
50
36
46
33
40
50
19
20
21
22
23
43
33
33 26
26 25 37
13
14
15
16 2417
29 2237 34 38
39
40 2541 37 42
for
some
but
not
all
buttons
for
a parexactly to the32
function
printed
on the
35
32 42
27
25
2619 39272045 2849
30 21 33
2447 36 48 353239 27452449 36
21 29 22 3023
43
44
45
46
ticular
product,
it
does
NOT
indicate
a
remote
or
button.
Some
commands,
such
31
44
34
34 38 28442348 35
38
48
31 31 28 23 35
31 20 32
31
3225
3326 3427 35 28 3629
problem
with
the
remote
but
rather
30
30 29
43
33
as the volume control,
are the
as
33
43
22
22 same
29
34
34
37
38
3932 4033 41 34 4235
that33
no function
is 42
programmed for the
29 30 Other
3231
they are with the CVR700.
buttons
3229 3042 21
21 33
43
44
45
4639 47 40 4841
28
37
38
28
button
being
pushed.
31
31
32
20
31
31 so
32they
will change their function
20that
2
3
5
6
correspond
to4 a secondary
label on the
8
9For example,
10
11 the12Numeric Keys
remote.
various
functions
14 are
15 used16to access
17
18
15
1
2
3
4
of20the CVR700’s
such as
21
22 audio
23 section,
24
711
7
8
9
10
selecting
modes,
26
27 surround
28
29
30 or setting the
13
13 in DVD
14 mode
15 these
16
17
sleep
timer.
However,
32
33
34
35
36
43 45
45
43
20 to 21
22 1923
buttons are used as19numbers
access
42 44
44
38
39
40
41
42
42
various items such as
and
25 track
26 numbers
27
28 2529
35 37
37
44
45
46
47
48
35
time search.
31
32
33
34 3135
34 36
36
34
Volume Punch-Through
43
44
45
46
47
57
56
51
50
49
48
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
The secondary remote may be pro26
3
Volume
grammed
to4operate
the6 47
435 45
49 Control
51 53 55 57
functions
50
812 and
9 Mute
10 4211 44
1246 48of the
43 45 47 49 52 5154 5356 55 57
CVR700
with
any
of the
41 46
1418
15 in conjunction
16 3517 37 42
1839 44
48 50 52 54 56
47 49 controlled
51 34
53 by
55
57
devices
remote.
For 41 47 51
36the
38
40
47
57
2024 4921 5122 53
23 55
24
35 37 39 3741
46 48
48 since
50 52
52
54
56 will
36 be40 46 4150
example,
the 54
CVR700
33
46
50
56
26 34
37 likely
47 51
37
2630
27
28
29
3025 36 38 40
35 57
39 3645 4049 46 50
32 system
39 41
41
used
as
TV viewing,
27 3324
36
43 the
45sound
47
49
51for
53
55
39
26
37
25
3236
33
34
35
36
31
34
41have
51
38 3544 3948 45 49
47
37 to
38 may
40
23
you
CVR700’s
vol28the
51
42 wish
44
46
48
50
5224
37
38
40
32
2735
4341
4547
47
49
515436
5356 55
57
3842
39
40 30
41 46 4222
33
36
40
50
29
34
ume
activated,
although
the
remote
is
set
37
50 48
25 37
31
44 48
344356
38 57
35 36
37 4240
39 43
41 45
25
23
28 49
4446
46
50 35
52 53
54
47
51
55
29
45
35
44
45
46 The
48
42
32 51 33
3947CVR700
49or 33
48run36
21
30 30
45
24
39
49
to
the 35
TV.
volume
43
4122
3634
4734
37
36 35
38 42
40
24
29TV
37
39
41
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
28
43 32
45 4731 49
51 53 55 57
44 29
34 38
38 44
48
31
20
23 35
35
34
48
control
associated
with
any46of
the
36
50 47
32 51 42
23
33may
30 4021
33
26be
41
342535
3637
38 4239
40
37
4137
44
46
48
50
52 54 56
43
33
22
34
28
43
33
22
4532
3531the
3920remote
3432 devices.
remote’s
program
31 50
273324 To
46
4049 41
2636
37 374036
47 51
37
253538
34
4236
32
21 Volume
39
41
33
42
21
31 32
44
34
33
38
48
for
Punch-Through,
follow
these
28 23 2735
45 46
39 40
49
3655 3735
36
43
45
473132
49 3351 24
2653
25
32
20 32
37 4150 47 51
34
36 57
38 40
30 31
20
33
29312212834 23
steps:
44 45
3443
38 5 39
2 353
4 35
648 49
32
38 the
39 function
4033 3741
For some products, 37however,
26
33 26
43 does
44 not follow
45
4632
32 4347
27
of a particular button
the
27
31 28
31
command printed on the remote. In order
28
30 29
30
to see which function a button controls,
29
29 30
29
consult the Function List tables on pages
30
28 31
96–97. To use those tables, first check28 31
42 44
2752 24
434630
4548
47 50
5154
5356
55 3757 36 40 46 50
29
2636
25
42
32
the type of device being controlled (e.g.,
33492233
3021 31
43 44 48
29
349 2353310 334
Input
Selector
for115638
1. Press
the
23
7
28
8
12 5 39 45
1
4 35
6
35
37
39
41
49
32
28
42 31
442920
46 3248 31
50 2752 2454 36
TV, VCR). Next, look at the remote control
42
32
21
30
30
33
43
33
22
29
3451
unit
wish
to
have
associated
41
31
44
34
47
37
34 the
36 35
38 you
40
38
48
13
14
15
16
17
18
23
28
35
7
8
9
10
11
12
3728 39
416
diagram in Figure 120. Note that each 11
31 32
31control
32
2233 with
33 the
44 volume
55 29
3040
33
3021
and
the
46
36620
50
43
3342
22
29
34
263425 36
37 38
41
51
47
37
40
19
20
21
22
23
24
13
14
15
16
17
18
button has a number on it.
28 31
31
9
10Button
43
45
5132
53 time
55 57
29
45
351212 49
39
49
at20the
same
42
77
21
8832 Volume
927
10
1111 47
30
33
50 3230
3324
2636 25
25 372619 36272040 2846
29
21
22
23
24
To find out what function a particular but28
42red
46
48
505 48
52
5449 5631
1the
244
3 appears
4 44
31 until
34
6 32
38
light
under
the
31
23
15 32
45
1313
1414
1528
161627351717
181832 3533 3920
36
24
31 33
25
26 34 27 35 28 3629
30
30 Input
ton has for a specific device, find the but35
39
29
34
Selector
7 22
837
9 35
10 34
125 48 6
1 23
2 24 41
3 .431138
4 44
31
19
20
21
22
23
28
20
2438 5139 53 4055 41
43 22 45 2347
49
57 42
37 32
29 213030
ton number on the Function List and then19
31 3342
32 41
33
34
35
36
51
21
37
47
342933
3622
38
40
43
34
2 50
3 10 54
4 11 565 12
6
13 either
17
18
25
29
83030 16
9 Selector
the
2. Press
System
46 115
48
52
262628
2727 42
28284414729
43 31
4437
4536
46 39 46
47 4050 4841
312920
look in the column for the device you are25
40
333032
37
38
42
26
25
42
32
21
the
Selector
19or3434
24
8 115 239 16
10173 , 11 18
125
2
4
6
35
3720Input
39 72133
41
14
3535
3636 22
3231 13
controlling. For example, button number 3131 3232 3333 28
27
2432 36
43 31 35
44 3945 45 4649 47
48
20
volume
depending
on
which
system’s
41
51
47
37
34
36
38
40
37
38
39
40
41
42
25
26
27
28
29
30
24
14721 34
1522
8 381623944 1748
10 1811
12
31 19
38
39
40
41 13
42 35
45 is the Night Mode button for the 37
2320
28
46 50
36
40 for
control
you
wish
to3748have
active
33 30
263225
25 22
46
3326
34
35
43 23 30
27 33
2013
2128
2229
29
4747 19
48 34
CVR700’s audio sectioin, but it is the 4343 4444 1 4545 312 46
14 36
15
16 2417
18
4 36
5 35The
45 49
639
Input
the 32
punch-through
mode.
273 24 21
42 29 36
37 29 3831
3932 33
40
41
42
30 25
“Number 9” button for most other prod33 32
2619
2734
2835
3023
20
21
22
24
31
446 48
34 1238
7 Selector
8 1 2828931
1035
11 4pressed
2 23 20
3 you
31540 in4841
43
4437 31
4538 3246
ucts. Button number 31 is the Volume
39
3225
3326 43
3427 35 42
28 3629
30
30
33 47
22 three
29 blink
34 times
Step
1
will
and
then
13
147
15 8
16 9
17 10
1811
12
Down button for the CVR700 and most
29
43 21 37 44
45
3831
3946
4047
41 48
4235
42
32
32
33
34
36
30
33
go out
to confirm
the data
entry.
19
2013
21
22
23 16
24
products, the Scan Down button for video
28
31 451738 4618
31 1420 43 15
32 4437
39 47 40 4841
42
have the CVR700’s volgames and the Zoom Out button for cam25 Example:
2619 1 27To
20 2 2821 32922 4 3023 5 24 6
43
44
45
46
47
48
ume3225
control
activated
even36though
corders.
31
33
34
35
7 26 8 27 9 28 10 29 11 30 12
the remote
is set
to control the TV,
37
3831
3932
4033 4134 4235
NOTE: The numbers used to describe
36
15 4 16
1 13 the
2 14
3 Input
5 17 6 18
first press
Aux
Selector
43
4437
4538
4639 4740
4841
the button functions in Figure 120 for the
42
20 9 21Up
22 11 23 12 24
e and
7 19the8 Volume
10 Button
purposes of describing how a button
43
44
45
46
47
48
25
26
27
28
29
30
at the13same
14time.15Next,16press17the 18
operates are a different set of numbers
System
31Selector
32
33 . 34
35
36
19
20
21
22
23
24
than those used in the rest of this manual
37 you38wish 39
40 the
41
42
NOTE:
Should
to
return
25
26
27
28
29
30
to describe the button functions for the
43 original
44 configuration
45
46
47
48
remote to31the
after
CVR700.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
37 39 41
Page 95
37
36 38 40
36
26 25 37
35
27 24 36
34
28 23 35
33
29 22 34
4:24 PM
30 21 33
31 20 32
32
31
programming a Volume Punch-Through,
1
4
you will need to repeat
the2 steps3 shown
above. However, press
7 the 8same9Input10
Selector in Steps 1 and
2. 14
13
15
16
43
42
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
1
7
13
19
25
31
37
43
41
40
39
38
35
4734
4633
4532
4431
4330
4229
28
37
47
3438 40
3640 383737404141 47
37 3539 3741 39 3434
41 3636 38
36
46
5136 3438 3640 38 33
33
33
41
51
51374040 46
37
47
2637
37
26
3747253636
40 26
25
2541
35
45
32
32
50263325 2637 25 32
36
46
2736
36
27
3646243535
40
50
50363939 45
24
2440
37 27
31
31
34
34
34
44
44
38
38
49273224 2736 24 31
23
23
23
35
35
45
45
28
28
35
28
35
35
39
39
49
49
36
30 29
30
33
43
43
22
2238
48283123 2835 23 30
34
44
2934
34
29
3444223333
48
4834
35 38
2929 303033
29
32
42
21
21 33
43
30
334321323233 42
293022 2934 22 33
34
2828 313132
28
31
31
324220313132
20
20 32
42
302921 3033 21 32
33
31
312820 3132 20 31
32
1 1 Punch22 1 33
Transport Control
61
21
32
4 73 7 5 48 8 76 59 9
Through
5
51
41
51
50
40
50
49
39
49
48
38
48
47
46
45
44
43
51
50
49
48
42
Resetting6 the Remote Memory
2 44 3 55 4 66 5
8 61010 9 1111 10 1212 11
12
you 47
add components
home
43As 45
49
51 53to your
55 57
occasionally
you
may
wish
50
52
54
56
43 4345 4547 4749 49 51 5153 5355
5557 57
43 1645
4720the
49Transport
51 2253
5523 to
57
17
1813
1413to operate
15
14
1519that
17
19
201918
2151
21 20 18
2335
22 totally
2424 2339
24
grammed
reprogram
the
remote
control
43
45so
4717 16
49
5322 2155
57
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
37
41
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 57
42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Channel Control
19 Punch20
21
22
23
2419
Control
Functions
without
the3739
confusion
of
any47
commands,
42
48
50
52
54
56
4147
20
19
21
20 44
2225
2125462322
2423
24
26
26
25
27
27
26
28
28
27
29
29
28
30
30
2938
30
42
4439
46
50
52 5154
37
34
36
40
43
45
49
515356
5355555757
35
37
43 45 47 49
51 53 5535
57
4341
4548
4951
41
35 37
39 41
Through
Forward,
Rewind,
macros
or
”Punch-Through“
programming
364441
46
40
25
26
27
28
29
3025 (Play,
41
51
35
37
2625Stop,
27
26Fast
2831
27
28
3029
3746
47
3536
3738
39
31392944
3241
3231
333348
32 30
343450
33 3533
35
34 34
36
3634
3525
36
42
44
46
48 47
5051
5254545656
36
38
40
26
37
4150
42
46
52
54
56
42
48
50
52
37
40
41 47 51
34 36and38
40 for37a 41
35
45
39
49
Pause,
Skip
you
may36
have
done.
do
this,
it50
is50 51
51
36To
46
4146
40
37
27
34
37
47
34
36
38
40
31 may32be pro33
34
35
3631
The secondary remote
3639
40
373835Record)
3840
383739
3939
38 36
4040 3947
4132
41 that
40 33
42
42
4124
42
26
37
3231 Up/Down
33
32 36
3437
33
34
3635
35
37
41
25
33
35
37
41
35
37
39
41
26
37
25
36 40 46 50
26 25 in37conjunc34 secondary
44
38
48
36 40 4631
5032
35 3538
45
VCR,
DVD
or CD3333
will26operate
possible
to27reset
the
to4150
3639remote
46
4045
39
49
23
28
35
33
36
4147475151
to operate
channel
49
37
24
25
3436
36
40
37so that
38 the 39
41
51
45 47 49grammed
51 53
55 57
37
37
47
37
39
40
4241
43
43254136
4437
444338
454540
44 42
4646
45 47
47
4649
48
4832
4727
482624
34
34
3637
38 40
35
45
43 45 40 47 4149 4251
533837 55 3938
57
39
32 4027
36
24
43
4539
4745
49the
51 22
53 factory
55 3557
30
33
43
45
4749
4946 51
35
34 3443
44
3538
45
4931
32the51
3944
29
34
32
38
48
tion
with
one
of
other
devices
conoriginal
defaults
and
command
27
36
43
45
47
49
53
55
57
23
28
27
36
36
31
4046
24
33
24
48
cable
or
either
the
TV,
36
36
46
40
50
40
5050
44 46 48control
50 function
52 54 for56
23
28
35
33
33
26
37
43
44 4245 44 46 46 4748
48
26 252537
31 4628
43
45 23
4726
46 35
4847 37
48 38 44
25
34
50
524443 54 4544
56
48
29
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
32
42
30
31
34
44
42
44
46
4845 50
21
33
43
31
34
44
38
48
30
33
38
48
22
30
23
trolled
by
the
remote.
For
example,
while
codes
by
following
these
steps.
However,
28
35
29
34
23
28
35
35
42 44 4346 4548 47
50493252 51
54 5356 55
33243636 43
3234
35 4339 45 49 29 22
35 393945
27
used53in your
may
4949
32
45 47 receiver
49
51
55 system
57
27
36
27
57
37 39 4341satellite
30
24
24
33
29 22 34 35 3337 394328
35 37 39 41
30 29
29
30 32
31
31
33
32
42
2920
35
37
39
41444848
34
30
33
31
2921
34
34or
using
the
TV,
you
may
wish
once
is22
reset,
all
commands
3223
3122
31
34 4241
3443
44the
35
37and
39controlling
41 46
2823
35 42
3021
33
38
48remote
383844
48 47 5051 52with
54one56of the
23
28
35
28
35
3746in41conjunction
29
42
44
48
50
52
54
56
36 38 4240be44used
32
21
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
41
51
30
33
37
47 29
34 36 38 40
2837
41
51
29
47
34
36 3842 40codes
32
3122
21
31
32
20
21
30
30
33 22
4043 37
30
33
3338 43
3041
30
to start
or
your
VCR
or 29
DVD
without
that
you
have
entered
will
be 36
3122
31
32
5132
20
3342
4328
29
34
47
37
38stop
28
devices
controlled
remote.
34
29
3434
43 5045 by
47 the49
51 For
53 55
37 36
39 4041 46
3157 33
31
32
26 25 3537other
35
37
39
423457
44
504941
52 5120
54 53
5633
3636
4640
404548
50
33
28
26 25 37
36
46
4346
4728
55
40
50
31
31
32
20
31
31
32
20
29
33
26
37
25
29
29
213333 32
46
36device
263225 42
3742 36
40 30
50 33
having
to
change
the
selected
by
erased
and
will
need
to
be
reentered:
30
33
32
42
21
21
30
4944and
26
37
41 46controlling
51
25
while
using
the
37
47
48
50
52
54
56
36 3538 39
40 4542
27 24 3436example,
41
51
34
36
404750 37
3555
4543
3957
4945
4952 32
51
53
55 36
57
3553 37
43 45 3247 2749 24 5136
35 39 452828
49 31 20 32
4239
4441
4638
48
544727
56 24
35
273124 36
32 31
45program
35 2839
32
the34CVR700
or36
the
remote.
To
31 11. Press
31
32 the
31 5 20
32
2049 46
2733
48to 40
36
46 channels
50
you
may
wish
change
on 3452
2 any 3of the4 Input
28 23 3335VCR,
36
6
40
31
44
26 34
37 44
Selector
35
25 38
3824
48
41
51
44
46 45
48 47
5049 28
52 50
54 5335
56 55 3457
2642
37
47
37
25
3654
38
40
56
31
44
38
48
43 45
47
49
51 37
534239
554441
5746 2848 23 5035
31 28 23 35
34
43
51
23
35
37
39
41
31
44
34
38
48
33
43
23
remote
for
Transport
Control
Punch28
35
35
45
39
49
22
32
29
34a 27
35 50
30without
cable24box48
or satellite
receiver
3930 45 49
32 37
41 34
36
33 25
43
1 8 1 2 9 43
411 4the5 12
47
37
34
38
40
2735 2436
36
”O“
Buttons
46
22
40
33 51
7 54
29
2 310 3 and
5 6Button
6 22
33
37
39237
41
26
30
42 44 4346
504936
523551
5437
5639
22
41
33
41
51
42
44
46
48
50
52
56
29
34
47
34
36
38
40
30
29
34
1
3
4
5
43
33
6
45
47
53
55
57
293122
Through,
follow
these
steps:
38 2544selected
48 30
30 21 3133having
343 49
29
28 3223
35 423334
46 41
36by21
3829
135 35
2 45
4444148
5
40 33
50
to change
the
device
2
3 until
4 the 512
6
3247
42
23
2834
39
same
time
26
37
51
27
47 633
37
7 147at 1the
8 1542
32
34
5136
29 Input
373229
3652
3854
46 30
40
50 21
32
47
49
51
53 4055
332421
13
8 916 9 1017 10 111811
12 21 33
37 42
39 43
41 45 33
30
3538836
3740
39
25 36
42
32
48 34
5043
5639 57
30
3032the
31
31 20 35
737
9 2841
10
11
12
30 262933
28
22 4434or46the
33
43
29CVR700
45
35
49
22
32 remote.
To
program
31
34
31
31
32
44
34
20
27
36
38
48
1
2
3 11 4314 125 5 326 6 31
Selector
Selector
for
you
1.28
Press
the
24
46 41
40
50
2350
7 26
28
35Input
8 135 3739
9 2 36
10 3 31
11 20
12
33
714 Buttons
8151
9162
10
46
36 28
4
5
3
31
40
32
6
33
45
49
32
41
51
25
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
20
47
37
51
34
36
38
40
26
37
25
27
36
37
47
13
17
18
34 36 38 40
24 31
19
2013
2114 2215 23 16 2417
312920 32
29 303521 3733 3931
18
43
45 47
49 34
51 38
53 44
55
57
41
32
42
32
42
2133
3032
33 to1434
43
13
15the35
16 3951174553 49
1855pressed
23
the remote for Channel
Control
Punch28
29
the
device
you
have
chanlights.147 7 15 8 8 16 9 9 17 10 10 1811 11 12 12
47
49
57
45
3530 3948
4934
32
3122
27
3615
46 35
36
38
40
50
36
33
50 1320
13wish
14745
16
1811
2447 50
3543
3324
8 44
9 481736
10 40
3730
39
4137
37
28 26
26
37
25
25 46 1912
26
2720 212821 2229 22 233023 24 24
42
44
462741
48
54 56 28 28312320
36
4029
31
313425
32 38
20 35
19
3351 523443
31 46
32 2044
29
22
34
42
32
follow
these
steps:
21
31
44
34
30
33
38
48
19
21
22
23
24
31
42
48
50
52
54
56
44
30
nel
control
associated
with
and
the
38
48
23
28
35
33
43
45
35
23
28
35
39
49
22
32 Through,
35
45
49 19 ”0“20Button
29
41 47 51
273324 3436 3629 38 4036 40
3615 23 16 39
three
2. Press
19 34322013 27 2124
2417
13 21
1523 times.
16 24 17 18 18
14 22
13
14 2814 22
15
2518
263326 27
2835
2936
373021
39 37
41 463250
31
3225the
3427
28
26 25 353730
42
29 301630 17
33
30
31
31
32
20
43
33
43
33
29 Button
29
Play
at2226
the
same
time
32
313 1.28
2
4
5
27 42
28
29 3830 44 48
37
39
41
6 34Selector
31
3837354429
34
3335
46
364822
40 34
Button
Press
33
23
2834
35
1 45
2 41503 47 51
4
5 30 621 2525
2628
2531
39
49
3223the
26
27
28
29
30
25
26
27
28
29
19
20
21
22
2735Input
1
2
3
4
5
37
3436
3629
38
40
6
24
31
19
20
21
22
23
24
19
20
21
22
20 32 21
3138LED
3441 34 Selector
354235 1 36 36 23023 23 3 24 244
3.43
The
3932 33the
4033 Input
29
28 2the
42 37
320 appears
434
536
6 32Input37
42
32 55 1 until
30
309 2910 22for
5131 32under
33
302132
under
31
3035to
33
31 light
32
33
45 53
43
45
47
4944
51
57
39
49
22
31
33the40
34
35 41 36 47
the23
device
you
wish
have
293338
34
8
1134
12
27
363443
31 32
24 26
38
48
36
50 11
28
3335
7
8 40 9 46 10
12 31
32
33
34
35
36
25
26
31
32
33
34
28
37
25
will
blink
three
times.
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
28
25 32 26 31
25
2640 4127
7 27 36
3730
8 28 40929
4346 10
4437 11384538 1239
4639 4047
4841277354228422883629 29 9 30 3010
31
20
31 54 7 Selector
291 30
31
20with
50
29
32
221
3 28
442
535
63448
3133
44
8
9 2 37
1033
11
125 37
44
46
50
21
3 . 38
4 25
26
38 32
48
30
33
30
23 27
the
channel
control
associated
and52
43
3342
39
40 6 32
41
42 42
4956 171
29
3234
14
17 22
18
24 3613 3514 39 1545 16
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
37 32
38
39
40
41
42
37
38
39
40
31
32
3341
34 42 35
36
18
2815 31 16 20 30
28 3127
32 36
34 391535Note
31 45
4336
44 44may
4632a46few
473347
45 16
49
13
14
1845
31
32
that
take
minutes,
31
43 17this
31
3233 35
20
13483448 14 35 15 36 16
22
29
29Up
3432
35
37
391233
7
Button
at42the
the
8 Volume
9 21
10
11
2 147and
3 release
5 44
1348
15 8 44316 9the
17
18
31
3443 38 441 2.
10 6 24
11 46 12 47
Input
Selector
Press
30
33
45
48
23
28
3541
20
21
22
23
24
35
37
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
31
37
38
39
40
41
44
34
43
44
45
46
47
48
19
20
21
22
23
24
38
48
29
3728 23
38 35
38 commands
39 19 40are20in
41 21 42 4222
42 5 41 43
28 time
21
134
231light
3 appears
4 37
19 39 2040
2141depending
2242 23on how
2437 many
51 20
6
3030
33
47
36
381832
until
the29
red
32
20
for11the
device
22
2417 that
3440 33
13 same
14 31
17
7 19 Button
8 1 13 9 22114 10 32230
42334
536
64718 40
15
16
41
431222
45 34
49 37
51the
53
55 51
57
47
26
27
28
2915
3016
38
43
33
28
29
43
44
45
46
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
31
32
20
memory
that
need
to
be
erased.
36 4 4246
44
45 25 46 26 47 4727 48 4828
50 6
29
2848 29
3043
under
the
Input
26 25 237 1032
2 43
3 44
4 25 45 5 2646 6 2747
733Selector
12525 requires
3 . 1140
the 1transport
control.
The
30
29
19
20
22
238 121 24933
33
21 17 10
22
23 33
1357
1472619 15 82720 16 92829
421821
44
4624 37
48 36
50 4240
52 46
54 50
56
1130
12
32
26
32
33
34
3521 4336
25
30
47 2449 36
51 35
53 39
55
45
49
32453127
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
32 1631
32
36 up for some reason
Button
1 2. Press
2 and
3 release
413 the
5 14Input
31
32
33
34
7 34
8 1 35
9 2 36
1031
3 you
4
533 If the
17
18 31 Input
28
720 6 15Selector
45 3549 locks
123225Selector
39634 remote
32
25
26
28
31
31
24
27 23 16
28
29 32
35
37
39301136
41 1235
21 3326 2215
2420
46 2330
48 835
50 934
52 1054 1911
56 482013
1727
18
38
39
40
4127 4242
3144 29
28
37
38 3839 44 40pressed
41 in1442
and
you
wish
to
reset
it
without
losing
Step
1
will
blink
three
times
37
38
39
40
41
42
31
44
34
37
38
39
40
38
48
Button
for
the
device
that
19
20413 12
21
22
241737 26183831 27 3932
7
81
92
10
28
3 11
13 40 147 41 34
1530
8 42
10
12 47 51
6 1533 23 16 25
38361735
40 181137 41
31
32
34
30
3516 923
43
37 35
39 2236
4151434
2048 2821 33 29 22 34
23 36
24
44
45
46
4733 3548
29
43 5 44 6 45
46and19then
47
programming
30
go
out to confirm
the
data
1
2change
3 the4channels.
43
33
4322 34
44
45 any 46
will
be used
to4025
29
4647 50 48 or removing and
43 replac44
45
46
33
26
27
28
29224751
3023
29
19 34 46392035
2136
2215
23 16
241736 40
43 53322444
4538
4740
48
26
37
25
13
14
15
37
387
39 8 3416
41
42
41
51
19 43
42
936 17
10
1120
122132
13
14
18
45
47
49
55
57
2118
38
40
37
41
42
30
33 37
31
33
25
26
27
28 29 29
30
ing
the
batteries,
you
may
perform
a
soft
entry.
42
32
21
30
33
45
35
The
Input
you
39
49
32
7 Selector
8
9
10
11
12
28
1
2
3
4
5
27
36
6
24 29 22 3023
31 26 23
32
34
35284650
3629
40
50 52383054
31
32 36
20
44
46
48
56 25
2619 462742
19
20
21
24
43
4413
4514 3322
46
4833
25 42
37
25
472832136 48
37
15 47
16
1726
182731
4
5 reset
624 by removing the cover from the bat31 43 3932 44 4033 45 141
34 28 2203531
44 48
34 38
pressed 13in Step
1 will38
blink
three1735
times
23of 32
28 20
To control25the31
transport
a35 31
3918
49 Example:
14
16
8 3530
377 27 2915
39932
4010
4111 45 4212
36
24
3348
3427 35 28 3629
25
2619
2720 3228
31
36
26
30compartment and gently pressing the
4437
4538 31 4639 32747
21
22
2337 39
2433 4134 4335
40 308 41
tery
9 42
1034 1133
12
43
22
and then19go31
out
to
confirm
the
data
29
44 4848 41
34
DVD47
player
the
remote
is set to
3824
23
35
51 while
36 23
38
20
22
431328 3521
44
4515
46
471740 37
37
38
3932 4033 41 34 4235
14
16
18
31
3225
3326 34
37 3436
39 40
41
42
36 42 rectangular button visible
28
2938
30
43
44
45 31 46 29
21
3015 48
1447
18 black
30 2729 22
entry.
43 36 40
33
control
TV, first
press
the 1633 1732small
46 an50external 13
3334
26
37
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
43
4437
4538 31
463920 47 40
484131
20
21
22
23465
24
28
37
3831
3932 4019
41 34
4235
43
44
45
47
48
1
2
3
4
42
6
through
the opening where the battery
32
33
36
29 30 213233
32 using
19 Button
21
22
23
Aux45
Input
49Selector
120
2 and
3
4
524
6
36 42 35 39
Example:
To
control
channels
31
3225 4733the
342727 3524
26 8 48
2810 362911
3012
43
4437
4538 2846
cover
normally
latches. This should return
43
44
45
46
47
48
7
9
3931
40
41
42
20 3132
44 48
34 38
the Play
Button 25 at 726
the same
27
28
29
30
23 35
28 31
your cable
box
or
satellite
receiver
8
9
10
11
12
37
3831
3932
4033 4134 4235
the
remote
to
normal
operation.
36
30
43
4513
4614 4729
4816 34 17 33 18 time.43
15 22
Next, release31them32and press
the
33
34
35
36
while
the44remote
is set
to control
the
13
14
15
16
17
18
43
4437
4538 29 4639 4740
4841
42
42
32
21
30
19 VCR
20 Input
21
22 33 23
24 DVD Input Selector
1
6
VCR, first press the
37 Button
38
392 . 403
414
425
19
20
21
22
23
24
31
43
44 28 4531 20
46 32
47
48
11
127
The
87
9remote
8
10139may
13 1110
1414pro131211
1515 14 12
1616 15 1742
17 theater
16 44
1818 1746
18
secondary
be
system,
48
27 4 28 5
and3 the
Selector Button
1 25 2 26
Channel Up Button
at the same
7 31 8 32 9 33 10 34 11
time. Next, release
37 them
38 and39press40the
13
14
15
16
17
AUX Input Selector
Button
43
44 1 45 2 .46 3
29 6 NOTES:
30
43
447
458
469
25
26
27
35 12 36
13
14
15
• To remove the Channel Control
Punch31
32
33
41
42
19
20
21
Through and return the remote
to
18
37
38 its 39
5
6
47 4 48original
configuration, repeat
25 the26steps27
19
20
21
22
23
24
43
44
45
7 Control
8
9
10
12
NOTE: To remove
the 26
Channel
press 33
in11the example
above. However,
31
32
25
27
28
29
30
Punch-Through and return the
the
13 remote
14 to 15
16
17 same
18 Input Selector in37Steps381
39
31
32
33
34
35
36
its original configuration, repeat
the
steps
and
19
20
21
22
23 2. 24
43
44
45
37
38
39
40
41
42
shown in the example above.25 However,
26
27
28
29
30
43
44
45
46
48 • Before programming the remote for
in Steps
147
press the same Input
Selector
Volume,
31
32
33
34
35
36Channel or Transport Punch-
and 2.
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
4710
28
16
34
22
40
28
46
34
11
48
29
17
35
23
41
29
47
35
12
30
18
36
24
42
30
48
36
40
41
42
46
47
48
53 55
52 54
57
56
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
5
6
11
12
17
18
23
24
29
30
35
36
41
42
47
48
Through,
41
42 make certain that any programming
47
48 needed for the specific TV,
CD, DVD, cable or satellite receivers has
been completed.
95
26
27
28
29
30
31
24
25
19
20
21
22
23
17
18
15
16
Navigation
Left
Set
Navigation
Right
Exit/Cancel
Navigation
Down
OSL
Direct
Tone
OSD
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Computer
Sel
Screen Sel
Volume Up
Mute
System Sel
Slow+
Volume
Down
Navigation
Left
Set
Navigation
Right
Exit/Cancel
Navigation
Down
OSL/Settings/Distance
Direct/Brigh/A/Yes/Win
Tone/Color/B/List
OSD/Contrast/C/No
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Computer
Sel
Screen
Volume Up
Mute
System
Channel Up/Pic+/Slow+
Volume
Down
13
14
Aux
VCR
CBL/SAT
05
06
07
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
Sports
Broadcast
Movies
DVD Setup/Level/Guide DVD Setup
Navigation
Navigation Up
Up
Menu/Info/Audio Input
Menu
All On
All Off
DVD
FM/AM (Tuner)
01
02
03
04
DVD
(MAIN)
Navigation
Up
Menu
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
TV
Navigation
Up
Menu
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
VCR
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
CD(R)
DVHS
GAME
Power On Power On
Play
Power Off Power Off
Stop
DVD Sel
DVD Sel DVD Sel
FM/AM
FM/AMl
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel (Tuner) Sel (Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT CBL/SAT CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Sel
DVD(R)
TIVO
PVR
Start/Stop Power On Power On
Start/Stop Power Off Power Off
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
DVD Sel
FM/AM
FM/AM
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel (Tuner) Sel (Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Sel
CAM
Repeat
Chapter
Data Code
Guide
Guide
Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu/ Visual Index/ Menu
Menu
DVD Menu
Menu
Navigation
Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Left
Set
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Select
Enter
Select
Select
Navigation
Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Exit/Cancel Exit/Cancel
Cancel
Clear
Clear
< / Cancel
Clear
Exit/Cancel
Exit
Cancel
Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation Navigation
Navigation
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
OSL
Info
Action
OSL
Video
X
Natural Record TIVO
TIVO
Track Direct
>
Direct
Window
⁄
Window
Tone
Sleep
List
Pre Chapter Display
Í
R.A Edit
Return
OSD
OSD/Display
OSD
Next Chapter OSD
Î
Display
Info
Info
Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/
Game/Cam
Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam
Game/
Cam Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Cam Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Computer
DVI/
DVI/Computer
DVI/ DVI/Computer DVI/ DVI/Computer
DVI/ DVI/Computer DVI/
Sel
Computer Sel
Sel
ComputerSel
Sel
Computer Sel Sel
Computer Sel
Sel
Computer Sel
Screen Sel
Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel Screen Sel
Volume Up
Volume Up Volume Up Volume Up Volume Up Volume Up Scan Up T (Zoom In) Volume Up Volume Up
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
System Sel
System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel System Sel
Slow+
Channel Up Channel Up
Slow Up Channel Up Slow Up Scan/Slow Up Channel Up Channel Up
Volume
Scan
W
Volume
Volume
Scan
W
Volume
Volume
Volume
Down
Down
(Zoom Out)
Down
Down
Down (Zoom Down) Down
Down
Down
DVD Setup
Navigation
Up
Menu
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
FM/AM
(TUNER)
Navigation
Left
Select/OK
Navigation
Right
Exit
Navigation
Down
Settings
A/Yes
B/List
C/No
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/Computer
Sel
Screen Sel
Volume Up
Mute
System Sel
Channel Up
Volume
Down
Guide
Navigation
Up
Menu/Info
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
CBL
SCREEN
Level
Navigation
Up
Audio Input
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
SYSTEM
Navigation Navigation
Navigation
Left
Left
Left
Enter
Set
Set
Navigation Navigation
Navigation
Right
Right
Right
Exit/Cancel Exit/Cancel Exit/Cancel
Navigation
Navigation Navigation
Down
Down
Down
Info
Distance
Brightness
Alt
Next
Color Temp
Tone
OSD
Contrast
OSD
Game/Cam Game/Cam Game/Cam
Sel
Sel
Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DR Sel
DVI/ DVI/Computer
DVI/
Computer Sel
Sel
Computer Sel
Screen Sel Screen Sel
Screen Sel
Volume Up
Volume Up
Mute
Mute
System Sel System Sel System Sel
Channel Up
Volume
Volume
Down
Down
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel DVD Sel
FM/AM
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel (Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT CBL/SAT
Sel
Sel
Sports
Broadcast
Movies
Guide
Info
Navigation Navigation
Up
Up
Menu/Info Menu
SAT
Navigation
Left
Enter
Navigation
Right
Exit/Cancel
Navigation
Down
Info
Quick
Sleep
OSD/Display
Game/Cam
Sel
DR Sel
DVI/
Computer Sel
Screen Sel
Volume Up
Mute
System Sel
Channel Up
Volume
Down
Navigation
Up
Menu
Power On
Power Off
DVD Sel
FM/AM
(Tuner) Sel
Aux Sel
VCR Sel
CBL/SAT
Sel
HDTV
4:24 PM
08
09
10`
11
12
BUTTON NAME
CVR700R1 Remote Function List Table
96
12/17/04
NO.
CVR700 OM
Page 96
Ch Down/Pic–/Slow–
34
Slow–
Disc Direct
Disc Skip
1/Dolby
1
2/DTS Surr
2
3/DTS NEO:6
3
Skip/Preset Forward/ Skip Forward/
Page Up
Pict
39
4/Logic 7
4
40
5/Surr
5
41
6/Stereo
6
42
Skip/Preset Back/ Skip Backward/
Page Down
Pic–
43
7/Test
7
44
8
8
45
9/Night
9
46
Scan/Tune Forward Scan Forward
47
*/Angle/Tune-Manual
Angle
48
0/Sleep
0
49
#/Zoom/Mem
Zoom/Mem
50
Scan/Tune Backward Scan Backward
51 LetterBox (Press & Release)
Screen Saver (Hold for 2 Seconds)
52
PIP (Press & Release)
PIP Swap (Hold for 2 Seconds)
Status
53 Status/PVR Play/TV/Vid
Play
Play
54
55
Auto/PIP Ch Up
56
Freeze/Pvr List
Stop
Frame/Pvr Live/Stop
57
Pause
Pause
58
Screen Standby/
59
PIP Ch Down/Learn
60
Light
Light
Record/Program
61
Disc Direct/Favorite
Disc Skip/Last Ch
32
33
DVD
(MAIN)
7
8
9
7
8
9
Tune Up
Tune-Manual
0
Memory
Tune Down
Light
Pause
Status
Play
4
5
6
4
5
6
Preset Down
Light
PIP
PIP Swap
TV/Video
1
2
3
Skip Up
Disc Skip
CD(R)
DVHS
R1
R2
GAME
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
Skip Up Index Right/>>| Skip Up
Slow Down Ch Down Slow Down
Disc Direct
Q.V
Disc Skip Skip Search
DVD(R)
Light
Record
Light
Record
Light
Record
VCR/TV
Stop
Pause
Title/Info
Stop
Pause
Stop
Pause
Stop
Pause
Light
Record
TV/Video
Play
Input
Light
Title
Stop
Pause
Subtitle
Play
7
7
8
8
9
9
FF
FF
Record Link Angle
0
0
Enter
Enter
Rew
Reverse
Status
Play
7
8
9
FF
Angle
0
Zoom
Rew
Input Select
Play
0
+10
Rew
7
8
9
FF
PIP
PIP Swap
TV/Video
Play
7
8
9
FF
Select
0
+100
Rew
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
Scan Down Skip Down Skip Down Index Left/ |<< Skip Down
1
2
3
Scan Up
Favorite
Prev Ch/
Last Ch
Ch Down
VCR
CM Skip
Skip
TIVO
Light
Record
Title
Stop
Pause
Play
Change Screen
Light
Record
Top Menu
Stop
Pause
TV/Input
Play
PIP
4
4
5
5
6
6
Skip/
Last Clip
Step Down
7
7
8
8
9
9
FF
FF
Photo
Angle
0
0
Zoom/Search
100
Rew
Rew
Scan/
Ch Down
Slow Down
1
1
2
2
3
3
Skip/Step Up Next Clip
Delay/Last Ch
CAM
7
8
9
FF
*
0
#
Rew
4
5
6
Page Down
1
2
3
Page Up
Favorite
Prev Ch/
Last Ch
Ch Down
CBL
Rew
0
7
8
9
FF
4
5
6
Page Down
1
2
3
Page Up
Favorite Ch
Prev Ch/
Last Ch
Ch Down
SAT
LetterBox
Screen Saver
PIP
0
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
SCREEN
Light
Record
Light
Record
Light
Record
Light
PIP (Press & Release)
PIP Swap (Hold for 2 Seconds)
TV/Input
Pvr Play
TV/Sat
Play
Play
Play
PIP Ch Up
Auto
Info
Pvr List
Freeze
Stop
Pvr Live
Stop
Frame
Pause
Pause
Pause
PIP Ch Down
Screen Standby
7
8
9
FF
AV
0
100
Rew
4
5
6
Last Clip
1
2
3
Next Clip
Ch Down
Skip
PVR
Light
Sleep
Night
Test Tone
Logic 7
Surround
Stereo
Dolby
DTS Surround
DTS NEO:6
SYSTEM
Light
Record
Freeze
Stop
Pause
PIP
PIP Swap
TV/Video
Play
7
8
9
FF
Ratio
0
100
Rew
4
5
6
1
2
3
Favorite
Prev Ch/Last
Ch
Ch Down
HDTV
4:24 PM
Back
0
100
1
2
3
Prev Ch/
Last Ch
Ch Down
TV
1
2
3
Preset Up
Slow–
Disc Direct
Disc Skip
FM/AM
(TUNER)
12/17/04
35
36
37
38
BUTTON NAME
NO.
CVR700 OM
Page 97
97
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 98
CVR700R1 TV SETUP CODES
98
Maker (Brand) Name
AKAI
AMPRO
AMSTRAD
AOC
ANAM
AMARK
ADMIRAL
CANDLE
CAPEHART
CENTURION
CENTRONIC
CITIZEN
CLASSIC
CONCERTO
CONTEC
CORONADO
CRAIG
CROWN
CXC
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DAYTRON
DIGI LINK
DYNASTY
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
FUTURETECH
GE
GRUNDIG
HALL MARK
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INFINITY
INKEL
JENSEN
JC PENNEY
JVC
KAWASHO
KEC
KENWOOD
KTV
KLOSS
KMC
LG (GOLDSTAR)
LODGENET
LXI
LUXMAN
LOGIK
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MATSUI
MEMOREX
METZ
MGA
MIDLAND
MITSUBISHI
MOTOROLA
NAD
NIKEI
NATIONAL
Code Number (3-Digit) List
001 070 008
001 070 008
001 011 103
001 011 103
045 057 103 106 122
103 132
103 132
001 002 003 011
059
070
045
001 002 003 011 045 092
045
011
041 045 051 052
132
045
045 132
045 132
001 011 092 132
011 022 038 045 046 094
011 132
073
045
063
074 132
001 010 012 033 045 052
013 033 045 058
013 033 045 058
045
001 011 014 015 026 057
053
011
076
001 011 015 016 017 018
148
148
019 148
001 011 014 015 035 092
038 040
045
045
001 010 045 079 132
001 010 045 079 132
002 060 132
002 060 132
011 101 103 104 110 118
013 021 069 077 145 148
013 021 069 077 145 148
011 069
011 069
001 003 011 060 061 065
001 074 148
001 074 148
011 013 069
011 013 069
001 011 033 044 050 068
001 011 033 044 050 068
001 006 008 011 033 042
093
021 031 045
021 031 045
036
094 132
097 105 111 118 132
132 141
068 098 141
029 072 132
132 145
128 132
118 132 145 148
074
074
044 095 100 115
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Maker (Brand) Name
NEC
ONKING
ONWA
OPTONICA
ORION
PANASONIC
PENNEY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
PROTON
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
REALISTIC
RUNCO
SAA
SSS
SAMPO
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SIGNATURE
SONY
SOUNDESIGN
SPECTRICON
SUPREMACY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TATUNG
TECHWOOD
TEKNIKA
TELERENT
TERA
TMK
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNIVERSAL
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDTECH
WARDS
YAMAHA
YORK
YUPITERU
ZENITH
ZONDA
Page 99
Code Number (3-Digit) List
001 013 022 025 042 057
045
045
025 077 080 081 082 083
025 077 080 081 082 083
036 038 057 087 120 148
068
001 003 011 045 060 061
001 003 011 040 060 067
001 011 024 029 031 032
011 132
011 030 059 122 132 133
011 030 059 122 132 133
038 057 087
011 025 045 048 056 062
001 009 011 026 029 057
013 025 045 048 056 062
004 005
011 045
011 045
001 059 011
051 092 096 104 107 011
013 027 037 041 054 058
011 033 045 132
011 021 026 033 058 132
006 011 020 025 028 033
069
043 055 067 075 085 116
003 011 033 045
103
002
001 003 011 060 061 064
039
057 063 077
057 063 077
011
001 003 011 033 045 069
069
007 011
007 011
047 049
013 021 035 042 052 063
132
014 015
008
011
011 014 015 033 061 065
001 011
011 045
011 045
069 070 090 094 103
069 070 090 094 103
121 123 125
084
084
065 118 132 148
088 132 145 148
086 089
066 118 132
071 098 133 145
066
118 128 132 145
078 091
145 148
034 077 099 132
117 130 136
065 145 148
092 094 132
092 102 108 109 112 113 114 119
132 148
99
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 100
CVR700R1 HDTV SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
LG
MOTOROLA
RCA
SAMSUNG
ZENITH
100
Code Number (3-Digit) List
960
961
957
959
958
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 101
CVR700R1 VCR SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
AIWA
AKAI
AMPRO
ASA
ANAM
AUDIO DYNAMICS
CANDLE
CANON
CITIZEN
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
X DUAL
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GE
GO VIDEO
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JCL
JENSEN
JC PENNEY
JVC
KENWOOD
LG(GOLDSTAR)
LLOYD
LXI
MAGIN
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
MATSUI
MEI
MEMOREX
MGA
MTC
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
MOTOROLA
MULTITECH
NAD
NATIONAL
NEC
NORDMENDE
OPTIMUS
OPTONICA
PANASONIC
PENTAX
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PILOT
PIONEER
PROSCAN
PULSAR
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
Code Number (3-Digit) List
191
173 199 201 259 260 277
227 285
227 285
190 221
169 195 199
285 286 288
185 190 221 286 291
285
154 196 267
190 221
163 165 168 220 249 253
169 195 199
191 208
214
174 182 186 193 201 238
154 167 168 191 293
154 167 168 191 293
190 218 221 227 244 275
264 268
169 200
162 191 199 218 269 281
190 221
190 199 221
190 199 221
169 170 190 196 221 238
169 190 199 203 205 210
171 195 199 203
169 170 177 238 243 258
170 171 191 238
170 171 191 238
196
190 191 221 222 223
169 190 221 222 224
238
238
190
154 168 171 190 191 208
200 201 214
200 201 214
170 177
170 176 177 200 201 204
172 175
191
290 291
290 291
169 195 199 203
199
159
208 209
164 187 188 221 265 276
170 177 190 218 221
190 191 221 222
190 191 209 221 222 226
238
170 178 203
180 181
227
171
190 221 230 276 295
153 158 159 160 161 258
157 164 170 177 218 244
254
263
278
215 262 281 283
227 238 266 271
206 214 216 282 296
238
285 288 291
275 276 278
101
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 102
Maker (Brand) Name
REALISTIC
RUNCO
RICO
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SONY
SOUNDESIGN
STS
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHICO
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
THOMAS
TMK
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEOSONIC
VIDEO CONCEPTS
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
102
Code Number (3-Digit) List
153 154 160 168 171 208
213 279
213 279
171
184 189 196 239 241 244
179 199 203 267
154 165 168 171 266
174 249 263
154 167 168 170 171 177
156 209 221 280
154 166 167 207 211 212
191
170
190 191 214 221 222
191
168 191
285
195 199
191 195 199
190 221
190 191 221 238
191
191
155 170 198 202 214 236
196 238
196
169
203
196
169 191 201
154 170 174 190 191 196
169 191 195 199
183 191 203 211 213 227
209 238 288 293
249 256 257 260
221 228 238 293
213 231 232 233
249 263 293
208 209 263
234 238
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 103
CVR700R1 CD SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
ADCOM
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIOACCESS
AUDIOFILE
AUDIO TECHNICA
BSR
CALIFORNIA AUDIO
CARVER
CROWN
DENON
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
JENSEN
JVC
KENWOOD
LG(GOLDSTAR)
LUXMAN
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCINTOSH
MGA
MITSUBISHI
MITSUMI
NAD
NAKAMICHI
NEC
NIKKO
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROTON
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
SOUNDSTREAM
SYMPHONIC
TEAC
THETA DIGITAL
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
Code Number (3-Digit) List
804 818 824
827 866 873 911 925
805 939
880
776
808
799
770 864
812 891 895 896 898 899
797
782 942 943
804 807
778 810 812 823
881
756 780 795 806 809 821
804
908
931 950 951
769 778 785 817 833 834
771
773 790 832 857
794 868
798 813 839 946 947 948
949
787
787
907
768 829 952 953
757 954 955
824
808 810
759 760 792 793 800 801
775 781 791 820 844 845
761 770 830 864 874 913
767 794 893 904
784 855 867 878 886 915
772
770 864
782 881
779 804 836 905
812 813 859 860
783
802 836 889 912 927
788 812 823 837 923
775 813 828 860 869 906
758 796 813 860 888
765 781 815 858 870 871
879
814 865
766 803 813 841 861 862
794
768 829 852 906 910 928
774 786 808 816 890
900 940 941
825 831 835 838 842 843 848 850 851 945
903 906 931 933
926 930
846 847 859
938
916 917
914 922 935 936
873 887 894 918
865 876 892 901
103
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 104
CVR700R1 CDR SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
BANG OLUFSEN
DENON
HARMAN KARDON
KENWOOD
PHILIPS
SONY
Code Number (3-Digit) List
257
261
262
260
259
258
CVR700R1 DVD SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
APEX DIGITAL
BRAVO
CALIFORNIA AUDIO
DENON
DVD VIDEO
GE
HARMAN KARDON
JBL
JVC
KENWOOD
KLH
LG(GOLDSTAR)
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROCEED
PROSCAN
RCA
RUNCO
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SONY
TECHNICS
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
ZENITH
104
Code Number (3-Digit) List
715 730
734 735
694
656 673 676 688 705
728
657 658
655 686 720
655
660
661 704 723
722
659 709 718 724 737
687 710
687 713
677 690
664 716
663 669 702
665 704
678 679 684 688 689 698 706 732
687 710
664 666 674 692 695 700 719
714
657 658 691
657 658 672 691
681
685 707 708 733
667 703
675 682 704 727
669 683 697 699 721 729
680
657 658
663 664 687 711 712 731
670 671 684 717
659 687 693 709 718 736
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 105
CVR700R1 DVD-R SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
BROKSONIC
CYBER HOME
GO VIDEO
JVC
LITE ON
MAGNAVOX
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SONY
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
Code Number (3-Digit) List
017
020
014
012
021
016
005 006 007 008 009
016
004 015
019
013
017
001 002 003
010 011 018
014
CVR700R1 D-VHS SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
JVC
MITSUBISHI
Code Number (3-Digit) List
602
601
CVR700R1 GAME SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
SONY PLAYSTATION2
MICROSOFT X BOX
Code Number (3-Digit) List
002
001
CVR700R1 CAMCORDER SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
CANON
JVC
PANASONIC
SAMSUNG
SONY
SHARP
Code Number (3-Digit) List
265 266
262
263
257 258
259 260 261
264
CVR700R1 TIVO SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
DIRECTV
PIONEER
SERIES 2 DVR
TOSHIBA
OTHER TIVO
Code Number (3-Digit) List
518
513
514 521
515
517 519 520
CVR700R1 PVR (DVR) SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
DAEWOO
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESSVU
HUGHES
HYUNDAI
KEEN
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PROSCAN
RCA
REPLAY TV
SONIC BLUE
SONY
Code Number (3-Digit) List
769 772
782 783 784
782
785 795
786
777
778 791
779 785 792 795
787
787 795
776 778 780 793 794
778 780
775 781 788 789 790 791 792
105
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 106
CVR700R1 CABLE SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
ABC
ALLEGRO
AMERICAST
ANTRONIX
ARCHER
BELCOR
CABLE STAR
CENTURION
CENTURY
CITIZEN
COLOUR VOICE
COMBANO
COMTRONICS
DIAMOND
DIGI
EAGLE
EASTERN
ELECTRICORD
EMERSON
FOCUS
GC ELETRONICS
GE
GEMINI
GENERAL
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
GOLDEN CHANNEL
GOODMIND
GI
HAMLIN
HITACHI
HOSPITALITY
JASCO
JERROLD
LINDSAY
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MOVIE TIME
M NET
NSC
OAK
PACE
PANASONIC
PANTHER
PARAGON
PHILIPS
PIONEER
POPULAR MECHANICS
POST NEWS WEEK
PRELUDE
PRIMESTAR
PTS
PULSAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
RECOTON
REGAL
REGENCY
REMBRANT
106
Code Number (3-Digit) List
303 305 313 347 350 354
413
369
323
314 316 323 333 414
415
335 415
394
316
316 413
371 392
385 386
328 339
332
416
329 339 348 488
365 368 372 417
341
414
418
415
378
317 331 334 362
312
470
339
414
303 305 313 317 319 394
309 310 357 358 363 394
303 363 490
376 382
413
303 304 305 313 318 375
420
342 493
319 321 370 384
360
470
337 341
345
324 337 346 377 492
325 340 345 361 396 498
481
352 355 380 478 479 491
416
360
315 321 322 329 371 387
303 311 343 359 421 473
418
325
422
464
320 356 377 378
360
379 413 414
355 380
418
309 357 358 363 401 402
365 417
334
361 412
395 398 399
401 403 419 477
395 397 398 399
499
392
502
403
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Maker (Brand) Name
SAMSUNG
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
SEAM
SHERITECH
SIGNAL
SIGNATURE
SL MARX
SONY
SPRUCER
STARCOM
STARGATE
SYLVANIA
TADIRAN
TANDY
TELECAPATION
TEXSCAN
TFC
TIMELESS
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
UNIKA
UNITED CABLE
UNIVERSAL
VIDEOWAY
VIEWSTAR
ZENITH
ZENTEK
Page 107
Code Number (3-Digit) List
339 374 488
305 306 307 349 350 351 353 354 381 393 404 405 406 407 408 410 411 428 430 431
432 485 486
423
331
339
303 490
339
429
355 383 479 491
304 313 317 318 465
317 339 422
373
339
326
330
338 373
424
425
308 347 348 364 472
360
316 323 333
313 361
314 316 323 333 335 336 341 344 415
366 426
321 324 327 388 389 390 391 492
360 366 367 400 427
418
107
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 108
CVR700R1 SATELLITE SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name
ALPHASTAR
ALPHASTAR DBS
ALPHASTAR DSR
AMPLICA
BIRDVIEW
BSR
CAPETRONICS
CHANNEL MASTER
CHAPARRAL
CITOH
CURTIS MATHES
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
ELECTRO HOME
EUROPLUS
FUJITSU
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
HITACHI DBS
HOUSTON TRACKER
HUGHES
HYTEK
JANIEL
JERROLD
KATHREIN
LEGEND
LG
LUXOR
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
NEXTWAVE
NORSAT
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PANASONIC DBS
PANSAT
PERSONAL CABLE
PHILIPS
PICO
PRESIDENT
PRIMESTAR
RCA
RCA DSS
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SATELLITE SERVICE CO
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
SONY
STARCAST
STAR CHOICE DBS
SUPER GUIDE
TEECOM
TOSHIBA
UNIDEN
ZENITH
108
Code Number (3-Digit) List
561
653
625 645
559
617 628
562
562
523 524 525 528 564
508 518 519 522 583
563
559
515 520 521 604 616
534 555 565 582 605
509 510 543 567 598 599
595
618
527 531 532 537
506 511 514 526 548 568
512
543
619
562
569
511 545 548 570
613
510
646
571
520 568 572 573 574
540 566
510
510 627
576 577
547
549 569
513
623
621
578
610
529 607
511 545 579 615
504 546 611 624 631 639
516
552 580 603
507 625 645
538 544 556 591
542
608 620 632
550
517
530 626 627
533 536 581 593 594 596
505 539 540 541 560 629
526 535 539 554 557 584
588 589 590 597 622
600 601 609 614 630
575 606
642
612
585 602 604 606
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 109
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Unit does not turn on
• Main Power Switch turned off
• No AC power
• Press in Main Power Switch 0.
• Check AC power plug and make certain
any switched outlet is turned on.
• Press the Standby Switch at least
4 seconds after the unit has been
turned on by the Main Power Switch 0.
• Standby pressed within 4 seconds
after Main Power Switch
Disc does not play
• Disc loaded improperly
• Incorrect disc type
• Invalid Region Code
• Rating is above parental preset
No picture
• Intermittent connections
• Wrong input
• Progressive Scan output selected
• Video Off feature active
• Incompatibility between DVI (HDCP)
source unit and CVR700
• Port needs to be reset
• LED on CVPD50 flashing yellow and red
• Load disc label-side up; align the disc
with the guides and place it in its 43 45
42 44
proper position.
• Check to see that disc is CD, CD-R, 35 37
34 CD,
36
CD-RW, VCD, SVCD, MP3, WMA, Photo
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW 33 26
(standard conforming), DVD-Video 32 27
31 28
or DVD-Audio; other types will not play.
30 29
• Make sure disc’s Region Code matches
29 30
code shown on rear panel of unit.
28
• Enter password to override or change 31
rating settings (see page 54).
49
48
39
38
41
40
25
24
23
22
21
20
37
36
35
34
33
32
• Check all video connections.
1
2
• Check input selection of TV or receiver.
7
8
• Use Progressive Scan mode only with
13
14
compatible TV.
• Press Screen Standby Button Y 19
20
to reactivate video circuitry (see page 2571). 26
• Make sure to obtain the most recent 31
32
software update for the source unit.
37
38
• Sometimes it helps to simply turn off the
43
44
CVR700 using the Main Power On/Off
Switch 0, turn off the master power switch
on the CVPD50 (depressed towards rear of
unit), unplug the JBL Digital Link cable and
unplug the AC power cords from both units.
Then follow these steps in reverse order, and
often the unit will function normally.
• Check AC power cord connections at wall
and unit. Check CVPD50 power switch
(should be depressed toward rear of unit).
See note on page 45.
“Snowy” picture when used with
external DVI (HDCP) DVD player
• Copy protection communication
between the source unit and the
CVR700 was unsuccessful
• Reset the connection by switching sources
on the CVR700, or by stopping and
restarting the DVD.
No sound
• Intermittent connections
• Incorrect digital audio selection
• DVD disc is in fast or slow mode
• Check all audio connections.
• Check digital audio settings.
• There is no audio playback on DVD discs
during fast or slow modes.
• Use analog audio outputs.
• Surround receiver not compatible
with 96kHz PCM audio
47
46
Picture is distorted or jumps during
fast forward or reverse play
• MPEG-2 decoding
• It is a normal artifact of DVD playback
for pictures to jump or show some
distortion during rapid play.
Some remote buttons do not operate
during DVD play; prohibited
symbol
appears (see below)
• Function not permitted at this time
• With most DVDs, some functions are
not permitted at certain times (e.g.,
Track Skip) or at all (e.g., direct audio
track selection).
51
50
53 55
52 54
57
56
37
36
35
34
33
41
40
39
38
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
32
31
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
109
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
42
Page 110
48
50
52 54
56
51 53 55 57
50 3752 4154 4756 51
36 40 46 50
37 3541 3947 4551 49
36 3440 3846 4450 48
35 3339 45 4349
343238 444248
33 31
43
32
31
42
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The Feature Not Available
message appears
• Requested function not available at
this time
• Certain functions
1
2 may3be disabled
4
5 by 6
the DVD itself
during
passages
of
a disc.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Picture is displayed in the
wrong aspect ratio
• Incorrect match of aspect ratio
settings disc or video signal
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
16 (see17pages
18 13
• Change1 aspect
ratio
settings
9 21 10Button
12 24 or
and 27)7using
19 8the
20 Frame
22 11 23`
Letterbox
z
. 17 29 18 30
13 25 Button
14 26 15
27 16 28
Remote control inoperative
• Weak batteries
• Sensor is blocked
31
32
33
34
35
• Change both
batteries.
25 37 26 38 27 39 28 40 29 41 30
• Clear path
to sensor or use optional
31 43
32 44 sensor.
33 45 34 46 35 47 36
outboard
remote
19
37
Disc will not copy to VCR
• Copy protection
43 45
42
System Reset
In the rare case in which the unit’s operation or the displays seem abnormal, the
cause may involve the erratic operation
of the system’s memory or microprocessor. To correct this problem, first try turning off the master power switch on the
underside of the CVPD50 (depressed
toward the front of the unit) and unplugging the JBL Digital Link cable, and the
power cords for both the CVR700 and the
CVPD50 and wait at least 3 minutes.
After the pause, reconnect the AC power
cords and the JBL Digital Link, turn the
CVPD50’s master power switch to the On
position (depressed toward the rear of
the unit) and check the system’s operation. If the system still malfunctions, a
system reset may clear the problem.
110
44 46
43 3545 3747 3949 41
42 3444 3646 3848 40
35 3337 2639 2541 37
34 3236 2738 2440 36
33 3126 2825 2337 35
32 3027 2924 2236 34
31 2928 3023 2135 33
30 28293122 203432
29 30 21 33
SOLUTION
28 31 20 32
47
44 46
49
48
51
50
53 55
52 54
35 37 39 41
37 41 47
34 36 38 40
36 40 46
33 26 25 37
35 39 45
32 27 24 36
31 28 23 35
34 38 44
30 29 22 34
43
33
To clear 29
the CVR700’s entire system
42
32
30 21 33
memory 28
including tuner presets, output
31
31 20 32
32
33
34
35
38
21
39
22
40
23
41
24 36
42
48
42
•
are
encoded
to prevent
copying
57Many DVDs
43
44
45
46
47
48
56to VCR.
51
50
49
48
level settings, delay times and speaker
configuration data, press the Main
Power On/Off Button 0 to place both
1
2mode,3 and then
4
5
6
units in Standby
press
and hold the
q
7 Mute
8 Button
9
10
11 for12
5 seconds.13The unit’s
software
version
14
15
16
17
18
number will
flash20 in the
Information
19
21
22
23
24
Display Ô as an indication that the unit
25
26
27
28
29
30
has been successfully reset.
31
20
36
NOTE: Resetting
the processor
will
erase
37
38
39
40
41
42
any configuration settings you have made
43
44
45
46
47
48
for speakers, output levels, surround
modes and digital input assignments, as
well as the tuner presets. The unit will be
returned to the factory presets, and all
settings for these items must be reentered.
If the system is still operating incorrectly,
there may have been an electronic discharge or severe AC line interference that
has corrupted the memory or microprocessor. If these steps do not solve the
problem, consult your custom installer or
an authorized JBL service center.
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 111
JBL CINEMA VISION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CVPD50 Display
Size/Diagonal
Displayable Picture Size (W x H):
Resolution:
Viewing Angle:
Contrast Ratio:
Brightness:
Storage Temperature:
Operating Temperature:
Maximum Usable Altitude:
Power Requirements:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Display Screen:
Display Screen With Credenza Stand:
Net Weight:
Display Screen:
Display Screen With Credenza Stand:
50" (1270 mm); 16:9 Widescreen format
43-1/2" x 24-1/2" (932mm x 532mm)
1366 x 768 pixels
<160˚
3,000:1
1,000 cdl/m2
–15˚C to +60˚C
+5˚C to 35˚C
6,560 ft. (2,000 meters)
120V AC, 60Hz, 450W maximum, 1W standby
48-3/4" x 29-3/4" x 3-1/2" (4" with wall bracket) (124cm x 76cm x 9cm)
48-3/4" x 37-3/8" x 10" (124cm x 95cm x 25cm)
97 lb (44kg)
110 lb (50kg)
CVR7007.1-Channel A/V Receiver/Optical Disc Changer/Video Processor
Optical Disc Player Section:
Applicable disc sizes:
5" (12cm) or 3" (8cm)
Applicable disc formats:
Video:
DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, Video-CD (VCD)
Audio:
DVD-Audio, CD, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, Windows Media 9, Dolby Digital and DTS Audio Discs
Still Image:
JPEG, Kodak Picture CD
Video Signal System:
NTSC
Composite (CVBS) Video Output:
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
S-Video (Y/C) Output:
Y/Luminance:
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
C/Chrominance:
0.286V p-p
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV) Video Output:
Y:
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
0.7V p-p/75 ohms
Pb (U):
Pr (V):
0.7V p-p/75 ohms
Video Digital-to-Analog Converters:
27MHz/10-bit
105dBA
Audio Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
96dB (16-bit), 100dB (18-bit), 105dB (20-bit)
Audio Dynamic Range:
192kHz/24-bit
Audio Digital-to-Analog Converters:
Audio Processing Section:
Surround modes:
Inputs:
Composite (CVBS) Video:
S-Video (Y/C):
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):
DVI (HDCP)/Analog RGB:
PIP Composite (CVBS):
Analog Audio L/R:
Digital Audio Coaxial:
Digital Audio Optical:
IR:
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic,
DTS ES 6.1 Matrix and Discrete, DTS 5.1, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7 with 96kHz capability,
3 DSP Modes
Bass management for DVD-Video and DVD-Audio
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 1
Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 5
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Rear Panel: 1
111
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 112
Outputs:
Composite (CVBS) Video:
S-Video (Y/C):
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):
Analog Audio L/R:
Digital Audio Coaxial:
Digital Audio Optical:
Headphone:
LFE/Subwoofer:
Speaker Level Outputs:
IR:
Audio Section:
Amplifier Type
Two Channel Stereo Mode:
Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Advanced PWM
100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 speakers,
90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%
100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 and CVCEN50 speakers,
90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%
200mV/47k ohms
97dBA
FM Tuner Section:
Frequency Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Mono/Stereo):
Distortion (Mono/Stereo):
Stereo Separation:
Selectivity:
Image Rejection:
IF Rejection:
87.5 – 108MHz
IHF 1.3µV/13.2dBf
70/68dB
0.2/0.3%
40dB @ 1kHz
+/–400kHz, 70dB
80dB
90dB
AM Tuner Section:
Frequency Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Usable Sensitivity:
Distortion:
Selectivity:
520–1720kHz
45dB
Loop 500µV
1kHz, 50% modulation, 0.8%
+/–10kHz, 30dB
Five and Seven Channel Cinema Modes:
112
Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 1 (Monitor Out)
Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1
Rear Panel: 1
7 pairs (Rear Panel)
Rear Panel: 1
Video Section:
Television Format:
Input Level/Impedance:
Output Level/Impedance:
Video Frequency Response:
Composite and S-video:
Component video:
10Hz – 8MHz (–3dB)
10Hz – 100MHz (–3dB)
General:
Power requirement:
Power Consumption:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Net Weight:
120V AC, 60Hz
320W maximum, 78W idle, 10W standby
17-3/8" x 6-3/5" x 17-3/4" (441mm x 168mm x 451mm)
24 lb (11kg)
NTSC
1V p-p/75 ohms
1V p-p/75 ohms
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 113
INDEX
4.3 Scaling 58
5-Channel Stereo 30, 34, 62
7-Channel Stereo 62
AC Power Connections 45, 59
Advanced Settings 52–53, 57–58
Advanced Settings Menus 52, 57
Antenna Terminals 23, 43
Aspect Ratio 13, 19, 27–28, 34–36, 54,
57–58
Audio Equipment Connections 21–23,
43–44
Audio Mode Menus 46–47
Audio Surround Mode Chart 62
Auto Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27, 29,
34, 36, 64
Auto Search Method 77, 92
Auxiliary Input 22, 44, 76
Bass Management 48–50
Burn-in 28, 35, 40–41
Cable Television 4, 21, 43, 76, 106-107
CD 12, 71, 103
Channel-Control Punch-Through 83, 95
Cleaning and Maintenance 7
Coaxial Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22, 26,
37, 43–44, 46, 61
Component Video 13–14, 22, 47, 54
Composite Video 21-22, 47, 56
Credenza Stand 39–40
Delay Settings 30, 37, 50
Description and Features 5
Digital Audio Playback 60–64,
Digital Recorder 21, 22, 23, 44, 59, 64,
76, 104, 105
Digital Source Selection 46, 61
Dimming Front-Panel Display 52
Direct Code Entry 92
Display Settings 57
Display Settings Menu 57
Distances 30, 37, 50
Dolby Digital 31, 34, 47, 60, 62
Dolby Pro Logic 31, 34, 47, 62
DSP Surround Modes 25, 34, 62
DTS 31, 34, 60–61, 62
DTS Neo:6 31, 34, 62
DTS-ES 62
DVI 22–23, 44, 45, 55–56, 76,
DVD 12, 13–15, 16, 46–47, 53–55, 57,
60–63, 66–69, 70
DVD-Audio 2, 19, 25, 46, 54, 60, 66, 70
DVD Auto Picture Resize 57–58
DVD Setup 53–55,
EzSet 25, 31, 51, 84–85
Fan 21, 53
Frame 13, 28, 35, 57–58
Front-Panel Controls 16–18
Front-Panel Information Display 19
Front-Panel Jacks 17, 59
Front-Panel-Display Brightness 52
Hall 25, 34, 62
Headphones 18, 60
HDTV 14
Installation 39–44
Installation Location 7–8, 39–40,
42–43
Installing CVPD50 39–41
IR Receiver 18, 31, 37–38
JBL On Screen Library 29, 37, 67–68
JPEG 12, 14, 73
Letterbox 13, 27, 34, 57-58
Lip Sync 53
Loading Discs 66
Logic 7 25, 34, 47, 60, 62
Macros 80–83
Main Menu 45
Main Remote Control 24-31, 76–91
Manual Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27,
29, 34, 36, 64
Memory Backup 65
MP3 12, 14, 63, 66–69, 72-73
Mute 31, 33, 59
Night Mode 29, 34, 47, 63
On-Screen Display 45, 53, 55
Operation 59–75
Optical Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22–23,
26, 37, 43–44, 46, 61
OSD Time-Out 53
Output Level Adjustments 50–52
Output Level Trim Adjustment 64–65
PCM 61
Picture-in-Picture (PIP) 22, 29, 35,
55, 56
Picture Settings 56–57
Picture Settings Menu 56
Power Switches 16, 25, 33, 37, 45, 59
Preset Stations 16, 17, 26, 30, 37, 64
Processor Reset 110
Programmed Device Functions 88-91,
94, 96–97
Programmed Play 75
Programming Product Codes 76–78,
92–93
Progressive Scan 14–15
Punch-Through Programming 83–84,
94–95
Random Play 27, 68–69,
Rear-Panel Connections 20–23
Recalling Preset Stations 16, 17, 26,
30, 37, 64
Recording 64
Remote Controls 24–38, 76–108
Remote Control Batteries 45
Remote Control Function Lists 89–91,
96–97
Remote Control Setup Code Tables
98–108
Repeat A-B 28
Repeat Play 28, 69
Resetting the Remotes 87, 95
Resume Mode 15, 68
Safety Information 4, 7–9
Satellite Television 21, 22, 43–44, 76,
108
Screen Menu 55
Screen Saver 28, 34–35, 40–41
Screen Setup 30, 55–58
Screen Standby 29, 35, 40–41, 71
Secondary Remote Control 32–38,
92–108
Setting Preset Stations 64
Sleep Mode 16, 29, 59
Source Configuration 46–48
Source Selection 18, 25, 33, 46, 59
Speaker Configuration and Bass
Manager Menu 48
Speaker Crossovers 49
Speaker Crossovers Menu 49
Speaker Distances Menu 50
Speaker Levels Menu 51
Speaker Menu 48
Speaker Placement 42–43
Speakers Polarity 42
Speaker Setup 48–51
Speaker Sizes 48–50
Speaker Wire 42
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators 19,
61
SPL Selector 25, 51, 84–85
Subwoofer 21, 42–43
Surround Mode Selection 18, 25, 30,
31, 34, 46–47, 60–63
Surround Off 30, 34, 62
S-Video 21–22, 47, 56
System Configuration 45–58
System Menu 46
Technical Specifications 111-112
Theater 25, 34, 62
Tone Controls 26, 37, 59
Trademark Acknowledgements 114
Transport Controls 17, 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 34, 35, 36, 37, 67, 68
Transport-Control Punch-Through 84, 95
Troubleshooting Guide 109–110
Tuner Mode 16–17, 26–27, 29, 34,
36, 64
Tuner Operation 64
Turn-On Volume Level 52–53
TV 98-99
Typographical Conventions 3
Unpacking 7–9
VCR 21, 44, 76, 101–102
Video Equipment Connections 21–23,
43–44
Video Monitor 22, 54
Video Off 29, 35, 40–41, 71
Volume Control 18, 26, 34, 52–53, 59
Volume Default 52–53
Volume Punch-Through 83, 94
WMA 12, 15, 63, 66–69, 72–73
113
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 114
Depth measurement includes knobs and connectors.
Height measurement includes feet and chassis.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
JBL and Logic 7 are registered trademarks, and JBL Cinema Vision, JBL Digital Link and On Screen Library (patent pending) are
trademarks, of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.
* “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.
Confidential 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
DTS, DTS 96/24, DTE-ES and DTS Neo:6 are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Kodak is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.
TiVo is a trademark of TiVo Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must
be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
114
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 115
NOTES
115
CVR700 OM
12/17/04
4:25 PM
Page 116
JBL Consumer Products
250 Crossways Park Drive, Woodbury
New York 11797 USA
www.jbl.com
© 2004 Harman International Industries,
Incorporated
Part No. CQX1A9142 12/04
A Harman International Company
A Harman International Company